Datenblatt für ATMEGA48/88/168(P,PV) Complete von Microchip Technology

Q MICFIDCHIP
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 1
Features
• High Performance, Low Power AVR® 8-Bit Microcontroller
• Advanced RISC Architecture
– 131 Powerful Instructions – Most Single Clock Cycle Execution
– 32 x 8 General Purpose Working Registers
– Fully Static Operation
– Up to 20 MIPS Throughput at 20 MHz
– On-chip 2-cycle Multiplier
• High Endurance Non-volatile Memory Segments
– 4/8/16KBytes of In-System Self-Programmable Flash program memory
– 256/512/512Bytes EEPROM
– 512/1K/1KBytes Internal SRAM
– Write/Erase Cycles: 10,000 Flash/100,000 EEPROM
– Data retention: 20 years at 85°C/100 years at 25°C(1)
– Optional Boot Code Section with Independent Lock Bits
In-System Programming by On-chip Boot Program
True Read-While-Write Operation
– Programming Lock for Software Security
•QTouch
® Library Support
– Capacitive touch buttons, sliders and wheels
– QTouch and QMatrix™ acquisition
– Up to 64 sense channels
• Peripheral Features
– Two 8-bit Timer/Counters with Separate Prescaler and Compare Mode
– One 16-bit Timer/Counter with Separate Prescaler, Compare Mode, and Capture Mode
– Real Time Counter with Separate Oscillator
megaAVR® Data Sheet
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
Introduction
The ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V is a low power, CMOS 8-bit microcontrollers based on the AVR®
enhanced RISC architecture. By executing instructions in a single clock cycle, the devices achieve CPU
throughput approaching one million instructions per second (MIPS) per megahertz, allowing the system
designer to optimize power consumption versus processing speed.
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 2
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
– Six PWM Channels
– 8-channel 10-bit ADC in TQFP and QFN/MLF package
Temperature Measurement
– 6-channel 10-bit ADC in PDIP Package
Temperature Measurement
– Programmable Serial USART
– Master/Slave SPI Serial Interface
– Byte-oriented 2-wire Serial Interface (Philips I2C compatible)
– Programmable Watchdog Timer with Separate On-chip Oscillator
– On-chip Analog Comparator
– Interrupt and Wake-up on Pin Change
• Special Microcontroller Features
– Power-on Reset and Programmable Brown-out Detection
– Internal Calibrated Oscillator
– External and Internal Interrupt Sources
– Six Sleep Modes: Idle, ADC Noise Reduction, Power-save, Power-down, Standby, and Extended Standby
• I/O and Packages
– 23 Programmable I/O Lines
– 28-pin PDIP, 32-lead TQFP, 28-pad QFN/MLF and 32-pad QFN/MLF
• Operating Voltage:
– 1.8 - 5.5V for ATmega48PV/88PV/168PV
– 2.7 - 5.5V for ATmega48P/88P/168P
• Temperature Range:
– -40°C to 85°C
• Speed Grade:
– ATmega48PV/88PV/168PV: 0 - 4MHz @ 1.8 - 5.5V, 0 - 10MHz @ 2.7 - 5.5V
– ATmega48P/88P/168P: 0 - 10MHz @ 2.7 - 5.5V, 0 - 20MHz @ 4.5 - 5.5V
• Low Power Consumption at 1MHz, 1.8V, 25°C:
– Active Mode: 0.3mA
– Power-down Mode: 0.1µA
– Power-save Mode: 0.8µA (Including 32kHz RTC)
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 3
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
Table of Contents
1 Pin Configurations ................................................................................. 10
1.1 Pin Descriptions............................................................................................... 11
2 Overview ................................................................................................. 12
2.1 Block Diagram ................................................................................................. 13
2.2 Comparison Between ATmega48P, ATmega88P and ATmega168P ............. 15
3 Resources ............................................................................................... 16
4 Data Retention ........................................................................................ 16
5 About Code Examples ........................................................................... 16
6 Capacitive touch sensing ...................................................................... 16
7 AVR CPU Core ........................................................................................ 17
7.1 Overview.......................................................................................................... 17
7.2 ALU – Arithmetic Logic Unit............................................................................. 18
7.3 Status Register ................................................................................................ 18
7.4 General Purpose Register File ........................................................................ 20
7.5 Stack Pointer ................................................................................................... 21
7.6 Instruction Execution Timing ........................................................................... 22
7.7 Reset and Interrupt Handling........................................................................... 23
8 AVR Memories ........................................................................................ 25
8.1 Overview.......................................................................................................... 25
8.2 In-System Reprogrammable Flash Program Memory ..................................... 25
8.3 SRAM Data Memory........................................................................................ 27
8.4 EEPROM Data Memory .................................................................................. 28
8.5 I/O Memory...................................................................................................... 29
8.6 Register Description ........................................................................................ 30
9 System Clock and Clock Options ......................................................... 35
9.1 Clock Systems and their Distribution............................................................... 35
9.2 Clock Sources ................................................................................................. 36
9.3 Low Power Crystal Oscillator........................................................................... 37
9.4 Full Swing Crystal Oscillator............................................................................ 39
9.5 Low Frequency Crystal Oscillator.................................................................... 41
9.6 Calibrated Internal RC Oscillator ..................................................................... 42
9.7 128 kHz Internal Oscillator .............................................................................. 43
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 4
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
9.8 External Clock ................................................................................................. 43
9.9 Clock Output Buffer ......................................................................................... 44
9.10 Timer/Counter Oscillator.................................................................................. 44
9.11 System Clock Prescaler .................................................................................. 44
9.12 Register Description ........................................................................................ 46
10 Power Management and Sleep Modes ................................................. 48
10.1 Sleep Modes.................................................................................................... 48
10.2 BOD Disable.................................................................................................... 49
10.3 Idle Mode......................................................................................................... 49
10.4 ADC Noise Reduction Mode............................................................................ 49
10.5 Power-down Mode........................................................................................... 50
10.6 Power-save Mode............................................................................................ 50
10.7 Standby Mode ................................................................................................. 50
10.8 Extended Standby Mode ................................................................................. 50
10.9 Power Reduction Register............................................................................... 51
10.10 Minimizing Power Consumption ...................................................................... 51
10.11 Register Description ........................................................................................ 53
11 System Control and Reset .................................................................... 55
11.1 Resetting the AVR ........................................................................................... 55
11.2 Reset Sources ................................................................................................. 55
11.3 Power-on Reset............................................................................................... 56
11.4 External Reset ................................................................................................. 57
11.5 Brown-out Detection ........................................................................................ 57
11.6 Watchdog System Reset ................................................................................. 58
11.7 Internal Voltage Reference.............................................................................. 58
11.8 Watchdog Timer .............................................................................................. 59
11.9 Register Description ........................................................................................ 63
12 Interrupts ................................................................................................ 66
12.1 Interrupt Vectors in ATmega48P ..................................................................... 66
12.2 Interrupt Vectors in ATmega88P ..................................................................... 68
12.3 Interrupt Vectors in ATmega168P ................................................................... 72
12.4 Register Description ........................................................................................ 77
13 External Interrupts ................................................................................. 79
13.1 Pin Change Interrupt Timing............................................................................ 79
13.2 Register Description ........................................................................................ 80
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 5
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
14 I/O-Ports .................................................................................................. 85
14.1 Overview.......................................................................................................... 85
14.2 Ports as General Digital I/O............................................................................. 86
14.3 Alternate Port Functions .................................................................................. 90
14.4 Register Description ...................................................................................... 102
15 8-bit Timer/Counter0 with PWM .......................................................... 104
15.1 Features ........................................................................................................ 104
15.2 Overview........................................................................................................ 104
15.3 Timer/Counter Clock Sources ....................................................................... 106
15.4 Counter Unit .................................................................................................. 106
15.5 Output Compare Unit..................................................................................... 107
15.6 Compare Match Output Unit.......................................................................... 108
15.7 Modes of Operation ....................................................................................... 109
15.8 Timer/Counter Timing Diagrams ................................................................... 114
15.9 Register Description ...................................................................................... 116
16 16-bit Timer/Counter1 with PWM ........................................................ 123
16.1 Features ........................................................................................................ 123
16.2 Overview........................................................................................................ 123
16.3 Accessing 16-bit Registers ............................................................................ 125
16.4 Timer/Counter Clock Sources ....................................................................... 128
16.5 Counter Unit .................................................................................................. 129
16.6 Input Capture Unit ......................................................................................... 130
16.7 Output Compare Units................................................................................... 132
16.8 Compare Match Output Unit.......................................................................... 133
16.9 Modes of Operation ....................................................................................... 135
16.10 Timer/Counter Timing Diagrams ................................................................... 142
16.11 Register Description ...................................................................................... 144
17 Timer/Counter0 and Timer/Counter1 Prescalers .............................. 152
17.1 Internal Clock Source .................................................................................... 152
17.2 Prescaler Reset ............................................................................................. 152
17.3 External Clock Source ................................................................................... 152
17.4 Register Description ...................................................................................... 154
18 8-bit Timer/Counter2 with PWM and Asynchronous Operation ...... 155
18.1 Features ........................................................................................................ 155
18.2 Overview........................................................................................................ 155
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 6
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
18.3 Timer/Counter Clock Sources ....................................................................... 156
18.4 Counter Unit .................................................................................................. 156
18.5 Output Compare Unit..................................................................................... 157
18.6 Compare Match Output Unit.......................................................................... 159
18.7 Modes of Operation ....................................................................................... 160
18.8 Timer/Counter Timing Diagrams ................................................................... 164
18.9 Asynchronous Operation of Timer/Counter2 ................................................. 166
18.10 Timer/Counter Prescaler ............................................................................... 167
18.11 Register Description ...................................................................................... 169
19 SPI – Serial Peripheral Interface ......................................................... 177
19.1 Features ........................................................................................................ 177
19.2 Overview........................................................................................................ 177
19.3 SS Pin Functionality ...................................................................................... 182
19.4 Data Modes ................................................................................................... 182
19.5 Register Description ...................................................................................... 184
20 USART0 ................................................................................................. 187
20.1 Features ........................................................................................................ 187
20.2 Overview........................................................................................................ 187
20.3 Clock Generation........................................................................................... 188
20.4 Frame Formats .............................................................................................. 191
20.5 USART Initialization....................................................................................... 192
20.6 Data Transmission – The USART Transmitter .............................................. 194
20.7 Data Reception – The USART Receiver ....................................................... 196
20.8 Asynchronous Data Reception ...................................................................... 200
20.9 Multi-processor Communication Mode .......................................................... 203
20.10 Register Description ...................................................................................... 205
20.11 Examples of Baud Rate Setting..................................................................... 209
21 USART in SPI Mode ............................................................................. 214
21.1 Features ........................................................................................................ 214
21.2 Overview........................................................................................................ 214
21.3 Clock Generation........................................................................................... 214
21.4 SPI Data Modes and Timing.......................................................................... 215
21.5 Frame Formats .............................................................................................. 216
21.6 Data Transfer................................................................................................. 218
21.7 AVR USART MSPIM vs. AVR SPI ................................................................ 220
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 7
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
21.8 Register Description ...................................................................................... 221
22 2-wire Serial Interface .......................................................................... 224
22.1 Features ........................................................................................................ 224
22.2 2-wire Serial Interface Bus Definition ............................................................ 224
22.3 Data Transfer and Frame Format.................................................................. 226
22.4 Multi-master Bus Systems, Arbitration and Synchronization......................... 228
22.5 Overview of the TWI Module ......................................................................... 231
22.6 Using the TWI................................................................................................ 233
22.7 Transmission Modes ..................................................................................... 237
22.8 Multi-master Systems and Arbitration............................................................ 251
22.9 Register Description ...................................................................................... 252
23 Analog Comparator .............................................................................. 258
23.1 Overview........................................................................................................ 258
23.2 Analog Comparator Multiplexed Input ........................................................... 258
23.3 Register Description ...................................................................................... 259
24 Analog-to-Digital Converter ................................................................ 262
24.1 Features ........................................................................................................ 262
24.2 Overview........................................................................................................ 262
24.3 Starting a Conversion .................................................................................... 264
24.4 Prescaling and Conversion Timing................................................................ 265
24.5 Changing Channel or Reference Selection ................................................... 267
24.6 ADC Noise Canceler ..................................................................................... 268
24.7 ADC Conversion Result................................................................................. 273
24.8 Temperature Measurement ........................................................................... 273
24.9 Register Description ...................................................................................... 274
25 debugWIRE On-chip Debug System .................................................. 279
25.1 Features ........................................................................................................ 279
25.2 Overview........................................................................................................ 279
25.3 Physical Interface .......................................................................................... 279
25.4 Software Break Points ................................................................................... 280
25.5 Limitations of debugWIRE ............................................................................. 280
25.6 Register Description ...................................................................................... 280
26 Self-Programming the Flash, ATmega48P ......................................... 281
26.1 Overview........................................................................................................ 281
26.2 Addressing the Flash During Self-Programming ........................................... 282
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 8
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
26.3 Register Description ...................................................................................... 288
27 Boot Loader Support – Read-While-Write Self-Programming, ATmega88P and ATmega168P
290
27.1 Features ........................................................................................................ 290
27.2 Overview........................................................................................................ 290
27.3 Application and Boot Loader Flash Sections................................................. 290
27.4 Read-While-Write and No Read-While-Write Flash Sections........................ 291
27.5 Boot Loader Lock Bits ................................................................................... 293
27.6 Entering the Boot Loader Program................................................................ 294
27.7 Addressing the Flash During Self-Programming ........................................... 295
27.8 Self-Programming the Flash.......................................................................... 295
27.9 Register Description ...................................................................................... 304
28 Memory Programming ......................................................................... 306
28.1 Program And Data Memory Lock Bits ........................................................... 306
28.2 Fuse Bits........................................................................................................ 307
28.3 Signature Bytes ............................................................................................. 309
28.4 Calibration Byte ............................................................................................. 309
28.5 Page Size ...................................................................................................... 310
28.6 Parallel Programming Parameters, Pin Mapping, and Commands ............... 310
28.7 Parallel Programming .................................................................................... 312
28.8 Serial Downloading........................................................................................ 319
29 Electrical Characteristics .................................................................... 324
29.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings* ......................................................................... 324
29.2 DC Characteristics......................................................................................... 324
29.3 Speed Grades ............................................................................................... 327
29.4 Clock Characteristics..................................................................................... 329
29.5 System and Reset Characteristics ................................................................ 330
29.6 SPI Timing Characteristics ............................................................................ 331
29.7 2-wire Serial Interface Characteristics........................................................... 333
29.8 ADC Characteristics – Preliminary Data........................................................ 335
29.9 Parallel Programming Characteristics ........................................................... 336
30 Typical Characteristics ........................................................................ 338
30.1 ATmega48P Typical Characteristics ............................................................. 338
30.2 ATmega88P Typical Characteristics ............................................................. 362
30.3 ATmega168P Typical Characteristics ........................................................... 386
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 9
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
31 Register Summary ............................................................................... 411
32 Instruction Set Summary ..................................................................... 415
33 Ordering Information ........................................................................... 418
33.1 ATmega48P................................................................................................... 418
33.2 ATmega88P................................................................................................... 419
33.3 ATmega168P................................................................................................. 420
34 Packaging Information ........................................................................ 421
34.1 32A ................................................................................................................ 421
34.2 28M1.............................................................................................................. 422
34.3 32M1-A .......................................................................................................... 423
34.4 28P3 .............................................................................................................. 424
35 Errata ..................................................................................................... 425
35.1 Errata ATmega48P........................................................................................ 425
35.2 Errata ATmega88P........................................................................................ 426
35.3 Errata ATmega168P...................................................................................... 428
36 Datasheet Revision History ................................................................. 430
36.1 Rev. A-11/2018.............................................................................................. 430
36.2 Rev. 8025M-06/11 ......................................................................................... 430
36.3 Rev. 8025L-07/10 .......................................................................................... 430
36.4 Rev. 8025K-10/09.......................................................................................... 430
36.5 Rev. 8025J-05/09 .......................................................................................... 430
36.6 Rev. 8025I-02/09 ........................................................................................... 430
36.7 Rev. 8025H-02/09 ......................................................................................... 431
36.8 Rev. 8025G-01/09 ......................................................................................... 431
36.9 Rev. 8025F-08/08.......................................................................................... 431
36.10 Rev. 8025E-08/08.......................................................................................... 431
36.11 Rev. 8025D-03/08 ......................................................................................... 432
36.12 Rev. 8025C-01/08 ......................................................................................... 432
36.13 Rev. 8025B-01/08.......................................................................................... 432
36.14 Rev. 8025A-07/07.......................................................................................... 433
33333333333333 EEEEEEEEEEEEEE Banana]: 0 O O O a:
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 10
1. Pin Configurations
Figure 1-1. Pinout ATmega48P/88P/168P
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
(PCINT19/OC2B/INT1) PD3
(PCINT20/XCK/T0) PD4
GND
VCC
GND
VCC
(PCINT6/XTAL1/TOSC1) PB6
(PCINT7/XTAL2/TOSC2) PB7
PC1 (ADC1/PCINT9)
PC0 (ADC0/PCINT8)
ADC7
GND
AREF
ADC6
AVCC
PB5 (SCK/PCINT5)
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
(PCINT21/OC0B/T1) PD5
(PCINT22/OC0A/AIN0) PD6
(PCINT23/AIN1) PD7
(PCINT0/CLKO/ICP1) PB0
(PCINT1/OC1A) PB1
(PCINT2/SS/OC1B) PB2
(PCINT3/OC2A/MOSI) PB3
(PCINT4/MISO) PB4
PD2 (INT0/PCINT18)
PD1 (TXD/PCINT17)
PD0 (RXD/PCINT16)
PC6 (RESET/PCINT14)
PC5 (ADC5/SCL/PCINT13)
PC4 (ADC4/SDA/PCINT12)
PC3 (ADC3/PCINT11)
PC2 (ADC2/PCINT10)
TQFP Top View
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
(PCINT14/RESET) PC6
(PCINT16/RXD) PD0
(PCINT17/TXD) PD1
(PCINT18/INT0) PD2
(PCINT19/OC2B/INT1) PD3
(PCINT20/XCK/T0) PD4
VCC
GND
(PCINT6/XTAL1/TOSC1) PB6
(PCINT7/XTAL2/TOSC2) PB7
(PCINT21/OC0B/T1) PD5
(PCINT22/OC0A/AIN0) PD6
(PCINT23/AIN1) PD7
(PCINT0/CLKO/ICP1) PB0
PC5 (ADC5/SCL/PCINT13)
PC4 (ADC4/SDA/PCINT12)
PC3 (ADC3/PCINT11)
PC2 (ADC2/PCINT10)
PC1 (ADC1/PCINT9)
PC0 (ADC0/PCINT8)
GND
AREF
AVCC
PB5 (SCK/PCINT5)
PB4 (MISO/PCINT4)
PB3 (MOSI/OC2A/PCINT3)
PB2 (SS/OC1B/PCINT2)
PB1 (OC1A/PCINT1)
PDIP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
32 MLF Top View
(PCINT19/OC2B/INT1) PD3
(PCINT20/XCK/T0) PD4
GND
VCC
GND
VCC
(PCINT6/XTAL1/TOSC1) PB6
(PCINT7/XTAL2/TOSC2) PB7
PC1 (ADC1/PCINT9)
PC0 (ADC0/PCINT8)
ADC7
GND
AREF
ADC6
AVCC
PB5 (SCK/PCINT5)
(PCINT21/OC0B/T1) PD5
(PCINT22/OC0A/AIN0) PD6
(PCINT23/AIN1) PD7
(PCINT0/CLKO/ICP1) PB0
(PCINT1/OC1A) PB1
(PCINT2/SS/OC1B) PB2
(PCINT3/OC2A/MOSI) PB3
(PCINT4/MISO) PB4
PD2 (INT0/PCINT18)
PD1 (TXD/PCINT17)
PD0 (RXD/PCINT16)
PC6 (RESET/PCINT14)
PC5 (ADC5/SCL/PCINT13)
PC4 (ADC4/SDA/PCINT12)
PC3 (ADC3/PCINT11)
PC2 (ADC2/PCINT10)
NOTE: Bottom pad should be soldered to ground.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
28 MLF Top View
(PCINT19/OC2B/INT1) PD3
(PCINT20/XCK/T0) PD4
VCC
GND
(PCINT6/XTAL1/TOSC1) PB6
(PCINT7/XTAL2/TOSC2) PB7
(PCINT21/OC0B/T1) PD5
(PCINT22/OC0A/AIN0) PD6
(PCINT23/AIN1) PD7
(PCINT0/CLKO/ICP1) PB0
(PCINT1/OC1A) PB1
(PCINT2/SS/OC1B) PB2
(PCINT3/OC2A/MOSI) PB3
(PCINT4/MISO) PB4
PD2 (INT0/PCINT18)
PD1 (TXD/PCINT17)
PD0 (RXD/PCINT16)
PC6 (RESET/PCINT14)
PC5 (ADC5/SCL/PCINT13)
PC4 (ADC4/SDA/PCINT12)
PC3 (ADC3/PCINT11)
PC2 (ADC2/PCINT10)
PC1 (ADC1/PCINT9)
PC0 (ADC0/PCINT8)
GND
AREF
AVCC
PB5 (SCK/PCINT5)
NOTE: Bottom pad should be soldered to ground.
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 11
1.1 Pin Descriptions
1.1.1 VCC
Digital supply voltage.
1.1.2 GND
Ground.
1.1.3 Port B (PB7:0) XTAL1/XTAL2/TOSC1/TOSC2
Port B is an 8-bit bi-directional I/O port with internal pull-up resistors (selected for each bit). The
Port B output buffers have symmetrical drive characteristics with both high sink and source
capability. As inputs, Port B pins that are externally pulled low will source current if the pull-up
resistors are activated. The Port B pins are tri-stated when a reset condition becomes active,
even if the clock is not running.
Depending on the clock selection fuse settings, PB6 can be used as input to the inverting
Oscillator amplifier and input to the internal clock operating circuit.
Depending on the clock selection fuse settings, PB7 can be used as output from the inverting
Oscillator amplifier.
If the Internal Calibrated RC Oscillator is used as chip clock source, PB7:6 is used as TOSC2:1
input for the Asynchronous Timer/Counter2 if the AS2 bit in ASSR is set.
The various special features of Port B are elaborated in “Alternate Functions of Port B” on page
92 and “System Clock and Clock Options” on page 35.
1.1.4 Port C (PC5:0)
Port C is a 7-bit bi-directional I/O port with internal pull-up resistors (selected for each bit). The
PC5:0 output buffers have symmetrical drive characteristics with both high sink and source
capability. As inputs, Port C pins that are externally pulled low will source current if the pull-up
resistors are activated. The Port C pins are tri-stated when a reset condition becomes active,
even if the clock is not running.
1.1.5 PC6/RESET
If the RSTDISBL Fuse is programmed, PC6 is used as an I/O pin. Note that the electrical
characteristics of PC6 differ from those of the other pins of Port C.
If the RSTDISBL Fuse is unprogrammed, PC6 is used as a Reset input. A low level on this pin
for longer than the minimum pulse length will generate a Reset, even if the clock is not running.
The minimum pulse length is given in Table 29-3 on page 330. Shorter pulses are not ensured to
generate a Reset.
The various special features of Port C are elaborated in “Alternate Functions of Port C” on page
95.
1.1.6 Port D (PD7:0)
Port D is an 8-bit bi-directional I/O port with internal pull-up resistors (selected for each bit). The
Port D output buffers have symmetrical drive characteristics with both high sink and source
capability. As inputs, Port D pins that are externally pulled low will source current if the pull-up
resistors are activated. The Port D pins are tri-stated when a reset condition becomes active,
even if the clock is not running.
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 12
The various special features of Port D are elaborated in “Alternate Functions of Port D” on page
98.
1.1.7 AVCC
AVCC is the supply voltage pin for the A/D Converter, PC3:0, and ADC7:6. It should be externally
connected to VCC, even if the ADC is not used. If the ADC is used, it should be connected to VCC
through a low-pass filter. Note that PC6:4 use digital supply voltage, VCC.
1.1.8 AREF
AREF is the analog reference pin for the A/D Converter.
1.1.9 ADC7:6 (TQFP and QFN/MLF Package Only)
In the TQFP and QFN/MLF package, ADC7:6 serve as analog inputs to the A/D converter.
These pins are powered from the analog supply and serve as 10-bit ADC channels.
2. Overview
The ATmega48P/88P/168P is a low-power CMOS 8-bit microcontroller based on the AVR
enhanced RISC architecture. By executing powerful instructions in a single clock cycle, the
ATmega48P/88P/168P achieves throughputs approaching 1 MIPS per MHz allowing the system
designer to optimize power consumption versus processing speed.
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 13
2.1 Block Diagram
Figure 2-1. Block Diagram
PORT C (7)PORT B (8)PORT D (8)
USART 0
8bit T/C 2
16bit T/C 18bit T/C 0 A/D Conv.
Internal
Bandgap
Analog
Comp.
SPI TWI
SRAMFlash
EEPROM
Watchdog
Oscillator
Watchdog
Timer
Oscillator
Circuits /
Clock
Generation
Power
Supervision
POR / BOD &
RESET
VCC
GND
PROGRAM
LOGIC
debugWIRE
2
GND
AREF
AVCC
DATABU S
ADC[6..7]PC[0..6]PB[0..7]PD[0..7]
6
RESET
XTAL[1..2]
CPU
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 14
The AVR core combines a rich instruction set with 32 general purpose working registers. All the
32 registers are directly connected to the Arithmetic Logic Unit (ALU), allowing two independent
registers to be accessed in one single instruction executed in one clock cycle. The resulting
architecture is more code efficient while achieving throughputs up to ten times faster than
conventional CISC microcontrollers.
The ATmega48P/88P/168P provides the following features: 4K/8K/16Kbytes of In-System
Programmable Flash with Read-While-Write capabilities, 256/512/512bytes EEPROM,
512/1K/1Kbytes SRAM, 23 general purpose I/O lines, 32 general purpose working registers,
three flexible Timer/Counters with compare modes, internal and external interrupts, a serial
programmable USART, a byte-oriented, 2-wire Serial Interface, an SPI serial port, a 6-channel
10-bit ADC (8 channels in TQFP and QFN/MLF packages), a programmable Watchdog Timer
with internal Oscillator, and five software selectable power saving modes. The Idle mode stops
the CPU while allowing the SRAM, Timer/Counters, USART, 2-wire Serial Interface, SPI port,
and interrupt system to continue functioning. The Power-down mode saves the register contents
but freezes the Oscillator, disabling all other chip functions until the next interrupt or hardware
reset. In Power-save mode, the asynchronous timer continues to run, allowing the user to
maintain a timer base while the rest of the device is sleeping. The ADC Noise Reduction mode
stops the CPU and all I/O modules except asynchronous timer and ADC, to minimize switching
noise during ADC conversions. In Standby mode, the crystal/resonator Oscillator is running
while the rest of the device is sleeping. This allows very fast start-up combined with low power
consumption.
Microchip offers the QTouch library for embedding capacitive touch buttons, sliders and wheels
functionality into AVR microcontrollers. The patented charge-transfer signal acquisition offers
robust sensing and includes fully debounced reporting of touch keys and includes Adjacent Key
Suppression™ (AKS™) technology for unambiguous detection of key events. The easy-to-use
QTouch Suite toolchain allows you to explore, develop and debug your own touch applications.
The device is manufactured using Microchip’s high density non-volatile memory technology. The
On-chip ISP Flash allows the program memory to be reprogrammed In-System through an SPI
serial interface, by a conventional non-volatile memory programmer, or by an On-chip Boot
program running on the AVR core. The Boot program can use any interface to download the
application program in the Application Flash memory. Software in the Boot Flash section will
continue to run while the Application Flash section is updated, providing true Read-While-Write
operation. By combining an 8-bit RISC CPU with In-System Self-Programmable Flash on a
monolithic chip, the ATmega48P/88P/168P is a powerful microcontroller that provides a highly
flexible and cost effective solution to many embedded control applications.
The ATmega48P/88P/168P AVR is supported with a full suite of program and system
development tools including: C Compilers, Macro Assemblers, Program Debugger/Simulators,
In-Circuit Emulators, and Evaluation kits.
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 15
2.2 Comparison Between ATmega48P, ATmega88P and ATmega168P
The ATmega48P, ATmega88P and ATmega168P differ only in memory sizes, boot loader
support, and interrupt vector sizes. Table 2-1 summarizes the different memory and interrupt
vector sizes for the three devices.
ATmega88P and ATmega168P support a real Read-While-Write Self-Programming mechanism.
There is a separate Boot Loader Section, and the SPM instruction can only execute from there.
In ATmega48P, there is no Read-While-Write support and no separate Boot Loader Section.
The SPM instruction can execute from the entire Flash.
Table 2-1. Memory Size Summary
Device Flash EEPROM RAM Interrupt Vector Size
ATmega48P 4KBytes 256Bytes 512Bytes 1 instruction word/vector
ATmega88P 8KBytes 512Bytes 1KBytes 1 instruction word/vector
ATmega168P 16KBytes 512Bytes 1KBytes 2 instruction words/vector
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 16
3. Resources
A comprehensive set of development tools, application notes and datasheets are available for
download on http://www.microchip.com
Note: 1.
4. Data Retention
Reliability Qualification results show that the projected data retention failure rate is much less
than 1 PPM over 20 years at 85°C or 100 years at 25°C.
5. About Code Examples
This documentation contains simple code examples that briefly show how to use various parts of
the device. These code examples assume that the part specific header file is included before
compilation. Be aware that not all C compiler vendors include bit definitions in the header files
and interrupt handling in C is compiler dependent. Confirm with the C compiler documentation
for more details.
For I/O Registers located in extended I/O map, “IN”, “OUT”, “SBIS”, “SBIC”, “CBI”, and “SBI”
instructions must be replaced with instructions that allow access to extended I/O. Typically
“LDS” and “STS” combined with “SBRS”, “SBRC”, “SBR”, and “CBR”.
6. Capacitive touch sensing
The QTouch Library provides a simple to use solution to realize touch sensitive interfaces on
most AVR® microcontrollers. The QTouch Library includes support for the QTouch and
QMatrix™ acquisition methods.
Touch sensing can be added to any application by linking the appropriate QTouch Library for the
AVR Microcontroller. This is done by using a simple set of APIs to define the touch channels and
sensors, and then calling the touch sensing API’s to retrieve the channel information and
determine the touch sensor states.
The QTouch Library is FREE and downloadable from the Microchip website at the following
location http://www.microchip.com. For implementation details and other information, refer to the
QTouch Library User Guide - also available for download from the Microchip website.
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 17
7. AVR CPU Core
7.1 Overview
This section discusses the AVR core architecture in general. The main function of the CPU core
is to ensure correct program execution. The CPU must therefore be able to access memories,
perform calculations, control peripherals, and handle interrupts.
Figure 7-1. Block Diagram of the AVR Architecture
In order to maximize performance and parallelism, the AVR uses a Harvard architecture – with
separate memories and buses for program and data. Instructions in the program memory are
executed with a single level pipelining. While one instruction is being executed, the next
instruction is pre-fetched from the program memory. This concept enables instructions to be
executed in every clock cycle. The program memory is In-System Reprogrammable Flash
memory.
Flash
Program
Memory
Instruction
Register
Instruction
Decoder
Program
Counter
Control Lines
32 x 8
General
Purpose
Registrers
ALU
Status
and Control
I/O Lines
EEPROM
Data Bus 8-bit
Data
SRAM
Direct Addressing
Indirect Addressing
Interrupt
Unit
SPI
Unit
Watchdog
Timer
Analog
Comparator
I/O Module 2
I/O Module1
I/O Module n
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 18
The fast-access Register File contains 32 x 8-bit general purpose working registers with a single
clock cycle access time. This allows single-cycle Arithmetic Logic Unit (ALU) operation. In a
typical ALU operation, two operands are output from the Register File, the operation is executed,
and the result is stored back in the Register File – in one clock cycle.
Six of the 32 registers can be used as three 16-bit indirect address register pointers for Data
Space addressing – enabling efficient address calculations. One of the these address pointers
can also be used as an address pointer for look up tables in Flash program memory. These
added function registers are the 16-bit X-, Y-, and Z-register, described later in this section.
The ALU supports arithmetic and logic operations between registers or between a constant and
a register. Single register operations can also be executed in the ALU. After an arithmetic
operation, the Status Register is updated to reflect information about the result of the operation.
Program flow is provided by conditional and unconditional jump and call instructions, able to
directly address the whole address space. Most AVR instructions have a single 16-bit word
format. Every program memory address contains a 16- or 32-bit instruction.
Program Flash memory space is divided in two sections, the Boot Program section and the
Application Program section. Both sections have dedicated Lock bits for write and read/write
protection. The SPM instruction that writes into the Application Flash memory section must
reside in the Boot Program section.
During interrupts and subroutine calls, the return address Program Counter (PC) is stored on the
Stack. The Stack is effectively allocated in the general data SRAM, and consequently the Stack
size is only limited by the total SRAM size and the usage of the SRAM. All user programs must
initialize the SP in the Reset routine (before subroutines or interrupts are executed). The Stack
Pointer (SP) is read/write accessible in the I/O space. The data SRAM can easily be accessed
through the five different addressing modes supported in the AVR architecture.
The memory spaces in the AVR architecture are all linear and regular memory maps.
A flexible interrupt module has its control registers in the I/O space with an additional Global
Interrupt Enable bit in the Status Register. All interrupts have a separate Interrupt Vector in the
Interrupt Vector table. The interrupts have priority in accordance with their Interrupt Vector
position. The lower the Interrupt Vector address, the higher the priority.
The I/O memory space contains 64 addresses for CPU peripheral functions as Control
Registers, SPI, and other I/O functions. The I/O Memory can be accessed directly, or as the
Data Space locations following those of the Register File, 0x20 - 0x5F. In addition, the
ATmega48P/88P/168P has Extended I/O space from 0x60 - 0xFF in SRAM where only the
ST/STS/STD and LD/LDS/LDD instructions can be used.
7.2 ALU – Arithmetic Logic Unit
The high-performance AVR ALU operates in direct connection with all the 32 general purpose
working registers. Within a single clock cycle, arithmetic operations between general purpose
registers or between a register and an immediate are executed. The ALU operations are divided
into three main categories – arithmetic, logical, and bit-functions. Some implementations of the
architecture also provide a powerful multiplier supporting both signed/unsigned multiplication
and fractional format. See the “Instruction Set” section for a detailed description.
7.3 Status Register
The Status Register contains information about the result of the most recently executed
arithmetic instruction. This information can be used for altering program flow in order to perform
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 19
conditional operations. Note that the Status Register is updated after all ALU operations, as
specified in the Instruction Set Reference. This will in many cases remove the need for using the
dedicated compare instructions, resulting in faster and more compact code.
The Status Register is not automatically stored when entering an interrupt routine and restored
when returning from an interrupt. This must be handled by software.
7.3.1 SREG – AVR Status Register
The AVR Status Register – SREG – is defined as:
• Bit 7 – I: Global Interrupt Enable
The Global Interrupt Enable bit must be set for the interrupts to be enabled. The individual
interrupt enable control is then performed in separate control registers. If the Global Interrupt
Enable Register is cleared, none of the interrupts are enabled independent of the individual
interrupt enable settings. The I-bit is cleared by hardware after an interrupt has occurred, and is
set by the RETI instruction to enable subsequent interrupts. The I-bit can also be set and cleared
by the application with the SEI and CLI instructions, as described in the instruction set reference.
• Bit 6 – T: Bit Copy Storage
The Bit Copy instructions BLD (Bit LoaD) and BST (Bit STore) use the T-bit as source or
destination for the operated bit. A bit from a register in the Register File can be copied into T by
the BST instruction, and a bit in T can be copied into a bit in a register in the Register File by the
BLD instruction.
• Bit 5 – H: Half Carry Flag
The Half Carry Flag H indicates a Half Carry in some arithmetic operations. Half Carry Is useful
in BCD arithmetic. See the “Instruction Set Description” for detailed information.
• Bit 4 – S: Sign Bit, S = N V
The S-bit is always an exclusive or between the Negative Flag N and the Two’s Complement
Overflow Flag V. See the “Instruction Set Description” for detailed information.
• Bit 3 – V: Two’s Complement Overflow Flag
The Two’s Complement Overflow Flag V supports two’s complement arithmetics. See the
“Instruction Set Description” for detailed information.
• Bit 2 – N: Negative Flag
The Negative Flag N indicates a negative result in an arithmetic or logic operation. See the
“Instruction Set Description” for detailed information.
• Bit 1 – Z: Zero Flag
The Zero Flag Z indicates a zero result in an arithmetic or logic operation. See the “Instruction
Set Description” for detailed information.
Bit 76543210
0x3F (0x5F) I T H S V N Z C SREG
Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 20
• Bit 0 – C: Carry Flag
The Carry Flag C indicates a carry in an arithmetic or logic operation. See the “Instruction Set
Description” for detailed information.
7.4 General Purpose Register File
The Register File is optimized for the AVR Enhanced RISC instruction set. In order to achieve
the required performance and flexibility, the following input/output schemes are supported by the
Register File:
• One 8-bit output operand and one 8-bit result input
• Two 8-bit output operands and one 8-bit result input
• Two 8-bit output operands and one 16-bit result input
• One 16-bit output operand and one 16-bit result input
Figure 7-2 shows the structure of the 32 general purpose working registers in the CPU.
Figure 7-2. AVR CPU General Purpose Working Registers
Most of the instructions operating on the Register File have direct access to all registers, and
most of them are single cycle instructions.
As shown in Figure 7-2, each register is also assigned a data memory address, mapping them
directly into the first 32 locations of the user Data Space. Although not being physically
implemented as SRAM locations, this memory organization provides great flexibility in access of
the registers, as the X-, Y- and Z-pointer registers can be set to index any register in the file.
7 0 Addr.
R0 0x00
R1 0x01
R2 0x02
…
R13 0x0D
General R14 0x0E
Purpose R15 0x0F
Working R16 0x10
Registers R17 0x11
…
R26 0x1A X-register Low Byte
R27 0x1B X-register High Byte
R28 0x1C Y-register Low Byte
R29 0x1D Y-register High Byte
R30 0x1E Z-register Low Byte
R31 0x1F Z-register High Byte
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 21
7.4.1 The X-register, Y-register, and Z-register
The registers R26..R31 have some added functions to their general purpose usage. These
registers are 16-bit address pointers for indirect addressing of the data space. The three indirect
address registers X, Y, and Z are defined as described in Figure 7-3.
Figure 7-3. The X-, Y-, and Z-registers
In the different addressing modes these address registers have functions as fixed displacement,
automatic increment, and automatic decrement (see the instruction set reference for details).
7.5 Stack Pointer
The Stack is mainly used for storing temporary data, for storing local variables and for storing
return addresses after interrupts and subroutine calls. Note that the Stack is implemented as
growing from higher to lower memory locations. The Stack Pointer Register always points to the
top of the Stack. The Stack Pointer points to the data SRAM Stack area where the Subroutine
and Interrupt Stacks are located. A Stack PUSH command will decrease the Stack Pointer.
The Stack in the data SRAM must be defined by the program before any subroutine calls are
executed or interrupts are enabled. Initial Stack Pointer value equals the last address of the
internal SRAM and the Stack Pointer must be set to point above start of the SRAM, see Figure
8-3 on page 27.
See Table 7-1 for Stack Pointer details.
The AVR Stack Pointer is implemented as two 8-bit registers in the I/O space. The number of
bits actually used is implementation dependent. Note that the data space in some
implementations of the AVR architecture is so small that only SPL is needed. In this case, the
SPH Register will not be present.
15 XH XL 0
X-register 7 0 7 0
R27 (0x1B) R26 (0x1A)
15 YH YL 0
Y-register 7 0 7 0
R29 (0x1D) R28 (0x1C)
15 ZH ZL 0
Z-register 7 0 7 0
R31 (0x1F) R30 (0x1E)
Table 7-1. Stack Pointer instructions
Instruction Stack pointer Description
PUSH Decremented by 1 Data is pushed onto the stack
CALL
ICALL
RCALL
Decremented by 2
Return address is pushed onto the stack with a subroutine call or
interrupt
POP Incremented by 1 Data is popped from the stack
RET
RETI
Incremented by 2 Return address is popped from the stack with return from
subroutine or return from interrupt
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 22
7.5.1 SPH and SPL – Stack Pointer High and Stack Pointer Low Register
7.6 Instruction Execution Timing
This section describes the general access timing concepts for instruction execution. The AVR
CPU is driven by the CPU clock clkCPU, directly generated from the selected clock source for the
chip. No internal clock division is used.
Figure 7-4 shows the parallel instruction fetches and instruction executions enabled by the
Harvard architecture and the fast-access Register File concept. This is the basic pipelining
concept to obtain up to 1 MIPS per MHz with the corresponding unique results for functions per
cost, functions per clocks, and functions per power-unit.
Figure 7-4. The Parallel Instruction Fetches and Instruction Executions
Figure 7-5 shows the internal timing concept for the Register File. In a single clock cycle an ALU
operation using two register operands is executed, and the result is stored back to the
destination register.
Figure 7-5. Single Cycle ALU Operation
Bit 151413121110 9 8
0x3E (0x5E) SP15 SP14 SP13 SP12 SP11 SP10 SP9 SP8 SPH
0x3D (0x5D) SP7 SP6 SP5 SP4 SP3 SP2 SP1 SP0 SPL
76543210
Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value RAMEND RAMEND RAMEND RAMEND RAMEND RAMEND RAMEND RAMEND
RAMEND RAMEND RAMEND RAMEND RAMEND RAMEND RAMEND RAMEND
clk
1st Instruction Fetch
1st Instruction Execute
2nd Instruction Fetch
2nd Instruction Execute
3rd Instruction Fetch
3rd Instruction Execute
4th Instruction Fetch
T1 T2 T3 T4
CPU
Total Execution Time
Register Operands Fetch
ALU Operation Execute
Result Write Back
T1 T2 T3 T4
clkCPU
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 23
7.7 Reset and Interrupt Handling
The AVR provides several different interrupt sources. These interrupts and the separate Reset
Vector each have a separate program vector in the program memory space. All interrupts are
assigned individual enable bits which must be written logic one together with the Global Interrupt
Enable bit in the Status Register in order to enable the interrupt. Depending on the Program
Counter value, interrupts may be automatically disabled when Boot Lock bits BLB02 or BLB12
are programmed. This feature improves software security. See the section “Memory
Programming” on page 306 for details.
The lowest addresses in the program memory space are by default defined as the Reset and
Interrupt Vectors. The complete list of vectors is shown in “Interrupts” on page 66. The list also
determines the priority levels of the different interrupts. The lower the address the higher is the
priority level. RESET has the highest priority, and next is INT0 – the External Interrupt Request
0. The Interrupt Vectors can be moved to the start of the Boot Flash section by setting the IVSEL
bit in the MCU Control Register (MCUCR). Refer to “Interrupts” on page 66 for more information.
The Reset Vector can also be moved to the start of the Boot Flash section by programming the
BOOTRST Fuse, see “Boot Loader Support – Read-While-Write Self-Programming,
ATmega88P and ATmega168P” on page 290.
When an interrupt occurs, the Global Interrupt Enable I-bit is cleared and all interrupts are
disabled. The user software can write logic one to the I-bit to enable nested interrupts. All
enabled interrupts can then interrupt the current interrupt routine. The I-bit is automatically set
when a Return from Interrupt instruction – RETI – is executed.
There are basically two types of interrupts. The first type is triggered by an event that sets the
Interrupt Flag. For these interrupts, the Program Counter is vectored to the actual Interrupt
Vector in order to execute the interrupt handling routine, and hardware clears the corresponding
Interrupt Flag. Interrupt Flags can also be cleared by writing a logic one to the flag bit position(s)
to be cleared. If an interrupt condition occurs while the corresponding interrupt enable bit is
cleared, the Interrupt Flag will be set and remembered until the interrupt is enabled, or the flag is
cleared by software. Similarly, if one or more interrupt conditions occur while the Global Interrupt
Enable bit is cleared, the corresponding Interrupt Flag(s) will be set and remembered until the
Global Interrupt Enable bit is set, and will then be executed by order of priority.
The second type of interrupts will trigger as long as the interrupt condition is present. These
interrupts do not necessarily have Interrupt Flags. If the interrupt condition disappears before the
interrupt is enabled, the interrupt will not be triggered.
When the AVR exits from an interrupt, it will always return to the main program and execute one
more instruction before any pending interrupt is served.
Note that the Status Register is not automatically stored when entering an interrupt routine, nor
restored when returning from an interrupt routine. This must be handled by software.
When using the CLI instruction to disable interrupts, the interrupts will be immediately disabled.
No interrupt will be executed after the CLI instruction, even if it occurs simultaneously with the
CLI instruction. The following example shows how this can be used to avoid interrupts during the
timed EEPROM write sequence.
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 24
When using the SEI instruction to enable interrupts, the instruction following SEI will be
executed before any pending interrupts, as shown in this example.
7.7.1 Interrupt Response Time
The interrupt execution response for all the enabled AVR interrupts is four clock cycles
minimum. After four clock cycles the program vector address for the actual interrupt handling
routine is executed. During this four clock cycle period, the Program Counter is pushed onto the
Stack. The vector is normally a jump to the interrupt routine, and this jump takes three clock
cycles. If an interrupt occurs during execution of a multi-cycle instruction, this instruction is
completed before the interrupt is served. If an interrupt occurs when the MCU is in sleep mode,
the interrupt execution response time is increased by four clock cycles. This increase comes in
addition to the start-up time from the selected sleep mode.
A return from an interrupt handling routine takes four clock cycles. During these four clock
cycles, the Program Counter (two bytes) is popped back from the Stack, the Stack Pointer is
incremented by two, and the I-bit in SREG is set.
Assembly Code Example
in r16, SREG ; store SREG
value
cli ; disable interrupts during timed
sequence
sbi EECR, EEMPE ; start
EEPROM write
sbi EECR, EEPE
out SREG, r16 ; restore
SREG value (I-bit)
C Code Example
char cSREG;
cSREG = SREG; /* store
SREG value */
/* disable interrupts during timed sequence */
_CLI();
EECR |= (1<<EEMPE); /* start EEPROM write */
EECR |= (1<<EEPE);
SREG = cSREG; /* restore SREG value (I-bit) */
Assembly Code Example
sei ; set Global Interrupt Enable
sleep ; enter sleep, waiting for interrupt
; note: will enter sleep before any pending interrupt(s)
C Code Example
__enable_interrupt(); /* set Global Interrupt Enable */
__sleep(); /* enter sleep, waiting for interrupt */
/* note: will enter sleep before any pending interrupt(s) */
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 25
8. AVR Memories
8.1 Overview
This section describes the different memories in the ATmega48P/88P/168P. The AVR
architecture has two main memory spaces, the Data Memory and the Program Memory space.
In addition, the ATmega48P/88P/168P features an EEPROM Memory for data storage. All three
memory spaces are linear and regular.
8.2 In-System Reprogrammable Flash Program Memory
The ATmega48P/88P/168P contains 4/8/16 bytes On-chip In-System Reprogrammable Flash
memory for program storage. Since all AVR instructions are 16 or 32 bits wide, the Flash is
organized as 2/4/8 x 16. For software security, the Flash Program memory space is divided into
two sections, Boot Loader Section and Application Program Section in ATmega88P and
ATmega168P. ATmega48P does not have separate Boot Loader and Application Program
sections, and the SPM instruction can be executed from the entire Flash. See SELFPRGEN
description in section “SPMCSR – Store Program Memory Control and Status Register” on page
288 and page 304for more details.
The Flash memory has an endurance of at least 10,000 write/erase cycles. The
ATmega48P/88P/168P Program Counter (PC) is 11/12/13 bits wide, thus addressing the 2/4/8
program memory locations. The operation of Boot Program section and associated Boot Lock
bits for software protection are described in detail in “Self-Programming the Flash, ATmega48P”
on page 281 and “Boot Loader Support – Read-While-Write Self-Programming, ATmega88P
and ATmega168P” on page 290. “Memory Programming” on page 306 contains a detailed
description on Flash Programming in SPI- or Parallel Programming mode.
Constant tables can be allocated within the entire program memory address space (see the LPM
– Load Program Memory instruction description).
Timing diagrams for instruction fetch and execution are presented in “Instruction Execution
Timing” on page 22.
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 26
Figure 8-1. Program Memory Map, ATmega48P
Figure 8-2. Program Memory Map, ATmega88P and ATmega168P
0x0000
0x7FF
Program Memory
Application Flash Section
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 27
8.3 SRAM Data Memory
Figure 8-3 shows how the ATmega48P/88P/168P SRAM Memory is organized.
The ATmega48P/88P/168P is a complex microcontroller with more peripheral units than can be
supported within the 64 locations reserved in the Opcode for the IN and OUT instructions. For
the Extended I/O space from 0x60 - 0xFF in SRAM, only the ST/STS/STD and LD/LDS/LDD
instructions can be used.
The lower 768/1280/1280 data memory locations address both the Register File, the I/O
memory, Extended I/O memory, and the internal data SRAM. The first 32 locations address the
Register File, the next 64 location the standard I/O memory, then 160 locations of Extended I/O
memory, and the next 512/1024/1024 locations address the internal data SRAM.
The five different addressing modes for the data memory cover: Direct, Indirect with
Displacement, Indirect, Indirect with Pre-decrement, and Indirect with Post-increment. In the
Register File, registers R26 to R31 feature the indirect addressing pointer registers.
The direct addressing reaches the entire data space.
The Indirect with Displacement mode reaches 63 address locations from the base address given
by the Y- or Z-register.
When using register indirect addressing modes with automatic pre-decrement and post-
increment, the address registers X, Y, and Z are decremented or incremented.
The 32 general purpose working registers, 64 I/O Registers, 160 Extended I/O Registers, and
the 512/1024/1024 bytes of internal data SRAM in the ATmega48P/88P/168P are all accessible
through all these addressing modes. The Register File is described in “General Purpose
Register File” on page 20.
Figure 8-3. Data Memory Map
32 Registers
64 I/O Registers
Internal SRAM
(512/1024/1024 x 8)
0x0000 - 0x001F
0x0020 - 0x005F
0x02FF/0x04FF/0x04FF
0x0060 - 0x00FF
Data Memory
160 Ext I/O Reg.
0x0100
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 28
8.3.1 Data Memory Access Times
This section describes the general access timing concepts for internal memory access. The
internal data SRAM access is performed in two clkCPU cycles as described in Figure 8-4.
Figure 8-4. On-chip Data SRAM Access Cycles
8.4 EEPROM Data Memory
The ATmega48P/88P/168P contains 256/512/512 bytes of data EEPROM memory. It is
organized as a separate data space, in which single bytes can be read and written. The
EEPROM has an endurance of at least 100,000 write/erase cycles. The access between the
EEPROM and the CPU is described in the following, specifying the EEPROM Address
Registers, the EEPROM Data Register, and the EEPROM Control Register.
“Memory Programming” on page 306 contains a detailed description on EEPROM Programming
in SPI or Parallel Programming mode.
8.4.1 EEPROM Read/Write Access
The EEPROM Access Registers are accessible in the I/O space.
The write access time for the EEPROM is given in Table 8-2. A self-timing function, however,
lets the user software detect when the next byte can be written. If the user code contains
instructions that write the EEPROM, some precautions must be taken. In heavily filtered power
supplies, VCC is likely to rise or fall slowly on power-up/down. This causes the device for some
period of time to run at a voltage lower than specified as minimum for the clock frequency used.
See “Preventing EEPROM Corruption” on page 29 for details on how to avoid problems in these
situations.
In order to prevent unintentional EEPROM writes, a specific write procedure must be followed.
Refer to the description of the EEPROM Control Register for details on this.
When the EEPROM is read, the CPU is halted for four clock cycles before the next instruction is
executed. When the EEPROM is written, the CPU is halted for two clock cycles before the next
instruction is executed.
clk
WR
RD
Data
Data
Address Address valid
T1 T2 T3
Compute Address
Read Write
CPU
Memory Access Instruction Next Instruction
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 29
8.4.2 Preventing EEPROM Corruption
During periods of low VCC, the EEPROM data can be corrupted because the supply voltage is
too low for the CPU and the EEPROM to operate properly. These issues are the same as for
board level systems using EEPROM, and the same design solutions should be applied.
An EEPROM data corruption can be caused by two situations when the voltage is too low. First,
a regular write sequence to the EEPROM requires a minimum voltage to operate correctly.
Secondly, the CPU itself can execute instructions incorrectly, if the supply voltage is too low.
EEPROM data corruption can easily be avoided by following this design recommendation:
Keep the AVR RESET active (low) during periods of insufficient power supply voltage. This can
be done by enabling the internal Brown-out Detector (BOD). If the detection level of the internal
BOD does not match the needed detection level, an external low VCC reset Protection circuit can
be used. If a reset occurs while a write operation is in progress, the write operation will be
completed provided that the power supply voltage is sufficient.
8.5 I/O Memory
The I/O space definition of the ATmega48P/88P/168P is shown in “Register Summary” on page
411.
All ATmega48P/88P/168P I/Os and peripherals are placed in the I/O space. All I/O locations
may be accessed by the LD/LDS/LDD and ST/STS/STD instructions, transferring data between
the 32 general purpose working registers and the I/O space. I/O Registers within the address
range 0x00 - 0x1F are directly bit-accessible using the SBI and CBI instructions. In these
registers, the value of single bits can be checked by using the SBIS and SBIC instructions. Refer
to the instruction set section for more details. When using the I/O specific commands IN and
OUT, the I/O addresses 0x00 - 0x3F must be used. When addressing I/O Registers as data
space using LD and ST instructions, 0x20 must be added to these addresses. The
ATmega48P/88P/168P is a complex microcontroller with more peripheral units than can be
supported within the 64 location reserved in Opcode for the IN and OUT instructions. For the
Extended I/O space from 0x60 - 0xFF in SRAM, only the ST/STS/STD and LD/LDS/LDD
instructions can be used.
For compatibility with future devices, reserved bits should be written to zero if accessed.
Reserved I/O memory addresses should never be written.
Some of the Status Flags are cleared by writing a logical one to them. Note that, unlike most
other AVRs, the CBI and SBI instructions will only operate on the specified bit, and can therefore
be used on registers containing such Status Flags. The CBI and SBI instructions work with
registers 0x00 to 0x1F only.
The I/O and peripherals control registers are explained in later sections.
8.5.1 General Purpose I/O Registers
The ATmega48P/88P/168P contains three General Purpose I/O Registers. These registers can
be used for storing any information, and they are particularly useful for storing global variables
and Status Flags. General Purpose I/O Registers within the address range 0x00 - 0x1F are
directly bit-accessible using the SBI, CBI, SBIS, and SBIC instructions.
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 30
8.6 Register Description
8.6.1 EEARH and EEARL – The EEPROM Address Register
• Bits 15:9 – Reserved
These bits are reserved bits in the ATmega48P/88P/168P and will always read as zero.
• Bits 8:0 – EEAR[8:0]: EEPROM Address
The EEPROM Address Registers – EEARH and EEARL specify the EEPROM address in the
256/512/512 bytes EEPROM space. The EEPROM data bytes are addressed linearly between 0
and 255/511/511. The initial value of EEAR is undefined. A proper value must be written before
the EEPROM may be accessed.
EEAR8 is an unused bit in ATmega48P and must always be written to zero.
8.6.2 EEDR – The EEPROM Data Register
• Bits 7:0 – EEDR[7:0]: EEPROM Data
For the EEPROM write operation, the EEDR Register contains the data to be written to the
EEPROM in the address given by the EEAR Register. For the EEPROM read operation, the
EEDR contains the data read out from the EEPROM at the address given by EEAR.
8.6.3 EECR – The EEPROM Control Register
• Bits 7:6 – Reserved
These bits are reserved bits in the ATmega48P/88P/168P and will always read as zero.
• Bits 5, 4 – EEPM1 and EEPM0: EEPROM Programming Mode Bits
The EEPROM Programming mode bit setting defines which programming action that will be
triggered when writing EEPE. It is possible to program data in one atomic operation (erase the
old value and program the new value) or to split the Erase and Write operations in two different
operations. The Programming times for the different modes are shown in Table 8-1. While EEPE
Bit 151413121110 9 8
0x22 (0x42) –––––––EEAR8EEARH
0x21 (0x41) EEAR7 EEAR6 EEAR5 EEAR4 EEAR3 EEAR2 EEAR1 EEAR0 EEARL
76543210
Read/Write RRRRRRRR/W
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X
XXXXXXXX
Bit 76543210
0x20 (0x40) MSB LSB EEDR
Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 76543210
0x1F (0x3F) – – EEPM1 EEPM0 EERIE EEMPE EEPE EERE EECR
Read/Write R R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 0 X X 0 0 X 0
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 31
is set, any write to EEPMn will be ignored. During reset, the EEPMn bits will be reset to 0b00
unless the EEPROM is busy programming.
• Bit 3 – EERIE: EEPROM Ready Interrupt Enable
Writing EERIE to one enables the EEPROM Ready Interrupt if the I bit in SREG is set. Writing
EERIE to zero disables the interrupt. The EEPROM Ready interrupt generates a constant
interrupt when EEPE is cleared. The interrupt will not be generated during EEPROM write or
SPM.
• Bit 2 – EEMPE: EEPROM Master Write Enable
The EEMPE bit determines whether setting EEPE to one causes the EEPROM to be written.
When EEMPE is set, setting EEPE within four clock cycles will write data to the EEPROM at the
selected address If EEMPE is zero, setting EEPE will have no effect. When EEMPE has been
written to one by software, hardware clears the bit to zero after four clock cycles. See the
description of the EEPE bit for an EEPROM write procedure.
• Bit 1 – EEPE: EEPROM Write Enable
The EEPROM Write Enable Signal EEPE is the write strobe to the EEPROM. When address
and data are correctly set up, the EEPE bit must be written to one to write the value into the
EEPROM. The EEMPE bit must be written to one before a logical one is written to EEPE,
otherwise no EEPROM write takes place. The following procedure should be followed when
writing the EEPROM (the order of steps 3 and 4 is not essential):
1. Wait until EEPE becomes zero.
2. Wait until SELFPRGEN in SPMCSR becomes zero.
3. Write new EEPROM address to EEAR (optional).
4. Write new EEPROM data to EEDR (optional).
5. Write a logical one to the EEMPE bit while writing a zero to EEPE in EECR.
6. Within four clock cycles after setting EEMPE, write a logical one to EEPE.
The EEPROM can not be programmed during a CPU write to the Flash memory. The software
must check that the Flash programming is completed before initiating a new EEPROM write.
Step 2 is only relevant if the software contains a Boot Loader allowing the CPU to program the
Flash. If the Flash is never being updated by the CPU, step 2 can be omitted. See “Boot Loader
Support – Read-While-Write Self-Programming, ATmega88P and ATmega168P” on page 290
for details about Boot programming.
Caution: An interrupt between step 5 and step 6 will make the write cycle fail, since the
EEPROM Master Write Enable will time-out. If an interrupt routine accessing the EEPROM is
interrupting another EEPROM access, the EEAR or EEDR Register will be modified, causing the
Table 8-1. EEPROM Mode Bits
EEPM1 EEPM0
Programming
Time Operation
0 0 3.4 ms Erase and Write in one operation (Atomic Operation)
0 1 1.8 ms Erase Only
1 0 1.8 ms Write Only
1 1 – Reserved for future use
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 32
interrupted EEPROM access to fail. It is recommended to have the Global Interrupt Flag cleared
during all the steps to avoid these problems.
When the write access time has elapsed, the EEPE bit is cleared by hardware. The user
software can poll this bit and wait for a zero before writing the next byte. When EEPE has been
set, the CPU is halted for two cycles before the next instruction is executed.
• Bit 0 – EERE: EEPROM Read Enable
The EEPROM Read Enable Signal EERE is the read strobe to the EEPROM. When the correct
address is set up in the EEAR Register, the EERE bit must be written to a logic one to trigger the
EEPROM read. The EEPROM read access takes one instruction, and the requested data is
available immediately. When the EEPROM is read, the CPU is halted for four cycles before the
next instruction is executed.
The user should poll the EEPE bit before starting the read operation. If a write operation is in
progress, it is neither possible to read the EEPROM, nor to change the EEAR Register.
The calibrated Oscillator is used to time the EEPROM accesses. Table 8-2 lists the typical
programming time for EEPROM access from the CPU.
The following code examples show one assembly and one C function for writing to the
EEPROM. The examples assume that interrupts are controlled (e.g. by disabling interrupts
globally) so that no interrupts will occur during execution of these functions. The examples also
assume that no Flash Boot Loader is present in the software. If such code is present, the
EEPROM write function must also wait for any ongoing SPM command to finish.
Table 8-2. EEPROM Programming Time
Symbol Number of Calibrated RC Oscillator Cycles Typ Programming Time
EEPROM write
(from CPU) 26,368 3.3 ms
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 33
The next code examples show assembly and C functions for reading the EEPROM. The
examples assume that interrupts are controlled so that no interrupts will occur during execution
of these functions.
Assembly Code Example
EEPROM_write:
; Wait for completion of previous write
sbic EECR,EEPE
rjmp EEPROM_write
; Set up address (r18:r17) in address register
out EEARH, r18
out EEARL, r17
; Write data (r16) to Data Register
out EEDR,r16
; Write logical one to EEMPE
sbi EECR,EEMPE
; Start eeprom write by setting EEPE
sbi EECR,EEPE
ret
C Code Example
void EEPROM_write(unsigned int uiAddress, unsigned char ucData)
{
/* Wait for completion of previous write */
while(EECR & (1<<EEPE))
;
/* Set up address and Data Registers */
EEAR = uiAddress;
EEDR = ucData;
/* Write logical one to EEMPE */
EECR |= (1<<EEMPE);
/* Start eeprom write by setting EEPE */
EECR |= (1<<EEPE);
}
Assembly Code Example
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 34
8.6.4 GPIOR2 – General Purpose I/O Register 2
8.6.5 GPIOR1 – General Purpose I/O Register 1
8.6.6 GPIOR0 – General Purpose I/O Register 0
EEPROM_read:
; Wait for completion of previous write
sbic EECR,EEPE
rjmp EEPROM_read
; Set up address (r18:r17) in address register
out EEARH, r18
out EEARL, r17
; Start eeprom read by writing EERE
sbi EECR,EERE
; Read data from Data Register
in r16,EEDR
ret
C Code Example
unsigned char EEPROM_read(unsigned int uiAddress)
{
/* Wait for completion of previous write */
while(EECR & (1<<EEPE))
;
/* Set up address register */
EEAR = uiAddress;
/* Start eeprom read by writing EERE */
EECR |= (1<<EERE);
/* Return data from Data Register */
return EEDR;
}
Bit 76543210
0x2B (0x4B) MSB LSB GPIOR2
Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 76543210
0x2A (0x4A) MSB LSB GPIOR1
Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 76543210
0x1E (0x3E) MSB LSB GPIOR0
Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 35
9. System Clock and Clock Options
9.1 Clock Systems and their Distribution
Figure 9-1 presents the principal clock systems in the AVR and their distribution. All of the clocks
need not be active at a given time. In order to reduce power consumption, the clocks to modules
not being used can be halted by using different sleep modes, as described in “Power
Management and Sleep Modes” on page 48. The clock systems are detailed below.
Figure 9-1. Clock Distribution
9.1.1 CPU Clock – clkCPU
The CPU clock is routed to parts of the system concerned with operation of the AVR core.
Examples of such modules are the General Purpose Register File, the Status Register and the
data memory holding the Stack Pointer. Halting the CPU clock inhibits the core from performing
general operations and calculations.
9.1.2 I/O Clock – clkI/O
The I/O clock is used by the majority of the I/O modules, like Timer/Counters, SPI, and USART.
The I/O clock is also used by the External Interrupt module, but note that some external
interrupts are detected by asynchronous logic, allowing such interrupts to be detected even if the
I/O clock is halted. Also note that start condition detection in the USI module is carried out
asynchronously when clkI/O is halted, TWI address recognition in all sleep modes.
General I/O
Modules
Asynchronous
Timer/Counter CPU Core RAM
clk
I/O
clk
ASY
AVR Clock
Control Unit
clk
CPU
Flash and
EEPROM
clk
FLASH
Source clock
Watchdog Timer
Watchdog
Oscillator
Reset Logic
Clock
Multiplexer
Watchdog clock
Calibrated RC
Oscillator
Timer/Counter
Oscillator Crystal
Oscillator Low-frequency
Crystal Oscillator
External Clock
ADC
clk
ADC
System Clock
Prescaler
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 36
9.1.3 Flash Clock – clkFLASH
The Flash clock controls operation of the Flash interface. The Flash clock is usually active
simultaneously with the CPU clock.
9.1.4 Asynchronous Timer Clock – clkASY
The Asynchronous Timer clock allows the Asynchronous Timer/Counter to be clocked directly
from an external clock or an external 32 kHz clock crystal. The dedicated clock domain allows
using this Timer/Counter as a real-time counter even when the device is in sleep mode.
9.1.5 ADC Clock – clkADC
The ADC is provided with a dedicated clock domain. This allows halting the CPU and I/O clocks
in order to reduce noise generated by digital circuitry. This gives more accurate ADC conversion
results.
9.2 Clock Sources
The device has the following clock source options, selectable by Flash Fuse bits as shown
below. The clock from the selected source is input to the AVR clock generator, and routed to the
appropriate modules.
Note: 1. For all fuses “1” means unprogrammed while “0” means programmed.
9.2.1 Default Clock Source
The device is shipped with internal RC oscillator at 8.0MHz and with the fuse CKDIV8
programmed, resulting in 1.0MHz system clock. The startup time is set to maximum and time-
out period enabled. (CKSEL = "0010", SUT = "10", CKDIV8 = "0"). The default setting ensures
that all users can make their desired clock source setting using any available programming
interface.
9.2.2 Clock Startup Sequence
Any clock source needs a sufficient VCC to start oscillating and a minimum number of oscillating
cycles before it can be considered stable.
To ensure sufficient VCC, the device issues an internal reset with a time-out delay (tTOUT) after
the device reset is released by all other reset sources. “System Control and Reset” on page 55
describes the start conditions for the internal reset. The delay (tTOUT) is timed from the Watchdog
Oscillator and the number of cycles in the delay is set by the SUTx and CKSELx fuse bits. The
Table 9-1. Device Clocking Options Select(1)
Device Clocking Option CKSEL[3:0]
Low Power Crystal Oscillator 1111 - 1000
Full Swing Crystal Oscillator 0111 - 0110
Low Frequency Crystal Oscillator 0101 - 0100
Internal 128 kHz RC Oscillator 0011
Calibrated Internal RC Oscillator 0010
External Clock 0000
Reserved 0001
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 37
selectable delays are shown in Table 9-2. The frequency of the Watchdog Oscillator is voltage
dependent as shown in “Typical Characteristics” on page 338.
Main purpose of the delay is to keep the AVR in reset until it is supplied with minimum VCC. The
delay will not monitor the actual voltage and it will be required to select a delay longer than the
VCC rise time. If this is not possible, an internal or external Brown-Out Detection circuit should be
used. A BOD circuit will ensure sufficient VCC before it releases the reset, and the time-out delay
can be disabled. Disabling the time-out delay without utilizing a Brown-Out Detection circuit is
not recommended.
The oscillator is required to oscillate for a minimum number of cycles before the clock is
considered stable. An internal ripple counter monitors the oscillator output clock, and keeps the
internal reset active for a given number of clock cycles. The reset is then released and the
device will start to execute. The recommended oscillator start-up time is dependent on the clock
type, and varies from 6 cycles for an externally applied clock to 32K cycles for a low frequency
crystal.
The start-up sequence for the clock includes both the time-out delay and the start-up time when
the device starts up from reset. When starting up from Power-save or Power-down mode, VCC is
assumed to be at a sufficient level and only the start-up time is included.
9.3 Low Power Crystal Oscillator
Pins XTAL1 and XTAL2 are input and output, respectively, of an inverting amplifier which can be
configured for use as an On-chip Oscillator, as shown in Figure 9-2 on page 38. Either a quartz
crystal or a ceramic resonator may be used.
This Crystal Oscillator is a low power oscillator, with reduced voltage swing on the XTAL2
output. It gives the lowest power consumption, but is not capable of driving other clock inputs,
and may be more susceptible to noise in noisy environments. In these cases, refer to the “Full
Swing Crystal Oscillator” on page 39.
C1 and C2 should always be equal for both crystals and resonators. The optimal value of the
capacitors depends on the crystal or resonator in use, the amount of stray capacitance, and the
electromagnetic noise of the environment. Some initial guidelines for choosing capacitors for
use with crystals are given in Table 9-3 on page 38. For ceramic resonators, the capacitor
values given by the manufacturer should be used.
Table 9-2. Number of Watchdog Oscillator Cycles
Typ Time-out (VCC = 5.0V) Typ Time-out (VCC = 3.0V) Number of Cycles
0 ms 0 ms 0
4.1 ms 4.3 ms 512
65 ms 69 ms 8K (8,192)
HDH
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 38
Figure 9-2. Crystal Oscillator Connections
The Low Power Oscillator can operate in three different modes, each optimized for a specific
frequency range. The operating mode is selected by the fuses CKSEL[3:1] as shown in Table 9-
3 on page 38.
Notes: 1. This is the recommended CKSEL settings for the different frequency ranges.
2. This option should not be used with crystals, only with ceramic resonators.
3. If 8 MHz frequency exceeds the specification of the device (depends on VCC), the CKDIV8
Fuse can be programmed in order to divide the internal frequency by 8. It must be ensured
that the resulting divided clock meets the frequency specification of the device.
The CKSEL0 Fuse together with the SUT[1:0] Fuses select the start-up times as shown in Table
9-4.
Table 9-3. Low Power Crystal Oscillator Operating Modes(3)
Frequency Range(1)
(MHz)
Recommended Range for
Capacitors C1 and C2 (pF) CKSEL[3:1]
0.4 - 0.9 – 100(2)
0.9 - 3.0 12 - 22 101
3.0 - 8.0 12 - 22 110
8.0 - 16.0 12 - 22 111
Table 9-4. Start-up Times for the Low Power Crystal Oscillator Clock Selection
Oscillator Source /
Power Conditions
Start-up Time from
Power-down and
Power-save
Additional Delay
from Reset
(VCC = 5.0V) CKSEL0 SUT[1:0]
Ceramic resonator, fast
rising power 258 CK 14CK + 4.1 ms(1) 000
Ceramic resonator, slowly
rising power 258 CK 14CK + 65 ms(1) 001
Ceramic resonator, BOD
enabled 1K CK 14CK(2) 010
Ceramic resonator, fast
rising power 1K CK 14CK + 4.1 ms(2) 011
Ceramic resonator, slowly
rising power 1K CK 14CK + 65 ms(2) 100
XTAL2 (TOSC2)
XTAL1 (TOSC1)
GND
C2
C1
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 39
Notes: 1. These options should only be used when not operating close to the maximum frequency of
the device, and only if frequency stability at start-up is not important for the application. These
options are not suitable for crystals.
2. These options are intended for use with ceramic resonators and will ensure frequency
stability at start-up. They can also be used with crystals when not operating close to the
maximum frequency of the device, and if frequency stability at start-up is not important for the
application.
9.4 Full Swing Crystal Oscillator
Pins XTAL1 and XTAL2 are input and output, respectively, of an inverting amplifier which can be
configured for use as an On-chip Oscillator, as shown in Figure 9-2 on page 38. Either a quartz
crystal or a ceramic resonator may be used.
This Crystal Oscillator is a full swing oscillator, with rail-to-rail swing on the XTAL2 output. This is
useful for driving other clock inputs and in noisy environments. The current consumption is
higher than the “Low Power Crystal Oscillator” on page 37. Note that the Full Swing Crystal
Oscillator will only operate for VCC = 2.7 - 5.5 volts.
C1 and C2 should always be equal for both crystals and resonators. The optimal value of the
capacitors depends on the crystal or resonator in use, the amount of stray capacitance, and the
electromagnetic noise of the environment. Some initial guidelines for choosing capacitors for
use with crystals are given in Table 9-6 on page 40. For ceramic resonators, the capacitor
values given by the manufacturer should be used.
The operating mode is selected by the fuses CKSEL[3:1] as shown in Table 9-5.
Note: If 8 MHz frequency exceeds the specification of the device (depends on VCC), the CKDIV8 Fuse
can be programmed in order to divide the internal frequency by 8. It must be ensured that the
resulting divided clock meets the frequency specification of the device.
Crystal Oscillator, BOD
enabled 16K CK 14CK 1 01
Crystal Oscillator, fast
rising power 16K CK 14CK + 4.1 ms 1 10
Crystal Oscillator, slowly
rising power 16K CK 14CK + 65 ms 1 11
Table 9-4. Start-up Times for the Low Power Crystal Oscillator Clock Selection (Continued)
Oscillator Source /
Power Conditions
Start-up Time from
Power-down and
Power-save
Additional Delay
from Reset
(VCC = 5.0V) CKSEL0 SUT[1:0]
Table 9-5. Full Swing Crystal Oscillator operating modes(Note:)
Frequency Range (MHz)
Recommended Range for
Capacitors C1 and C2 (pF) CKSEL[3:1]
0.4 - 20 12 - 22 011
HEP
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 40
Figure 9-3. Crystal Oscillator Connections
Notes: 1. These options should only be used when not operating close to the maximum frequency of
the device, and only if frequency stability at start-up is not important for the application. These
options are not suitable for crystals.
2. These options are intended for use with ceramic resonators and will ensure frequency
stability at start-up. They can also be used with crystals when not operating close to the
maximum frequency of the device, and if frequency stability at start-up is not important for the
application.
Table 9-6. Start-up Times for the Full Swing Crystal Oscillator Clock Selection
Oscillator Source /
Power Conditions
Start-up Time from
Power-down and
Power-save
Additional Delay
from Reset
(VCC = 5.0V) CKSEL0 SUT[1:0]
Ceramic resonator, fast
rising power 258 CK 14CK + 4.1 ms(1) 000
Ceramic resonator, slowly
rising power 258 CK 14CK + 65 ms(1) 001
Ceramic resonator, BOD
enabled 1K CK 14CK(2) 010
Ceramic resonator, fast
rising power 1K CK 14CK + 4.1 ms(2) 011
Ceramic resonator, slowly
rising power 1K CK 14CK + 65 ms(2) 100
Crystal Oscillator, BOD
enabled 16K CK 14CK 1 01
Crystal Oscillator, fast
rising power 16K CK 14CK + 4.1 ms 1 10
Crystal Oscillator, slowly
rising power 16K CK 14CK + 65 ms 1 11
XTAL2 (TOSC2)
XTAL1 (TOSC1)
GND
C2
C1
( r 2 ('LrC
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 41
9.5 Low Frequency Crystal Oscillator
The Low-frequency Crystal Oscillator is optimized for use with a 32.768 kHz watch crystal.
When selecting crystals, load capasitance and crystal’s Equivalent Series Resistance, ESR
must be taken into consideration. Both values are specified by the crystal vendor.
ATmega48P/88P/168P oscillator is optimized for very low power consumption, and thus when
selecting crystals, see Table 9-7 on page 41 for maximum ESR recommendations on 6.5 pF,
9.0 pF and 12.5 pF crystals
Table 9-7. Maximum ESR Recommendation for 32.768 kHz Crystal
Note: 1. Maximum ESR is typical value based on characterization
The Low-frequency Crystal Oscillator provides an internal load capacitance of typical 6 pF at
each TOSC pin. The external capacitance (C) needed at each TOSC pin can be calculated by
using:
where CL is the load capacitance for a 32.768 kHz crystal specified by the crystal vendor and CS
is the total stray capacitance for one TOSC pin.
Crystals specifying load capacitance (CL) higher than 6 pF, require external capacitors applied
as described in Figure 9-2 on page 38.
The Low-frequency Crystal Oscillator must be selected by setting the CKSEL Fuses to “0110” or
“0111”, as shown in Table 9-10. Start-up times are determined by the SUT Fuses as shown in
Table 9-9.
Crystal CL (pF) Max ESR [k](1)
6.5 75
9.0 65
12.5 30
Table 9-8. Capacitance for the Low-frequency Crystal Oscillator
Device
32 kHz Osc.
Type
Cap
(Xtal1/Tosc1)
Cap
(Xtal2/Tosc2)
ATmega48P/88P/169P System Osc. 18 pF 8 pF
Timer Osc. 18 pF 8 pF
Table 9-9. Start-up Times for the Low-frequency Crystal Oscillator Clock Selection
SUT[1:0] Additional Delay from Reset (VCC = 5.0V) Recommended Usage
00 4 CK Fast rising power or BOD enabled
01 4 CK + 4.1 ms Slowly rising power
10 4 CK + 65 ms Stable frequency at start-up
11 Reserved
C2CLCs
–=
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 42
Note: 1. This option should only be used if frequency stability at start-up is not important for the
application
9.6 Calibrated Internal RC Oscillator
By default, the Internal RC Oscillator provides an approximate 8.0 MHz clock. Though voltage
and temperature dependent, this clock can be very accurately calibrated by the user. See Table
29-1 on page 329 for more details. The device is shipped with the CKDIV8 Fuse programmed.
See “System Clock Prescaler” on page 44 for more details.
This clock may be selected as the system clock by programming the CKSEL Fuses as shown in
Table 9-11. If selected, it will operate with no external components. During reset, hardware loads
the pre-programmed calibration value into the OSCCAL Register and thereby automatically
calibrates the RC Oscillator. The accuracy of this calibration is shown as Factory calibration in
Table 29-1 on page 329.
By changing the OSCCAL register from SW, see “OSCCAL – Oscillator Calibration Register” on
page 46, it is possible to get a higher calibration accuracy than by using the factory calibration.
The accuracy of this calibration is shown as User calibration in Table 29-1 on page 329.
When this Oscillator is used as the chip clock, the Watchdog Oscillator will still be used for the
Watchdog Timer and for the Reset Time-out. For more information on the pre-programmed
calibration value, see the section “Calibration Byte” on page 309.
Notes: 1. This is the recommended CKSEL settings for the different frequency ranges.
2. If 8 MHz frequency exceeds the specification of the device (depends on VCC), the CKDIV8
Fuse can be programmed in order to divide the internal frequency by 8.
When this Oscillator is selected, start-up times are determined by the SUT Fuses as shown in
Table 9-12 on page 42.
Note: 1. If the RSTDISBL fuse is programmed, this start-up time will be increased to
14CK + 4.1 ms to ensure programming mode can be entered.
2. The device is shipped with this option selected.
Table 9-10. Start-up Times for the Low-frequency Crystal Oscillator Clock Selection
CKSEL[3:0]
Start-up Time from
Power-down and Power-save Recommended Usage
0100(1) 1K CK
0101 32K CK Stable frequency at start-up
Table 9-11. Internal Calibrated RC Oscillator Operating Modes(2)
Frequency Range(1) (MHz) CKSEL[3:0]
7.3 - 8.1 0010
Table 9-12. Start-up times for the internal calibrated RC Oscillator clock selection
Power Conditions
Start-up Time from Power-
down and Power-save
Additional Delay from
Reset (VCC = 5.0V) SUT[1:0]
BOD enabled 6 CK 14CK(1) 00
Fast rising power 6 CK 14CK + 4.1 ms 01
Slowly rising power 6 CK 14CK + 65 ms(2) 10
Reserved 11
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 43
9.7 128 kHz Internal Oscillator
The 128 kHz internal Oscillator is a low power Oscillator providing a clock of 128 kHz. The
frequency is nominal at 3V and 25C. This clock may be select as the system clock by
programming the CKSEL Fuses to “11” as shown in Table 9-13.
Note: 1. Note that the 128 kHz oscillator is a very low power clock source, and is not designed for a
high accuracy.
When this clock source is selected, start-up times are determined by the SUT Fuses as shown in
Table 9-14.
Note: 1. If the RSTDISBL fuse is programmed, this start-up time will be increased to
14CK + 4.1 ms to ensure programming mode can be entered.
9.8 External Clock
To drive the device from an external clock source, XTAL1 should be driven as shown in Figure
9-4 on page 43. To run the device on an external clock, the CKSEL Fuses must be programmed
to “0000” (see Table 9-15).
Figure 9-4. External Clock Drive Configuration
When this clock source is selected, start-up times are determined by the SUT Fuses as shown in
Table 9-16.
Table 9-13. 128 kHz Internal Oscillator Operating Modes
Nominal Frequency(1) CKSEL[3:0]
128 kHz 0011
Table 9-14. Start-up Times for the 128 kHz Internal Oscillator
Power Conditions
Start-up Time from Power-
down and Power-save
Additional Delay from
Reset SUT[1:0]
BOD enabled 6 CK 14CK(1) 00
Fast rising power 6 CK 14CK + 4 ms 01
Slowly rising power 6 CK 14CK + 64 ms 10
Reserved 11
Table 9-15. Crystal Oscillator Clock Frequency
Frequency CKSEL[3:0]
0 - 20 MHz 0000
NC
EXTERNAL
CLOCK
SIGNAL
XTAL2
XTAL1
GND
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 44
When applying an external clock, it is required to avoid sudden changes in the applied clock
frequency to ensure stable operation of the MCU. A variation in frequency of more than 2% from
one clock cycle to the next can lead to unpredictable behavior. If changes of more than 2% is
required, ensure that the MCU is kept in Reset during the changes.
Note that the System Clock Prescaler can be used to implement run-time changes of the internal
clock frequency while still ensuring stable operation. Refer to “System Clock Prescaler” on page
44 for details.
9.9 Clock Output Buffer
The device can output the system clock on the CLKO pin. To enable the output, the CKOUT
Fuse has to be programmed. This mode is suitable when the chip clock is used to drive other
circuits on the system. The clock also will be output during reset, and the normal operation of I/O
pin will be overridden when the fuse is programmed. Any clock source, including the internal RC
Oscillator, can be selected when the clock is output on CLKO. If the System Clock Prescaler is
used, it is the divided system clock that is output.
9.10 Timer/Counter Oscillator
ATmega48P/88P/168P uses the same crystal oscillator for Low-frequency Oscillator and
Timer/Counter Oscillator. See “Low Frequency Crystal Oscillator” on page 41 for details on the
oscillator and crystal requirements.
ATmega48P/88P/168P share the Timer/Counter Oscillator Pins (TOSC1 and TOSC2) with
XTAL1 and XTAL2. When using the Timer/Counter Oscillator, the system clock needs to be four
times the oscillator frequency. Due to this and the pin sharing, the Timer/Counter Oscillator can
only be used when the Calibrated Internal RC Oscillator is selected as system clock source.
Applying an external clock source to TOSC1 can be done if EXTCLK in the ASSR Register is
written to logic one. See “Asynchronous Operation of Timer/Counter2” on page 166 for further
description on selecting external clock as input instead of a 32.768 kHz watch crystal.
9.11 System Clock Prescaler
The ATmega48P/88P/168P has a system clock prescaler, and the system clock can be divided
by setting the “CLKPR – Clock Prescale Register” on page 46. This feature can be used to
decrease the system clock frequency and the power consumption when the requirement for
processing power is low. This can be used with all clock source options, and it will affect the
clock frequency of the CPU and all synchronous peripherals. clkI/O, clkADC, clkCPU, and clkFLASH
are divided by a factor as shown in Table 29-3 on page 330.
When switching between prescaler settings, the System Clock Prescaler ensures that no
glitches occurs in the clock system. It also ensures that no intermediate frequency is higher than
Table 9-16. Start-up Times for the External Clock Selection
Power Conditions
Start-up Time from Power-
down and Power-save
Additional Delay from
Reset (VCC = 5.0V) SUT[1:0]
BOD enabled 6 CK 14CK 00
Fast rising power 6 CK 14CK + 4.1 ms 01
Slowly rising power 6 CK 14CK + 65 ms 10
Reserved 11
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 45
neither the clock frequency corresponding to the previous setting, nor the clock frequency
corresponding to the new setting. The ripple counter that implements the prescaler runs at the
frequency of the undivided clock, which may be faster than the CPU's clock frequency. Hence, it
is not possible to determine the state of the prescaler - even if it were readable, and the exact
time it takes to switch from one clock division to the other cannot be exactly predicted. From the
time the CLKPS values are written, it takes between T1 + T2 and T1 + 2 * T2 before the new
clock frequency is active. In this interval, 2 active clock edges are produced. Here, T1 is the
previous clock period, and T2 is the period corresponding to the new prescaler setting.
To avoid unintentional changes of clock frequency, a special write procedure must befollowed to
change the CLKPS bits:
1. Write the Clock Prescaler Change Enable (CLKPCE) bit to one and all other bitsin CLKPR
to zero.
2. Within four cycles, write the desired value to CLKPS while writing a zero to CLKPCE.
Interrupts must be disabled when changing prescaler setting to make sure the write procedure is
not interrupted.
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 46
9.12 Register Description
9.12.1 OSCCAL – Oscillator Calibration Register
• Bits 7:0 – CAL[7:0]: Oscillator Calibration Value
The Oscillator Calibration Register is used to trim the Calibrated Internal RC Oscillator to
remove process variations from the oscillator frequency. A pre-programmed calibration value is
automatically written to this register during chip reset, giving the Factory calibrated frequency as
specified in Table 29-1 on page 329. The application software can write this register to change
the oscillator frequency. The oscillator can be calibrated to frequencies as specified in Table 29-
1 on page 329. Calibration outside that range is not ensured.
Note that this oscillator is used to time EEPROM and Flash write accesses, and these write
times will be affected accordingly. If the EEPROM or Flash are written, do not calibrate to more
than 8.8 MHz. Otherwise, the EEPROM or Flash write may fail.
The CAL7 bit determines the range of operation for the oscillator. Setting this bit to 0 gives the
lowest frequency range, setting this bit to 1 gives the highest frequency range. The two
frequency ranges are overlapping, in other words a setting of OSCCAL = 0x7F gives a higher
frequency than OSCCAL = 0x80.
The CAL[6:0] bits are used to tune the frequency within the selected range. A setting of 0x00
gives the lowest frequency in that range, and a setting of 0x7F gives the highest frequency in the
range.
9.12.2 CLKPR – Clock Prescale Register
• Bit 7 – CLKPCE: Clock Prescaler Change Enable
The CLKPCE bit must be written to logic one to enable change of the CLKPS bits. The CLKPCE
bit is only updated when the other bits in CLKPR are simultaneously written to zero. CLKPCE is
cleared by hardware four cycles after it is written or when CLKPS bits are written. Rewriting the
CLKPCE bit within this time-out period does neither extend the time-out period, nor clear the
CLKPCE bit.
• Bits 3:0 – CLKPS[3:0]: Clock Prescaler Select Bits 3 - 0
These bits define the division factor between the selected clock source and the internal system
clock. These bits can be written run-time to vary the clock frequency to suit the application
requirements. As the divider divides the master clock input to the MCU, the speed of all
synchronous peripherals is reduced when a division factor is used. The division factors are given
in Table 9-17 on page 47.
Bit 76543210
(0x66) CAL7 CAL6 CAL5 CAL4 CAL3 CAL2 CAL1 CAL0 OSCCAL
Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value Device Specific Calibration Value
Bit 76543210
(0x61) CLKPCE – – – CLKPS3 CLKPS2 CLKPS1 CLKPS0 CLKPR
Read/Write R/W R R R R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 See Bit Description
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 47
The CKDIV8 Fuse determines the initial value of the CLKPS bits. If CKDIV8 is unprogrammed,
the CLKPS bits will be reset to “0000”. If CKDIV8 is programmed, CLKPS bits are reset to
“0011”, giving a division factor of 8 at start up. This feature should be used if the selected clock
source has a higher frequency than the maximum frequency of the device at the present
operating conditions. Note that any value can be written to the CLKPS bits regardless of the
CKDIV8 Fuse setting. The Application software must ensure that a sufficient division factor is
chosen if the selected clock source has a higher frequency than the maximum frequency of the
device at the present operating conditions. The device is shipped with the CKDIV8 Fuse
programmed.
Table 9-17. Clock Prescaler Select
CLKPS3 CLKPS2 CLKPS1 CLKPS0 Clock Division Factor
0000 1
0001 2
0010 4
0011 8
0100 16
0101 32
0110 64
0111 128
1000 256
1001 Reserved
1010 Reserved
1011 Reserved
1100 Reserved
1101 Reserved
1110 Reserved
1111 Reserved
2935 00m
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 48
10. Power Management and Sleep Modes
Sleep modes enable the application to shut down unused modules in the MCU, thereby saving
power. The AVR provides various sleep modes allowing the user to tailor the power
consumption to the application’s requirements.
When enabled, the Brown-out Detector (BOD) actively monitors the power supply voltage during
the sleep periods. To further save power, it is possible to disable the BOD in some sleep modes.
See “BOD Disable” on page 49 for more details.
10.1 Sleep Modes
Figure 9-1 on page 35 presents the different clock systems in the ATmega48P/88P/168P, and
their distribution. The figure is helpful in selecting an appropriate sleep mode. Table 10-1 shows
the different sleep modes, their wake up sources BOD disable ability.
Notes: 1. Only recommended with external crystal or resonator selected as clock source.
2. If Timer/Counter2 is running in asynchronous mode.
3. For INT1 and INT0, only level interrupt.
To enter any of the six sleep modes, the SE bit in SMCR must be written to logic one and a
SLEEP instruction must be executed. The SM2, SM1, and SM0 bits in the SMCR Register select
which sleep mode (Idle, ADC Noise Reduction, Power-down, Power-save, Standby, or Extended
Standby) will be activated by the SLEEP instruction. See Table 10-2 on page 53 for a summary.
If an enabled interrupt occurs while the MCU is in a sleep mode, the MCU wakes up. The MCU
is then halted for four cycles in addition to the start-up time, executes the interrupt routine, and
resumes execution from the instruction following SLEEP. The contents of the Register File and
SRAM are unaltered when the device wakes up from sleep. If a reset occurs during sleep mode,
the MCU wakes up and executes from the Reset Vector.
Table 10-1. Active Clock Domains and Wake-up Sources in the Different Sleep Modes.
Active Clock Domains Oscillators Wake-up Sources
Software
BOD Disable
Sleep Mode
clkCPU
clkFLASH
clkIO
clkADC
clkASY
Main Clock
Source Enabled
Timer Oscillator
Enabled
INT1, INT0 and
Pin Change
TWI Address
Match
Timer2
SPM/EEPROM
Ready
ADC
WDT
Other/O
Idle XXX X X
(2) X X X X XXX
ADC Noise
Reduction XX X X
(2) X(3) XX
(2) XXX
Power-down X(3) XXX
Power-save X X(2) X(3) XX X X
Standby(1) XX
(3) XXX
Extended
Standby X(2) XX
(2) X(3) XX X X
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 49
10.2 BOD Disable
When the Brown-out Detector (BOD) is enabled by BODLEVEL fuses, Table 28-6 on page 308,
the BOD is actively monitoring the power supply voltage during a sleep period. To save power, it
is possible to disable the BOD by software for some of the sleep modes, see Table 10-1 on page
48. The sleep mode power consumption will then be at the same level as when BOD is globally
disabled by fuses. If BOD is disabled in software, the BOD function is turned off immediately
after entering the sleep mode. Upon wake-up from sleep, BOD is automatically enabled again.
This ensures safe operation in case the VCC level has dropped during the sleep period.
When the BOD has been disabled, the wake-up time from sleep mode will be approximately 60
µs to ensure that the BOD is working correctly before the MCU continues executing code.
BOD disable is controlled by bit 6, BODS (BOD Sleep) in the control register MCUCR, see
“MCUCR – MCU Control Register” on page 53. Writing this bit to one turns off the BOD in
relevant sleep modes, while a zero in this bit keeps BOD active. Default setting keeps BOD
active, i.e. BODS set to zero.
Writing to the BODS bit is controlled by a timed sequence and an enable bit, see “MCUCR –
MCU Control Register” on page 53.
10.3 Idle Mode
When the SM[2:0] bits are written to 000, the SLEEP instruction makes the MCU enter Idle
mode, stopping the CPU but allowing the SPI, USART, Analog Comparator, ADC, 2-wire Serial
Interface, Timer/Counters, Watchdog, and the interrupt system to continue operating. This sleep
mode basically halts clkCPU and clkFLASH, while allowing the other clocks to run.
Idle mode enables the MCU to wake up from external triggered interrupts as well as internal
ones like the Timer Overflow and USART Transmit Complete interrupts. If wake-up from the
Analog Comparator interrupt is not required, the Analog Comparator can be powered down by
setting the ACD bit in the Analog Comparator Control and Status Register – ACSR. This will
reduce power consumption in Idle mode. If the ADC is enabled, a conversion starts
automatically when this mode is entered.
10.4 ADC Noise Reduction Mode
When the SM[2:0] bits are written to 001, the SLEEP instruction makes the MCU enter ADC
Noise Reduction mode, stopping the CPU but allowing the ADC, the external interrupts, the 2-
wire Serial Interface address watch, Timer/Counter2(1), and the Watchdog to continue operating
(if enabled). This sleep mode basically halts clkI/O, clkCPU, and clkFLASH, while allowing the other
clocks to run.
This improves the noise environment for the ADC, enabling higher resolution measurements. If
the ADC is enabled, a conversion starts automatically when this mode is entered. Apart from the
ADC Conversion Complete interrupt, only an External Reset, a Watchdog System Reset, a
Watchdog Interrupt, a Brown-out Reset, a 2-wire Serial Interface address match, a
Timer/Counter2 interrupt, an SPM/EEPROM ready interrupt, an external level interrupt on INT0
or INT1 or a pin change interrupt can wake up the MCU from ADC Noise Reduction mode.
Note: 1. Timer/Counter2 will only keep running in asynchronous mode, see “8-bit Timer/Counter2 with
PWM and Asynchronous Operation” on page 155 for details.
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 50
10.5 Power-down Mode
When the SM[2:0] bits are written to 010, the SLEEP instruction makes the MCU enter Power-
down mode. In this mode, the external Oscillator is stopped, while the external interrupts, the 2-
wire Serial Interface address watch, and the Watchdog continue operating (if enabled). Only an
External Reset, a Watchdog System Reset, a Watchdog Interrupt, a Brown-out Reset, a 2-wire
Serial Interface address match, an external level interrupt on INT0 or INT1, or a pin change
interrupt can wake up the MCU. This sleep mode basically halts all generated clocks, allowing
operation of asynchronous modules only.
Note that if a level triggered interrupt is used for wake-up from Power-down mode, the changed
level must be held for some time to wake up the MCU. Refer to “External Interrupts” on page 79
for details.
When waking up from Power-down mode, there is a delay from the wake-up condition occurs
until the wake-up becomes effective. This allows the clock to restart and become stable after
having been stopped. The wake-up period is defined by the same CKSEL Fuses that define the
Reset Time-out period, as described in “Clock Sources” on page 36.
10.6 Power-save Mode
When the SM[2:0] bits are written to 011, the SLEEP instruction makes the MCU enter Power-
save mode. This mode is identical to Power-down, with one exception:
If Timer/Counter2 is enabled, it will keep running during sleep. The device can wake up from
either Timer Overflow or Output Compare event from Timer/Counter2 if the corresponding
Timer/Counter2 interrupt enable bits are set in TIMSK2, and the Global Interrupt Enable bit in
SREG is set.
If Timer/Counter2 is not running, Power-down mode is recommended instead of Power-save
mode.
The Timer/Counter2 can be clocked both synchronously and asynchronously in Power-save
mode. If Timer/Counter2 is not using the asynchronous clock, the Timer/Counter Oscillator is
stopped during sleep. If Timer/Counter2 is not using the synchronous clock, the clock source is
stopped during sleep. Note that even if the synchronous clock is running in Power-save, this
clock is only available for Timer/Counter2.
10.7 Standby Mode
When the SM[2:0] bits are 110 and an external crystal/resonator clock option is selected, the
SLEEP instruction makes the MCU enter Standby mode. This mode is identical to Power-down
with the exception that the Oscillator is kept running. From Standby mode, the device wakes up
in six clock cycles.
10.8 Extended Standby Mode
When the SM[2:0] bits are 111 and an external crystal/resonator clock option is selected, the
SLEEP instruction makes the MCU enter Extended Standby mode. This mode is identical to
Power-save with the exception that the Oscillator is kept running. From Extended Standby
mode, the device wakes up in six clock cycles.
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 51
10.9 Power Reduction Register
The Power Reduction Register (PRR), see “PRR – Power Reduction Register” on page 54,
provides a method to stop the clock to individual peripherals to reduce power consumption. The
current state of the peripheral is frozen and the I/O registers can not be read or written.
Resources used by the peripheral when stopping the clock will remain occupied, hence the
peripheral should in most cases be disabled before stopping the clock. Waking up a module,
which is done by clearing the bit in PRR, puts the module in the same state as before shutdown.
Module shutdown can be used in Idle mode and Active mode to significantly reduce the overall
power consumption. In all other sleep modes, the clock is already stopped.
10.10 Minimizing Power Consumption
There are several possibilities to consider when trying to minimize the power consumption in an
AVR controlled system. In general, sleep modes should be used as much as possible, and the
sleep mode should be selected so that as few as possible of the device’s functions are
operating. All functions not needed should be disabled. In particular, the following modules may
need special consideration when trying to achieve the lowest possible power consumption.
10.10.1 Analog to Digital Converter
If enabled, the ADC will be enabled in all sleep modes. To save power, the ADC should be
disabled before entering any sleep mode. When the ADC is turned off and on again, the next
conversion will be an extended conversion. Refer to “Analog-to-Digital Converter” on page 262
for details on ADC operation.
10.10.2 Analog Comparator
When entering Idle mode, the Analog Comparator should be disabled if not used. When entering
ADC Noise Reduction mode, the Analog Comparator should be disabled. In other sleep modes,
the Analog Comparator is automatically disabled. However, if the Analog Comparator is set up
to use the Internal Voltage Reference as input, the Analog Comparator should be disabled in all
sleep modes. Otherwise, the Internal Voltage Reference will be enabled, independent of sleep
mode. Refer to “Analog Comparator” on page 258 for details on how to configure the Analog
Comparator.
10.10.3 Brown-out Detector
If the Brown-out Detector is not needed by the application, this module should be turned off. If
the Brown-out Detector is enabled by the BODLEVEL Fuses, it will be enabled in all sleep
modes, and hence, always consume power. In the deeper sleep modes, this will contribute
significantly to the total current consumption. Refer to “Brown-out Detection” on page 57 for
details on how to configure the Brown-out Detector.
10.10.4 Internal Voltage Reference
The Internal Voltage Reference will be enabled when needed by the Brown-out Detection, the
Analog Comparator or the ADC. If these modules are disabled as described in the sections
above, the internal voltage reference will be disabled and it will not be consuming power. When
turned on again, the user must allow the reference to start up before the output is used. If the
reference is kept on in sleep mode, the output can be used immediately. Refer to “Internal
Voltage Reference” on page 58 for details on the start-up time.
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 52
10.10.5 Watchdog Timer
If the Watchdog Timer is not needed in the application, the module should be turned off. If the
Watchdog Timer is enabled, it will be enabled in all sleep modes and hence always consume
power. In the deeper sleep modes, this will contribute significantly to the total current
consumption. Refer to “Watchdog Timer” on page 59 for details on how to configure the
Watchdog Timer.
10.10.6 Port Pins
When entering a sleep mode, all port pins should be configured to use minimum power. The
most important is then to ensure that no pins drive resistive loads. In sleep modes where both
the I/O clock (clkI/O) and the ADC clock (clkADC) are stopped, the input buffers of the device will
be disabled. This ensures that no power is consumed by the input logic when not needed. In
some cases, the input logic is needed for detecting wake-up conditions, and it will then be
enabled. Refer to the section “Digital Input Enable and Sleep Modes” on page 89 for details on
which pins are enabled. If the input buffer is enabled and the input signal is left floating or have
an analog signal level close to VCC/2, the input buffer will use excessive power.
For analog input pins, the digital input buffer should be disabled at all times. An analog signal
level close to VCC/2 on an input pin can cause significant current even in active mode. Digital
input buffers can be disabled by writing to the Digital Input Disable Registers (DIDR1 and
DIDR0). Refer to “DIDR1 – Digital Input Disable Register 1” on page 261 and “DIDR0 – Digital
Input Disable Register 0” on page 278 for details.
10.10.7 On-chip Debug System
If the On-chip debug system is enabled by the DWEN Fuse and the chip enters sleep mode, the
main clock source is enabled and hence always consumes power. In the deeper sleep modes,
this will contribute significantly to the total current consumption.
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 53
10.11 Register Description
10.11.1 SMCR – Sleep Mode Control Register
The Sleep Mode Control Register contains control bits for power management.
• Bits 7:4 – Reserved
These bits are unused bits in the ATmega48P/88P/168P, and will always read as zero.
• Bits 3:1 – SM[2:0]: Sleep Mode Select Bits 2, 1, and 0
These bits select between the five available sleep modes as shown in Table 10-2.
Note: 1. Standby mode is only recommended for use with external crystals or resonators.
• Bit 0 – SE: Sleep Enable
The SE bit must be written to logic one to make the MCU enter the sleep mode when the SLEEP
instruction is executed. To avoid the MCU entering the sleep mode unless it is the programmer’s
purpose, it is recommended to write the Sleep Enable (SE) bit to one just before the execution of
the SLEEP instruction and to clear it immediately after waking up.
10.11.2 MCUCR – MCU Control Register
• Bit 6 – BODS: BOD Sleep
The BODS bit must be written to logic one in order to turn off BOD during sleep, see Table 10-1
on page 48. Writing to the BODS bit is controlled by a timed sequence and an enable bit,
BODSE in MCUCR. To disable BOD in relevant sleep modes, both BODS and BODSE must first
Bit 76543210
0x33 (0x53) ––––SM2SM1SM0SESMCR
Read/Write R R R R R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Table 10-2. Sleep Mode Select
SM2 SM1 SM0 Sleep Mode
000Idle
0 0 1 ADC Noise Reduction
0 1 0 Power-down
0 1 1 Power-save
1 0 0 Reserved
1 0 1 Reserved
1 1 0 Standby(1)
1 1 1 External Standby(1)
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0x35 (0x55) – BODS BODSE PUD – – IVSEL IVCE MCUCR
Read/Write R R/W R/W R/W R R R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 54
be set to one. Then, to set the BODS bit, BODS must be set to one and BODSE must be set to
zero within four clock cycles.
The BODS bit is active three clock cycles after it is set. A sleep instruction must be executed
while BODS is active in order to turn off the BOD for the actual sleep mode. The BODS bit is
automatically cleared after three clock cycles.
• Bit 5 – BODSE: BOD Sleep Enable
BODSE enables setting of BODS control bit, as explained in BODS bit description. BOD disable
is controlled by a timed sequence.
10.11.3 PRR – Power Reduction Register
• Bit 7 – PRTWI: Power Reduction TWI
Writing a logic one to this bit shuts down the TWI by stopping the clock to the module. When
waking up the TWI again, the TWI should be re initialized to ensure proper operation.
• Bit 6 – PRTIM2: Power Reduction Timer/Counter2
Writing a logic one to this bit shuts down the Timer/Counter2 module in synchronous mode (AS2
is 0). When the Timer/Counter2 is enabled, operation will continue like before the shutdown.
• Bit 5 – PRTIM0: Power Reduction Timer/Counter0
Writing a logic one to this bit shuts down the Timer/Counter0 module. When the Timer/Counter0
is enabled, operation will continue like before the shutdown.
• Bit 4 – Res: Reserved bit
This bit is reserved in ATmega48P/88P/168P and will always read as zero.
• Bit 3 – PRTIM1: Power Reduction Timer/Counter1
Writing a logic one to this bit shuts down the Timer/Counter1 module. When the Timer/Counter1
is enabled, operation will continue like before the shutdown.
• Bit 2 – PRSPI: Power Reduction Serial Peripheral Interface
If using debugWIRE On-chip Debug System, this bit should not be written to one.
Writing a logic one to this bit shuts down the Serial Peripheral Interface by stopping the clock to
the module. When waking up the SPI again, the SPI should be re initialized to ensure proper
operation.
• Bit 1 – PRUSART0: Power Reduction USART0
Writing a logic one to this bit shuts down the USART by stopping the clock to the module. When
waking up the USART again, the USART should be re initialized to ensure proper operation.
• Bit 0 – PRADC: Power Reduction ADC
Writing a logic one to this bit shuts down the ADC. The ADC must be disabled before shut down.
The analog comparator cannot use the ADC input MUX when the ADC is shut down.
Bit 765432 1 0
(0x64) PRTWI PRTIM2 PRTIM0 – PRTIM1 PRSPI PRUSART0 PRADC PRR
Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
RESET
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 55
11. System Control and Reset
11.1 Resetting the AVR
During reset, all I/O Registers are set to their initial values, and the program starts execution
from the Reset Vector. For the ATmega168P, the instruction placed at the Reset Vector must be
a JMP – Absolute Jump – instruction to the reset handling routine. For the ATmega48P and
ATmega88P, the instruction placed at the Reset Vector must be an RJMP – Relative Jump –
instruction to the reset handling routine. If the program never enables an interrupt source, the
Interrupt Vectors are not used, and regular program code can be placed at these locations. This
is also the case if the Reset Vector is in the Application section while the Interrupt Vectors are in
the Boot section or vice versa (ATmega88P/168P only). The circuit diagram in Figure 11-1 on
page 56 shows the reset logic. Table 29-3 on page 330 defines the electrical parameters of the
reset circuitry.
The I/O ports of the AVR are immediately reset to their initial state when a reset source goes
active. This does not require any clock source to be running.
After all reset sources have gone inactive, a delay counter is invoked, stretching the internal
reset. This allows the power to reach a stable level before normal operation starts. The time-out
period of the delay counter is defined by the user through the SUT and CKSEL Fuses. The
different selections for the delay period are presented in “Clock Sources” on page 36.
11.2 Reset Sources
The ATmega48P/88P/168P has four sources of reset:
• Power-on Reset. The MCU is reset when the supply voltage is below the Power-on Reset
threshold (VPOT).
• External Reset. The MCU is reset when a low level is present on the RESET pin for longer
than the minimum pulse length.
• Watchdog System Reset. The MCU is reset when the Watchdog Timer period expires and
the Watchdog System Reset mode is enabled.
• Brown-out Reset. The MCU is reset when the supply voltage VCC is below the Brown-out
Reset threshold (VBOT) and the Brown-out Detector is enabled.
mm”. 2263. Emma E538 Reset smut Watchdag hmev vcc
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 56
Figure 11-1. Reset Logic
11.3 Power-on Reset
A Power-on Reset (POR) pulse is generated by an On-chip detection circuit. The detection level
is defined in “System and Reset Characteristics” on page 330. The POR is activated whenever
VCC is below the detection level. The POR circuit can be used to trigger the start-up Reset, as
well as to detect a failure in supply voltage.
A Power-on Reset (POR) circuit ensures that the device is reset from Power-on. Reaching the
Power-on Reset threshold voltage invokes the delay counter, which determines how long the
device is kept in RESET after VCC rise. The RESET signal is activated again, without any delay,
when VCC decreases below the detection level.
Figure 11-2. MCU Start-up, RESET Tied to VCC
MCU Status
Register (MCUSR)
Brown-out
Reset Circuit
BODLEVEL [2..0]
Delay Counters
CKSEL[3:0]
CK
TIMEOUT
WDRF
BORF
EXTRF
PORF
DATA BUS
Clock
Generator
SPIKE
FILTER
Pull-up Resistor
Watchdog
Oscillator
SUT[1:0]
Power-on Reset
Circuit
RSTDISBL
V
RESET
TIME-OUT
INTERNAL
RESET
t
TOUT
V
POT
V
RST
CC
RESET ‘ TW‘EVOUT \NTERNAL RESET
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 57
Figure 11-3. MCU Start-up, RESET Extended Externally
11.4 External Reset
An External Reset is generated by a low level on the RESET pin. Reset pulses longer than the
minimum pulse width (see “System and Reset Characteristics” on page 330) will generate a
reset, even if the clock is not running. Shorter pulses are not ensured to generate a reset. When
the applied signal reaches the Reset Threshold Voltage – VRST – on its positive edge, the delay
counter starts the MCU after the Time-out period – tTOUT – has expired. The External Reset can
be disabled by the RSTDISBL fuse, see Table 28-6 on page 308.
Figure 11-4. External Reset During Operation
11.5 Brown-out Detection
ATmega48P/88P/168P has an On-chip Brown-out Detection (BOD) circuit for monitoring the
VCC level during operation by comparing it to a fixed trigger level. The trigger level for the BOD
can be selected by the BODLEVEL Fuses. The trigger level has a hysteresis to ensure spike
free Brown-out Detection. The hysteresis on the detection level should be interpreted as VBOT+ =
VBOT + VHYST/2 and VBOT- = VBOT - VHYST/2.When the BOD is enabled, and VCC decreases to a
value below the trigger level (VBOT- in Figure 11-5 on page 58), the Brown-out Reset is
immediately activated. When VCC increases above the trigger level (VBOT+ in Figure 11-5 on
page 58), the delay counter starts the MCU after the Time-out period tTOUT has expired.
The BOD circuit will only detect a drop in VCC if the voltage stays below the trigger level for
longer than tBOD given in “System and Reset Characteristics” on page 330.
RESET
TIME-OUT
INTERNAL
RESET
t
TOUT
V
POT
V
RST
VCC
CC
T RESET WDT TTME-OUT RESET T‘MEVOUT TNTERNAL RESET
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 58
Figure 11-5. Brown-out Reset During Operation
11.6 Watchdog System Reset
When the Watchdog times out, it will generate a short reset pulse of one CK cycle duration. On
the falling edge of this pulse, the delay timer starts counting the Time-out period tTOUT. Refer to
page 59 for details on operation of the Watchdog Timer.
Figure 11-6. Watchdog System Reset During Operation
11.7 Internal Voltage Reference
ATmega48P/88P/168P features an internal bandgap reference. This reference is used for
Brown-out Detection, and it can be used as an input to the Analog Comparator or the ADC.
11.7.1 Voltage Reference Enable Signals and Start-up Time
The voltage reference has a start-up time that may influence the way it should be used. The
start-up time is given in “System and Reset Characteristics” on page 330. To save power, the
reference is not always turned on. The reference is on during the following situations:
1. When the BOD is enabled (by programming the BODLEVEL [2:0] Fuses).
2. When the bandgap reference is connected to the Analog Comparator (by setting the
ACBG bit in ACSR).
3. When the ADC is enabled.
Thus, when the BOD is not enabled, after setting the ACBG bit or enabling the ADC, the user
must always allow the reference to start up before the output from the Analog Comparator or
V
CC
RESET
TIME-OUT
INTERNAL
RESET
V
BOT-
V
BOT+
tTOUT
CK
CC
WATCH DOG PRESCALER ET
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 59
ADC is used. To reduce power consumption in Power-down mode, the user can avoid the three
conditions above to ensure that the reference is turned off before entering Power-down mode.
11.8 Watchdog Timer
11.8.1 Features
•Clocked from separate On-chip Oscillator
•3 Operating modes
–Interrupt
– System Reset
– Interrupt and System Reset
•Selectable Time-out period from 16ms to 8s
•Possible Hardware fuse Watchdog always on (WDTON) for fail-safe mode
11.8.2 Overview
ATmega48P/88P/168P has an Enhanced Watchdog Timer (WDT). The WDT is a timer counting
cycles of a separate on-chip 128 kHz oscillator. The WDT gives an interrupt or a system reset
when the counter reaches a given time-out value. In normal operation mode, it is required that
the system uses the WDR - Watchdog Timer Reset - instruction to restart the counter before the
time-out value is reached. If the system doesn't restart the counter, an interrupt or system reset
will be issued.
Figure 11-7. Watchdog Timer
In Interrupt mode, the WDT gives an interrupt when the timer expires. This interrupt can be used
to wake the device from sleep-modes, and also as a general system timer. One example is to
limit the maximum time allowed for certain operations, giving an interrupt when the operation
has run longer than expected. In System Reset mode, the WDT gives a reset when the timer
expires. This is typically used to prevent system hang-up in case of runaway code. The third
mode, Interrupt and System Reset mode, combines the other two modes by first giving an
interrupt and then switch to System Reset mode. This mode will for instance allow a safe
shutdown by saving critical parameters before a system reset.
The Watchdog always on (WDTON) fuse, if programmed, will force the Watchdog Timer to
System Reset mode. With the fuse programmed the System Reset mode bit (WDE) and
128kHz
OSCILLATOR
OSC/2K
OSC/4K
OSC/8K
OSC/16K
OSC/32K
OSC/64K
OSC/128K
OSC/256K
OSC/512K
OSC/1024K
WDP0
WDP1
WDP2
WDP3
WATCHDOG
RESET
WDE
WDIF
WDIE
MCU RESET
INTERRUPT
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 60
Interrupt mode bit (WDIE) are locked to 1 and 0 respectively. To further ensure program
security, alterations to the Watchdog set-up must follow timed sequences. The sequence for
clearing WDE and changing time-out configuration is as follows:
1. In the same operation, write a logic one to the Watchdog change enable bit (WDCE) and
WDE. A logic one must be written to WDE regardless of the previous value of the WDE bit.
2. Within the next four clock cycles, write the WDE and Watchdog prescaler bits (WDP) as
desired, but with the WDCE bit cleared. This must be done in one operation.
The following code example shows one assembly and one C function for turning off the
Watchdog Timer. The example assumes that interrupts are controlled (e.g. by disabling
interrupts globally) so that no interrupts will occur during the execution of these functions.
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 61
Note: 1. See ”About Code Examples” on page 16.
Note: If the Watchdog is accidentally enabled, for example by a runaway pointer or brown-out
condition, the device will be reset and the Watchdog Timer will stay enabled. If the code is not
set up to handle the Watchdog, this might lead to an eternal loop of time-out resets. To avoid this
situation, the application software should always clear the Watchdog System Reset Flag
(WDRF) and the WDE control bit in the initialisation routine, even if the Watchdog is not in use.
Assembly Code Example(1)
WDT_off:
; Turn off global interrupt
cli
; Reset Watchdog Timer
wdr
; Clear WDRF in MCUSR
in r16, MCUSR
andi r16, (0xff & (0<<WDRF))
out MCUSR, r16
; Write logical one to WDCE and WDE
; Keep old prescaler setting to prevent unintentional
time-out
lds r16, WDTCSR
ori r16, (1<<WDCE) | (1<<WDE)
sts WDTCSR, r16
; Turn off WDT
ldi r16, (0<<WDE)
sts WDTCSR, r16
; Turn on global interrupt
sei
ret
C Code Example(1)
void WDT_off(void)
{
__disable_interrupt();
__watchdog_reset();
/* Clear WDRF in MCUSR */
MCUSR &= ~(1<<WDRF);
/* Write logical one to WDCE and WDE */
/* Keep old prescaler setting to prevent unintentional
time-out */
WDTCSR |= (1<<WDCE) | (1<<WDE);
/* Turn off WDT */
WDTCSR = 0x00;
__enable_interrupt();
}
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 62
The following code example shows one assembly and one C function for changing the time-out
value of the Watchdog Timer.
Note: 1. See ”About Code Examples” on page 16.
Note: The Watchdog Timer should be reset before any change of the WDP bits, since a change
in the WDP bits can result in a time-out when switching to a shorter time-out period.
Assembly Code Example(1)
WDT_Prescaler_Change:
; Turn off global interrupt
cli
; Reset Watchdog Timer
wdr
; Start timed sequence
lds r16, WDTCSR
ori r16, (1<<WDCE) | (1<<WDE)
sts WDTCSR, r16
; -- Got four cycles to set the new values from here -
; Set new prescaler(time-out) value = 64K cycles (~0.5 s)
ldi r16, (1<<WDE) | (1<<WDP2) | (1<<WDP0)
sts WDTCSR, r16
; -- Finished setting new values, used 2 cycles -
; Turn on global interrupt
sei
ret
C Code Example(1)
void WDT_Prescaler_Change(void)
{
__disable_interrupt();
__watchdog_reset();
/* Start timed equence */
WDTCSR |= (1<<WDCE) | (1<<WDE);
/* Set new prescaler(time-out) value = 64K cycles (~0.5
s) */
WDTCSR = (1<<WDE) | (1<<WDP2) | (1<<WDP0);
__enable_interrupt();
}
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 63
11.9 Register Description
11.9.1 MCUSR – MCU Status Register
The MCU Status Register provides information on which reset source caused an MCU reset.
• Bit 7:4 – Reserved
These bits are unused bits in the ATmega48P/88P/168P, and will always read as zero.
• Bit 3 – WDRF: Watchdog System Reset Flag
This bit is set if a Watchdog System Reset occurs. The bit is reset by a Power-on Reset, or by
writing a logic zero to the flag.
• Bit 2 – BORF: Brown-out Reset Flag
This bit is set if a Brown-out Reset occurs. The bit is reset by a Power-on Reset, or by writing a
logic zero to the flag.
• Bit 1 – EXTRF: External Reset Flag
This bit is set if an External Reset occurs. The bit is reset by a Power-on Reset, or by writing a
logic zero to the flag.
• Bit 0 – PORF: Power-on Reset Flag
This bit is set if a Power-on Reset occurs. The bit is reset only by writing a logic zero to the flag.
To make use of the Reset Flags to identify a reset condition, the user should read and then
Reset the MCUSR as early as possible in the program. If the register is cleared before another
reset occurs, the source of the reset can be found by examining the Reset Flags.
11.9.2 WDTCSR – Watchdog Timer Control Register
• Bit 7 – WDIF: Watchdog Interrupt Flag
This bit is set when a time-out occurs in the Watchdog Timer and the Watchdog Timer is
configured for interrupt. WDIF is cleared by hardware when executing the corresponding
interrupt handling vector. Alternatively, WDIF is cleared by writing a logic one to the flag. When
the I-bit in SREG and WDIE are set, the Watchdog Time-out Interrupt is executed.
• Bit 6 – WDIE: Watchdog Interrupt Enable
When this bit is written to one and the I-bit in the Status Register is set, the Watchdog Interrupt is
enabled. If WDE is cleared in combination with this setting, the Watchdog Timer is in Interrupt
Mode, and the corresponding interrupt is executed if time-out in the Watchdog Timer occurs. If
Bit 76543210
0x35 (0x55) ––––WDRFBORFEXTRFPORFMCUSR
Read/Write RRRRR/WR/WR/WR/W
Initial Value0000 See Bit Description
Bit 76543210
(0x60) WDIF WDIE WDP3 WDCE WDE WDP2 WDP1 WDP0 WDTCSR
Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 X 0 0 0
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 64
WDE is set, the Watchdog Timer is in Interrupt and System Reset Mode. The first time-out in the
Watchdog Timer will set WDIF. Executing the corresponding interrupt vector will clear WDIE and
WDIF automatically by hardware (the Watchdog goes to System Reset Mode). This is useful for
keeping the Watchdog Timer security while using the interrupt. To stay in Interrupt and System
Reset Mode, WDIE must be set after each interrupt. This should however not be done within the
interrupt service routine itself, as this might compromise the safety-function of the Watchdog
System Reset mode. If the interrupt is not executed before the next time-out, a System Reset
will be applied.
Note: 1. WDTON Fuse set to “0” means programmed and “1” means unprogrammed.
• Bit 4 – WDCE: Watchdog Change Enable
This bit is used in timed sequences for changing WDE and prescaler bits. To clear the WDE bit,
and/or change the prescaler bits, WDCE must be set.
Once written to one, hardware will clear WDCE after four clock cycles.
• Bit 3 – WDE: Watchdog System Reset Enable
WDE is overridden by WDRF in MCUSR. This means that WDE is always set when WDRF is
set. To clear WDE, WDRF must be cleared first. This feature ensures multiple resets during
conditions causing failure, and a safe start-up after the failure.
• Bit 5, 2:0 – WDP[3:0]: Watchdog Timer Prescaler 3, 2, 1 and 0
The WDP[3:0] bits determine the Watchdog Timer prescaling when the Watchdog Timer is
running. The different prescaling values and their corresponding time-out periods are shown in
Table 11-2 on page 64.
Table 11-1. Watchdog Timer Configuration
WDTON(1) WDE WDIE Mode Action on Time-out
1 0 0 Stopped None
1 0 1 Interrupt Mode Interrupt
1 1 0 System Reset Mode Reset
111
Interrupt and System Reset
Mode
Interrupt, then go to System
Reset Mode
0 x x System Reset Mode Reset
Table 11-2. Watchdog Timer Prescale Select
WDP3 WDP2 WDP1 WDP0
Number of WDT Oscillator
Cycles
Typical Time-out at
VCC = 5.0V
0 0 0 0 2K (2048) cycles 16 ms
0 0 0 1 4K (4096) cycles 32 ms
0 0 1 0 8K (8192) cycles 64 ms
0 0 1 1 16K (16384) cycles 0.125 s
0 1 0 0 32K (32768) cycles 0.25 s
0 1 0 1 64K (65536) cycles 0.5 s
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 65
0 1 1 0 128K (131072) cycles 1.0 s
0 1 1 1 256K (262144) cycles 2.0 s
1 0 0 0 512K (524288) cycles 4.0 s
1 0 0 1 1024K (1048576) cycles 8.0 s
1010
Reserved
1011
1100
1101
1110
1111
Table 11-2. Watchdog Timer Prescale Select (Continued)
WDP3 WDP2 WDP1 WDP0
Number of WDT Oscillator
Cycles
Typical Time-out at
VCC = 5.0V
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 66
12. Interrupts
This section describes the specifics of the interrupt handling as performed in
ATmega48P/88P/168P. For a general explanation of the AVR interrupt handling, refer to “Reset
and Interrupt Handling” on page 23.
The interrupt vectors in ATmega48P, ATmega88P and ATmega168P are generally the same,
with the following differences:
• Each Interrupt Vector occupies two instruction words in ATmega168P, and one instruction
word in ATmega48P and ATmega88P.
• ATmega48P does not have a separate Boot Loader Section. In ATmega88P and
ATmega168P, the Reset Vector is affected by the BOOTRST fuse, and the Interrupt
Vector start address is affected by the IVSEL bit in MCUCR.
12.1 Interrupt Vectors in ATmega48P
Table 12-1. Reset and Interrupt Vectors in ATmega48P
Vector No. Program Address Source Interrupt Definition
1 0x000 RESET External Pin, Power-on Reset, Brown-out Reset and Watchdog System Reset
2 0x001 INT0 External Interrupt Request 0
3 0x002 INT1 External Interrupt Request 1
4 0x003 PCINT0 Pin Change Interrupt Request 0
5 0x004 PCINT1 Pin Change Interrupt Request 1
6 0x005 PCINT2 Pin Change Interrupt Request 2
7 0x006 WDT Watchdog Time-out Interrupt
8 0x007 TIMER2 COMPA Timer/Counter2 Compare Match A
9 0x008 TIMER2 COMPB Timer/Counter2 Compare Match B
10 0x009 TIMER2 OVF Timer/Counter2 Overflow
11 0x00A TIMER1 CAPT Timer/Counter1 Capture Event
12 0x00B TIMER1 COMPA Timer/Counter1 Compare Match A
13 0x00C TIMER1 COMPB Timer/Coutner1 Compare Match B
14 0x00D TIMER1 OVF Timer/Counter1 Overflow
15 0x00E TIMER0 COMPA Timer/Counter0 Compare Match A
16 0x00F TIMER0 COMPB Timer/Counter0 Compare Match B
17 0x010 TIMER0 OVF Timer/Counter0 Overflow
18 0x011 SPI, STC SPI Serial Transfer Complete
19 0x012 USART, RX USART Rx Complete
20 0x013 USART, UDRE USART, Data Register Empty
21 0x014 USART, TX USART, Tx Complete
22 0x015 ADC ADC Conversion Complete
23 0x016 EE READY EEPROM Ready
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 67
The most typical and general program setup for the Reset and Interrupt Vector Addresses in
ATmega48P is:
Address Labels CodeComments
0x000 rjmpRESET;
Reset Handler
0x001 rjmpEXT_INT0;
IRQ0 Handler
0x002 rjmpEXT_INT1;
IRQ1 Handler
0x003 rjmpPCINT0;
PCINT0 Handler
0x004 rjmpPCINT1;
PCINT1 Handler
0x005 rjmpPCINT2;
PCINT2 Handler
0x006 rjmpWDT;
Watchdog Timer Handler
0x007 rjmpTIM2_COMPA
; Timer2 Compare A Handler
0x008 rjmpTIM2_COMPB
; Timer2 Compare B Handler
0x009 rjmpTIM2_OVF;
Timer2 Overflow Handler
0x00A rjmpTIM1_CAPT;
Timer1 Capture Handler
0x00B rjmpTIM1_COMPA
; Timer1 Compare A Handler
0x00C rjmpTIM1_COMPB
; Timer1 Compare B Handler
0x00D rjmpTIM1_OVF;
Timer1 Overflow Handler
0x00E rjmpTIM0_COMPA
; Timer0 Compare A Handler
0x00F rjmpTIM0_COMPB
; Timer0 Compare B Handler
0x010 rjmpTIM0_OVF;
Timer0 Overflow Handler
0x011 rjmpSPI_STC;
SPI Transfer Complete Handler
0x012 rjmpUSART_RXC;
USART, RX Complete Handler
0x013 rjmpUSART_UDRE
; USART, UDR Empty Handler
0x014 rjmpUSART_TXC;
USART, TX Complete Handler
24 0x017 ANALOG COMP Analog Comparator
25 0x018 TWI 2-wire Serial Interface
26 0x019 SPM READY Store Program Memory Ready
Table 12-1. Reset and Interrupt Vectors in ATmega48P (Continued)
Vector No. Program Address Source Interrupt Definition
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 68
0x015 rjmpADC; ADC
Conversion Complete Handler
0x016 rjmpEE_RDY;
EEPROM Ready Handler
0x017 rjmpANA_COMP;
Analog Comparator Handler
0x018 rjmpTWI; 2-
wire Serial Interface Handler
0x019 rjmpSPM_RDY;
Store Program Memory Ready Handler
;
0x01A RESET: ldir16,
high(RAMEND) ; Main program
start
0x01B out SPH,r16;
Set Stack Pointer to top of RAM
0x01C ldi r16,
low(RAMEND)
0x01D out SPL,r16
0x01E sei; Enable
interrupts
0x01F <instr> xxx
... ... ... ...
12.2 Interrupt Vectors in ATmega88P
Table 12-2. Reset and Interrupt Vectors in ATmega88P
Vector No.
Program
Address(2) Source Interrupt Definition
1 0x000(1) RESET External Pin, Power-on Reset, Brown-out Reset and Watchdog System Reset
2 0x001 INT0 External Interrupt Request 0
3 0x002 INT1 External Interrupt Request 1
4 0x003 PCINT0 Pin Change Interrupt Request 0
5 0x004 PCINT1 Pin Change Interrupt Request 1
6 0x005 PCINT2 Pin Change Interrupt Request 2
7 0x006 WDT Watchdog Time-out Interrupt
8 0x007 TIMER2 COMPA Timer/Counter2 Compare Match A
9 0x008 TIMER2 COMPB Timer/Counter2 Compare Match B
10 0x009 TIMER2 OVF Timer/Counter2 Overflow
11 0x00A TIMER1 CAPT Timer/Counter1 Capture Event
12 0x00B TIMER1 COMPA Timer/Counter1 Compare Match A
13 0x00C TIMER1 COMPB Timer/Coutner1 Compare Match B
14 0x00D TIMER1 OVF Timer/Counter1 Overflow
15 0x00E TIMER0 COMPA Timer/Counter0 Compare Match A
16 0x00F TIMER0 COMPB Timer/Counter0 Compare Match B
17 0x010 TIMER0 OVF Timer/Counter0 Overflow
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 69
Notes: 1. When the BOOTRST Fuse is programmed, the device will jump to the Boot Loader address at reset, see “Boot Loader
Support – Read-While-Write Self-Programming, ATmega88P and ATmega168P” on page 290.
2. When the IVSEL bit in MCUCR is set, Interrupt Vectors will be moved to the start of the Boot Flash Section. The address of
each Interrupt Vector will then be the address in this table added to the start address of the Boot Flash Section.
Table 12-3 on page 69 shows reset and Interrupt Vectors placement for the various
combinations of BOOTRST and IVSEL settings. If the program never enables an interrupt
source, the Interrupt Vectors are not used, and regular program code can be placed at these
locations. This is also the case if the Reset Vector is in the Application section while the Interrupt
Vectors are in the Boot section or vice versa.
Note: 1. The Boot Reset Address is shown in Table 27-7 on page 302. For the BOOTRST Fuse “1”
means unprogrammed while “0” means programmed.
The most typical and general program setup for the Reset and Interrupt Vector Addresses in
ATmega88P is:
Address Labels CodeComments
0x000 rjmpRESET;
Reset Handler
0x001 rjmpEXT_INT0;
IRQ0 Handler
0x002 rjmpEXT_INT1;
IRQ1 Handler
0x003 rjmpPCINT0;
PCINT0 Handler
0x004 rjmpPCINT1;
PCINT1 Handler
18 0x011 SPI, STC SPI Serial Transfer Complete
19 0x012 USART, RX USART Rx Complete
20 0x013 USART, UDRE USART, Data Register Empty
21 0x014 USART, TX USART, Tx Complete
22 0x015 ADC ADC Conversion Complete
23 0x016 EE READY EEPROM Ready
24 0x017 ANALOG COMP Analog Comparator
25 0x018 TWI 2-wire Serial Interface
26 0x019 SPM READY Store Program Memory Ready
Table 12-2. Reset and Interrupt Vectors in ATmega88P (Continued)
Vector No.
Program
Address(2) Source Interrupt Definition
Table 12-3. Reset and Interrupt Vectors Placement in ATmega88P(1)
BOOTRST IVSEL Reset Address Interrupt Vectors Start Address
1 0 0x000 0x001
1 1 0x000 Boot Reset Address + 0x001
0 0 Boot Reset Address 0x001
0 1 Boot Reset Address Boot Reset Address + 0x001
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 70
0x005 rjmpPCINT2;
PCINT2 Handler
0x006 rjmpWDT;
Watchdog Timer Handler
0x007 rjmpTIM2_COMPA
; Timer2 Compare A Handler
0X008 rjmpTIM2_COMPB
; Timer2 Compare B Handler
0x009 rjmpTIM2_OVF;
Timer2 Overflow Handler
0x00A rjmpTIM1_CAPT;
Timer1 Capture Handler
0x00B rjmpTIM1_COMPA
; Timer1 Compare A Handler
0x00C rjmpTIM1_COMPB
; Timer1 Compare B Handler
0x00D rjmpTIM1_OVF;
Timer1 Overflow Handler
0x00E rjmpTIM0_COMPA
; Timer0 Compare A Handler
0x00F rjmpTIM0_COMPB
; Timer0 Compare B Handler
0x010 rjmpTIM0_OVF;
Timer0 Overflow Handler
0x011 rjmpSPI_STC;
SPI Transfer Complete Handler
0x012 rjmpUSART_RXC;
USART, RX Complete Handler
0x013 rjmpUSART_UDRE
; USART, UDR Empty Handler
0x014 rjmpUSART_TXC;
USART, TX Complete Handler
0x015 rjmpADC; ADC
Conversion Complete Handler
0x016 rjmpEE_RDY;
EEPROM Ready Handler
0x017 rjmpANA_COMP;
Analog Comparator Handler
0x018 rjmpTWI; 2-
wire Serial Interface Handler
0x019 rjmpSPM_RDY;
Store Program Memory Ready Handler
;
0x01A RESET: ldir16,
high(RAMEND) ; Main program
start
0x01B out SPH,r16;
Set Stack Pointer to top of RAM
0x01C ldi r16,
low(RAMEND)
0x01D out SPL,r16
0x01E sei; Enable
interrupts
0x01F <instr> xxx
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 71
When the BOOTRST Fuse is unprogrammed, the Boot section size set to 2K bytes and the
IVSEL bit in the MCUCR Register is set before any interrupts are enabled, the most typical and
general program setup for the Reset and Interrupt Vector Addresses in ATmega88P is:
Address Labels CodeComments
0x000 RESET: ldi
r16,high(RAMEND) ; Main program
start
0x001 outSPH,r16;
Set Stack Pointer to top of RAM
0x002 ldi
r16,low(RAMEND)
0x003 outSPL,r16
0x004 sei; Enable
interrupts
0x005 <instr> xxx
;
.org 0xC01
0xC01 rjmpEXT_INT0;
IRQ0 Handler
0xC02 rjmpEXT_INT1;
IRQ1 Handler
... ......;
0xC19 rjmpSPM_RDY;
Store Program Memory Ready Handler
When the BOOTRST Fuse is programmed and the Boot section size set to 2K bytes, the most
typical and general program setup for the Reset and Interrupt Vector Addresses in ATmega88P
is:
Address Labels CodeComments
.org 0x001
0x001 rjmpEXT_INT0;
IRQ0 Handler
0x002 rjmpEXT_INT1;
IRQ1 Handler
... ......;
0x019 rjmpSPM_RDY;
Store Program Memory Ready Handler
;
.org 0xC00
0xC00 RESET: ldi
r16,high(RAMEND) ; Main program
start
0xC01 outSPH,r16;
Set Stack Pointer to top of RAM
0xC02 ldi
r16,low(RAMEND)
0xC03 outSPL,r16
0xC04 sei; Enable
interrupts
0xC05 <instr> xxx
When the BOOTRST Fuse is programmed, the Boot section size set to 2K bytes and the IVSEL
bit in the MCUCR Register is set before any interrupts are enabled, the most typical and general
program setup for the Reset and Interrupt Vector Addresses in ATmega88P is:
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 72
Address Labels CodeComments
;
.org 0xC00
0xC00 rjmpRESET;
Reset handler
0xC01 rjmpEXT_INT0;
IRQ0 Handler
0xC02 rjmpEXT_INT1;
IRQ1 Handler
... ......;
0xC19 rjmpSPM_RDY;
Store Program Memory Ready Handler
;
0xC1A RESET: ldi
r16,high(RAMEND) ; Main program
start
0xC1B outSPH,r16;
Set Stack Pointer to top of RAM
0xC1C ldi
r16,low(RAMEND)
0xC1D outSPL,r16
0xC1E sei; Enable
interrupts
0xC1F <instr> xxx
12.3 Interrupt Vectors in ATmega168P
Table 12-4. Reset and Interrupt Vectors in ATmega168P
VectorNo.
Program
Address(2) Source Interrupt Definition
1 0x0000(1) RESET External Pin, Power-on Reset, Brown-out Reset and Watchdog System Reset
2 0x0002 INT0 External Interrupt Request 0
3 0x0004 INT1 External Interrupt Request 1
4 0x0006 PCINT0 Pin Change Interrupt Request 0
5 0x0008 PCINT1 Pin Change Interrupt Request 1
6 0x000A PCINT2 Pin Change Interrupt Request 2
7 0x000C WDT Watchdog Time-out Interrupt
8 0x000E TIMER2 COMPA Timer/Counter2 Compare Match A
9 0x0010 TIMER2 COMPB Timer/Counter2 Compare Match B
10 0x0012 TIMER2 OVF Timer/Counter2 Overflow
11 0x0014 TIMER1 CAPT Timer/Counter1 Capture Event
12 0x0016 TIMER1 COMPA Timer/Counter1 Compare Match A
13 0x0018 TIMER1 COMPB Timer/Coutner1 Compare Match B
14 0x001A TIMER1 OVF Timer/Counter1 Overflow
15 0x001C TIMER0 COMPA Timer/Counter0 Compare Match A
16 0x001E TIMER0 COMPB Timer/Counter0 Compare Match B
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 73
Notes: 1. When the BOOTRST Fuse is programmed, the device will jump to the Boot Loader address at reset, see “Boot Loader
Support – Read-While-Write Self-Programming, ATmega88P and ATmega168P” on page 290.
2. When the IVSEL bit in MCUCR is set, Interrupt Vectors will be moved to the start of the Boot Flash Section. The address of
each Interrupt Vector will then be the address in this table added to the start address of the Boot Flash Section.
Table 12-5 on page 73 shows reset and Interrupt Vectors placement for the various
combinations of BOOTRST and IVSEL settings. If the program never enables an interrupt
source, the Interrupt Vectors are not used, and regular program code can be placed at these
locations. This is also the case if the Reset Vector is in the Application section while the Interrupt
Vectors are in the Boot section or vice versa.
Note: 1. The Boot Reset Address is shown in Table 27-7 on page 302. For the BOOTRST Fuse “1”
means unprogrammed while “0” means programmed.
The most typical and general program setup for the Reset and Interrupt Vector Addresses in
ATmega168P is:
Address Labels CodeComments
0x0000 jmpRESET;
Reset Handler
0x0002 jmpEXT_INT0;
IRQ0 Handler
0x0004 jmpEXT_INT1;
IRQ1 Handler
0x0006 jmpPCINT0;
PCINT0 Handler
0x0008 jmpPCINT1;
PCINT1 Handler
17 0x0020 TIMER0 OVF Timer/Counter0 Overflow
18 0x0022 SPI, STC SPI Serial Transfer Complete
19 0x0024 USART, RX USART Rx Complete
20 0x0026 USART, UDRE USART, Data Register Empty
21 0x0028 USART, TX USART, Tx Complete
22 0x002A ADC ADC Conversion Complete
23 0x002C EE READY EEPROM Ready
24 0x002E ANALOG COMP Analog Comparator
25 0x0030 TWI 2-wire Serial Interface
26 0x0032 SPM READY Store Program Memory Ready
Table 12-4. Reset and Interrupt Vectors in ATmega168P (Continued)
VectorNo.
Program
Address(2) Source Interrupt Definition
Table 12-5. Reset and Interrupt Vectors Placement in ATmega168P(1)
BOOTRST IVSEL Reset Address Interrupt Vectors Start Address
1 0 0x000 0x002
1 1 0x000 Boot Reset Address + 0x0002
0 0 Boot Reset Address 0x002
0 1 Boot Reset Address Boot Reset Address + 0x0002
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 74
0x000A jmpPCINT2;
PCINT2 Handler
0x000C jmpWDT;
Watchdog Timer Handler
0x000E jmpTIM2_COMPA;
Timer2 Compare A Handler
0x0010 jmpTIM2_COMPB;
Timer2 Compare B Handler
0x0012 jmpTIM2_OVF;
Timer2 Overflow Handler
0x0014 jmpTIM1_CAPT;
Timer1 Capture Handler
0x0016 jmpTIM1_COMPA;
Timer1 Compare A Handler
0x0018 jmpTIM1_COMPB;
Timer1 Compare B Handler
0x001A jmpTIM1_OVF;
Timer1 Overflow Handler
0x001C jmpTIM0_COMPA;
Timer0 Compare A Handler
0x001E jmpTIM0_COMPB;
Timer0 Compare B Handler
0x0020 jmpTIM0_OVF;
Timer0 Overflow Handler
0x0022 jmpSPI_STC;
SPI Transfer Complete Handler
0x0024 jmpUSART_RXC;
USART, RX Complete Handler
0x0026 jmpUSART_UDRE;
USART, UDR Empty Handler
0x0028 jmpUSART_TXC;
USART, TX Complete Handler
0x002A jmpADC; ADC
Conversion Complete Handler
0x002C jmpEE_RDY;
EEPROM Ready Handler
0x002E jmpANA_COMP;
Analog Comparator Handler
0x0030 jmpTWI; 2-wire
Serial Interface Handler
0x0032 jmpSPM_RDY;
Store Program Memory Ready Handler
;
0x0033 RESET: ldir16,
high(RAMEND) ; Main program
start
0x0034 out SPH,r16;
Set Stack Pointer to top of RAM
0x0035 ldi r16,
low(RAMEND)
0x0036 out SPL,r16
0x0037 sei; Enable
interrupts
0x0038 <instr> xxx
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 75
... ... ... ...
When the BOOTRST Fuse is unprogrammed, the Boot section size set to 2K bytes and the
IVSEL bit in the MCUCR Register is set before any interrupts are enabled, the most typical and
general program setup for the Reset and Interrupt Vector Addresses in ATmega168P is:
Address Labels CodeComments
0x0000 RESET: ldi
r16,high(RAMEND) ; Main program
start
0x0001 outSPH,r16;
Set Stack Pointer to top of RAM
0x0002 ldi
r16,low(RAMEND)
0x0003 outSPL,r16
0x0004 sei; Enable
interrupts
0x0005 <instr> xxx
;
.org 0x1C02
0x1C02 jmpEXT_INT0;
IRQ0 Handler
0x1C04 jmpEXT_INT1;
IRQ1 Handler
... ......;
0x1C32 jmpSPM_RDY;
Store Program Memory Ready Handler
When the BOOTRST Fuse is programmed and the Boot section size set to 2K bytes, the most
typical and general program setup for the Reset and Interrupt Vector Addresses in
ATmega168P is:
Address Labels CodeComments
.org 0x0002
0x0002 jmpEXT_INT0;
IRQ0 Handler
0x0004 jmpEXT_INT1;
IRQ1 Handler
... ......;
0x0032 jmpSPM_RDY;
Store Program Memory Ready Handler
;
.org 0x1C00
0x1C00 RESET: ldi
r16,high(RAMEND) ; Main program
start
0x1C01 outSPH,r16;
Set Stack Pointer to top of RAM
0x1C02 ldi
r16,low(RAMEND)
0x1C03 outSPL,r16
0x1C04 sei; Enable
interrupts
0x1C05 <instr> xxx
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 76
When the BOOTRST Fuse is programmed, the Boot section size set to 2K bytes and the IVSEL
bit in the MCUCR Register is set before any interrupts are enabled, the most typical and general
program setup for the Reset and Interrupt Vector Addresses in ATmega168P is:
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 77
Address Labels CodeComments
;
.org 0x1C00
0x1C00 jmpRESET;
Reset handler
0x1C02 jmpEXT_INT0;
IRQ0 Handler
0x1C04 jmpEXT_INT1;
IRQ1 Handler
... ......;
0x1C32 jmpSPM_RDY;
Store Program Memory Ready Handler
;
0x1C33 RESET: ldi
r16,high(RAMEND) ; Main program
start
0x1C34 outSPH,r16;
Set Stack Pointer to top of RAM
0x1C35 ldi
r16,low(RAMEND)
0x1C36 outSPL,r16
0x1C37 sei; Enable
interrupts
0x1C38 <instr> xxx
12.4 Register Description
12.4.1 Moving Interrupts Between Application and Boot Space, ATmega88P and ATmega168P
The MCU Control Register controls the placement of the Interrupt Vector table.
12.4.2 MCUCR – MCU Control Register
• Bit 1 – IVSEL: Interrupt Vector Select
When the IVSEL bit is cleared (zero), the Interrupt Vectors are placed at the start of the Flash
memory. When this bit is set (one), the Interrupt Vectors are moved to the beginning of the Boot
Loader section of the Flash. The actual address of the start of the Boot Flash Section is
determined by the BOOTSZ Fuses. Refer to the section “Boot Loader Support – Read-While-
Write Self-Programming, ATmega88P and ATmega168P” on page 290 for details. To avoid
unintentional changes of Interrupt Vector tables, a special write procedure must be followed to
change the IVSEL bit:
a. Write the Interrupt Vector Change Enable (IVCE) bit to one.
1. Within four cycles, write the desired value to IVSEL while writing a zero to IVCE.
Interrupts will automatically be disabled while this sequence is executed. Interrupts are disabled
in the cycle IVCE is set, and they remain disabled until after the instruction following the write to
Bit 76543210
0x35 (0x55) –BODS BODSE PUD –– IVSEL IVCE MCUCR
Read/Write R R R R/W R R R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 78
IVSEL. If IVSEL is not written, interrupts remain disabled for four cycles. The I-bit in the Status
Register is unaffected by the automatic disabling.
Note: If Interrupt Vectors are placed in the Boot Loader section and Boot Lock bit BLB02 is pro-
grammed, interrupts are disabled while executing from the Application section. If Interrupt Vectors
are placed in the Application section and Boot Lock bit BLB12 is programed, interrupts are dis-
abled while executing from the Boot Loader section. Refer to the section “Boot Loader Support –
Read-While-Write Self-Programming, ATmega88P and ATmega168P” on page 290 for details on
Boot Lock bits.
This bit is not available in ATmega48P.
• Bit 0 – IVCE: Interrupt Vector Change Enable
The IVCE bit must be written to logic one to enable change of the IVSEL bit. IVCE is cleared by
hardware four cycles after it is written or when IVSEL is written. Setting the IVCE bit will disable
interrupts, as explained in the IVSEL description above. See Code Example below.
This bit is not available in ATmega48P.
Assembly Code Example
Move_interrupts:
; Enable change of Interrupt Vectors
ldi r16, (1<<IVCE)
out MCUCR, r16
; Move interrupts to Boot Flash section
ldi r16, (1<<IVSEL)
out MCUCR, r16
ret
C Code Example
void Move_interrupts(void)
{
/* Enable change of Interrupt Vectors */
MCUCR = (1<<IVCE);
/* Move interrupts to Boot Flash section */
MCUCR = (1<<IVSEL);
}
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 79
13. External Interrupts
The External Interrupts are triggered by the INT0 and INT1 pins or any of the PCINT[23:0] pins.
Observe that, if enabled, the interrupts will trigger even if the INT0 and INT1 or PCINT[23:0] pins
are configured as outputs. This feature provides a way of generating a software interrupt. The
pin change interrupt PCI2 will trigger if any enabled PCINT[23:16] pin toggles. The pin change
interrupt PCI1 will trigger if any enabled PCINT[14:8] pin toggles. The pin change interrupt PCI0
will trigger if any enabled PCINT[7:0] pin toggles. The PCMSK2, PCMSK1 and PCMSK0
Registers control which pins contribute to the pin change interrupts. Pin change interrupts on
PCINT[23:0] are detected asynchronously. This implies that these interrupts can be used for
waking the part also from sleep modes other than Idle mode.
The INT0 and INT1 interrupts can be triggered by a falling or rising edge or a low level. This is
set up as indicated in the specification for the External Interrupt Control Register A – EICRA.
When the INT0 or INT1 interrupts are enabled and are configured as level triggered, the
interrupts will trigger as long as the pin is held low. Note that recognition of falling or rising edge
interrupts on INT0 or INT1 requires the presence of an I/O clock, described in “Clock Systems
and their Distribution” on page 35. Low level interrupt on INT0 and INT1 is detected
asynchronously. This implies that this interrupt can be used for waking the part also from sleep
modes other than Idle mode. The I/O clock is halted in all sleep modes except Idle mode.
Note that if a level triggered interrupt is used for wake-up from Power-down, the required level
must be held long enough for the MCU to complete the wake-up to trigger the level interrupt. If
the level disappears before the end of the Start-up Time, the MCU will still wake up, but no
interrupt will be generated. The start-up time is defined by the SUT and CKSEL Fuses as
described in “System Clock and Clock Options” on page 35.
13.1 Pin Change Interrupt Timing
An example of timing of a pin change interrupt is shown in Figure 13-1.
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 80
Figure 13-1. Timing of pin change interrupts
13.2 Register Description
13.2.1 EICRA – External Interrupt Control Register A
The External Interrupt Control Register A contains control bits for interrupt sense control.
• Bit 7:4 – Reserved
These bits are unused bits in the ATmega48P/88P/168P, and will always read as zero.
• Bit 3, 2 – ISC11, ISC10: Interrupt Sense Control 1 Bit 1 and Bit 0
The External Interrupt 1 is activated by the external pin INT1 if the SREG I-flag and the
corresponding interrupt mask are set. The level and edges on the external INT1 pin that activate
the interrupt are defined in Table 13-1. The value on the INT1 pin is sampled before detecting
edges. If edge or toggle interrupt is selected, pulses that last longer than one clock period will
generate an interrupt. Shorter pulses are not ensured to generate an interrupt. If low level
interrupt is selected, the low level must be held until the completion of the currently executing
instruction to generate an interrupt.
clk
PCINT(0)
pin_lat
pin_sync
pcint_in_(0)
pcint_syn
p
cint_setflag
PCIF
PCINT(0)
pin_sync pcint_syn
pin_lat
D Q
LE
pcint_setflag PC
IF
clk
clk
PCINT(0) in PCMSK(x)
pcint_in_(0) 0
x
Bit 76543210
(0x69) – – – – ISC11 ISC10 ISC01 ISC00 EICRA
Read/Write R R R R R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Table 13-1. Interrupt 1 Sense Control
ISC11 ISC10 Description
0 0 The low level of INT1 generates an interrupt request.
0 1 Any logical change on INT1 generates an interrupt request.
1 0 The falling edge of INT1 generates an interrupt request.
1 1 The rising edge of INT1 generates an interrupt request.
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 81
• Bit 1, 0 – ISC01, ISC00: Interrupt Sense Control 0 Bit 1 and Bit 0
The External Interrupt 0 is activated by the external pin INT0 if the SREG I-flag and the
corresponding interrupt mask are set. The level and edges on the external INT0 pin that activate
the interrupt are defined in Table 13-2. The value on the INT0 pin is sampled before detecting
edges. If edge or toggle interrupt is selected, pulses that last longer than one clock period will
generate an interrupt. Shorter pulses are not ensured to generate an interrupt. If low level
interrupt is selected, the low level must be held until the completion of the currently executing
instruction to generate an interrupt.
Table 13-2. Interrupt 0 Sense Control
ISC01 ISC00 Description
0 0 The low level of INT0 generates an interrupt request.
0 1 Any logical change on INT0 generates an interrupt request.
1 0 The falling edge of INT0 generates an interrupt request.
1 1 The rising edge of INT0 generates an interrupt request.
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 82
13.2.2 EIMSK – External Interrupt Mask Register
• Bit 7:2 – Reserved
These bits are unused bits in the ATmega48P/88P/168P, and will always read as zero.
• Bit 1 – INT1: External Interrupt Request 1 Enable
When the INT1 bit is set (one) and the I-bit in the Status Register (SREG) is set (one), the
external pin interrupt is enabled. The Interrupt Sense Control1 bits 1/0 (ISC11 and ISC10) in the
External Interrupt Control Register A (EICRA) define whether the external interrupt is activated
on rising and/or falling edge of the INT1 pin or level sensed. Activity on the pin will cause an
interrupt request even if INT1 is configured as an output. The corresponding interrupt of External
Interrupt Request 1 is executed from the INT1 Interrupt Vector.
• Bit 0 – INT0: External Interrupt Request 0 Enable
When the INT0 bit is set (one) and the I-bit in the Status Register (SREG) is set (one), the
external pin interrupt is enabled. The Interrupt Sense Control0 bits 1/0 (ISC01 and ISC00) in the
External Interrupt Control Register A (EICRA) define whether the external interrupt is activated
on rising and/or falling edge of the INT0 pin or level sensed. Activity on the pin will cause an
interrupt request even if INT0 is configured as an output. The corresponding interrupt of External
Interrupt Request 0 is executed from the INT0 Interrupt Vector.
13.2.3 EIFR – External Interrupt Flag Register
• Bit 7:2 – Reserved
These bits are unused bits in the ATmega48P/88P/168P, and will always read as zero.
• Bit 1 – INTF1: External Interrupt Flag 1
When an edge or logic change on the INT1 pin triggers an interrupt request, INTF1 becomes set
(one). If the I-bit in SREG and the INT1 bit in EIMSK are set (one), the MCU will jump to the
corresponding Interrupt Vector. The flag is cleared when the interrupt routine is executed.
Alternatively, the flag can be cleared by writing a logical one to it. This flag is always cleared
when INT1 is configured as a level interrupt.
• Bit 0 – INTF0: External Interrupt Flag 0
When an edge or logic change on the INT0 pin triggers an interrupt request, INTF0 becomes set
(one). If the I-bit in SREG and the INT0 bit in EIMSK are set (one), the MCU will jump to the
corresponding Interrupt Vector. The flag is cleared when the interrupt routine is executed.
Alternatively, the flag can be cleared by writing a logical one to it. This flag is always cleared
when INT0 is configured as a level interrupt.
Bit 76543210
0x1D (0x3D) ––––––INT1INT0EIMSK
Read/Write RRRRRRR/WR/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 76543210
0x1C (0x3C) – – – – – – INTF1 INTF0 EIFR
Read/Write RRRRRRR/WR/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 83
13.2.4 PCICR – Pin Change Interrupt Control Register
• Bit 7:3 – Reserved
These bits are unused bits in the ATmega48P/88P/168P, and will always read as zero.
• Bit 2 – PCIE2: Pin Change Interrupt Enable 2
When the PCIE2 bit is set (one) and the I-bit in the Status Register (SREG) is set (one), pin
change interrupt 2 is enabled. Any change on any enabled PCINT[23:16] pin will cause an
interrupt. The corresponding interrupt of Pin Change Interrupt Request is executed from the
PCI2 Interrupt Vector. PCINT[23:16] pins are enabled individually by the PCMSK2 Register.
• Bit 1 – PCIE1: Pin Change Interrupt Enable 1
When the PCIE1 bit is set (one) and the I-bit in the Status Register (SREG) is set (one), pin
change interrupt 1 is enabled. Any change on any enabled PCINT[14:8] pin will cause an
interrupt. The corresponding interrupt of Pin Change Interrupt Request is executed from the
PCI1 Interrupt Vector. PCINT[14:8] pins are enabled individually by the PCMSK1 Register.
• Bit 0 – PCIE0: Pin Change Interrupt Enable 0
When the PCIE0 bit is set (one) and the I-bit in the Status Register (SREG) is set (one), pin
change interrupt 0 is enabled. Any change on any enabled PCINT[7:0] pin will cause an
interrupt. The corresponding interrupt of Pin Change Interrupt Request is executed from the
PCI0 Interrupt Vector. PCINT[7:0] pins are enabled individually by the PCMSK0 Register.
13.2.5 PCIFR – Pin Change Interrupt Flag Register
• Bit 7:3 – Reserved
These bits are unused bits in the ATmega48P/88P/168P, and will always read as zero.
• Bit 2 – PCIF2: Pin Change Interrupt Flag 2
When a logic change on any PCINT[23:16] pin triggers an interrupt request, PCIF2 becomes set
(one). If the I-bit in SREG and the PCIE2 bit in PCICR are set (one), the MCU will jump to the
corresponding Interrupt Vector. The flag is cleared when the interrupt routine is executed.
Alternatively, the flag can be cleared by writing a logical one to it.
• Bit 1 – PCIF1: Pin Change Interrupt Flag 1
When a logic change on any PCINT[14:8] pin triggers an interrupt request, PCIF1 becomes set
(one). If the I-bit in SREG and the PCIE1 bit in PCICR are set (one), the MCU will jump to the
corresponding Interrupt Vector. The flag is cleared when the interrupt routine is executed.
Alternatively, the flag can be cleared by writing a logical one to it.
Bit 76543210
(0x68) – – – – – PCIE2 PCIE1 PCIE0 PCICR
Read/Write RRRRRR/WR/WR/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 76543210
0x1B (0x3B) –––––PCIF2PCIF1PCIF0PCIFR
Read/Write RRRRRR/WR/WR/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 84
• Bit 0 – PCIF0: Pin Change Interrupt Flag 0
When a logic change on any PCINT[7:0] pin triggers an interrupt request, PCIF0 becomes set
(one). If the I-bit in SREG and the PCIE0 bit in PCICR are set (one), the MCU will jump to the
corresponding Interrupt Vector. The flag is cleared when the interrupt routine is executed.
Alternatively, the flag can be cleared by writing a logical one to it.
13.2.6 PCMSK2 – Pin Change Mask Register 2
• Bit 7:0 – PCINT[23:16]: Pin Change Enable Mask 23..16
Each PCINT[23:16]-bit selects whether pin change interrupt is enabled on the corresponding I/O
pin. If PCINT[23:16] is set and the PCIE2 bit in PCICR is set, pin change interrupt is enabled on
the corresponding I/O pin. If PCINT[23:16] is cleared, pin change interrupt on the corresponding
I/O pin is disabled.
13.2.7 PCMSK1 – Pin Change Mask Register 1
• Bit 7 – Reserved Bit
This bit is an unused bit in the ATmega48P/88P/168P, and will always read as zero.
• Bit 6:0 – PCINT[14:8]: Pin Change Enable Mask 14..8
Each PCINT[14:8]-bit selects whether pin change interrupt is enabled on the corresponding I/O
pin. If PCINT[14:8] is set and the PCIE1 bit in PCICR is set, pin change interrupt is enabled on
the corresponding I/O pin. If PCINT[14:8] is cleared, pin change interrupt on the corresponding
I/O pin is disabled.
13.2.8 PCMSK0 – Pin Change Mask Register 0
• Bit 7:0 – PCINT[7:0]: Pin Change Enable Mask 7..0
Each PCINT[7:0] bit selects whether pin change interrupt is enabled on the corresponding I/O
pin. If PCINT[7:0] is set and the PCIE0 bit in PCICR is set, pin change interrupt is enabled on the
corresponding I/O pin. If PCINT[7:0] is cleared, pin change interrupt on the corresponding I/O
pin is disabled.
Bit 76543210
(0x6D) PCINT23 PCINT22 PCINT21 PCINT20 PCINT19 PCINT18 PCINT17 PCINT16 PCMSK2
Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 76543210
(0x6C) – PCINT14 PCINT13 PCINT12 PCINT11 PCINT10 PCINT9 PCINT8 PCMSK1
Read/Write R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 76543210
(0x6B) PCINT7 PCINT6 PCINT5 PCINT4 PCINT3 PCINT2 PCINT1 PCINT0 PCMSK0
Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value00000000
\_______.
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 85
14. I/O-Ports
14.1 Overview
All AVR ports have true Read-Modify-Write functionality when used as general digital I/O ports.
This means that the direction of one port pin can be changed without unintentionally changing
the direction of any other pin with the SBI and CBI instructions. The same applies when
changing drive value (if configured as output) or enabling/disabling of pull-up resistors (if
configured as input). Each output buffer has symmetrical drive characteristics with both high sink
and source capability. The pin driver is strong enough to drive LED displays directly. All port pins
have individually selectable pull-up resistors with a supply-voltage invariant resistance. All I/O
pins have protection diodes to both VCC and Ground as indicated in Figure 14-1. Refer to
“Electrical Characteristics” on page 324 for a complete list of parameters.
Figure 14-1. I/O Pin Equivalent Schematic
All registers and bit references in this section are written in general form. A lower case “x”
represents the numbering letter for the port, and a lower case “n” represents the bit number.
However, when using the register or bit defines in a program, the precise form must be used. For
example, PORTB3 for bit no. 3 in Port B, here documented generally as PORTxn. The physical
I/O Registers and bit locations are listed in “Register Description” on page 102.
Three I/O memory address locations are allocated for each port, one each for the Data Register
– PORTx, Data Direction Register – DDRx, and the Port Input Pins – PINx. The Port Input Pins
I/O location is read only, while the Data Register and the Data Direction Register are read/write.
However, writing a logic one to a bit in the PINx Register, will result in a toggle in the
corresponding bit in the Data Register. In addition, the Pull-up Disable – PUD bit in MCUCR
disables the pull-up function for all pins in all ports when set.
Using the I/O port as General Digital I/O is described in “Ports as General Digital I/O” on page
86. Most port pins are multiplexed with alternate functions for the peripheral features on the
device. How each alternate function interferes with the port pin is described in “Alternate Port
Functions” on page 90. Refer to the individual module sections for a full description of the
alternate functions.
Cpin
Logic
Rpu
See Figure
"General Digital I/O" for
Details
Pxn
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 86
Note that enabling the alternate function of some of the port pins does not affect the use of the
other pins in the port as general digital I/O.
14.2 Ports as General Digital I/O
The ports are bi-directional I/O ports with optional internal pull-ups. Figure 14-2 shows a
functional description of one I/O-port pin, here generically called Pxn.
Figure 14-2. General Digital I/O(1)
Note: 1. WRx, WPx, WDx, RRx, RPx, and RDx are common to all pins within the same port. clkI/O,
SLEEP, and PUD are common to all ports.
14.2.1 Configuring the Pin
Each port pin consists of three register bits: DDxn, PORTxn, and PINxn. As shown in “Register
Description” on page 102, the DDxn bits are accessed at the DDRx I/O address, the PORTxn
bits at the PORTx I/O address, and the PINxn bits at the PINx I/O address.
The DDxn bit in the DDRx Register selects the direction of this pin. If DDxn is written logic one,
Pxn is configured as an output pin. If DDxn is written logic zero, Pxn is configured as an input
pin.
If PORTxn is written logic one when the pin is configured as an input pin, the pull-up resistor is
activated. To switch the pull-up resistor off, PORTxn has to be written logic zero or the pin has to
be configured as an output pin. The port pins are tri-stated when reset condition becomes active,
even if no clocks are running.
clk
RPx
RRx
RDx
WDx
PUD
SYNCHRONIZER
WDx: WRITE DDRx
WRx: WRITE PORTx
RRx: READ PORTx REGISTER
RPx: READ PORTx PIN
PUD: PULLUP DISABLE
clk
I/O
: I/O CLOCK
RDx: READ DDRx
D
L
Q
Q
RESET
RESET
Q
QD
Q
Q D
CLR
PORTxn
Q
QD
CLR
DDxn
PINxn
DATA B U S
SLEEP
SLEEP: SLEEP CONTROL
Pxn
I/O
WPx
0
1
WRx
WPx: WRITE PINx REGISTER
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 87
If PORTxn is written logic one when the pin is configured as an output pin, the port pin is driven
high (one). If PORTxn is written logic zero when the pin is configured as an output pin, the port
pin is driven low (zero).
14.2.2 Toggling the Pin
Writing a logic one to PINxn toggles the value of PORTxn, independent on the value of DDRxn.
Note that the SBI instruction can be used to toggle one single bit in a port.
14.2.3 Switching Between Input and Output
When switching between tri-state ({DDxn, PORTxn} = 0b00) and output high ({DDxn, PORTxn}
= 0b11), an intermediate state with either pull-up enabled {DDxn, PORTxn} = 0b01) or output
low ({DDxn, PORTxn} = 0b10) must occur. Normally, the pull-up enabled state is fully
acceptable, as a high-impedance environment will not notice the difference between a strong
high driver and a pull-up. If this is not the case, the PUD bit in the MCUCR Register can be set to
disable all pull-ups in all ports.
Switching between input with pull-up and output low generates the same problem. The user
must use either the tri-state ({DDxn, PORTxn} = 0b00) or the output high state ({DDxn, PORTxn}
= 0b11) as an intermediate step.
Table 14-1 summarizes the control signals for the pin value.
14.2.4 Reading the Pin Value
Independent of the setting of Data Direction bit DDxn, the port pin can be read through the
PINxn Register bit. As shown in Figure 14-2, the PINxn Register bit and the preceding latch
constitute a synchronizer. This is needed to avoid metastability if the physical pin changes value
near the edge of the internal clock, but it also introduces a delay. Figure 14-3 shows a timing
diagram of the synchronization when reading an externally applied pin value. The maximum and
minimum propagation delays are denoted tpd,max and tpd,min respectively.
Table 14-1. Port Pin Configurations
DDxn PORTxn
PUD
(in MCUCR) I/O Pull-up Comment
0 0 X Input No Tri-state (Hi-Z)
0 1 0 Input Yes Pxn will source current if ext. pulled low.
0 1 1 Input No Tri-state (Hi-Z)
1 0 X Output No Output Low (Sink)
1 1 X Output No Output High (Source)
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 88
Figure 14-3. Synchronization when Reading an Externally Applied Pin value
Consider the clock period starting shortly after the first falling edge of the system clock. The latch
is closed when the clock is low, and goes transparent when the clock is high, as indicated by the
shaded region of the “SYNC LATCH” signal. The signal value is latched when the system clock
goes low. It is clocked into the PINxn Register at the succeeding positive clock edge. As
indicated by the two arrows tpd,max and tpd,min, a single signal transition on the pin will be
delayed between ½ and 1½ system clock period depending upon the time of assertion.
When reading back a software assigned pin value, a nop instruction must be inserted as
indicated in Figure 14-4. The out instruction sets the “SYNC LATCH” signal at the positive edge
of the clock. In this case, the delay tpd through the synchronizer is 1 system clock period.
Figure 14-4. Synchronization when Reading a Software Assigned Pin Value
The following code example shows how to set port B pins 0 and 1 high, 2 and 3 low, and define
the port pins from 4 to 7 as input with pull-ups assigned to port pins 6 and 7. The resulting pin
values are read back again, but as previously discussed, a nop instruction is included to be able
to read back the value recently assigned to some of the pins.
XXX in r17, PINx
0x00 0xFF
INSTRUCTIONS
SYNC LATCH
PINxn
r17
XXX
SYSTEM CLK
t
pd, max
t
pd, min
out PORTx, r16 nop in r17, PINx
0xFF
0x00 0xFF
SYSTEM CLK
r16
INSTRUCTIONS
SYNC LATCH
PINxn
r17
t
pd
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 89
Note: 1. For the assembly program, two temporary registers are used to minimize the time from pull-
ups are set on pins 0, 1, 6, and 7, until the direction bits are correctly set, defining bit 2 and 3
as low and redefining bits 0 and 1 as strong high drivers.
14.2.5 Digital Input Enable and Sleep Modes
As shown in Figure 14-2, the digital input signal can be clamped to ground at the input of the
Schmitt Trigger. The signal denoted SLEEP in the figure, is set by the MCU Sleep Controller in
Power-down mode, Power-save mode, and Standby mode to avoid high power consumption if
some input signals are left floating, or have an analog signal level close to VCC/2.
SLEEP is overridden for port pins enabled as external interrupt pins. If the external interrupt
request is not enabled, SLEEP is active also for these pins. SLEEP is also overridden by various
other alternate functions as described in “Alternate Port Functions” on page 90.
If a logic high level (“one”) is present on an asynchronous external interrupt pin configured as
“Interrupt on Rising Edge, Falling Edge, or Any Logic Change on Pin” while the external interrupt
is not enabled, the corresponding External Interrupt Flag will be set when resuming from the
above mentioned Sleep mode, as the clamping in these sleep mode produces the requested
logic change.
14.2.6 Unconnected Pins
If some pins are unused, it is recommended to ensure that these pins have a defined level. Even
though most of the digital inputs are disabled in the deep sleep modes as described above,
Assembly Code Example(1)
...
; Define pull-ups and set outputs high
; Define directions for port pins
ldi
r16,(1<<PB7)|(1<<PB6)|(1<<PB1)|(1<<PB0)
ldi
r17,(1<<DDB3)|(1<<DDB2)|(1<<DDB1)|(1<<DDB0)
out PORTB,r16
out DDRB,r17
; Insert nop for synchronization
nop
; Read port pins
in r16,PINB
...
C Code Example
unsigned char i;
...
/* Define pull-ups and set outputs high */
/* Define directions for port pins */
PORTB = (1<<PB7)|(1<<PB6)|(1<<PB1)|(1<<PB0);
DDRB = (1<<DDB3)|(1<<DDB2)|(1<<DDB1)|(1<<DDB0);
/* Insert nop for synchronization*/
__no_operation();
/* Read port pins */
i = PINB;
...
WM
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 90
floating inputs should be avoided to reduce current consumption in all other modes where the
digital inputs are enabled (Reset, Active mode and Idle mode).
The simplest method to ensure a defined level of an unused pin, is to enable the internal pull-up.
In this case, the pull-up will be disabled during reset. If low power consumption during reset is
important, it is recommended to use an external pull-up or pull-down. Connecting unused pins
directly to VCC or GND is not recommended, since this may cause excessive currents if the pin is
accidentally configured as an output.
14.3 Alternate Port Functions
Most port pins have alternate functions in addition to being general digital I/Os. Figure 14-5
shows how the port pin control signals from the simplified Figure 14-2 on page 86 can be
overridden by alternate functions. The overriding signals may not be present in all port pins, but
the figure serves as a generic description applicable to all port pins in the AVR microcontroller
family.
Figure 14-5. Alternate Port Functions(1)
Note: 1. WRx, WPx, WDx, RRx, RPx, and RDx are common to all pins within the same port. clkI/O,
SLEEP, and PUD are common to all ports. All other signals are unique for each pin.
clk
RPx
RRx
WRx
RDx
WDx
PUD
SYNCHRONIZER
WDx: WRITE DDRx
WRx: WRITE PORTx
RRx: READ PORTx REGISTER
RPx: READ PORTx PIN
PUD: PULLUP DISABLE
clk
I/O
: I/O CLOCK
RDx: READ DDRx
D
L
Q
Q
SET
CLR
0
1
0
1
0
1
DIxn
AIOxn
DIEOExn
PVOVxn
PVOExn
DDOVxn
DDOExn
PUOExn
PUOVxn
PUOExn: Pxn PULL-UP OVERRIDE ENABLE
PUOVxn: Pxn PULL-UP OVERRIDE VALUE
DDOExn: Pxn DATA DIRECTION OVERRIDE ENABLE
DDOVxn: Pxn DATA DIRECTION OVERRIDE VALUE
PVOExn: Pxn PORT VALUE OVERRIDE ENABLE
PVOVxn: Pxn PORT VALUE OVERRIDE VALUE
DIxn: DIGITAL INPUT PIN n ON PORTx
AIOxn: ANALOG INPUT/OUTPUT PIN n ON PORTx
RESET
RESET
Q
QD
CLR
Q
QD
CLR
Q
Q
D
CLR
PINxn
PORTxn
DDxn
DATA BU S
0
1
DIEOVxn
SLEEP
DIEOExn: Pxn DIGITAL INPUT-ENABLE OVERRIDE ENABLE
DIEOVxn: Pxn DIGITAL INPUT-ENABLE OVERRIDE VALUE
SLEEP: SLEEP CONTROL
Pxn
I/O
0
1
PTOExn
PTOExn: Pxn, PORT TOGGLE OVERRIDE ENABLE
WPx: WRITE PINx
WPx
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 91
Table 14-2 summarizes the function of the overriding signals. The pin and port indexes from
Figure 14-5 on page 90 are not shown in the succeeding tables. The overriding signals are
generated internally in the modules having the alternate function.
The following subsections shortly describe the alternate functions for each port, and relate the
overriding signals to the alternate function. Refer to the alternate function description for further
details.
Table 14-2. Generic Description of Overriding Signals for Alternate Functions
Signal Name Full Name Description
PUOE Pull-up Override
Enable
If this signal is set, the pull-up enable is controlled by the PUOV
signal. If this signal is cleared, the pull-up is enabled when
{DDxn, PORTxn, PUD} = 0b010.
PUOV Pull-up Override
Value
If PUOE is set, the pull-up is enabled/disabled when PUOV is
set/cleared, regardless of the setting of the DDxn, PORTxn,
and PUD Register bits.
DDOE Data Direction
Override Enable
If this signal is set, the Output Driver Enable is controlled by the
DDOV signal. If this signal is cleared, the Output driver is
enabled by the DDxn Register bit.
DDOV Data Direction
Override Value
If DDOE is set, the Output Driver is enabled/disabled when
DDOV is set/cleared, regardless of the setting of the DDxn
Register bit.
PVOE Port Value
Override Enable
If this signal is set and the Output Driver is enabled, the port
value is controlled by the PVOV signal. If PVOE is cleared, and
the Output Driver is enabled, the port Value is controlled by the
PORTxn Register bit.
PVOV Port Value
Override Value
If PVOE is set, the port value is set to PVOV, regardless of the
setting of the PORTxn Register bit.
PTOE Port Toggle
Override Enable If PTOE is set, the PORTxn Register bit is inverted.
DIEOE
Digital Input
Enable Override
Enable
If this bit is set, the Digital Input Enable is controlled by the
DIEOV signal. If this signal is cleared, the Digital Input Enable
is determined by MCU state (Normal mode, sleep mode).
DIEOV
Digital Input
Enable Override
Value
If DIEOE is set, the Digital Input is enabled/disabled when
DIEOV is set/cleared, regardless of the MCU state (Normal
mode, sleep mode).
DI Digital Input
This is the Digital Input to alternate functions. In the figure, the
signal is connected to the output of the Schmitt Trigger but
before the synchronizer. Unless the Digital Input is used as a
clock source, the module with the alternate function will use its
own synchronizer.
AIO Analog
Input/Output
This is the Analog Input/output to/from alternate functions. The
signal is connected directly to the pad, and can be used bi-
directionally.
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 92
14.3.1 Alternate Functions of Port B
The Port B pins with alternate functions are shown in Table 14-3.
The alternate pin configuration is as follows:
• XTAL2/TOSC2/PCINT7 – Port B, Bit 7
XTAL2: Chip clock Oscillator pin 2. Used as clock pin for crystal Oscillator or Low-frequency
crystal Oscillator. When used as a clock pin, the pin can not be used as an I/O pin.
TOSC2: Timer Oscillator pin 2. Used only if internal calibrated RC Oscillator is selected as chip
clock source, and the asynchronous timer is enabled by the correct setting in ASSR. When the
AS2 bit in ASSR is set (one) and the EXCLK bit is cleared (zero) to enable asynchronous
clocking of Timer/Counter2 using the Crystal Oscillator, pin PB7 is disconnected from the port,
and becomes the inverting output of the Oscillator amplifier. In this mode, a crystal Oscillator is
connected to this pin, and the pin cannot be used as an I/O pin.
PCINT7: Pin Change Interrupt source 7. The PB7 pin can serve as an external interrupt source.
If PB7 is used as a clock pin, DDB7, PORTB7 and PINB7 will all read 0.
• XTAL1/TOSC1/PCINT6 – Port B, Bit 6
XTAL1: Chip clock Oscillator pin 1. Used for all chip clock sources except internal calibrated RC
Oscillator. When used as a clock pin, the pin can not be used as an I/O pin.
TOSC1: Timer Oscillator pin 1. Used only if internal calibrated RC Oscillator is selected as chip
clock source, and the asynchronous timer is enabled by the correct setting in ASSR. When the
Table 14-3. Port B Pins Alternate Functions
Port Pin Alternate Functions
PB7
XTAL2 (Chip Clock Oscillator pin 2)
TOSC2 (Timer Oscillator pin 2)
PCINT7 (Pin Change Interrupt 7)
PB6
XTAL1 (Chip Clock Oscillator pin 1 or External clock input)
TOSC1 (Timer Oscillator pin 1)
PCINT6 (Pin Change Interrupt 6)
PB5 SCK (SPI Bus Master clock Input)
PCINT5 (Pin Change Interrupt 5)
PB4 MISO (SPI Bus Master Input/Slave Output)
PCINT4 (Pin Change Interrupt 4)
PB3
MOSI (SPI Bus Master Output/Slave Input)
OC2A (Timer/Counter2 Output Compare Match A Output)
PCINT3 (Pin Change Interrupt 3)
PB2
SS (SPI Bus Master Slave select)
OC1B (Timer/Counter1 Output Compare Match B Output)
PCINT2 (Pin Change Interrupt 2)
PB1 OC1A (Timer/Counter1 Output Compare Match A Output)
PCINT1 (Pin Change Interrupt 1)
PB0
ICP1 (Timer/Counter1 Input Capture Input)
CLKO (Divided System Clock Output)
PCINT0 (Pin Change Interrupt 0)
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 93
AS2 bit in ASSR is set (one) to enable asynchronous clocking of Timer/Counter2, pin PB6 is
disconnected from the port, and becomes the input of the inverting Oscillator amplifier. In this
mode, a crystal Oscillator is connected to this pin, and the pin can not be used as an I/O pin.
PCINT6: Pin Change Interrupt source 6. The PB6 pin can serve as an external interrupt source.
If PB6 is used as a clock pin, DDB6, PORTB6 and PINB6 will all read 0.
• SCK/PCINT5 – Port B, Bit 5
SCK: Master Clock output, Slave Clock input pin for SPI channel. When the SPI is enabled as a
Slave, this pin is configured as an input regardless of the setting of DDB5. When the SPI is
enabled as a Master, the data direction of this pin is controlled by DDB5. When the pin is forced
by the SPI to be an input, the pull-up can still be controlled by the PORTB5 bit.
PCINT5: Pin Change Interrupt source 5. The PB5 pin can serve as an external interrupt source.
• MISO/PCINT4 – Port B, Bit 4
MISO: Master Data input, Slave Data output pin for SPI channel. When the SPI is enabled as a
Master, this pin is configured as an input regardless of the setting of DDB4. When the SPI is
enabled as a Slave, the data direction of this pin is controlled by DDB4. When the pin is forced
by the SPI to be an input, the pull-up can still be controlled by the PORTB4 bit.
PCINT4: Pin Change Interrupt source 4. The PB4 pin can serve as an external interrupt source.
• MOSI/OC2/PCINT3 – Port B, Bit 3
MOSI: SPI Master Data output, Slave Data input for SPI channel. When the SPI is enabled as a
Slave, this pin is configured as an input regardless of the setting of DDB3. When the SPI is
enabled as a Master, the data direction of this pin is controlled by DDB3. When the pin is forced
by the SPI to be an input, the pull-up can still be controlled by the PORTB3 bit.
OC2, Output Compare Match Output: The PB3 pin can serve as an external output for the
Timer/Counter2 Compare Match. The PB3 pin has to be configured as an output (DDB3 set
(one)) to serve this function. The OC2 pin is also the output pin for the PWM mode timer
function.
PCINT3: Pin Change Interrupt source 3. The PB3 pin can serve as an external interrupt source.
•SS
/OC1B/PCINT2 – Port B, Bit 2
SS: Slave Select input. When the SPI is enabled as a Slave, this pin is configured as an input
regardless of the setting of DDB2. As a Slave, the SPI is activated when this pin is driven low.
When the SPI is enabled as a Master, the data direction of this pin is controlled by DDB2. When
the pin is forced by the SPI to be an input, the pull-up can still be controlled by the PORTB2 bit.
OC1B, Output Compare Match output: The PB2 pin can serve as an external output for the
Timer/Counter1 Compare Match B. The PB2 pin has to be configured as an output (DDB2 set
(one)) to serve this function. The OC1B pin is also the output pin for the PWM mode timer
function.
PCINT2: Pin Change Interrupt source 2. The PB2 pin can serve as an external interrupt source.
• OC1A/PCINT1 – Port B, Bit 1
OC1A, Output Compare Match output: The PB1 pin can serve as an external output for the
Timer/Counter1 Compare Match A. The PB1 pin has to be configured as an output (DDB1 set
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 94
(one)) to serve this function. The OC1A pin is also the output pin for the PWM mode timer
function.
PCINT1: Pin Change Interrupt source 1. The PB1 pin can serve as an external interrupt source.
• ICP1/CLKO/PCINT0 – Port B, Bit 0
ICP1, Input Capture Pin: The PB0 pin can act as an Input Capture Pin for Timer/Counter1.
CLKO, Divided System Clock: The divided system clock can be output on the PB0 pin. The
divided system clock will be output if the CKOUT Fuse is programmed, regardless of the
PORTB0 and DDB0 settings. It will also be output during reset.
PCINT0: Pin Change Interrupt source 0. The PB0 pin can serve as an external interrupt source.
Table 14-4 and Table 14-5 on page 95 relate the alternate functions of Port B to the overriding
signals shown in Figure 14-5 on page 90. SPI MSTR INPUT and SPI SLAVE OUTPUT
constitute the MISO signal, while MOSI is divided into SPI MSTR OUTPUT and SPI SLAVE
INPUT.
Notes: 1. INTRC means that one of the internal RC Oscillators are selected (by the CKSEL fuses),
EXTCK means that external clock is selected (by the CKSEL fuses)
Table 14-4. Overriding Signals for Alternate Functions in PB7..PB4
Signal
Name
PB7/XTAL2/
TOSC2/PCINT7(1)
PB6/XTAL1/
TOSC1/PCINT6(1)
PB5/SCK/
PCINT5
PB4/MISO/
PCINT4
PUOE INTRC • EXTCK+
AS2 INTRC + AS2 SPE • MSTR SPE • MSTR
PUOV 0 0 PORTB5 • PUD PORTB4 • PUD
DDOE INTRC • EXTCK+
AS2 INTRC + AS2 SPE • MSTR SPE • MSTR
DDOV0000
PVOE 0 0 SPE • MSTR SPE • MSTR
PVOV 0 0 SCK OUTPUT SPI SLAVE
OUTPUT
DIEOE
INTRC • EXTCK +
AS2 + PCINT7 •
PCIE0
INTRC + AS2 +
PCINT6 • PCIE0 PCINT5 • PCIE0 PCINT4 • PCIE0
DIEOV (INTRC + EXTCK) •
AS2 INTRC • AS2 11
DI PCINT7 INPUT PCINT6 INPUT PCINT5 INPUT
SCK INPUT
PCINT4 INPUT
SPI MSTR INPUT
AIO Oscillator Output Oscillator/Clock
Input ––
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 95
14.3.2 Alternate Functions of Port C
The Port C pins with alternate functions are shown in Table 14-6.
Table 14-5. Overriding Signals for Alternate Functions in PB3..PB0
Signal
Name
PB3/MOSI/
OC2/PCINT3
PB2/SS/
OC1B/PCINT2
PB1/OC1A/
PCINT1
PB0/ICP1/
PCINT0
PUOE SPE • MSTR SPE • MSTR 00
PUOV PORTB3 • PUD PORTB2 • PUD 00
DDOE SPE • MSTR SPE • MSTR 00
DDOV 0 0 0 0
PVOE SPE • MSTR +
OC2A ENABLE OC1B ENABLE OC1A ENABLE 0
PVOV SPI MSTR OUTPUT
+ OC2A OC1B OC1A 0
DIEOE PCINT3 • PCIE0 PCINT2 • PCIE0 PCINT1 • PCIE0 PCINT0 • PCIE0
DIEOV 1 1 1 1
DI PCINT3 INPUT
SPI SLAVE INPUT
PCINT2 INPUT
SPI SS PCINT1 INPUT PCINT0 INPUT
ICP1 INPUT
AIO – – – –
Table 14-6. Port C Pins Alternate Functions
Port Pin Alternate Function
PC6 RESET (Reset pin)
PCINT14 (Pin Change Interrupt 14)
PC5
ADC5 (ADC Input Channel 5)
SCL (2-wire Serial Bus Clock Line)
PCINT13 (Pin Change Interrupt 13)
PC4
ADC4 (ADC Input Channel 4)
SDA (2-wire Serial Bus Data Input/Output Line)
PCINT12 (Pin Change Interrupt 12)
PC3 ADC3 (ADC Input Channel 3)
PCINT11 (Pin Change Interrupt 11)
PC2 ADC2 (ADC Input Channel 2)
PCINT10 (Pin Change Interrupt 10)
PC1 ADC1 (ADC Input Channel 1)
PCINT9 (Pin Change Interrupt 9)
PC0 ADC0 (ADC Input Channel 0)
PCINT8 (Pin Change Interrupt 8)
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 96
The alternate pin configuration is as follows:
• RESET/PCINT14 – Port C, Bit 6
RESET, Reset pin: When the RSTDISBL Fuse is programmed, this pin functions as a normal I/O
pin, and the part will have to rely on Power-on Reset and Brown-out Reset as its reset sources.
When the RSTDISBL Fuse is unprogrammed, the reset circuitry is connected to the pin, and the
pin can not be used as an I/O pin.
If PC6 is used as a reset pin, DDC6, PORTC6 and PINC6 will all read 0.
PCINT14: Pin Change Interrupt source 14. The PC6 pin can serve as an external interrupt
source.
• SCL/ADC5/PCINT13 – Port C, Bit 5
SCL, 2-wire Serial Interface Clock: When the TWEN bit in TWCR is set (one) to enable the 2-
wire Serial Interface, pin PC5 is disconnected from the port and becomes the Serial Clock I/O
pin for the 2-wire Serial Interface. In this mode, there is a spike filter on the pin to suppress
spikes shorter than 50 ns on the input signal, and the pin is driven by an open drain driver with
slew-rate limitation.
PC5 can also be used as ADC input Channel 5. Note that ADC input channel 5 uses digital
power.
PCINT13: Pin Change Interrupt source 13. The PC5 pin can serve as an external interrupt
source.
• SDA/ADC4/PCINT12 – Port C, Bit 4
SDA, 2-wire Serial Interface Data: When the TWEN bit in TWCR is set (one) to enable the 2-wire
Serial Interface, pin PC4 is disconnected from the port and becomes the Serial Data I/O pin for
the 2-wire Serial Interface. In this mode, there is a spike filter on the pin to suppress spikes
shorter than 50 ns on the input signal, and the pin is driven by an open drain driver with slew-
rate limitation.
PC4 can also be used as ADC input Channel 4. Note that ADC input channel 4 uses digital
power.
PCINT12: Pin Change Interrupt source 12. The PC4 pin can serve as an external interrupt
source.
• ADC3/PCINT11 – Port C, Bit 3
PC3 can also be used as ADC input Channel 3. Note that ADC input channel 3 uses analog
power.
PCINT11: Pin Change Interrupt source 11. The PC3 pin can serve as an external interrupt
source.
• ADC2/PCINT10 – Port C, Bit 2
PC2 can also be used as ADC input Channel 2. Note that ADC input channel 2 uses analog
power.
PCINT10: Pin Change Interrupt source 10. The PC2 pin can serve as an external interrupt
source.
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 97
• ADC1/PCINT9 – Port C, Bit 1
PC1 can also be used as ADC input Channel 1. Note that ADC input channel 1 uses analog
power.
PCINT9: Pin Change Interrupt source 9. The PC1 pin can serve as an external interrupt source.
• ADC0/PCINT8 – Port C, Bit 0
PC0 can also be used as ADC input Channel 0. Note that ADC input channel 0 uses analog
power.
PCINT8: Pin Change Interrupt source 8. The PC0 pin can serve as an external interrupt source.
Table 14-7 and Table 14-8 relate the alternate functions of Port C to the overriding signals
shown in Figure 14-5 on page 90.
Note: 1. When enabled, the 2-wire Serial Interface enables slew-rate controls on the output pins PC4
and PC5. This is not shown in the figure. In addition, spike filters are connected between the
AIO outputs shown in the port figure and the digital logic of the TWI module.
Table 14-7. Overriding Signals for Alternate Functions in PC6..PC4(1)
Signal
Name PC6/RESET/PCINT14 PC5/SCL/ADC5/PCINT13 PC4/SDA/ADC4/PCINT12
PUOE RSTDISBL TWEN TWEN
PUOV 1 PORTC5 • PUD PORTC4 • PUD
DDOE RSTDISBL TWEN TWEN
DDOV 0 SCL_OUT SDA_OUT
PVOE 0 TWEN TWEN
PVOV 0 0 0
DIEOE RSTDISBL + PCINT14 •
PCIE1 PCINT13 • PCIE1 + ADC5D PCINT12 • PCIE1 + ADC4D
DIEOV RSTDISBL PCINT13 • PCIE1 PCINT12 • PCIE1
DI PCINT14 INPUT PCINT13 INPUT PCINT12 INPUT
AIO RESET INPUT ADC5 INPUT / SCL INPUT ADC4 INPUT / SDA INPUT
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 98
14.3.3 Alternate Functions of Port D
The Port D pins with alternate functions are shown in Table 14-9.
Table 14-8. Overriding Signals for Alternate Functions in PC3..PC0
Signal
Name
PC3/ADC3/
PCINT11
PC2/ADC2/
PCINT10
PC1/ADC1/
PCINT9
PC0/ADC0/
PCINT8
PUOE0000
PUOV0000
DDOE 0 0 0 0
DDOV 0 0 0 0
PVOE 0 0 0 0
PVOV 0 0 0 0
DIEOE PCINT11 • PCIE1 +
ADC3D
PCINT10 • PCIE1 +
ADC2D
PCINT9 • PCIE1 +
ADC1D
PCINT8 • PCIE1 +
ADC0D
DIEOV PCINT11 • PCIE1 PCINT10 • PCIE1 PCINT9 • PCIE1 PCINT8 • PCIE1
DI PCINT11 INPUT PCINT10 INPUT PCINT9 INPUT PCINT8 INPUT
AIO ADC3 INPUT ADC2 INPUT ADC1 INPUT ADC0 INPUT
Table 14-9. Port D Pins Alternate Functions
Port Pin Alternate Function
PD7 AIN1 (Analog Comparator Negative Input)
PCINT23 (Pin Change Interrupt 23)
PD6
AIN0 (Analog Comparator Positive Input)
OC0A (Timer/Counter0 Output Compare Match A Output)
PCINT22 (Pin Change Interrupt 22)
PD5
T1 (Timer/Counter 1 External Counter Input)
OC0B (Timer/Counter0 Output Compare Match B Output)
PCINT21 (Pin Change Interrupt 21)
PD4
XCK (USART External Clock Input/Output)
T0 (Timer/Counter 0 External Counter Input)
PCINT20 (Pin Change Interrupt 20)
PD3
INT1 (External Interrupt 1 Input)
OC2B (Timer/Counter2 Output Compare Match B Output)
PCINT19 (Pin Change Interrupt 19)
PD2 INT0 (External Interrupt 0 Input)
PCINT18 (Pin Change Interrupt 18)
PD1 TXD (USART Output Pin)
PCINT17 (Pin Change Interrupt 17)
PD0 RXD (USART Input Pin)
PCINT16 (Pin Change Interrupt 16)
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 99
The alternate pin configuration is as follows:
• AIN1/OC2B/PCINT23 – Port D, Bit 7
AIN1, Analog Comparator Negative Input. Configure the port pin as input with the internal pull-up
switched off to avoid the digital port function from interfering with the function of the Analog
Comparator.
PCINT23: Pin Change Interrupt source 23. The PD7 pin can serve as an external interrupt
source.
• AIN0/OC0A/PCINT22 – Port D, Bit 6
AIN0, Analog Comparator Positive Input. Configure the port pin as input with the internal pull-up
switched off to avoid the digital port function from interfering with the function of the Analog
Comparator.
OC0A, Output Compare Match output: The PD6 pin can serve as an external output for the
Timer/Counter0 Compare Match A. The PD6 pin has to be configured as an output (DDD6 set
(one)) to serve this function. The OC0A pin is also the output pin for the PWM mode timer
function.
PCINT22: Pin Change Interrupt source 22. The PD6 pin can serve as an external interrupt
source.
• T1/OC0B/PCINT21 – Port D, Bit 5
T1, Timer/Counter1 counter source.
OC0B, Output Compare Match output: The PD5 pin can serve as an external output for the
Timer/Counter0 Compare Match B. The PD5 pin has to be configured as an output (DDD5 set
(one)) to serve this function. The OC0B pin is also the output pin for the PWM mode timer
function.
PCINT21: Pin Change Interrupt source 21. The PD5 pin can serve as an external interrupt
source.
• XCK/T0/PCINT20 – Port D, Bit 4
XCK, USART external clock.
T0, Timer/Counter0 counter source.
PCINT20: Pin Change Interrupt source 20. The PD4 pin can serve as an external interrupt
source.
• INT1/OC2B/PCINT19 – Port D, Bit 3
INT1, External Interrupt source 1: The PD3 pin can serve as an external interrupt source.
OC2B, Output Compare Match output: The PD3 pin can serve as an external output for the
Timer/Counter0 Compare Match B. The PD3 pin has to be configured as an output (DDD3 set
(one)) to serve this function. The OC2B pin is also the output pin for the PWM mode timer
function.
PCINT19: Pin Change Interrupt source 19. The PD3 pin can serve as an external interrupt
source.
• INT0/PCINT18 – Port D, Bit 2
INT0, External Interrupt source 0: The PD2 pin can serve as an external interrupt source.
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 100
PCINT18: Pin Change Interrupt source 18. The PD2 pin can serve as an external interrupt
source.
• TXD/PCINT17 – Port D, Bit 1
TXD, Transmit Data (Data output pin for the USART). When the USART Transmitter is enabled,
this pin is configured as an output regardless of the value of DDD1.
PCINT17: Pin Change Interrupt source 17. The PD1 pin can serve as an external interrupt
source.
• RXD/PCINT16 – Port D, Bit 0
RXD, Receive Data (Data input pin for the USART). When the USART Receiver is enabled this
pin is configured as an input regardless of the value of DDD0. When the USART forces this pin
to be an input, the pull-up can still be controlled by the PORTD0 bit.
PCINT16: Pin Change Interrupt source 16. The PD0 pin can serve as an external interrupt
source.
Table 14-10 and Table 14-11 relate the alternate functions of Port D to the overriding signals
shown in Figure 14-5 on page 90.
Table 14-10. Overriding Signals for Alternate Functions PD7..PD4
Signal
Name
PD7/AIN1
/PCINT23
PD6/AIN0/
OC0A/PCINT22
PD5/T1/OC0B/
PCINT21
PD4/XCK/
T0/PCINT20
PUOE0000
PUO0000
DDOE 0 0 0 0
DDOV 0 0 0 0
PVOE 0 OC0A ENABLE OC0B ENABLE UMSEL
PVOV 0 OC0A OC0B XCK OUTPUT
DIEOE PCINT23 • PCIE2 PCINT22 • PCIE2 PCINT21 • PCIE2 PCINT20 • PCIE2
DIEOV1111
DI PCINT23 INPUT PCINT22 INPUT PCINT21 INPUT
T1 INPUT
PCINT20 INPUT
XCK INPUT
T0 INPUT
AIO AIN1 INPUT AIN0 INPUT – –
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 101
Table 14-11. Overriding Signals for Alternate Functions in PD3..PD0
Signal
Name
PD3/OC2B/INT1/
PCINT19
PD2/INT0/
PCINT18
PD1/TXD/
PCINT17
PD0/RXD/
PCINT16
PUOE 0 0 TXEN RXEN
PUO 0 0 0 PORTD0 • PUD
DDOE 0 0 TXEN RXEN
DDOV 0 0 1 0
PVOE OC2B ENABLE 0 TXEN 0
PVOV OC2B 0 TXD 0
DIEOE INT1 ENABLE +
PCINT19 • PCIE2
INT0 ENABLE +
PCINT18 • PCIE1 PCINT17 • PCIE2 PCINT16 • PCIE2
DIEOV 1 1 1 1
DI PCINT19 INPUT
INT1 INPUT
PCINT18 INPUT
INT0 INPUT PCINT17 INPUT PCINT16 INPUT
RXD
AIO – – – –
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 102
14.4 Register Description
14.4.1 MCUCR – MCU Control Register
• Bit 4 – PUD: Pull-up Disable
When this bit is written to one, the pull-ups in the I/O ports are disabled even if the DDxn and
PORTxn Registers are configured to enable the pull-ups ({DDxn, PORTxn} = 0b01). See
“Configuring the Pin” on page 86 for more details about this feature.
14.4.2 PORTB – The Port B Data Register
14.4.3 DDRB – The Port B Data Direction Register
14.4.4 PINB – The Port B Input Pins Address
14.4.5 PORTC – The Port C Data Register
14.4.6 DDRC – The Port C Data Direction Register
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0x35 (0x55) – BODS BODSE PUD – – IVSEL IVCE MCUCR
Read/Write R R R R/W R R R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 76543210
0x05 (0x25) PORTB7 PORTB6 PORTB5 PORTB4 PORTB3 PORTB2 PORTB1 PORTB0 PORTB
Read/Write R/W R/W R/WR/WR/WR/WR/WR/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 76543210
0x04 (0x24) DDB7 DDB6 DDB5 DDB4 DDB3 DDB2 DDB1 DDB0 DDRB
Read/Write R/W R/W R/WR/WR/WR/WR/WR/W
Initial Value00000000
Bit 76543210
0x03 (0x23) PINB7 PINB6 PINB5 PINB4 PINB3 PINB2 PINB1 PINB0 PINB
Read/WriteRRRRRRRR
Initial Value N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Bit 76543210
0x08 (0x28) – PORTC6 PORTC5 PORTC4 PORTC3 PORTC2 PORTC1 PORTC0 PORTC
Read/Write R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 76543210
0x07 (0x27) – DDC6 DDC5 DDC4 DDC3 DDC2 DDC1 DDC0 DDRC
Read/Write R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 103
14.4.7 PINC – The Port C Input Pins Address
14.4.8 PORTD – The Port D Data Register
14.4.9 DDRD – The Port D Data Direction Register
14.4.10 PIND – The Port D Input Pins Address
Bit 76543210
0x06 (0x26) – PINC6 PINC5 PINC4 PINC3 PINC2 PINC1 PINC0 PINC
Read/WriteRRRRRRRR
Initial Value 0 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Bit 76543210
0x0B (0x2B) PORTD7 PORTD6 PORTD5 PORTD4 PORTD3 PORTD2 PORTD1 PORTD0 PORTD
Read/Write R/W R/W R/WR/WR/WR/WR/WR/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 76543210
0x0A (0x2A) DDD7 DDD6 DDD5 DDD4 DDD3 DDD2 DDD1 DDD0 DDRD
Read/Write R/W R/W R/WR/WR/WR/WR/WR/W
Initial Value00000000
Bit 76543210
0x09 (0x29) PIND7 PIND6 PIND5 PIND4 PIND3 PIND2 PIND1 PIND0 PIND
Read/WriteRRRRRRRR
Initial Value N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 104
15. 8-bit Timer/Counter0 with PWM
15.1 Features
•Two Independent Output Compare Units
•Double Buffered Output Compare Registers
•Clear Timer on Compare Match (Auto Reload)
•Glitch Free, Phase Correct Pulse Width Modulator (PWM)
•Variable PWM Period
•Frequency Generator
•Three Independent Interrupt Sources (TOV0, OCF0A, and OCF0B)
15.2 Overview
Timer/Counter0 is a general purpose 8-bit Timer/Counter module, with two independent Output
Compare Units, and with PWM support. It allows accurate program execution timing (event
management) and wave generation.
A simplified block diagram of the 8-bit Timer/Counter is shown in Figure 15-1. For the actual
placement of I/O pins, refer to “Pinout ATmega48P/88P/168P” on page 10. CPU accessible I/O
Registers, including I/O bits and I/O pins, are shown in bold. The device-specific I/O Register
and bit locations are listed in the “Register Description” on page 116.
The PRTIM0 bit in “Minimizing Power Consumption” on page 51 must be written to zero to
enable Timer/Counter0 module.
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 105
Figure 15-1. 8-bit Timer/Counter Block Diagram
15.2.1 Definitions
Many register and bit references in this section are written in general form. A lower case “n”
replaces the Timer/Counter number, in this case 0. A lower case “x” replaces the Output
Compare Unit, in this case Compare Unit A or Compare Unit B. However, when using the
register or bit defines in a program, the precise form must be used, i.e., TCNT0 for accessing
Timer/Counter0 counter value and so on.
The definitions in Table 15-1 are also used extensively throughout the document.
15.2.2 Registers
The Timer/Counter (TCNT0) and Output Compare Registers (OCR0A and OCR0B) are 8-bit
registers. Interrupt request (abbreviated to Int.Req. in the figure) signals are all visible in the
Timer Interrupt Flag Register (TIFR0). All interrupts are individually masked with the Timer
Interrupt Mask Register (TIMSK0). TIFR0 and TIMSK0 are not shown in the figure.
Clock Select
Timer/Counter
DATA BUS
OCRnA
OCRnB
=
=
TCNTn
Waveform
Generation
Waveform
Generation
OCnA
OCnB
=
Fixed
TOP
Value
Control Logic
=
0
TOP BOTTOM
Count
Clear
Direction
TOVn
(Int.Req.)
OCnA
(Int.Req.)
OCnB
(Int.Req.)
TCCRnA TCCRnB
Tn
Edge
Detector
( From Prescaler )
clk
Tn
Table 15-1. Definitions
BOTTOM The counter reaches the BOTTOM when it becomes 0x00.
MAX The counter reaches its MAXimum when it becomes 0xFF (decimal 255).
TOP
The counter reaches the TOP when it becomes equal to the highest value in the
count sequence. The TOP value can be assigned to be the fixed value 0xFF
(MAX) or the value stored in the OCR0A Register. The assignment is
dependent on the mode of operation.
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 106
The Timer/Counter can be clocked internally, via the prescaler, or by an external clock source on
the T0 pin. The Clock Select logic block controls which clock source and edge the Timer/Counter
uses to increment (or decrement) its value. The Timer/Counter is inactive when no clock source
is selected. The output from the Clock Select logic is referred to as the timer clock (clkT0).
The double buffered Output Compare Registers (OCR0A and OCR0B) are compared with the
Timer/Counter value at all times. The result of the compare can be used by the Waveform
Generator to generate a PWM or variable frequency output on the Output Compare pins (OC0A
and OC0B). See “Using the Output Compare Unit” on page 133. for details. The compare match
event will also set the Compare Flag (OCF0A or OCF0B) which can be used to generate an
Output Compare interrupt request.
15.3 Timer/Counter Clock Sources
The Timer/Counter can be clocked by an internal or an external clock source. The clock source
is selected by the Clock Select logic which is controlled by the Clock Select (CS02:0) bits
located in the Timer/Counter Control Register (TCCR0B). For details on clock sources and
prescaler, see “Timer/Counter0 and Timer/Counter1 Prescalers” on page 152.
15.4 Counter Unit
The main part of the 8-bit Timer/Counter is the programmable bi-directional counter unit. Figure
15-2 shows a block diagram of the counter and its surroundings.
Figure 15-2. Counter Unit Block Diagram
Signal description (internal signals):
count: Increment or decrement TCNT0 by 1.
direction: Select between increment and decrement.
clear: Clear TCNT0 (set all bits to zero).
clkTn: Timer/Counter clock, referred to as clkT0 in the following.
top: Signalize that TCNT0 has reached maximum value.
bottom: Signalize that TCNT0 has reached minimum value (zero).
Depending of the mode of operation used, the counter is cleared, incremented, or decremented
at each timer clock (clkT0). clkT0 can be generated from an external or internal clock source,
selected by the Clock Select bits (CS02:0). When no clock source is selected (CS02:0 = 0) the
timer is stopped. However, the TCNT0 value can be accessed by the CPU, regardless of
whether clkT0 is present or not. A CPU write overrides (has priority over) all counter clear or
count operations.
DATA BUS
TCNTn Control Logic
count
TOVn
(Int.Req.)
Clock Select
top
Tn
Edge
Detector
( From Prescaler )
clk
Tn
bottom
direction
clear
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 107
The counting sequence is determined by the setting of the WGM01 and WGM00 bits located in
the Timer/Counter Control Register (TCCR0A) and the WGM02 bit located in the Timer/Counter
Control Register B (TCCR0B). There are close connections between how the counter behaves
(counts) and how waveforms are generated on the Output Compare outputs OC0A and OC0B.
For more details about advanced counting sequences and waveform generation, see “Modes of
Operation” on page 109.
The Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOV0) is set according to the mode of operation selected by
the WGM02:0 bits. TOV0 can be used for generating a CPU interrupt.
15.5 Output Compare Unit
The 8-bit comparator continuously compares TCNT0 with the Output Compare Registers
(OCR0A and OCR0B). Whenever TCNT0 equals OCR0A or OCR0B, the comparator signals a
match. A match will set the Output Compare Flag (OCF0A or OCF0B) at the next timer clock
cycle. If the corresponding interrupt is enabled, the Output Compare Flag generates an Output
Compare interrupt. The Output Compare Flag is automatically cleared when the interrupt is
executed. Alternatively, the flag can be cleared by software by writing a logical one to its I/O bit
location. The Waveform Generator uses the match signal to generate an output according to
operating mode set by the WGM02:0 bits and Compare Output mode (COM0x1:0) bits. The max
and bottom signals are used by the Waveform Generator for handling the special cases of the
extreme values in some modes of operation (“Modes of Operation” on page 109).
Figure 15-3 shows a block diagram of the Output Compare unit.
Figure 15-3. Output Compare Unit, Block Diagram
The OCR0x Registers are double buffered when using any of the Pulse Width Modulation
(PWM) modes. For the normal and Clear Timer on Compare (CTC) modes of operation, the
double buffering is disabled. The double buffering synchronizes the update of the OCR0x
Compare Registers to either top or bottom of the counting sequence. The synchronization
prevents the occurrence of odd-length, non-symmetrical PWM pulses, thereby making the
output glitch-free.
OCFnx (Int.Req.)
= (8-bit Comparator )
OCRnx
OCnx
DATA BUS
TCNTn
WGMn1:0
Waveform Generator
top
FOCn
COMnx1:0
bottom
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 108
The OCR0x Register access may seem complex, but this is not case. When the double buffering
is enabled, the CPU has access to the OCR0x Buffer Register, and if double buffering is
disabled the CPU will access the OCR0x directly.
15.5.1 Force Output Compare
In non-PWM waveform generation modes, the match output of the comparator can be forced by
writing a one to the Force Output Compare (FOC0x) bit. Forcing compare match will not set the
OCF0x Flag or reload/clear the timer, but the OC0x pin will be updated as if a real compare
match had occurred (the COM0x1:0 bits settings define whether the OC0x pin is set, cleared or
toggled).
15.5.2 Compare Match Blocking by TCNT0 Write
All CPU write operations to the TCNT0 Register will block any compare match that occur in the
next timer clock cycle, even when the timer is stopped. This feature allows OCR0x to be
initialized to the same value as TCNT0 without triggering an interrupt when the Timer/Counter
clock is enabled.
15.5.3 Using the Output Compare Unit
Since writing TCNT0 in any mode of operation will block all compare matches for one timer clock
cycle, there are risks involved when changing TCNT0 when using the Output Compare Unit,
independently of whether the Timer/Counter is running or not. If the value written to TCNT0
equals the OCR0x value, the compare match will be missed, resulting in incorrect waveform
generation. Similarly, do not write the TCNT0 value equal to BOTTOM when the counter is
downcounting.
The setup of the OC0x should be performed before setting the Data Direction Register for the
port pin to output. The easiest way of setting the OC0x value is to use the Force Output
Compare (FOC0x) strobe bits in Normal mode. The OC0x Registers keep their values even
when changing between Waveform Generation modes.
Be aware that the COM0x1:0 bits are not double buffered together with the compare value.
Changing the COM0x1:0 bits will take effect immediately.
15.6 Compare Match Output Unit
The Compare Output mode (COM0x1:0) bits have two functions. The Waveform Generator uses
the COM0x1:0 bits for defining the Output Compare (OC0x) state at the next compare match.
Also, the COM0x1:0 bits control the OC0x pin output source. Figure 15-4 shows a simplified
schematic of the logic affected by the COM0x1:0 bit setting. The I/O Registers, I/O bits, and I/O
pins in the figure are shown in bold. Only the parts of the general I/O port control registers (DDR
and PORT) that are affected by the COM0x1:0 bits are shown. When referring to the OC0x
state, the reference is for the internal OC0x Register, not the OC0x pin. If a system reset occur,
the OC0x Register is reset to “0”.
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 109
Figure 15-4. Compare Match Output Unit, Schematic
The general I/O port function is overridden by the Output Compare (OC0x) from the Waveform
Generator if either of the COM0x1:0 bits are set. However, the OC0x pin direction (input or
output) is still controlled by the Data Direction Register (DDR) for the port pin. The Data
Direction Register bit for the OC0x pin (DDR_OC0x) must be set as output before the OC0x
value is visible on the pin. The port override function is independent of the Waveform Generation
mode.
The design of the Output Compare pin logic allows initialization of the OC0x state before the
output is enabled. Note that some COM0x1:0 bit settings are reserved for certain modes of
operation. See “Register Description” on page 116.
15.6.1 Compare Output Mode and Waveform Generation
The Waveform Generator uses the COM0x1:0 bits differently in Normal, CTC, and PWM modes.
For all modes, setting the COM0x1:0 = 0 tells the Waveform Generator that no action on the
OC0x Register is to be performed on the next compare match. For compare output actions in the
non-PWM modes refer to Table 15-2 on page 116. For fast PWM mode, refer to Table 15-3 on
page 116, and for phase correct PWM refer to Table 15-4 on page 117.
A change of the COM0x1:0 bits state will have effect at the first compare match after the bits are
written. For non-PWM modes, the action can be forced to have immediate effect by using the
FOC0x strobe bits.
15.7 Modes of Operation
The mode of operation, i.e., the behavior of the Timer/Counter and the Output Compare pins, is
defined by the combination of the Waveform Generation mode (WGM02:0) and Compare Output
mode (COM0x1:0) bits. The Compare Output mode bits do not affect the counting sequence,
while the Waveform Generation mode bits do. The COM0x1:0 bits control whether the PWM
output generated should be inverted or not (inverted or non-inverted PWM). For non-PWM
modes the COM0x1:0 bits control whether the output should be set, cleared, or toggled at a
compare match (See “Compare Match Output Unit” on page 108.).
For detailed timing information refer to “Timer/Counter Timing Diagrams” on page 114.
PORT
DDR
DQ
DQ
OCnx
Pin
OCnx
DQ
Waveform
Generator
COMnx1
COMnx0
0
1
DATA BUS
FOCn
clk
I/O
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 110
15.7.1 Normal Mode
The simplest mode of operation is the Normal mode (WGM02:0 = 0). In this mode the counting
direction is always up (incrementing), and no counter clear is performed. The counter simply
overruns when it passes its maximum 8-bit value (TOP = 0xFF) and then restarts from the
bottom (0x00). In normal operation the Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOV0) will be set in the
same timer clock cycle as the TCNT0 becomes zero. The TOV0 Flag in this case behaves like a
ninth bit, except that it is only set, not cleared. However, combined with the timer overflow
interrupt that automatically clears the TOV0 Flag, the timer resolution can be increased by
software. There are no special cases to consider in the Normal mode, a new counter value can
be written anytime.
The Output Compare unit can be used to generate interrupts at some given time. Using the
Output Compare to generate waveforms in Normal mode is not recommended, since this will
occupy too much of the CPU time.
15.7.2 Clear Timer on Compare Match (CTC) Mode
In Clear Timer on Compare or CTC mode (WGM02:0 = 2), the OCR0A Register is used to
manipulate the counter resolution. In CTC mode the counter is cleared to zero when the counter
value (TCNT0) matches the OCR0A. The OCR0A defines the top value for the counter, hence
also its resolution. This mode allows greater control of the compare match output frequency. It
also simplifies the operation of counting external events.
The timing diagram for the CTC mode is shown in Figure 15-5. The counter value (TCNT0)
increases until a compare match occurs between TCNT0 and OCR0A, and then counter
(TCNT0) is cleared.
Figure 15-5. CTC Mode, Timing Diagram
An interrupt can be generated each time the counter value reaches the TOP value by using the
OCF0A Flag. If the interrupt is enabled, the interrupt handler routine can be used for updating
the TOP value. However, changing TOP to a value close to BOTTOM when the counter is
running with none or a low prescaler value must be done with care since the CTC mode does
not have the double buffering feature. If the new value written to OCR0A is lower than the
current value of TCNT0, the counter will miss the compare match. The counter will then have to
count to its maximum value (0xFF) and wrap around starting at 0x00 before the compare match
can occur.
For generating a waveform output in CTC mode, the OC0A output can be set to toggle its logical
level on each compare match by setting the Compare Output mode bits to toggle mode
(COM0A1:0 = 1). The OC0A value will not be visible on the port pin unless the data direction for
T
CNTn
O
Cn
(
Toggle)
OCnx Interrupt Flag Set
1 4
P
eriod
2 3
(COMnx1:0 = 1)
F++++++A
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 111
the pin is set to output. The waveform generated will have a maximum frequency of fOC0 =
fclk_I/O/2 when OCR0A is set to zero (0x00). The waveform frequency is defined by the following
equation:
The N variable represents the prescale factor (1, 8, 64, 256, or 1024).
As for the Normal mode of operation, the TOV0 Flag is set in the same timer clock cycle that the
counter counts from MAX to 0x00.
15.7.3 Fast PWM Mode
The fast Pulse Width Modulation or fast PWM mode (WGM02:0 = 3 or 7) provides a high
frequency PWM waveform generation option. The fast PWM differs from the other PWM option
by its single-slope operation. The counter counts from BOTTOM to TOP then restarts from
BOTTOM. TOP is defined as 0xFF when WGM2:0 = 3, and OCR0A when WGM2:0 = 7. In non-
inverting Compare Output mode, the Output Compare (OC0x) is cleared on the compare match
between TCNT0 and OCR0x, and set at BOTTOM. In inverting Compare Output mode, the
output is set on compare match and cleared at BOTTOM. Due to the single-slope operation, the
operating frequency of the fast PWM mode can be twice as high as the phase correct PWM
mode that use dual-slope operation. This high frequency makes the fast PWM mode well suited
for power regulation, rectification, and DAC applications. High frequency allows physically small
sized external components (coils, capacitors), and therefore reduces total system cost.
In fast PWM mode, the counter is incremented until the counter value matches the TOP value.
The counter is then cleared at the following timer clock cycle. The timing diagram for the fast
PWM mode is shown in Figure 15-6. The TCNT0 value is in the timing diagram shown as a
histogram for illustrating the single-slope operation. The diagram includes non-inverted and
inverted PWM outputs. The small horizontal line marks on the TCNT0 slopes represent compare
matches between OCR0x and TCNT0.
Figure 15-6. Fast PWM Mode, Timing Diagram
The Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOV0) is set each time the counter reaches TOP. If the
interrupt is enabled, the interrupt handler routine can be used for updating the compare value.
fOCnx
fclk_I/O
2N1OCRnx+
--------------------------------------------------=
T
CNTn
OCRnx Update and
TOVn Interrupt Flag Set
1
P
eriod
2 3
O
Cnx
O
Cnx
(COMnx1:0 = 2)
(COMnx1:0 = 3)
OCRnx Interrupt Flag Se
t
4 5 6 7
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 112
In fast PWM mode, the compare unit allows generation of PWM waveforms on the OC0x pins.
Setting the COM0x1:0 bits to two will produce a non-inverted PWM and an inverted PWM output
can be generated by setting the COM0x1:0 to three: Setting the COM0A1:0 bits to one allows
the OC0A pin to toggle on Compare Matches if the WGM02 bit is set. This option is not available
for the OC0B pin (see Table 15-6 on page 117). The actual OC0x value will only be visible on
the port pin if the data direction for the port pin is set as output. The PWM waveform is
generated by setting (or clearing) the OC0x Register at the compare match between OCR0x and
TCNT0, and clearing (or setting) the OC0x Register at the timer clock cycle the counter is
cleared (changes from TOP to BOTTOM).
The PWM frequency for the output can be calculated by the following equation:
The N variable represents the prescale factor (1, 8, 64, 256, or 1024).
The extreme values for the OCR0A Register represents special cases when generating a PWM
waveform output in the fast PWM mode. If the OCR0A is set equal to BOTTOM, the output will
be a narrow spike for each MAX+1 timer clock cycle. Setting the OCR0A equal to MAX will result
in a constantly high or low output (depending on the polarity of the output set by the COM0A1:0
bits.)
A frequency (with 50% duty cycle) waveform output in fast PWM mode can be achieved by
setting OC0x to toggle its logical level on each compare match (COM0x1:0 = 1). The waveform
generated will have a maximum frequency of fOC0 = fclk_I/O/2 when OCR0A is set to zero. This
feature is similar to the OC0A toggle in CTC mode, except the double buffer feature of the
Output Compare unit is enabled in the fast PWM mode.
15.7.4 Phase Correct PWM Mode
The phase correct PWM mode (WGM02:0 = 1 or 5) provides a high resolution phase correct
PWM waveform generation option. The phase correct PWM mode is based on a dual-slope
operation. The counter counts repeatedly from BOTTOM to TOP and then from TOP to
BOTTOM. TOP is defined as 0xFF when WGM2:0 = 1, and OCR0A when WGM2:0 = 5. In non-
inverting Compare Output mode, the Output Compare (OC0x) is cleared on the compare match
between TCNT0 and OCR0x while upcounting, and set on the compare match while
downcounting. In inverting Output Compare mode, the operation is inverted. The dual-slope
operation has lower maximum operation frequency than single slope operation. However, due to
the symmetric feature of the dual-slope PWM modes, these modes are preferred for motor
control applications.
In phase correct PWM mode the counter is incremented until the counter value matches TOP.
When the counter reaches TOP, it changes the count direction. The TCNT0 value will be equal
to TOP for one timer clock cycle. The timing diagram for the phase correct PWM mode is shown
on Figure 15-7. The TCNT0 value is in the timing diagram shown as a histogram for illustrating
the dual-slope operation. The diagram includes non-inverted and inverted PWM outputs. The
small horizontal line marks on the TCNT0 slopes represent compare matches between OCR0x
and TCNT0.
fOCnxPWM
fclk_I/O
N256
------------------=
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 113
Figure 15-7. Phase Correct PWM Mode, Timing Diagram
The Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOV0) is set each time the counter reaches BOTTOM. The
Interrupt Flag can be used to generate an interrupt each time the counter reaches the BOTTOM
value.
In phase correct PWM mode, the compare unit allows generation of PWM waveforms on the
OC0x pins. Setting the COM0x1:0 bits to two will produce a non-inverted PWM. An inverted
PWM output can be generated by setting the COM0x1:0 to three: Setting the COM0A0 bits to
one allows the OC0A pin to toggle on Compare Matches if the WGM02 bit is set. This option is
not available for the OC0B pin (see Table 15-7 on page 118). The actual OC0x value will only be
visible on the port pin if the data direction for the port pin is set as output. The PWM waveform is
generated by clearing (or setting) the OC0x Register at the compare match between OCR0x and
TCNT0 when the counter increments, and setting (or clearing) the OC0x Register at compare
match between OCR0x and TCNT0 when the counter decrements. The PWM frequency for the
output when using phase correct PWM can be calculated by the following equation:
The N variable represents the prescale factor (1, 8, 64, 256, or 1024).
The extreme values for the OCR0A Register represent special cases when generating a PWM
waveform output in the phase correct PWM mode. If the OCR0A is set equal to BOTTOM, the
output will be continuously low and if set equal to MAX the output will be continuously high for
non-inverted PWM mode. For inverted PWM the output will have the opposite logic values.
At the very start of period 2 in Figure 15-7 OCnx has a transition from high to low even though
there is no Compare Match. The point of this transition is to ensure symmetry around BOTTOM.
There are two cases that give a transition without Compare Match.
• OCRnx changes its value from MAX, like in Figure 15-7. When the OCR0A value is MAX
the OCn pin value is the same as the result of a down-counting Compare Match. To
TOVn Interrupt Flag Set
OCnx Interrupt Flag Set
1 2 3
TCNTn
Period
OCnx
OCnx
(COMnx1:0 = 2)
(COMnx1:0 = 3)
OCRnx Update
fOCnxPCPWM
fclk_I/O
N510
------------------=
\‘j:
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 114
ensure symmetry around BOTTOM the OCnx value at MAX must correspond to the result
of an up-counting Compare Match.
• The timer starts counting from a value higher than the one in OCRnx, and for that reason
misses the Compare Match and hence the OCnx change that would have happened on
the way up.
15.8 Timer/Counter Timing Diagrams
The Timer/Counter is a synchronous design and the timer clock (clkT0) is therefore shown as a
clock enable signal in the following figures. The figures include information on when interrupt
flags are set. Figure 15-8 contains timing data for basic Timer/Counter operation. The figure
shows the count sequence close to the MAX value in all modes other than phase correct PWM
mode.
Figure 15-8. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, no Prescaling
Figure 15-9 shows the same timing data, but with the prescaler enabled.
Figure 15-9. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, with Prescaler (fclk_I/O/8)
Figure 15-10 shows the setting of OCF0B in all modes and OCF0A in all modes except CTC
mode and PWM mode, where OCR0A is TOP.
clk
Tn
(clk
I/O
/1)
TOVn
clk
I/O
TCNTn MAX - 1 MAX BOTTOM BOTTOM + 1
TOVn
TCNTn MAX - 1 MAX BOTTOM BOTTOM + 1
clk
I/O
clk
Tn
(clk
I/O
/8)
\I‘V; \‘j;
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 115
Figure 15-10. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, Setting of OCF0x, with Prescaler (fclk_I/O/8)
Figure 15-11 shows the setting of OCF0A and the clearing of TCNT0 in CTC mode and fast
PWM mode where OCR0A is TOP.
Figure 15-11. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, Clear Timer on Compare Match mode, with Prescaler
(fclk_I/O/8)
OCFnx
OCRnx
TCNTn
OCRnx Value
OCRnx - 1 OCRnx OCRnx + 1 OCRnx + 2
clkI/O
clkTn
(clk
I/O
/8)
OCFnx
OCRnx
TCNTn
(CTC)
TOP
TOP - 1 TOP BOTTOM BOTTOM + 1
clkI/O
clkTn
(clk
I/O
/8)
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 116
15.9 Register Description
15.9.1 TCCR0A – Timer/Counter Control Register A
• Bits 7:6 – COM0A[1:0]: Compare Match Output A Mode
These bits control the Output Compare pin (OC0A) behavior. If one or both of the COM0A1:0
bits are set, the OC0A output overrides the normal port functionality of the I/O pin it is connected
to. However, note that the Data Direction Register (DDR) bit corresponding to the OC0A pin
must be set in order to enable the output driver.
When OC0A is connected to the pin, the function of the COM0A1:0 bits depends on the
WGM02:0 bit setting. Table 15-2 shows the COM0A1:0 bit functionality when the WGM02:0 bits
are set to a normal or CTC mode (non-PWM).
Table 15-3 shows the COM0A1:0 bit functionality when the WGM01:0 bits are set to fast PWM
mode.
Note: 1. A special case occurs when OCR0A equals TOP and COM0A1 is set. In this case, the
Compare Match is ignored, but the set or clear is done at BOTTOM. See “Fast PWM Mode”
on page 111 for more details.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0x24 (0x44) COM0A1 COM0A0 COM0B1 COM0B0 – – WGM01 WGM00 TCCR0A
Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R R R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Table 15-2. Compare Output Mode, non-PWM Mode
COM0A1 COM0A0 Description
0 0 Normal port operation, OC0A disconnected.
0 1 Toggle OC0A on Compare Match
1 0 Clear OC0A on Compare Match
1 1 Set OC0A on Compare Match
Table 15-3. Compare Output Mode, Fast PWM Mode(1)
COM0A1 COM0A0 Description
0 0 Normal port operation, OC0A disconnected.
01
WGM02 = 0: Normal Port Operation, OC0A Disconnected.
WGM02 = 1: Toggle OC0A on Compare Match.
10
Clear OC0A on Compare Match, set OC0A at BOTTOM,
(non-inverting mode).
11
Set OC0A on Compare Match, clear OC0A at BOTTOM,
(inverting mode).
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 117
Table 15-4 shows the COM0A1:0 bit functionality when the WGM02:0 bits are set to phase
correct PWM mode.
Note: 1. A special case occurs when OCR0A equals TOP and COM0A1 is set. In this case, the
Compare Match is ignored, but the set or clear is done at TOP. See “Phase Correct PWM
Mode” on page 138 for more details.
• Bits 5:4 – COM0B1:0: Compare Match Output B Mode
These bits control the Output Compare pin (OC0B) behavior. If one or both of the COM0B1:0
bits are set, the OC0B output overrides the normal port functionality of the I/O pin it is connected
to. However, note that the Data Direction Register (DDR) bit corresponding to the OC0B pin
must be set in order to enable the output driver.
When OC0B is connected to the pin, the function of the COM0B1:0 bits depends on the
WGM02:0 bit setting. Table 15-5 shows the COM0B1:0 bit functionality when the WGM02:0 bits
are set to a normal or CTC mode (non-PWM).
Table 15-6 shows the COM0B1:0 bit functionality when the WGM02:0 bits are set to fast PWM
mode.
Note: 1. A special case occurs when OCR0B equals TOP and COM0B1 is set. In this case, the
Compare Match is ignored, but the set or clear is done at TOP. See “Fast PWM Mode” on
page 111 for more details.
Table 15-4. Compare Output Mode, Phase Correct PWM Mode(1)
COM0A1 COM0A0 Description
0 0 Normal port operation, OC0A disconnected.
01
WGM02 = 0: Normal Port Operation, OC0A Disconnected.
WGM02 = 1: Toggle OC0A on Compare Match.
10
Clear OC0A on Compare Match when up-counting. Set OC0A on
Compare Match when down-counting.
11
Set OC0A on Compare Match when up-counting. Clear OC0A on
Compare Match when down-counting.
Table 15-5. Compare Output Mode, non-PWM Mode
COM0B1 COM0B0 Description
0 0 Normal port operation, OC0B disconnected.
0 1 Toggle OC0B on Compare Match
1 0 Clear OC0B on Compare Match
1 1 Set OC0B on Compare Match
Table 15-6. Compare Output Mode, Fast PWM Mode(1)
COM0B1 COM0B0 Description
0 0 Normal port operation, OC0B disconnected.
01Reserved
10
Clear OC0B on Compare Match, set OC0B at BOTTOM,
(non-inverting mode)
11
Set OC0B on Compare Match, clear OC0B at BOTTOM,
(inverting mode).
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 118
Table 15-7 shows the COM0B1:0 bit functionality when the WGM02:0 bits are set to phase
correct PWM mode.
Note: 1. A special case occurs when OCR0B equals TOP and COM0B1 is set. In this case, the
Compare Match is ignored, but the set or clear is done at TOP. See “Phase Correct PWM
Mode” on page 112 for more details.
• Bits 3, 2 – Reserved
These bits are reserved bits in the ATmega48P/88P/168P and will always read as zero.
• Bits 1:0 – WGM01:0: Waveform Generation Mode
Combined with the WGM02 bit found in the TCCR0B Register, these bits control the counting
sequence of the counter, the source for maximum (TOP) counter value, and what type of
waveform generation to be used, see Table 15-8. Modes of operation supported by the
Timer/Counter unit are: Normal mode (counter), Clear Timer on Compare Match (CTC) mode,
and two types of Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) modes (see “Modes of Operation” on page
109).
Notes: 1. MAX = 0xFF
2. BOTTOM = 0x00
Table 15-7. Compare Output Mode, Phase Correct PWM Mode(1)
COM0B1 COM0B0 Description
0 0 Normal port operation, OC0B disconnected.
01Reserved
10
Clear OC0B on Compare Match when up-counting. Set OC0B on
Compare Match when down-counting.
11
Set OC0B on Compare Match when up-counting. Clear OC0B on
Compare Match when down-counting.
Table 15-8. Waveform Generation Mode Bit Description
Mode WGM02 WGM01 WGM00
Timer/Counter
Mode of
Operation TOP
Update of
OCRx at
TOV Flag
Set on(1)(2)
0 0 0 0 Normal 0xFF Immediate MAX
10 0 1
PWM, Phase
Correct 0xFF TOP BOTTOM
2 0 1 0 CTC OCRA Immediate MAX
3 0 1 1 Fast PWM 0xFF BOTTOM MAX
4 1 0 0 Reserved – – –
51 0 1
PWM, Phase
Correct OCRA TOP BOTTOM
6 1 1 0 Reserved – – –
7 1 1 1 Fast PWM OCRA BOTTOM TOP
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 119
15.9.2 TCCR0B – Timer/Counter Control Register B
• Bit 7 – FOC0A: Force Output Compare A
The FOC0A bit is only active when the WGM bits specify a non-PWM mode.
However, for ensuring compatibility with future devices, this bit must be set to zero when
TCCR0B is written when operating in PWM mode. When writing a logical one to the FOC0A bit,
an immediate Compare Match is forced on the Waveform Generation unit. The OC0A output is
changed according to its COM0A1:0 bits setting. Note that the FOC0A bit is implemented as a
strobe. Therefore it is the value present in the COM0A1:0 bits that determines the effect of the
forced compare.
A FOC0A strobe will not generate any interrupt, nor will it clear the timer in CTC mode using
OCR0A as TOP.
The FOC0A bit is always read as zero.
• Bit 6 – FOC0B: Force Output Compare B
The FOC0B bit is only active when the WGM bits specify a non-PWM mode.
However, for ensuring compatibility with future devices, this bit must be set to zero when
TCCR0B is written when operating in PWM mode. When writing a logical one to the FOC0B bit,
an immediate Compare Match is forced on the Waveform Generation unit. The OC0B output is
changed according to its COM0B1:0 bits setting. Note that the FOC0B bit is implemented as a
strobe. Therefore it is the value present in the COM0B1:0 bits that determines the effect of the
forced compare.
A FOC0B strobe will not generate any interrupt, nor will it clear the timer in CTC mode using
OCR0B as TOP.
The FOC0B bit is always read as zero.
• Bits 5:4 – Reserved
These bits are reserved bits in the ATmega48P/88P/168P and will always read as zero.
• Bit 3 – WGM02: Waveform Generation Mode
See the description in the “TCCR0A – Timer/Counter Control Register A” on page 116.
• Bits 2:0 – CS02:0: Clock Select
The three Clock Select bits select the clock source to be used by the Timer/Counter.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0x25 (0x45) FOC0A FOC0B – – WGM02 CS02 CS01 CS00 TCCR0B
Read/Write W W R R R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 120
If external pin modes are used for the Timer/Counter0, transitions on the T0 pin will clock the
counter even if the pin is configured as an output. This feature allows software control of the
counting.
15.9.3 TCNT0 – Timer/Counter Register
The Timer/Counter Register gives direct access, both for read and write operations, to the
Timer/Counter unit 8-bit counter. Writing to the TCNT0 Register blocks (removes) the Compare
Match on the following timer clock. Modifying the counter (TCNT0) while the counter is running,
introduces a risk of missing a Compare Match between TCNT0 and the OCR0x Registers.
15.9.4 OCR0A – Output Compare Register A
The Output Compare Register A contains an 8-bit value that is continuously compared with the
counter value (TCNT0). A match can be used to generate an Output Compare interrupt, or to
generate a waveform output on the OC0A pin.
15.9.5 OCR0B – Output Compare Register B
The Output Compare Register B contains an 8-bit value that is continuously compared with the
counter value (TCNT0). A match can be used to generate an Output Compare interrupt, or to
generate a waveform output on the OC0B pin.
Table 15-9. Clock Select Bit Description
CS02 CS01 CS00 Description
0 0 0 No clock source (Timer/Counter stopped)
001clk
I/O/(No prescaling)
010clk
I/O/8 (From prescaler)
011clk
I/O/64 (From prescaler)
100clk
I/O/256 (From prescaler)
101clk
I/O/1024 (From prescaler)
1 1 0 External clock source on T0 pin. Clock on falling edge.
1 1 1 External clock source on T0 pin. Clock on rising edge.
Bit 76543210
0x26 (0x46) TCNT0[7:0] TCNT0
Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 76543210
0x27 (0x47) OCR0A[7:0] OCR0A
Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 76543210
0x28 (0x48) OCR0B[7:0] OCR0B
Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 121
15.9.6 TIMSK0 – Timer/Counter Interrupt Mask Register
• Bits 7:3 – Reserved
These bits are reserved bits in the ATmega48P/88P/168P and will always read as zero.
• Bit 2 – OCIE0B: Timer/Counter Output Compare Match B Interrupt Enable
When the OCIE0B bit is written to one, and the I-bit in the Status Register is set, the
Timer/Counter Compare Match B interrupt is enabled. The corresponding interrupt is executed if
a Compare Match in Timer/Counter occurs, i.e., when the OCF0B bit is set in the Timer/Counter
Interrupt Flag Register – TIFR0.
• Bit 1 – OCIE0A: Timer/Counter0 Output Compare Match A Interrupt Enable
When the OCIE0A bit is written to one, and the I-bit in the Status Register is set, the
Timer/Counter0 Compare Match A interrupt is enabled. The corresponding interrupt is executed
if a Compare Match in Timer/Counter0 occurs, i.e., when the OCF0A bit is set in the
Timer/Counter 0 Interrupt Flag Register – TIFR0.
• Bit 0 – TOIE0: Timer/Counter0 Overflow Interrupt Enable
When the TOIE0 bit is written to one, and the I-bit in the Status Register is set, the
Timer/Counter0 Overflow interrupt is enabled. The corresponding interrupt is executed if an
overflow in Timer/Counter0 occurs, i.e., when the TOV0 bit is set in the Timer/Counter 0
Interrupt Flag Register – TIFR0.
15.9.7 TIFR0 – Timer/Counter 0 Interrupt Flag Register
• Bits 7:3 – Reserved
These bits are reserved bits in the ATmega48P/88P/168P and will always read as zero.
• Bit 2 – OCF0B: Timer/Counter 0 Output Compare B Match Flag
The OCF0B bit is set when a Compare Match occurs between the Timer/Counter and the data in
OCR0B – Output Compare Register0 B. OCF0B is cleared by hardware when executing the
corresponding interrupt handling vector. Alternatively, OCF0B is cleared by writing a logic one to
the flag. When the I-bit in SREG, OCIE0B (Timer/Counter Compare B Match Interrupt Enable),
and OCF0B are set, the Timer/Counter Compare Match Interrupt is executed.
• Bit 1 – OCF0A: Timer/Counter 0 Output Compare A Match Flag
The OCF0A bit is set when a Compare Match occurs between the Timer/Counter0 and the data
in OCR0A – Output Compare Register0. OCF0A is cleared by hardware when executing the
corresponding interrupt handling vector. Alternatively, OCF0A is cleared by writing a logic one to
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
(0x6E) – – – – – OCIE0B OCIE0A TOIE0 TIMSK0
Read/Write RRRRRR/WR/WR/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 76543210
0x15 (0x35) –––––OCF0BOCF0ATOV0TIFR0
Read/Write RRRRRR/WR/WR/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 122
the flag. When the I-bit in SREG, OCIE0A (Timer/Counter0 Compare Match Interrupt Enable),
and OCF0A are set, the Timer/Counter0 Compare Match Interrupt is executed.
• Bit 0 – TOV0: Timer/Counter0 Overflow Flag
The bit TOV0 is set when an overflow occurs in Timer/Counter0. TOV0 is cleared by hardware
when executing the corresponding interrupt handling vector. Alternatively, TOV0 is cleared by
writing a logic one to the flag. When the SREG I-bit, TOIE0 (Timer/Counter0 Overflow Interrupt
Enable), and TOV0 are set, the Timer/Counter0 Overflow interrupt is executed.
The setting of this flag is dependent of the WGM02:0 bit setting. Refer to Table 15-8, “Waveform
Generation Mode Bit Description” on page 118.
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 123
16. 16-bit Timer/Counter1 with PWM
16.1 Features
•True 16-bit Design (i.e., Allows 16-bit PWM)
•Two independent Output Compare Units
•Double Buffered Output Compare Registers
•One Input Capture Unit
•Input Capture Noise Canceler
•Clear Timer on Compare Match (Auto Reload)
•Glitch-free, Phase Correct Pulse Width Modulator (PWM)
•Variable PWM Period
•Frequency Generator
•External Event Counter
•Four independent interrupt Sources (TOV1, OCF1A, OCF1B, and ICF1)
16.2 Overview
The 16-bit Timer/Counter unit allows accurate program execution timing (event management),
wave generation, and signal timing measurement.
Most register and bit references in this section are written in general form. A lower case “n”
replaces the Timer/Counter number, and a lower case “x” replaces the Output Compare unit
channel. However, when using the register or bit defines in a program, the precise form must be
used, i.e., TCNT1 for accessing Timer/Counter1 counter value and so on.
A simplified block diagram of the 16-bit Timer/Counter is shown in Figure 16-1. For the actual
placement of I/O pins, refer to “Pinout ATmega48P/88P/168P” on page 10. CPU accessible I/O
Registers, including I/O bits and I/O pins, are shown in bold. The device-specific I/O Register
and bit locations are listed in the “Register Description” on page 144.
The PRTIM1 bit in “PRR – Power Reduction Register” on page 54 must be written to zero to
enable Timer/Counter1 module.
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 124
Figure 16-1. 16-bit Timer/Counter Block Diagram(1)
Note: 1. Refer to Figure 1-1 on page 10, Table 14-3 on page 92 and Table 14-9 on page 98 for
Timer/Counter1 pin placement and description.
16.2.1 Registers
The Timer/Counter (TCNT1), Output Compare Registers (OCR1A/B), and Input Capture
Register (ICR1) are all 16-bit registers. Special procedures must be followed when accessing
the 16-bit registers. These procedures are described in the section “Accessing 16-bit Registers”
on page 125. The Timer/Counter Control Registers (TCCR1A/B) are 8-bit registers and have no
CPU access restrictions. Interrupt requests (abbreviated to Int.Req. in the figure) signals are all
visible in the Timer Interrupt Flag Register (TIFR1). All interrupts are individually masked with
the Timer Interrupt Mask Register (TIMSK1). TIFR1 and TIMSK1 are not shown in the figure.
The Timer/Counter can be clocked internally, via the prescaler, or by an external clock source on
the T1 pin. The Clock Select logic block controls which clock source and edge the Timer/Counter
uses to increment (or decrement) its value. The Timer/Counter is inactive when no clock source
is selected. The output from the Clock Select logic is referred to as the timer clock (clkT1).
The double buffered Output Compare Registers (OCR1A/B) are compared with the
Timer/Counter value at all time. The result of the compare can be used by the Waveform
Generator to generate a PWM or variable frequency output on the Output Compare pin
(OC1A/B). See “Output Compare Units” on page 132. The compare match event will also set the
Clock Select
Timer/Counter
DATA BU S
OCRnA
OCRnB
ICRn
=
=
TCNTn
Waveform
Generation
Waveform
Generation
OCnA
OCnB
Noise
Canceler
ICPn
=
Fixed
TOP
Values
Edge
Detector
Control Logic
=
0
TOP BOTTOM
Count
Clear
Direction
TOVn
(Int.Req.)
OCnA
(Int.Req.)
OCnB
(Int.Req.)
ICFn (Int.Req.)
TCCRnA TCCRnB
( From Analog
Comparator Ouput )
Tn
Edge
Detector
( From Prescaler )
clk
Tn
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 125
Compare Match Flag (OCF1A/B) which can be used to generate an Output Compare interrupt
request.
The Input Capture Register can capture the Timer/Counter value at a given external (edge
triggered) event on either the Input Capture pin (ICP1) or on the Analog Comparator pins (See
“Analog Comparator” on page 258) The Input Capture unit includes a digital filtering unit (Noise
Canceler) for reducing the chance of capturing noise spikes.
The TOP value, or maximum Timer/Counter value, can in some modes of operation be defined
by either the OCR1A Register, the ICR1 Register, or by a set of fixed values. When using
OCR1A as TOP value in a PWM mode, the OCR1A Register can not be used for generating a
PWM output. However, the TOP value will in this case be double buffered allowing the TOP
value to be changed in run time. If a fixed TOP value is required, the ICR1 Register can be used
as an alternative, freeing the OCR1A to be used as PWM output.
16.2.2 Definitions
The following definitions are used extensively throughout the section:
16.3 Accessing 16-bit Registers
The TCNT1, OCR1A/B, and ICR1 are 16-bit registers that can be accessed by the AVR CPU via
the 8-bit data bus. The 16-bit register must be byte accessed using two read or write operations.
Each 16-bit timer has a single 8-bit register for temporary storing of the high byte of the 16-bit
access. The same temporary register is shared between all 16-bit registers within each 16-bit
timer. Accessing the low byte triggers the 16-bit read or write operation. When the low byte of a
16-bit register is written by the CPU, the high byte stored in the temporary register, and the low
byte written are both copied into the 16-bit register in the same clock cycle. When the low byte of
a 16-bit register is read by the CPU, the high byte of the 16-bit register is copied into the
temporary register in the same clock cycle as the low byte is read.
Not all 16-bit accesses uses the temporary register for the high byte. Reading the OCR1A/B 16-
bit registers does not involve using the temporary register.
To do a 16-bit write, the high byte must be written before the low byte. For a 16-bit read, the low
byte must be read before the high byte.
The following code examples show how to access the 16-bit Timer Registers assuming that no
interrupts updates the temporary register. The same principle can be used directly for accessing
the OCR1A/B and ICR1 Registers. Note that when using “C”, the compiler handles the 16-bit
access.
BOTTOM The counter reaches the BOTTOM when it becomes 0x0000.
MAX The counter reaches its MAXimum when it becomes 0xFFFF (decimal 65535).
TOP
The counter reaches the TOP when it becomes equal to the highest value in the count
sequence. The TOP value can be assigned to be one of the fixed values: 0x00FF, 0x01FF,
or 0x03FF, or to the value stored in the OCR1A or ICR1 Register. The assignment is
dependent of the mode of operation.
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 126
Note: 1. See ”About Code Examples” on page 16.
For I/O Registers located in extended I/O map, “IN”, “OUT”, “SBIS”, “SBIC”, “CBI”, and “SBI”
instructions must be replaced with instructions that allow access to extended I/O. Typically
“LDS” and “STS” combined with “SBRS”, “SBRC”, “SBR”, and “CBR”.
The assembly code example returns the TCNT1 value in the r17:r16 register pair.
It is important to notice that accessing 16-bit registers are atomic operations. If an interrupt
occurs between the two instructions accessing the 16-bit register, and the interrupt code
updates the temporary register by accessing the same or any other of the 16-bit Timer
Registers, then the result of the access outside the interrupt will be corrupted. Therefore, when
both the main code and the interrupt code update the temporary register, the main code must
disable the interrupts during the 16-bit access.
The following code examples show how to do an atomic read of the TCNT1 Register contents.
Reading any of the OCR1A/B or ICR1 Registers can be done by using the same principle.
Assembly Code Examples(1)
...
; Set TCNT1 to 0x01FF
ldi r17,0x01
ldi r16,0xFF
out TCNT1H,r17
out TCNT1L,r16
; Read TCNT1 into r17:r16
in r16,TCNT1L
in r17,TCNT1H
...
C Code Examples(1)
unsigned int i;
...
/* Set TCNT1 to 0x01FF */
TCNT1 = 0x1FF;
/* Read TCNT1 into i */
i = TCNT1;
...
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 127
Note: 1. See ”About Code Examples” on page 16.
For I/O Registers located in extended I/O map, “IN”, “OUT”, “SBIS”, “SBIC”, “CBI”, and “SBI”
instructions must be replaced with instructions that allow access to extended I/O. Typically
“LDS” and “STS” combined with “SBRS”, “SBRC”, “SBR”, and “CBR”.
The assembly code example returns the TCNT1 value in the r17:r16 register pair.
The following code examples show how to do an atomic write of the TCNT1 Register contents.
Writing any of the OCR1A/B or ICR1 Registers can be done by using the same principle.
Assembly Code Example(1)
TIM16_ReadTCNT1:
; Save global interrupt flag
in r18,SREG
; Disable interrupts
cli
; Read TCNT1 into r17:r16
in r16,TCNT1L
in r17,TCNT1H
; Restore global interrupt flag
out SREG,r18
ret
C Code Example(1)
unsigned int TIM16_ReadTCNT1( void )
{
unsigned char sreg;
unsigned int i;
/* Save global interrupt flag */
sreg = SREG;
/* Disable interrupts */
_CLI();
/* Read TCNT1 into i */
i = TCNT1;
/* Restore global interrupt flag */
SREG = sreg;
return i;
}
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 128
Note: 1. See ”About Code Examples” on page 16.
For I/O Registers located in extended I/O map, “IN”, “OUT”, “SBIS”, “SBIC”, “CBI”, and “SBI”
instructions must be replaced with instructions that allow access to extended I/O. Typically
“LDS” and “STS” combined with “SBRS”, “SBRC”, “SBR”, and “CBR”.
The assembly code example requires that the r17:r16 register pair contains the value to be
written to TCNT1.
16.3.1 Reusing the Temporary High Byte Register
If writing to more than one 16-bit register where the high byte is the same for all registers written,
then the high byte only needs to be written once. However, note that the same rule of atomic
operation described previously also applies in this case.
16.4 Timer/Counter Clock Sources
The Timer/Counter can be clocked by an internal or an external clock source. The clock source
is selected by the Clock Select logic which is controlled by the Clock Select (CS12:0) bits
located in the Timer/Counter control Register B (TCCR1B). For details on clock sources and
prescaler, see “Timer/Counter0 and Timer/Counter1 Prescalers” on page 152.
Assembly Code Example(1)
TIM16_WriteTCNT1:
; Save global interrupt flag
in r18,SREG
; Disable interrupts
cli
; Set TCNT1 to r17:r16
out TCNT1H,r17
out TCNT1L,r16
; Restore global interrupt flag
out SREG,r18
ret
C Code Example(1)
void TIM16_WriteTCNT1( unsigned int i )
{
unsigned char sreg;
unsigned int i;
/* Save global interrupt flag */
sreg = SREG;
/* Disable interrupts */
_CLI();
/* Set TCNT1 to i */
TCNT1 = i;
/* Restore global interrupt flag */
SREG = sreg;
}
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 129
16.5 Counter Unit
The main part of the 16-bit Timer/Counter is the programmable 16-bit bi-directional counter unit.
Figure 16-2 shows a block diagram of the counter and its surroundings.
Figure 16-2. Counter Unit Block Diagram
Signal description (internal signals):
Count: Increment or decrement TCNT1 by 1.
Direction: Select between increment and decrement.
Clear: Clear TCNT1 (set all bits to zero).
clkT1: Timer/Counter clock.
TOP: Signalize that TCNT1 has reached maximum value.
BOTTOM: Signalize that TCNT1 has reached minimum value (zero).
The 16-bit counter is mapped into two 8-bit I/O memory locations: Counter High (TCNT1H)
containing the upper eight bits of the counter, and Counter Low (TCNT1L) containing the lower
eight bits. The TCNT1H Register can only be indirectly accessed by the CPU. When the CPU
does an access to the TCNT1H I/O location, the CPU accesses the high byte temporary register
(TEMP). The temporary register is updated with the TCNT1H value when the TCNT1L is read,
and TCNT1H is updated with the temporary register value when TCNT1L is written. This allows
the CPU to read or write the entire 16-bit counter value within one clock cycle via the 8-bit data
bus. It is important to notice that there are special cases of writing to the TCNT1 Register when
the counter is counting that will give unpredictable results. The special cases are described in
the sections where they are of importance.
Depending on the mode of operation used, the counter is cleared, incremented, or decremented
at each timer clock (clkT1). The clkT1 can be generated from an external or internal clock source,
selected by the Clock Select bits (CS12:0). When no clock source is selected (CS12:0 = 0) the
timer is stopped. However, the TCNT1 value can be accessed by the CPU, independent of
whether clkT1 is present or not. A CPU write overrides (has priority over) all counter clear or
count operations.
The counting sequence is determined by the setting of the Waveform Generation mode bits
(WGM13:0) located in the Timer/Counter Control Registers A and B (TCCR1A and TCCR1B).
There are close connections between how the counter behaves (counts) and how waveforms
are generated on the Output Compare outputs OC1x. For more details about advanced counting
sequences and waveform generation, see “Modes of Operation” on page 135.
The Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOV1) is set according to the mode of operation selected by
the WGM13:0 bits. TOV1 can be used for generating a CPU interrupt.
TEMP (8-bit)
DATA BUS
(8-bit)
TCNTn (16-bit Counter)
TCNTnH (8-bit) TCNTnL (8-bit) Control Logic
Count
Clear
Direction
TOVn
(Int.Req.)
Clock Select
TOP BOTTOM
Tn
Edge
Detector
( From Prescaler )
clk
Tn
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 130
16.6 Input Capture Unit
The Timer/Counter incorporates an Input Capture unit that can capture external events and give
them a time-stamp indicating time of occurrence. The external signal indicating an event, or
multiple events, can be applied via the ICP1 pin or alternatively, via the analog-comparator unit.
The time-stamps can then be used to calculate frequency, duty-cycle, and other features of the
signal applied. Alternatively the time-stamps can be used for creating a log of the events.
The Input Capture unit is illustrated by the block diagram shown in Figure 16-3. The elements of
the block diagram that are not directly a part of the Input Capture unit are gray shaded. The
small “n” in register and bit names indicates the Timer/Counter number.
Figure 16-3. Input Capture Unit Block Diagram
When a change of the logic level (an event) occurs on the Input Capture pin (ICP1), alternatively
on the Analog Comparator output (ACO), and this change confirms to the setting of the edge
detector, a capture will be triggered. When a capture is triggered, the 16-bit value of the counter
(TCNT1) is written to the Input Capture Register (ICR1). The Input Capture Flag (ICF1) is set at
the same system clock as the TCNT1 value is copied into ICR1 Register. If enabled (ICIE1 = 1),
the Input Capture Flag generates an Input Capture interrupt. The ICF1 Flag is automatically
cleared when the interrupt is executed. Alternatively the ICF1 Flag can be cleared by software
by writing a logical one to its I/O bit location.
Reading the 16-bit value in the Input Capture Register (ICR1) is done by first reading the low
byte (ICR1L) and then the high byte (ICR1H). When the low byte is read the high byte is copied
into the high byte temporary register (TEMP). When the CPU reads the ICR1H I/O location it will
access the TEMP Register.
The ICR1 Register can only be written when using a Waveform Generation mode that utilizes
the ICR1 Register for defining the counter’s TOP value. In these cases the Waveform
Generation mode (WGM13:0) bits must be set before the TOP value can be written to the ICR1
Register. When writing the ICR1 Register the high byte must be written to the ICR1H I/O location
before the low byte is written to ICR1L.
ICFn (Int.Req.)
Analog
Comparator
WRITE ICRn (16-bit Register)
ICRnH (8-bit)
Noise
Canceler
ICPn
Edge
Detector
TEMP (8-bit)
DATA BUS
(8-bit)
ICRnL (8-bit)
TCNTn (16-bit Counter)
TCNTnH (8-bit) TCNTnL (8-bit)
ACIC* ICNC ICES
ACO*
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 131
For more information on how to access the 16-bit registers refer to “Accessing 16-bit Registers”
on page 125.
16.6.1 Input Capture Trigger Source
The main trigger source for the Input Capture unit is the Input Capture pin (ICP1).
Timer/Counter1 can alternatively use the Analog Comparator output as trigger source for the
Input Capture unit. The Analog Comparator is selected as trigger source by setting the Analog
Comparator Input Capture (ACIC) bit in the Analog Comparator Control and Status Register
(ACSR). Be aware that changing trigger source can trigger a capture. The Input Capture Flag
must therefore be cleared after the change.
Both the Input Capture pin (ICP1) and the Analog Comparator output (ACO) inputs are sampled
using the same technique as for the T1 pin (Figure 17-1 on page 152). The edge detector is also
identical. However, when the noise canceler is enabled, additional logic is inserted before the
edge detector, which increases the delay by four system clock cycles. Note that the input of the
noise canceler and edge detector is always enabled unless the Timer/Counter is set in a
Waveform Generation mode that uses ICR1 to define TOP.
An Input Capture can be triggered by software by controlling the port of the ICP1 pin.
16.6.2 Noise Canceler
The noise canceler improves noise immunity by using a simple digital filtering scheme. The
noise canceler input is monitored over four samples, and all four must be equal for changing the
output that in turn is used by the edge detector.
The noise canceler is enabled by setting the Input Capture Noise Canceler (ICNC1) bit in
Timer/Counter Control Register B (TCCR1B). When enabled the noise canceler introduces
additional four system clock cycles of delay from a change applied to the input, to the update of
the ICR1 Register. The noise canceler uses the system clock and is therefore not affected by the
prescaler.
16.6.3 Using the Input Capture Unit
The main challenge when using the Input Capture unit is to assign enough processor capacity
for handling the incoming events. The time between two events is critical. If the processor has
not read the captured value in the ICR1 Register before the next event occurs, the ICR1 will be
overwritten with a new value. In this case the result of the capture will be incorrect.
When using the Input Capture interrupt, the ICR1 Register should be read as early in the
interrupt handler routine as possible. Even though the Input Capture interrupt has relatively high
priority, the maximum interrupt response time is dependent on the maximum number of clock
cycles it takes to handle any of the other interrupt requests.
Using the Input Capture unit in any mode of operation when the TOP value (resolution) is
actively changed during operation, is not recommended.
Measurement of an external signal’s duty cycle requires that the trigger edge is changed after
each capture. Changing the edge sensing must be done as early as possible after the ICR1
Register has been read. After a change of the edge, the Input Capture Flag (ICF1) must be
cleared by software (writing a logical one to the I/O bit location). For measuring frequency only,
the clearing of the ICF1 Flag is not required (if an interrupt handler is used).
timer clock cycle
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 132
16.7 Output Compare Units
The 16-bit comparator continuously compares TCNT1 with the Output Compare Register
(OCR1x). If TCNT equals OCR1x the comparator signals a match. A match will set the Output
Compare Flag (OCF1x) at the next timer clock cycle. If enabled (OCIE1x = 1), the Output
Compare Flag generates an Output Compare interrupt. The OCF1x Flag is automatically
cleared when the interrupt is executed. Alternatively the OCF1x Flag can be cleared by software
by writing a logical one to its I/O bit location. The Waveform Generator uses the match signal to
generate an output according to operating mode set by the Waveform Generation mode
(WGM13:0) bits and Compare Output mode (COM1x1:0) bits. The TOP and BOTTOM signals
are used by the Waveform Generator for handling the special cases of the extreme values in
some modes of operation (See “Modes of Operation” on page 135.)
A special feature of Output Compare unit A allows it to define the Timer/Counter TOP value (i.e.,
counter resolution). In addition to the counter resolution, the TOP value defines the period time
for waveforms generated by the Waveform Generator.
Figure 16-4 shows a block diagram of the Output Compare unit. The small “n” in the register and
bit names indicates the device number (n = 1 for Timer/Counter 1), and the “x” indicates Output
Compare unit (A/B). The elements of the block diagram that are not directly a part of the Output
Compare unit are gray shaded.
Figure 16-4. Output Compare Unit, Block Diagram
The OCR1x Register is double buffered when using any of the twelve Pulse Width Modulation
(PWM) modes. For the Normal and Clear Timer on Compare (CTC) modes of operation, the
double buffering is disabled. The double buffering synchronizes the update of the OCR1x
Compare Register to either TOP or BOTTOM of the counting sequence. The synchronization
prevents the occurrence of odd-length, non-symmetrical PWM pulses, thereby making the
output glitch-free.
The OCR1x Register access may seem complex, but this is not case. When the double buffering
is enabled, the CPU has access to the OCR1x Buffer Register, and if double buffering is
OCFnx (Int.Req.)
=
(16-bit Comparator )
OCRnx Buffer (16-bit Register)
OCRnxH Buf. (8-bit)
OCnx
TEMP (8-bit)
DATA BUS
(8-bit)
OCRnxL Buf. (8-bit)
TCNTn (16-bit Counter)
TCNTnH (8-bit) TCNTnL (8-bit)
COMnx1:0WGMn3:0
OCRnx (16-bit Register)
OCRnxH (8-bit) OCRnxL (8-bit)
Waveform Generator
TOP
BOTTOM
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 133
disabled the CPU will access the OCR1x directly. The content of the OCR1x (Buffer or
Compare) Register is only changed by a write operation (the Timer/Counter does not update this
register automatically as the TCNT1 and ICR1 Register). Therefore OCR1x is not read via the
high byte temporary register (TEMP). However, it is a good practice to read the low byte first as
when accessing other 16-bit registers. Writing the OCR1x Registers must be done via the TEMP
Register since the compare of all 16 bits is done continuously. The high byte (OCR1xH) has to
be written first. When the high byte I/O location is written by the CPU, the TEMP Register will be
updated by the value written. Then when the low byte (OCR1xL) is written to the lower eight bits,
the high byte will be copied into the upper 8-bits of either the OCR1x buffer or OCR1x Compare
Register in the same system clock cycle.
For more information of how to access the 16-bit registers refer to “Accessing 16-bit Registers”
on page 125.
16.7.1 Force Output Compare
In non-PWM Waveform Generation modes, the match output of the comparator can be forced by
writing a one to the Force Output Compare (FOC1x) bit. Forcing compare match will not set the
OCF1x Flag or reload/clear the timer, but the OC1x pin will be updated as if a real compare
match had occurred (the COM11:0 bits settings define whether the OC1x pin is set, cleared or
toggled).
16.7.2 Compare Match Blocking by TCNT1 Write
All CPU writes to the TCNT1 Register will block any compare match that occurs in the next timer
clock cycle, even when the timer is stopped. This feature allows OCR1x to be initialized to the
same value as TCNT1 without triggering an interrupt when the Timer/Counter clock is enabled.
16.7.3 Using the Output Compare Unit
Since writing TCNT1 in any mode of operation will block all compare matches for one timer clock
cycle, there are risks involved when changing TCNT1 when using any of the Output Compare
channels, independent of whether the Timer/Counter is running or not. If the value written to
TCNT1 equals the OCR1x value, the compare match will be missed, resulting in incorrect
waveform generation. Do not write the TCNT1 equal to TOP in PWM modes with variable TOP
values. The compare match for the TOP will be ignored and the counter will continue to 0xFFFF.
Similarly, do not write the TCNT1 value equal to BOTTOM when the counter is downcounting.
The setup of the OC1x should be performed before setting the Data Direction Register for the
port pin to output. The easiest way of setting the OC1x value is to use the Force Output
Compare (FOC1x) strobe bits in Normal mode. The OC1x Register keeps its value even when
changing between Waveform Generation modes.
Be aware that the COM1x1:0 bits are not double buffered together with the compare value.
Changing the COM1x1:0 bits will take effect immediately.
16.8 Compare Match Output Unit
The Compare Output mode (COM1x1:0) bits have two functions. The Waveform Generator uses
the COM1x1:0 bits for defining the Output Compare (OC1x) state at the next compare match.
Secondly the COM1x1:0 bits control the OC1x pin output source. Figure 16-5 shows a simplified
schematic of the logic affected by the COM1x1:0 bit setting. The I/O Registers, I/O bits, and I/O
pins in the figure are shown in bold. Only the parts of the general I/O Port Control Registers
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 134
(DDR and PORT) that are affected by the COM1x1:0 bits are shown. When referring to the
OC1x state, the reference is for the internal OC1x Register, not the OC1x pin. If a system reset
occur, the OC1x Register is reset to “0”.
Figure 16-5. Compare Match Output Unit, Schematic
The general I/O port function is overridden by the Output Compare (OC1x) from the Waveform
Generator if either of the COM1x1:0 bits are set. However, the OC1x pin direction (input or
output) is still controlled by the Data Direction Register (DDR) for the port pin. The Data
Direction Register bit for the OC1x pin (DDR_OC1x) must be set as output before the OC1x
value is visible on the pin. The port override function is generally independent of the Waveform
Generation mode, but there are some exceptions. Refer to Table 16-1, Table 16-2 and Table 16-
3 for details.
The design of the Output Compare pin logic allows initialization of the OC1x state before the
output is enabled. Note that some COM1x1:0 bit settings are reserved for certain modes of
operation. See “Register Description” on page 144.
The COM1x1:0 bits have no effect on the Input Capture unit.
16.8.1 Compare Output Mode and Waveform Generation
The Waveform Generator uses the COM1x1:0 bits differently in normal, CTC, and PWM modes.
For all modes, setting the COM1x1:0 = 0 tells the Waveform Generator that no action on the
OC1x Register is to be performed on the next compare match. For compare output actions in the
non-PWM modes refer to Table 16-1 on page 144. For fast PWM mode refer to Table 16-2 on
page 146, and for phase correct and phase and frequency correct PWM refer to Table 16-3 on
page 146.
A change of the COM1x1:0 bits state will have effect at the first compare match after the bits are
written. For non-PWM modes, the action can be forced to have immediate effect by using the
FOC1x strobe bits.
PORT
DDR
DQ
DQ
OCnx
Pin
OCnx
DQ
Waveform
Generator
COMnx1
COMnx0
0
1
DATA B US
FOCnx
clk
I/O
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 135
16.9 Modes of Operation
The mode of operation, i.e., the behavior of the Timer/Counter and the Output Compare pins, is
defined by the combination of the Waveform Generation mode (WGM13:0) and Compare Output
mode (COM1x1:0) bits. The Compare Output mode bits do not affect the counting sequence,
while the Waveform Generation mode bits do. The COM1x1:0 bits control whether the PWM
output generated should be inverted or not (inverted or non-inverted PWM). For non-PWM
modes the COM1x1:0 bits control whether the output should be set, cleared or toggle at a
compare match (See “Compare Match Output Unit” on page 133.)
For detailed timing information refer to “Timer/Counter Timing Diagrams” on page 142.
16.9.1 Normal Mode
The simplest mode of operation is the Normal mode (WGM13:0 = 0). In this mode the counting
direction is always up (incrementing), and no counter clear is performed. The counter simply
overruns when it passes its maximum 16-bit value (MAX = 0xFFFF) and then restarts from the
BOTTOM (0x0000). In normal operation the Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOV1) will be set in
the same timer clock cycle as the TCNT1 becomes zero. The TOV1 Flag in this case behaves
like a 17th bit, except that it is only set, not cleared. However, combined with the timer overflow
interrupt that automatically clears the TOV1 Flag, the timer resolution can be increased by
software. There are no special cases to consider in the Normal mode, a new counter value can
be written anytime.
The Input Capture unit is easy to use in Normal mode. However, observe that the maximum
interval between the external events must not exceed the resolution of the counter. If the interval
between events are too long, the timer overflow interrupt or the prescaler must be used to
extend the resolution for the capture unit.
The Output Compare units can be used to generate interrupts at some given time. Using the
Output Compare to generate waveforms in Normal mode is not recommended, since this will
occupy too much of the CPU time.
16.9.2 Clear Timer on Compare Match (CTC) Mode
In Clear Timer on Compare or CTC mode (WGM13:0 = 4 or 12), the OCR1A or ICR1 Register
are used to manipulate the counter resolution. In CTC mode the counter is cleared to zero when
the counter value (TCNT1) matches either the OCR1A (WGM13:0 = 4) or the ICR1 (WGM13:0 =
12). The OCR1A or ICR1 define the top value for the counter, hence also its resolution. This
mode allows greater control of the compare match output frequency. It also simplifies the
operation of counting external events.
The timing diagram for the CTC mode is shown in Figure 16-6. The counter value (TCNT1)
increases until a compare match occurs with either OCR1A or ICR1, and then counter (TCNT1)
is cleared.
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 136
Figure 16-6. CTC Mode, Timing Diagram
An interrupt can be generated at each time the counter value reaches the TOP value by either
using the OCF1A or ICF1 Flag according to the register used to define the TOP value. If the
interrupt is enabled, the interrupt handler routine can be used for updating the TOP value.
However, changing the TOP to a value close to BOTTOM when the counter is running with none
or a low prescaler value must be done with care since the CTC mode does not have the double
buffering feature. If the new value written to OCR1A or ICR1 is lower than the current value of
TCNT1, the counter will miss the compare match. The counter will then have to count to its
maximum value (0xFFFF) and wrap around starting at 0x0000 before the compare match can
occur. In many cases this feature is not desirable. An alternative will then be to use the fast
PWM mode using OCR1A for defining TOP (WGM13:0 = 15) since the OCR1A then will be
double buffered.
For generating a waveform output in CTC mode, the OC1A output can be set to toggle its logical
level on each compare match by setting the Compare Output mode bits to toggle mode
(COM1A1:0 = 1). The OC1A value will not be visible on the port pin unless the data direction for
the pin is set to output (DDR_OC1A = 1). The waveform generated will have a maximum
frequency of fOC1A = fclk_I/O/2 when OCR1A is set to zero (0x0000). The waveform frequency is
defined by the following equation:
The N variable represents the prescaler factor (1, 8, 64, 256, or 1024).
As for the Normal mode of operation, the TOV1 Flag is set in the same timer clock cycle that the
counter counts from MAX to 0x0000.
16.9.3 Fast PWM Mode
The fast Pulse Width Modulation or fast PWM mode (WGM13:0 = 5, 6, 7, 14, or 15) provides a
high frequency PWM waveform generation option. The fast PWM differs from the other PWM
options by its single-slope operation. The counter counts from BOTTOM to TOP then restarts
from BOTTOM. In non-inverting Compare Output mode, the Output Compare (OC1x) is cleared
on the compare match between TCNT1 and OCR1x, and set at BOTTOM. In inverting Compare
Output mode output is set on compare match and cleared at BOTTOM. Due to the single-slope
operation, the operating frequency of the fast PWM mode can be twice as high as the phase
correct and phase and frequency correct PWM modes that use dual-slope operation. This high
frequency makes the fast PWM mode well suited for power regulation, rectification, and DAC
applications. High frequency allows physically small sized external components (coils,
capacitors), hence reduces total system cost.
TCNTn
OCnA
(Toggle)
OCnA Interrupt Flag Set
or ICFn Interrupt Flag Set
(Interrupt on TOP)
1 4
Period
2 3
(COMnA1:0 = 1)
fOCnA
fclk_I/O
2N1OCRnA+
---------------------------------------------------=
,_J_|'U_4L — w F+++Mk+4
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 137
The PWM resolution for fast PWM can be fixed to 8-, 9-, or 10-bit, or defined by either ICR1 or
OCR1A. The minimum resolution allowed is 2-bit (ICR1 or OCR1A set to 0x0003), and the
maximum resolution is 16-bit (ICR1 or OCR1A set to MAX). The PWM resolution in bits can be
calculated by using the following equation:
In fast PWM mode the counter is incremented until the counter value matches either one of the
fixed values 0x00FF, 0x01FF, or 0x03FF (WGM13:0 = 5, 6, or 7), the value in ICR1 (WGM13:0 =
14), or the value in OCR1A (WGM13:0 = 15). The counter is then cleared at the following timer
clock cycle. The timing diagram for the fast PWM mode is shown in Figure 16-7. The figure
shows fast PWM mode when OCR1A or ICR1 is used to define TOP. The TCNT1 value is in the
timing diagram shown as a histogram for illustrating the single-slope operation. The diagram
includes non-inverted and inverted PWM outputs. The small horizontal line marks on the TCNT1
slopes represent compare matches between OCR1x and TCNT1. The OC1x Interrupt Flag will
be set when a compare match occurs.
Figure 16-7. Fast PWM Mode, Timing Diagram
The Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOV1) is set each time the counter reaches TOP. In addition
the OC1A or ICF1 Flag is set at the same timer clock cycle as TOV1 is set when either OCR1A
or ICR1 is used for defining the TOP value. If one of the interrupts are enabled, the interrupt
handler routine can be used for updating the TOP and compare values.
When changing the TOP value the program must ensure that the new TOP value is higher or
equal to the value of all of the Compare Registers. If the TOP value is lower than any of the
Compare Registers, a compare match will never occur between the TCNT1 and the OCR1x.
Note that when using fixed TOP values the unused bits are masked to zero when any of the
OCR1x Registers are written.
The procedure for updating ICR1 differs from updating OCR1A when used for defining the TOP
value. The ICR1 Register is not double buffered. This means that if ICR1 is changed to a low
value when the counter is running with none or a low prescaler value, there is a risk that the new
ICR1 value written is lower than the current value of TCNT1. The result will then be that the
counter will miss the compare match at the TOP value. The counter will then have to count to the
MAX value (0xFFFF) and wrap around starting at 0x0000 before the compare match can occur.
The OCR1A Register however, is double buffered. This feature allows the OCR1A I/O location
to be written anytime. When the OCR1A I/O location is written the value written will be put into
RFPWM
TOP 1+log
2log
-----------------------------------=
TCNTn
OCRnx/TOP Update and
TOVn Interrupt Flag Set and
OCnA Interrupt Flag Set
or ICFn Interrupt Flag Set
(Interrupt on TOP)
1 7
Period
2 3 4 5 6 8
OCnx
OCnx
(COMnx1:0 = 2)
(COMnx1:0 = 3)
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 138
the OCR1A Buffer Register. The OCR1A Compare Register will then be updated with the value
in the Buffer Register at the next timer clock cycle the TCNT1 matches TOP. The update is done
at the same timer clock cycle as the TCNT1 is cleared and the TOV1 Flag is set.
Using the ICR1 Register for defining TOP works well when using fixed TOP values. By using
ICR1, the OCR1A Register is free to be used for generating a PWM output on OC1A. However,
if the base PWM frequency is actively changed (by changing the TOP value), using the OCR1A
as TOP is clearly a better choice due to its double buffer feature.
In fast PWM mode, the compare units allow generation of PWM waveforms on the OC1x pins.
Setting the COM1x1:0 bits to two will produce a inverted PWM and an non-inverted PWM output
can be generated by setting the COM1x1:0 to three (see Table 16-3 on page 146). The actual
OC1x value will only be visible on the port pin if the data direction for the port pin is set as output
(DDR_OC1x). The PWM waveform is generated by setting (or clearing) the OC1x Register at
the compare match between OCR1x and TCNT1, and clearing (or setting) the OC1x Register at
the timer clock cycle the counter is cleared (changes from TOP to BOTTOM).
The PWM frequency for the output can be calculated by the following equation:
The N variable represents the prescaler divider (1, 8, 64, 256, or 1024).
The extreme values for the OCR1x Register represents special cases when generating a PWM
waveform output in the fast PWM mode. If the OCR1x is set equal to BOTTOM (0x0000) the
output will be a narrow spike for each TOP+1 timer clock cycle. Setting the OCR1x equal to TOP
will result in a constant high or low output (depending on the polarity of the output set by the
COM1x1:0 bits.)
A frequency (with 50% duty cycle) waveform output in fast PWM mode can be achieved by
setting OC1A to toggle its logical level on each compare match (COM1A1:0 = 1). This applies
only if OCR1A is used to define the TOP value (WGM13:0 = 15). The waveform generated will
have a maximum frequency of fOC1A = fclk_I/O/2 when OCR1A is set to zero (0x0000). This feature
is similar to the OC1A toggle in CTC mode, except the double buffer feature of the Output
Compare unit is enabled in the fast PWM mode.
16.9.4 Phase Correct PWM Mode
The phase correct Pulse Width Modulation or phase correct PWM mode (WGM13:0 = 1, 2, 3,
10, or 11) provides a high resolution phase correct PWM waveform generation option. The
phase correct PWM mode is, like the phase and frequency correct PWM mode, based on a dual-
slope operation. The counter counts repeatedly from BOTTOM (0x0000) to TOP and then from
TOP to BOTTOM. In non-inverting Compare Output mode, the Output Compare (OC1x) is
cleared on the compare match between TCNT1 and OCR1x while upcounting, and set on the
compare match while downcounting. In inverting Output Compare mode, the operation is
inverted. The dual-slope operation has lower maximum operation frequency than single slope
operation. However, due to the symmetric feature of the dual-slope PWM modes, these modes
are preferred for motor control applications.
The PWM resolution for the phase correct PWM mode can be fixed to 8-, 9-, or 10-bit, or defined
by either ICR1 or OCR1A. The minimum resolution allowed is 2-bit (ICR1 or OCR1A set to
fOCnxPWM
fclk_I/O
N1TOP+
-----------------------------------=
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 139
0x0003), and the maximum resolution is 16-bit (ICR1 or OCR1A set to MAX). The PWM
resolution in bits can be calculated by using the following equation:
In phase correct PWM mode the counter is incremented until the counter value matches either
one of the fixed values 0x00FF, 0x01FF, or 0x03FF (WGM13:0 = 1, 2, or 3), the value in ICR1
(WGM13:0 = 10), or the value in OCR1A (WGM13:0 = 11). The counter has then reached the
TOP and changes the count direction. The TCNT1 value will be equal to TOP for one timer clock
cycle. The timing diagram for the phase correct PWM mode is shown on Figure 16-8. The figure
shows phase correct PWM mode when OCR1A or ICR1 is used to define TOP. The TCNT1
value is in the timing diagram shown as a histogram for illustrating the dual-slope operation. The
diagram includes non-inverted and inverted PWM outputs. The small horizontal line marks on
the TCNT1 slopes represent compare matches between OCR1x and TCNT1. The OC1x
Interrupt Flag will be set when a compare match occurs.
Figure 16-8. Phase Correct PWM Mode, Timing Diagram
The Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOV1) is set each time the counter reaches BOTTOM. When
either OCR1A or ICR1 is used for defining the TOP value, the OC1A or ICF1 Flag is set
accordingly at the same timer clock cycle as the OCR1x Registers are updated with the double
buffer value (at TOP). The Interrupt Flags can be used to generate an interrupt each time the
counter reaches the TOP or BOTTOM value.
When changing the TOP value the program must ensure that the new TOP value is higher or
equal to the value of all of the Compare Registers. If the TOP value is lower than any of the
Compare Registers, a compare match will never occur between the TCNT1 and the OCR1x.
Note that when using fixed TOP values, the unused bits are masked to zero when any of the
OCR1x Registers are written. As the third period shown in Figure 16-8 illustrates, changing the
TOP actively while the Timer/Counter is running in the phase correct mode can result in an
unsymmetrical output. The reason for this can be found in the time of update of the OCR1x
Register. Since the OCR1x update occurs at TOP, the PWM period starts and ends at TOP. This
implies that the length of the falling slope is determined by the previous TOP value, while the
RPCPWM
TOP 1+log
2log
-----------------------------------=
OCRnx/TOP Update and
OCnA Interrupt Flag Set
or ICFn Interrupt Flag Set
(Interrupt on TOP)
1 2 3 4
TOVn Interrupt Flag Set
(Interrupt on Bottom)
TCNTn
Period
OCnx
OCnx
(COMnx1:0 = 2)
(COMnx1:0 = 3)
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 140
length of the rising slope is determined by the new TOP value. When these two values differ the
two slopes of the period will differ in length. The difference in length gives the unsymmetrical
result on the output.
It is recommended to use the phase and frequency correct mode instead of the phase correct
mode when changing the TOP value while the Timer/Counter is running. When using a static
TOP value there are practically no differences between the two modes of operation.
In phase correct PWM mode, the compare units allow generation of PWM waveforms on the
OC1x pins. Setting the COM1x1:0 bits to two will produce a non-inverted PWM and an inverted
PWM output can be generated by setting the COM1x1:0 to three (see Table 16-3 on page 146).
The actual OC1x value will only be visible on the port pin if the data direction for the port pin is
set as output (DDR_OC1x). The PWM waveform is generated by setting (or clearing) the OC1x
Register at the compare match between OCR1x and TCNT1 when the counter increments, and
clearing (or setting) the OC1x Register at compare match between OCR1x and TCNT1 when
the counter decrements. The PWM frequency for the output when using phase correct PWM can
be calculated by the following equation:
The N variable represents the prescaler divider (1, 8, 64, 256, or 1024).
The extreme values for the OCR1x Register represent special cases when generating a PWM
waveform output in the phase correct PWM mode. If the OCR1x is set equal to BOTTOM the
output will be continuously low and if set equal to TOP the output will be continuously high for
non-inverted PWM mode. For inverted PWM the output will have the opposite logic values. If
OCR1A is used to define the TOP value (WGM13:0 = 11) and COM1A1:0 = 1, the OC1A output
will toggle with a 50% duty cycle.
16.9.5 Phase and Frequency Correct PWM Mode
The phase and frequency correct Pulse Width Modulation, or phase and frequency correct PWM
mode (WGM13:0 = 8 or 9) provides a high resolution phase and frequency correct PWM
waveform generation option. The phase and frequency correct PWM mode is, like the phase
correct PWM mode, based on a dual-slope operation. The counter counts repeatedly from
BOTTOM (0x0000) to TOP and then from TOP to BOTTOM. In non-inverting Compare Output
mode, the Output Compare (OC1x) is cleared on the compare match between TCNT1 and
OCR1x while upcounting, and set on the compare match while downcounting. In inverting
Compare Output mode, the operation is inverted. The dual-slope operation gives a lower
maximum operation frequency compared to the single-slope operation. However, due to the
symmetric feature of the dual-slope PWM modes, these modes are preferred for motor control
applications.
The main difference between the phase correct, and the phase and frequency correct PWM
mode is the time the OCR1x Register is updated by the OCR1x Buffer Register, (see Figure 16-
8 and Figure 16-9).
The PWM resolution for the phase and frequency correct PWM mode can be defined by either
ICR1 or OCR1A. The minimum resolution allowed is 2-bit (ICR1 or OCR1A set to 0x0003), and
fOCnxPCPWM
fclk_I/O
2NTOP
----------------------------=
+——+——+4——4
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 141
the maximum resolution is 16-bit (ICR1 or OCR1A set to MAX). The PWM resolution in bits can
be calculated using the following equation:
In phase and frequency correct PWM mode the counter is incremented until the counter value
matches either the value in ICR1 (WGM13:0 = 8), or the value in OCR1A (WGM13:0 = 9). The
counter has then reached the TOP and changes the count direction. The TCNT1 value will be
equal to TOP for one timer clock cycle. The timing diagram for the phase correct and frequency
correct PWM mode is shown on Figure 16-9. The figure shows phase and frequency correct
PWM mode when OCR1A or ICR1 is used to define TOP. The TCNT1 value is in the timing
diagram shown as a histogram for illustrating the dual-slope operation. The diagram includes
non-inverted and inverted PWM outputs. The small horizontal line marks on the TCNT1 slopes
represent compare matches between OCR1x and TCNT1. The OC1x Interrupt Flag will be set
when a compare match occurs.
Figure 16-9. Phase and Frequency Correct PWM Mode, Timing Diagram
The Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOV1) is set at the same timer clock cycle as the OCR1x
Registers are updated with the double buffer value (at BOTTOM). When either OCR1A or ICR1
is used for defining the TOP value, the OC1A or ICF1 Flag set when TCNT1 has reached TOP.
The Interrupt Flags can then be used to generate an interrupt each time the counter reaches the
TOP or BOTTOM value.
When changing the TOP value the program must ensure that the new TOP value is higher or
equal to the value of all of the Compare Registers. If the TOP value is lower than any of the
Compare Registers, a compare match will never occur between the TCNT1 and the OCR1x.
As Figure 16-9 shows the output generated is, in contrast to the phase correct mode,
symmetrical in all periods. Since the OCR1x Registers are updated at BOTTOM, the length of
the rising and the falling slopes will always be equal. This gives symmetrical output pulses and is
therefore frequency correct.
Using the ICR1 Register for defining TOP works well when using fixed TOP values. By using
ICR1, the OCR1A Register is free to be used for generating a PWM output on OC1A. However,
RPFCPWM
TOP 1+log
2log
-----------------------------------=
OCRnx/TOP Updateand
TOVn Interrupt Flag Set
(Interrupt on Bottom)
OCnA Interrupt Flag Set
or ICFn Interrupt Flag Set
(Interrupt on TOP)
1 2 3 4
TCNTn
Period
OCnx
OCnx
(COMnx1:0 = 2)
(COMnx1:0 = 3)
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 142
if the base PWM frequency is actively changed by changing the TOP value, using the OCR1A as
TOP is clearly a better choice due to its double buffer feature.
In phase and frequency correct PWM mode, the compare units allow generation of PWM
waveforms on the OC1x pins. Setting the COM1x1:0 bits to two will produce a non-inverted
PWM and an inverted PWM output can be generated by setting the COM1x1:0 to three (see
Table 16-3 on page 146). The actual OC1x value will only be visible on the port pin if the data
direction for the port pin is set as output (DDR_OC1x). The PWM waveform is generated by
setting (or clearing) the OC1x Register at the compare match between OCR1x and TCNT1
when the counter increments, and clearing (or setting) the OC1x Register at compare match
between OCR1x and TCNT1 when the counter decrements. The PWM frequency for the output
when using phase and frequency correct PWM can be calculated by the following equation:
The N variable represents the prescaler divider (1, 8, 64, 256, or 1024).
The extreme values for the OCR1x Register represents special cases when generating a PWM
waveform output in the phase correct PWM mode. If the OCR1x is set equal to BOTTOM the
output will be continuously low and if set equal to TOP the output will be set to high for non-
inverted PWM mode. For inverted PWM the output will have the opposite logic values. If OCR1A
is used to define the TOP value (WGM13:0 = 9) and COM1A1:0 = 1, the OC1A output will toggle
with a 50% duty cycle.
16.10 Timer/Counter Timing Diagrams
The Timer/Counter is a synchronous design and the timer clock (clkT1) is therefore shown as a
clock enable signal in the following figures. The figures include information on when Interrupt
Flags are set, and when the OCR1x Register is updated with the OCR1x buffer value (only for
modes utilizing double buffering). Figure 16-10 shows a timing diagram for the setting of OCF1x.
Figure 16-10. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, Setting of OCF1x, no Prescaling
Figure 16-11 shows the same timing data, but with the prescaler enabled.
fOCnxPFCPWM
fclk_I/O
2NTOP
----------------------------=
clk
Tn
(clk
I/O
/1)
OCFnx
clk
I/O
OCRnx
TCNTn
OCRnx Value
OCRnx - 1 OCRnx OCRnx + 1 OCRnx + 2
\I‘I:I
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 143
Figure 16-11. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, Setting of OCF1x, with Prescaler (fclk_I/O/8)
Figure 16-12 shows the count sequence close to TOP in various modes. When using phase and
frequency correct PWM mode the OCR1x Register is updated at BOTTOM. The timing diagrams
will be the same, but TOP should be replaced by BOTTOM, TOP-1 by BOTTOM+1 and so on.
The same renaming applies for modes that set the TOV1 Flag at BOTTOM.
Figure 16-12. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, no Prescaling
OCFnx
OCRnx
TCNTn
OCRnx Value
OCRnx - 1 OCRnx OCRnx + 1 OCRnx + 2
clk
I/O
clk
Tn
(clk
I/O
/8)
TOVn (FPWM)
and ICFn (if used
as TOP)
OCRnx
(Update at TOP)
TCNTn
(CTC and FPWM)
TCNTn
(PC and PFC PWM) TOP - 1 TOP TOP - 1 TOP - 2
Old OCRnx Value New OCRnx Value
TOP - 1 TOP BOTTOM BOTTOM + 1
clk
Tn
(clk
I/O
/1)
clk
I/O
\II \—\,:|
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 144
Figure 16-13 shows the same timing data, but with the prescaler enabled.
Figure 16-13. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, with Prescaler (fclk_I/O/8)
16.11 Register Description
16.11.1 TCCR1A – Timer/Counter1 Control Register A
• Bit 7:6 – COM1A1:0: Compare Output Mode for Channel A
• Bit 5:4 – COM1B1:0: Compare Output Mode for Channel B
The COM1A1:0 and COM1B1:0 control the Output Compare pins (OC1A and OC1B
respectively) behavior. If one or both of the COM1A1:0 bits are written to one, the OC1A output
overrides the normal port functionality of the I/O pin it is connected to. If one or both of the
COM1B1:0 bit are written to one, the OC1B output overrides the normal port functionality of the
I/O pin it is connected to. However, note that the Data Direction Register (DDR) bit
corresponding to the OC1A or OC1B pin must be set in order to enable the output driver.
When the OC1A or OC1B is connected to the pin, the function of the COM1x1:0 bits is
dependent of the WGM13:0 bits setting. Table 16-1 shows the COM1x1:0 bit functionality when
the WGM13:0 bits are set to a Normal or a CTC mode (non-PWM).
TOVn (FPWM)
and ICFn (if used
as TOP)
OCRnx
(Update at TOP)
TCNTn
(CTC and FPWM)
TCNTn
(PC and PFC PWM) TOP - 1 TOP TOP - 1 TOP - 2
Old OCRnx Value New OCRnx Value
TOP - 1 TOP BOTTOM BOTTOM + 1
clk
I/O
clk
Tn
(clk
I/O
/8)
Bit 76543210
(0x80) COM1A1 COM1A0 COM1B1 COM1B0 – – WGM11 WGM10 TCCR1A
Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R R R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Table 16-1. Compare Output Mode, non-PWM
COM1A1/COM1B1 COM1A0/COM1B0 Description
0 0 Normal port operation, OC1A/OC1B disconnected.
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 145
0 1 Toggle OC1A/OC1B on Compare Match.
10
Clear OC1A/OC1B on Compare Match (Set output to
low level).
11
Set OC1A/OC1B on Compare Match (Set output to
high level).
Table 16-1. Compare Output Mode, non-PWM
COM1A1/COM1B1 COM1A0/COM1B0 Description
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 146
Table 16-2 shows the COM1x1:0 bit functionality when the WGM13:0 bits are set to the fast
PWM mode.
Note: 1. A special case occurs when OCR1A/OCR1B equals TOP and COM1A1/COM1B1 is set. In
this case the compare match is ignored, but the set or clear is done at BOTTOM. See “Fast
PWM Mode” on page 136. for more details.
Table 16-3 shows the COM1x1:0 bit functionality when the WGM13:0 bits are set to the phase
correct or the phase and frequency correct, PWM mode.
Note: 1. A special case occurs when OCR1A/OCR1B equals TOP and COM1A1/COM1B1 is set. See
“Phase Correct PWM Mode” on page 138. for more details.
• Bit 1:0 – WGM11:0: Waveform Generation Mode
Combined with the WGM13:2 bits found in the TCCR1B Register, these bits control the counting
sequence of the counter, the source for maximum (TOP) counter value, and what type of
waveform generation to be used, see Table 16-4. Modes of operation supported by the
Timer/Counter unit are: Normal mode (counter), Clear Timer on Compare match (CTC) mode,
and three types of Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) modes. (See “Modes of Operation” on page
135.).
Table 16-2. Compare Output Mode, Fast PWM(1)
COM1A1/COM1B1 COM1A0/COM1B0 Description
0 0 Normal port operation, OC1A/OC1B disconnected.
01
WGM13:0 = 14 or 15: Toggle OC1A on Compare
Match, OC1B disconnected (normal port operation).
For all other WGM1 settings, normal port operation,
OC1A/OC1B disconnected.
10
Clear OC1A/OC1B on Compare Match, set
OC1A/OC1B at BOTTOM (non-inverting mode)
11
Set OC1A/OC1B on Compare Match, clear
OC1A/OC1B at BOTTOM (inverting mode)
Table 16-3. Compare Output Mode, Phase Correct and Phase and Frequency Correct PWM(1)
COM1A1/COM1B1 COM1A0/COM1B0 Description
0 0 Normal port operation, OC1A/OC1B disconnected.
01
WGM13:0 = 9 or 11: Toggle OC1A on Compare
Match, OC1B disconnected (normal port operation).
For all other WGM1 settings, normal port operation,
OC1A/OC1B disconnected.
10
Clear OC1A/OC1B on Compare Match when up-
counting. Set OC1A/OC1B on Compare Match when
downcounting.
11
Set OC1A/OC1B on Compare Match when up-
counting. Clear OC1A/OC1B on Compare Match
when downcounting.
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 147
Note: 1. The CTC1 and PWM11:0 bit definition names are obsolete. Use the WGM12:0 definitions. However, the functionality and
location of these bits are compatible with previous versions of the timer.
16.11.2 TCCR1B – Timer/Counter1 Control Register B
• Bit 7 – ICNC1: Input Capture Noise Canceler
Setting this bit (to one) activates the Input Capture Noise Canceler. When the noise canceler is
activated, the input from the Input Capture pin (ICP1) is filtered. The filter function requires four
successive equal valued samples of the ICP1 pin for changing its output. The Input Capture is
therefore delayed by four Oscillator cycles when the noise canceler is enabled.
• Bit 6 – ICES1: Input Capture Edge Select
This bit selects which edge on the Input Capture pin (ICP1) that is used to trigger a capture
event. When the ICES1 bit is written to zero, a falling (negative) edge is used as trigger, and
when the ICES1 bit is written to one, a rising (positive) edge will trigger the capture.
When a capture is triggered according to the ICES1 setting, the counter value is copied into the
Input Capture Register (ICR1). The event will also set the Input Capture Flag (ICF1), and this
can be used to cause an Input Capture Interrupt, if this interrupt is enabled.
Table 16-4. Waveform Generation Mode Bit Description(1)
Mode WGM13
WGM12
(CTC1)
WGM11
(PWM11)
WGM10
(PWM10)
Timer/Counter Mode of
Operation TOP
Update of
OCR1x at
TOV1 Flag
Set on
00000Normal 0xFFFFImmediateMAX
10001PWM, Phase Correct, 8-bit0x00FFTOPBOTTOM
20010PWM, Phase Correct, 9-bit0x01FFTOPBOTTOM
30011PWM, Phase Correct, 10-bit0x03FFTOPBOTTOM
40100CTC OCR1AImmediateMAX
50101Fast PWM, 8-bit 0x00FFBOTTOMTOP
60110Fast PWM, 9-bit 0x01FFBOTTOMTOP
70111Fast PWM, 10-bit 0x03FFBOTTOMTOP
81000
PWM, Phase and Frequency
Correct ICR1 BOTTOM BOTTOM
91001
PWM, Phase and Frequency
Correct OCR1A BOTTOM BOTTOM
101010PWM, Phase CorrectICR1TOPBOTTOM
111011PWM, Phase CorrectOCR1ATOPBOTTOM
121100CTC ICR1ImmediateMAX
131101(Reserved) – – –
141110Fast PWM ICR1BOTTOMTOP
151111Fast PWM OCR1ABOTTOMTOP
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
(0x81) ICNC1 ICES1 – WGM13 WGM12 CS12 CS11 CS10 TCCR1B
Read/Write R/W R/W R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 148
When the ICR1 is used as TOP value (see description of the WGM13:0 bits located in the
TCCR1A and the TCCR1B Register), the ICP1 is disconnected and consequently the Input
Capture function is disabled.
• Bit 5 – Reserved Bit
This bit is reserved for future use. For ensuring compatibility with future devices, this bit must be
written to zero when TCCR1B is written.
• Bit 4:3 – WGM13:2: Waveform Generation Mode
See TCCR1A Register description.
• Bit 2:0 – CS12:0: Clock Select
The three Clock Select bits select the clock source to be used by the Timer/Counter, see Figure
16-10 and Figure 16-11.
If external pin modes are used for the Timer/Counter1, transitions on the T1 pin will clock the
counter even if the pin is configured as an output. This feature allows software control of the
counting.
16.11.3 TCCR1C – Timer/Counter1 Control Register C
• Bit 7 – FOC1A: Force Output Compare for Channel A
• Bit 6 – FOC1B: Force Output Compare for Channel B
The FOC1A/FOC1B bits are only active when the WGM13:0 bits specifies a non-PWM mode.
When writing a logical one to the FOC1A/FOC1B bit, an immediate compare match is forced on
the Waveform Generation unit. The OC1A/OC1B output is changed according to its COM1x1:0
bits setting. Note that the FOC1A/FOC1B bits are implemented as strobes. Therefore it is the
value present in the COM1x1:0 bits that determine the effect of the forced compare.
Table 16-5. Clock Select Bit Description
CS12 CS11 CS10 Description
0 0 0 No clock source (Timer/Counter stopped).
001clk
I/O/1 (No prescaling)
010clk
I/O/8 (From prescaler)
011clk
I/O/64 (From prescaler)
100clk
I/O/256 (From prescaler)
101clk
I/O/1024 (From prescaler)
1 1 0 External clock source on T1 pin. Clock on falling edge.
1 1 1 External clock source on T1 pin. Clock on rising edge.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
(0x82) FOC1A FOC1B – – – – – – TCCR1C
Read/Write R/W R/W R R R R R R
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 149
A FOC1A/FOC1B strobe will not generate any interrupt nor will it clear the timer in Clear Timer
on Compare match (CTC) mode using OCR1A as TOP. The FOC1A/FOC1B bits are always
read as zero.
16.11.4 TCNT1H and TCNT1L – Timer/Counter1
The two Timer/Counter I/O locations (TCNT1H and TCNT1L, combined TCNT1) give direct
access, both for read and for write operations, to the Timer/Counter unit 16-bit counter. To
ensure that both the high and low bytes are read and written simultaneously when the CPU
accesses these registers, the access is performed using an 8-bit temporary High Byte Register
(TEMP). This temporary register is shared by all the other 16-bit registers. See “Accessing 16-bit
Registers” on page 125.
Modifying the counter (TCNT1) while the counter is running introduces a risk of missing a
compare match between TCNT1 and one of the OCR1x Registers.
Writing to the TCNT1 Register blocks (removes) the compare match on the following timer clock
for all compare units.
16.11.5 OCR1AH and OCR1AL – Output Compare Register 1 A
16.11.6 OCR1BH and OCR1BL – Output Compare Register 1 B
The Output Compare Registers contain a 16-bit value that is continuously compared with the
counter value (TCNT1). A match can be used to generate an Output Compare interrupt, or to
generate a waveform output on the OC1x pin.
The Output Compare Registers are 16-bit in size. To ensure that both the high and low bytes are
written simultaneously when the CPU writes to these registers, the access is performed using an
8-bit temporary High Byte Register (TEMP). This temporary register is shared by all the other
16-bit registers. See “Accessing 16-bit Registers” on page 125.
Bit 76543210
(0x85) TCNT1[15:8] TCNT1H
(0x84) TCNT1[7:0] TCNT1L
Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 76543210
(0x89) OCR1A[15:8] OCR1AH
(0x88) OCR1A[7:0] OCR1AL
Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 76543210
(0x8B) OCR1B[15:8] OCR1BH
(0x8A) OCR1B[7:0] OCR1BL
Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 150
16.11.7 ICR1H and ICR1L – Input Capture Register 1
The Input Capture is updated with the counter (TCNT1) value each time an event occurs on the
ICP1 pin (or optionally on the Analog Comparator output for Timer/Counter1). The Input Capture
can be used for defining the counter TOP value.
The Input Capture Register is 16-bit in size. To ensure that both the high and low bytes are read
simultaneously when the CPU accesses these registers, the access is performed using an 8-bit
temporary High Byte Register (TEMP). This temporary register is shared by all the other 16-bit
registers. See “Accessing 16-bit Registers” on page 125.
16.11.8 TIMSK1 – Timer/Counter1 Interrupt Mask Register
• Bit 7, 6 – Reserved
These bits are unused bits in the ATmega48P/88P/168P, and will always read as zero.
• Bit 5 – ICIE1: Timer/Counter1, Input Capture Interrupt Enable
When this bit is written to one, and the I-flag in the Status Register is set (interrupts globally
enabled), the Timer/Counter1 Input Capture interrupt is enabled. The corresponding Interrupt
Vector (see “Interrupts” on page 66) is executed when the ICF1 Flag, located in TIFR1, is set.
• Bit 4, 3 – Reserved
These bits are unused bits in the ATmega48P/88P/168P, and will always read as zero.
• Bit 2 – OCIE1B: Timer/Counter1, Output Compare B Match Interrupt Enable
When this bit is written to one, and the I-flag in the Status Register is set (interrupts globally
enabled), the Timer/Counter1 Output Compare B Match interrupt is enabled. The corresponding
Interrupt Vector (see “Interrupts” on page 66) is executed when the OCF1B Flag, located in
TIFR1, is set.
• Bit 1 – OCIE1A: Timer/Counter1, Output Compare A Match Interrupt Enable
When this bit is written to one, and the I-flag in the Status Register is set (interrupts globally
enabled), the Timer/Counter1 Output Compare A Match interrupt is enabled. The corresponding
Interrupt Vector (see “Interrupts” on page 66) is executed when the OCF1A Flag, located in
TIFR1, is set.
• Bit 0 – TOIE1: Timer/Counter1, Overflow Interrupt Enable
When this bit is written to one, and the I-flag in the Status Register is set (interrupts globally
enabled), the Timer/Counter1 Overflow interrupt is enabled. The corresponding Interrupt Vector
(See “Interrupts” on page 66) is executed when the TOV1 Flag, located in TIFR1, is set.
Bit 76543210
(0x87) ICR1[15:8] ICR1H
(0x86) ICR1[7:0] ICR1L
Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 76543210
(0x6F) – – ICIE1 – – OCIE1B OCIE1A TOIE1 TIMSK1
Read/Write R R R/W R R R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 151
16.11.9 TIFR1 – Timer/Counter1 Interrupt Flag Register
• Bit 7, 6 – Reserved
These bits are unused bits in the ATmega48P/88P/168P, and will always read as zero.
• Bit 5 – ICF1: Timer/Counter1, Input Capture Flag
This flag is set when a capture event occurs on the ICP1 pin. When the Input Capture Register
(ICR1) is set by the WGM13:0 to be used as the TOP value, the ICF1 Flag is set when the
counter reaches the TOP value.
ICF1 is automatically cleared when the Input Capture Interrupt Vector is executed. Alternatively,
ICF1 can be cleared by writing a logic one to its bit location.
• Bit 4, 3 – Reserved
These bits are unused bits in the ATmega48P/88P/168P, and will always read as zero.
• Bit 2 – OCF1B: Timer/Counter1, Output Compare B Match Flag
This flag is set in the timer clock cycle after the counter (TCNT1) value matches the Output
Compare Register B (OCR1B).
Note that a Forced Output Compare (FOC1B) strobe will not set the OCF1B Flag.
OCF1B is automatically cleared when the Output Compare Match B Interrupt Vector is
executed. Alternatively, OCF1B can be cleared by writing a logic one to its bit location.
• Bit 1 – OCF1A: Timer/Counter1, Output Compare A Match Flag
This flag is set in the timer clock cycle after the counter (TCNT1) value matches the Output
Compare Register A (OCR1A).
Note that a Forced Output Compare (FOC1A) strobe will not set the OCF1A Flag.
OCF1A is automatically cleared when the Output Compare Match A Interrupt Vector is
executed. Alternatively, OCF1A can be cleared by writing a logic one to its bit location.
• Bit 0 – TOV1: Timer/Counter1, Overflow Flag
The setting of this flag is dependent of the WGM13:0 bits setting. In Normal and CTC modes,
the TOV1 Flag is set when the timer overflows. Refer to Table 16-4 on page 147 for the TOV1
Flag behavior when using another WGM13:0 bit setting.
TOV1 is automatically cleared when the Timer/Counter1 Overflow Interrupt Vector is executed.
Alternatively, TOV1 can be cleared by writing a logic one to its bit location.
Bit 76543210
0x16 (0x36) – – ICF1 – – OCF1B OCF1A TOV1 TIFR1
Read/Write R R R/W R R R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
L
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 152
17. Timer/Counter0 and Timer/Counter1 Prescalers
“8-bit Timer/Counter0 with PWM” on page 104 and “16-bit Timer/Counter1 with PWM” on page
123 share the same prescaler module, but the Timer/Counters can have different prescaler
settings. The description below applies to both Timer/Counter1 and Timer/Counter0.
17.1 Internal Clock Source
The Timer/Counter can be clocked directly by the system clock (by setting the CSn2:0 = 1). This
provides the fastest operation, with a maximum Timer/Counter clock frequency equal to system
clock frequency (fCLK_I/O). Alternatively, one of four taps from the prescaler can be used as a
clock source. The prescaled clock has a frequency of either fCLK_I/O/8, fCLK_I/O/64, fCLK_I/O/256, or
fCLK_I/O/1024.
17.2 Prescaler Reset
The prescaler is free running, i.e., operates independently of the Clock Select logic of the
Timer/Counter, and it is shared by Timer/Counter1 and Timer/Counter0. Since the prescaler is
not affected by the Timer/Counter’s clock select, the state of the prescaler will have implications
for situations where a prescaled clock is used. One example of prescaling artifacts occurs when
the timer is enabled and clocked by the prescaler (6 > CSn2:0 > 1). The number of system clock
cycles from when the timer is enabled to the first count occurs can be from 1 to N+1 system
clock cycles, where N equals the prescaler divisor (8, 64, 256, or 1024).
It is possible to use the prescaler reset for synchronizing the Timer/Counter to program
execution. However, care must be taken if the other Timer/Counter that shares the same
prescaler also uses prescaling. A prescaler reset will affect the prescaler period for all
Timer/Counters it is connected to.
17.3 External Clock Source
An external clock source applied to the T1/T0 pin can be used as Timer/Counter clock
(clkT1/clkT0). The T1/T0 pin is sampled once every system clock cycle by the pin synchronization
logic. The synchronized (sampled) signal is then passed through the edge detector. Figure 17-1
shows a functional equivalent block diagram of the T1/T0 synchronization and edge detector
logic. The registers are clocked at the positive edge of the internal system clock (clkI/O). The latch
is transparent in the high period of the internal system clock.
The edge detector generates one clkT1/clkT0 pulse for each positive (CSn2:0 = 7) or negative
(CSn2:0 = 6) edge it detects.
Figure 17-1. T1/T0 Pin Sampling
Tn_sync
(To Clock
Select Logic)
Edge DetectorSynchronization
DQDQ
LE
DQ
Tn
clkI/O
107w m: PRESCALER 7‘— csm csu c512 TIMER’COUNTER‘ CLOCK SOURCE nMEmcouNrERncLocK souRcE
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 153
The synchronization and edge detector logic introduces a delay of 2.5 to 3.5 system clock cycles
from an edge has been applied to the T1/T0 pin to the counter is updated.
Enabling and disabling of the clock input must be done when T1/T0 has been stable for at least
one system clock cycle, otherwise it is a risk that a false Timer/Counter clock pulse is generated.
Each half period of the external clock applied must be longer than one system clock cycle to
ensure correct sampling. The external clock must be ensured to have less than half the system
clock frequency (fExtClk < fclk_I/O/2) given a 50/50% duty cycle. Since the edge detector uses
sampling, the maximum frequency of an external clock it can detect is half the sampling
frequency (Nyquist sampling theorem). However, due to variation of the system clock frequency
and duty cycle caused by Oscillator source (crystal, resonator, and capacitors) tolerances, it is
recommended that maximum frequency of an external clock source is less than fclk_I/O/2.5.
An external clock source can not be prescaled.
Figure 17-2. Prescaler for Timer/Counter0 and Timer/Counter1(1)
Note: 1. The synchronization logic on the input pins (T1/T0) is shown in Figure 17-1.
PSRSYNC
Clear
clk
T1
clk
T0
T1
T0
clk
I/O
Synchronization
Synchronization
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 154
17.4 Register Description
17.4.1 GTCCR – General Timer/Counter Control Register
• Bit 7 – TSM: Timer/Counter Synchronization Mode
Writing the TSM bit to one activates the Timer/Counter Synchronization mode. In this mode, the
value that is written to the PSRASY and PSRSYNC bits is kept, hence keeping the
corresponding prescaler reset signals asserted. This ensures that the corresponding
Timer/Counters are halted and can be configured to the same value without the risk of one of
them advancing during configuration. When the TSM bit is written to zero, the PSRASY and
PSRSYNC bits are cleared by hardware, and the Timer/Counters start counting simultaneously.
• Bit 0 – PSRSYNC: Prescaler Reset
When this bit is one, Timer/Counter1 and Timer/Counter0 prescaler will be Reset. This bit is
normally cleared immediately by hardware, except if the TSM bit is set. Note that
Timer/Counter1 and Timer/Counter0 share the same prescaler and a reset of this prescaler will
affect both timers.
Bit 765432 1 0
0x23 (0x43) TSM –––––PSRASY PSRSYNC GTCCR
Read/Write R/W R R R R R R/W R/W
Initial Value000000 0 0
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 155
18. 8-bit Timer/Counter2 with PWM and Asynchronous Operation
18.1 Features
•Single Channel Counter
•Clear Timer on Compare Match (Auto Reload)
•Glitch-free, Phase Correct Pulse Width Modulator (PWM)
•Frequency Generator
•10-bit Clock Prescaler
•Overflow and Compare Match Interrupt Sources (TOV2, OCF2A and OCF2B)
•Allows Clocking from External 32 kHz Watch Crystal Independent of the I/O Clock
18.2 Overview
Timer/Counter2 is a general purpose, single channel, 8-bit Timer/Counter module. A simplified
block diagram of the 8-bit Timer/Counter is shown in Figure 18-1. For the actual placement of
I/O pins, refer to “Pinout ATmega48P/88P/168P” on page 10. CPU accessible I/O Registers,
including I/O bits and I/O pins, are shown in bold. The device-specific I/O Register and bit
locations are listed in the “Register Description” on page 169.
The PRTIM2 bit in “Minimizing Power Consumption” on page 51 must be written to zero to
enable Timer/Counter2 module.
Figure 18-1. 8-bit Timer/Counter Block Diagram
Clock Select
Timer/Counter
DATA BUS
OCRnA
OCRnB
=
=
TCNTn
Waveform
Generation
Waveform
Generation
OCnA
OCnB
=
Fixed
TOP
Value
Control Logic
=
0
TOP BOTTOM
Count
Clear
Direction
TOVn
(Int.Req.)
OCnA
(Int.Req.)
OCnB
(Int.Req.)
TCCRnA TCCRnB
Tn
Edge
Detector
( From Prescaler )
clk
Tn
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 156
18.2.1 Registers
The Timer/Counter (TCNT2) and Output Compare Register (OCR2A and OCR2B) are 8-bit
registers. Interrupt request (shorten as Int.Req.) signals are all visible in the Timer Interrupt Flag
Register (TIFR2). All interrupts are individually masked with the Timer Interrupt Mask Register
(TIMSK2). TIFR2 and TIMSK2 are not shown in the figure.
The Timer/Counter can be clocked internally, via the prescaler, or asynchronously clocked from
the TOSC1/2 pins, as detailed later in this section. The asynchronous operation is controlled by
the Asynchronous Status Register (ASSR). The Clock Select logic block controls which clock
source he Timer/Counter uses to increment (or decrement) its value. The Timer/Counter is
inactive when no clock source is selected. The output from the Clock Select logic is referred to
as the timer clock (clkT2).
The double buffered Output Compare Register (OCR2A and OCR2B) are compared with the
Timer/Counter value at all times. The result of the compare can be used by the Waveform
Generator to generate a PWM or variable frequency output on the Output Compare pins (OC2A
and OC2B). See “Output Compare Unit” on page 157. for details. The compare match event will
also set the Compare Flag (OCF2A or OCF2B) which can be used to generate an Output
Compare interrupt request.
18.2.2 Definitions
Many register and bit references in this document are written in general form. A lower case “n”
replaces the Timer/Counter number, in this case 2. However, when using the register or bit
defines in a program, the precise form must be used, i.e., TCNT2 for accessing Timer/Counter2
counter value and so on.
The definitions in Table 18-1 are also used extensively throughout the section.
18.3 Timer/Counter Clock Sources
The Timer/Counter can be clocked by an internal synchronous or an external asynchronous
clock source. The clock source clkT2 is by default equal to the MCU clock, clkI/O. When the AS2
bit in the ASSR Register is written to logic one, the clock source is taken from the Timer/Counter
Oscillator connected to TOSC1 and TOSC2. For details on asynchronous operation, see “ASSR
– Asynchronous Status Register” on page 175. For details on clock sources and prescaler, see
“Timer/Counter Prescaler” on page 167.
18.4 Counter Unit
The main part of the 8-bit Timer/Counter is the programmable bi-directional counter unit. Figure
18-2 on page 157 shows a block diagram of the counter and its surrounding environment.
Table 18-1. Definitions
BOTTOM The counter reaches the BOTTOM when it becomes zero (0x00).
MAX The counter reaches its MAXimum when it becomes 0xFF (decimal 255).
TOP
The counter reaches the TOP when it becomes equal to the highest value in the
count sequence. The TOP value can be assigned to be the fixed value 0xFF
(MAX) or the value stored in the OCR2A Register. The assignment is
dependent on the mode of operation.
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 157
Figure 18-2. Counter Unit Block Diagram
Signal description (internal signals):
count: Increment or decrement TCNT2 by 1.
direction: Selects between increment and decrement.
clear: Clear TCNT2 (set all bits to zero).
clkTn: Timer/Counter clock, referred to as clkT2 in the following.
top: Signalizes that TCNT2 has reached maximum value.
bottom: Signalizes that TCNT2 has reached minimum value (zero).
Depending on the mode of operation used, the counter is cleared, incremented, or decremented
at each timer clock (clkT2). clkT2 can be generated from an external or internal clock source,
selected by the Clock Select bits (CS22:0). When no clock source is selected (CS22:0 = 0) the
timer is stopped. However, the TCNT2 value can be accessed by the CPU, regardless of
whether clkT2 is present or not. A CPU write overrides (has priority over) all counter clear or
count operations.
The counting sequence is determined by the setting of the WGM21 and WGM20 bits located in
the Timer/Counter Control Register (TCCR2A) and the WGM22 located in the Timer/Counter
Control Register B (TCCR2B). There are close connections between how the counter behaves
(counts) and how waveforms are generated on the Output Compare outputs OC2A and OC2B.
For more details about advanced counting sequences and waveform generation, see “Modes of
Operation” on page 160.
The Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOV2) is set according to the mode of operation selected by
the WGM22:0 bits. TOV2 can be used for generating a CPU interrupt.
18.5 Output Compare Unit
The 8-bit comparator continuously compares TCNT2 with the Output Compare Register
(OCR2A and OCR2B). Whenever TCNT2 equals OCR2A or OCR2B, the comparator signals a
match. A match will set the Output Compare Flag (OCF2A or OCF2B) at the next timer clock
cycle. If the corresponding interrupt is enabled, the Output Compare Flag generates an Output
Compare interrupt. The Output Compare Flag is automatically cleared when the interrupt is
executed. Alternatively, the Output Compare Flag can be cleared by software by writing a logical
one to its I/O bit location. The Waveform Generator uses the match signal to generate an output
according to operating mode set by the WGM22:0 bits and Compare Output mode (COM2x1:0)
bits. The max and bottom signals are used by the Waveform Generator for handling the special
cases of the extreme values in some modes of operation (“Modes of Operation” on page 160).
Figure 18-3 shows a block diagram of the Output Compare unit.
DATA BUS
TCNTn Control Logic
count
TOVn
(Int.Req.)
topbottom
direction
clear
TOSC1
T/C
Oscillator
TOSC2
Prescaler
clk
I/O
clk Tn
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 158
Figure 18-3. Output Compare Unit, Block Diagram
The OCR2x Register is double buffered when using any of the Pulse Width Modulation (PWM)
modes. For the Normal and Clear Timer on Compare (CTC) modes of operation, the double
buffering is disabled. The double buffering synchronizes the update of the OCR2x Compare
Register to either top or bottom of the counting sequence. The synchronization prevents the
occurrence of odd-length, non-symmetrical PWM pulses, thereby making the output glitch-free.
The OCR2x Register access may seem complex, but this is not case. When the double buffering
is enabled, the CPU has access to the OCR2x Buffer Register, and if double buffering is
disabled the CPU will access the OCR2x directly.
18.5.1 Force Output Compare
In non-PWM waveform generation modes, the match output of the comparator can be forced by
writing a one to the Force Output Compare (FOC2x) bit. Forcing compare match will not set the
OCF2x Flag or reload/clear the timer, but the OC2x pin will be updated as if a real compare
match had occurred (the COM2x1:0 bits settings define whether the OC2x pin is set, cleared or
toggled).
18.5.2 Compare Match Blocking by TCNT2 Write
All CPU write operations to the TCNT2 Register will block any compare match that occurs in the
next timer clock cycle, even when the timer is stopped. This feature allows OCR2x to be
initialized to the same value as TCNT2 without triggering an interrupt when the Timer/Counter
clock is enabled.
18.5.3 Using the Output Compare Unit
Since writing TCNT2 in any mode of operation will block all compare matches for one timer clock
cycle, there are risks involved when changing TCNT2 when using the Output Compare channel,
independently of whether the Timer/Counter is running or not. If the value written to TCNT2
equals the OCR2x value, the compare match will be missed, resulting in incorrect waveform
generation. Similarly, do not write the TCNT2 value equal to BOTTOM when the counter is
downcounting.
OCFnx (Int.Req.)
=
(8-bit Comparator )
OCRnx
OCnx
DATA BUS
TCNTn
WGMn1:0
Waveform Generator
top
FOCn
COMnX1:0
bottom
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 159
The setup of the OC2x should be performed before setting the Data Direction Register for the
port pin to output. The easiest way of setting the OC2x value is to use the Force Output
Compare (FOC2x) strobe bit in Normal mode. The OC2x Register keeps its value even when
changing between Waveform Generation modes.
Be aware that the COM2x1:0 bits are not double buffered together with the compare value.
Changing the COM2x1:0 bits will take effect immediately.
18.6 Compare Match Output Unit
The Compare Output mode (COM2x1:0) bits have two functions. The Waveform Generator uses
the COM2x1:0 bits for defining the Output Compare (OC2x) state at the next compare match.
Also, the COM2x1:0 bits control the OC2x pin output source. Figure 18-4 shows a simplified
schematic of the logic affected by the COM2x1:0 bit setting. The I/O Registers, I/O bits, and I/O
pins in the figure are shown in bold. Only the parts of the general I/O Port Control Registers
(DDR and PORT) that are affected by the COM2x1:0 bits are shown. When referring to the
OC2x state, the reference is for the internal OC2x Register, not the OC2x pin.
Figure 18-4. Compare Match Output Unit, Schematic
The general I/O port function is overridden by the Output Compare (OC2x) from the Waveform
Generator if either of the COM2x1:0 bits are set. However, the OC2x pin direction (input or
output) is still controlled by the Data Direction Register (DDR) for the port pin. The Data
Direction Register bit for the OC2x pin (DDR_OC2x) must be set as output before the OC2x
value is visible on the pin. The port override function is independent of the Waveform Generation
mode.
The design of the Output Compare pin logic allows initialization of the OC2x state before the
output is enabled. Note that some COM2x1:0 bit settings are reserved for certain modes of
operation. See “Register Description” on page 169.
PORT
DDR
DQ
DQ
OCnx
Pin
OCnx
DQ
Waveform
Generator
COMnx1
COMnx0
0
1
DATA BUS
FOCnx
clk
I/O
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 160
18.6.1 Compare Output Mode and Waveform Generation
The Waveform Generator uses the COM2x1:0 bits differently in normal, CTC, and PWM modes.
For all modes, setting the COM2x1:0 = 0 tells the Waveform Generator that no action on the
OC2x Register is to be performed on the next compare match. For compare output actions in the
non-PWM modes refer to Table 18-5 on page 170. For fast PWM mode, refer to Table 18-6 on
page 170, and for phase correct PWM refer to Table 18-7 on page 171.
A change of the COM2x1:0 bits state will have effect at the first compare match after the bits are
written. For non-PWM modes, the action can be forced to have immediate effect by using the
FOC2x strobe bits.
18.7 Modes of Operation
The mode of operation, i.e., the behavior of the Timer/Counter and the Output Compare pins, is
defined by the combination of the Waveform Generation mode (WGM22:0) and Compare Output
mode (COM2x1:0) bits. The Compare Output mode bits do not affect the counting sequence,
while the Waveform Generation mode bits do. The COM2x1:0 bits control whether the PWM
output generated should be inverted or not (inverted or non-inverted PWM). For non-PWM
modes the COM2x1:0 bits control whether the output should be set, cleared, or toggled at a
compare match (See “Compare Match Output Unit” on page 159.).
For detailed timing information refer to “Timer/Counter Timing Diagrams” on page 164.
18.7.1 Normal Mode
The simplest mode of operation is the Normal mode (WGM22:0 = 0). In this mode the counting
direction is always up (incrementing), and no counter clear is performed. The counter simply
overruns when it passes its maximum 8-bit value (TOP = 0xFF) and then restarts from the
bottom (0x00). In normal operation the Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOV2) will be set in the
same timer clock cycle as the TCNT2 becomes zero. The TOV2 Flag in this case behaves like a
ninth bit, except that it is only set, not cleared. However, combined with the timer overflow
interrupt that automatically clears the TOV2 Flag, the timer resolution can be increased by
software. There are no special cases to consider in the Normal mode, a new counter value can
be written anytime.
The Output Compare unit can be used to generate interrupts at some given time. Using the
Output Compare to generate waveforms in Normal mode is not recommended, since this will
occupy too much of the CPU time.
18.7.2 Clear Timer on Compare Match (CTC) Mode
In Clear Timer on Compare or CTC mode (WGM22:0 = 2), the OCR2A Register is used to
manipulate the counter resolution. In CTC mode the counter is cleared to zero when the counter
value (TCNT2) matches the OCR2A. The OCR2A defines the top value for the counter, hence
also its resolution. This mode allows greater control of the compare match output frequency. It
also simplifies the operation of counting external events.
The timing diagram for the CTC mode is shown in Figure 18-5. The counter value (TCNT2)
increases until a compare match occurs between TCNT2 and OCR2A, and then counter
(TCNT2) is cleared.
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 161
Figure 18-5. CTC Mode, Timing Diagram
An interrupt can be generated each time the counter value reaches the TOP value by using the
OCF2A Flag. If the interrupt is enabled, the interrupt handler routine can be used for updating
the TOP value. However, changing TOP to a value close to BOTTOM when the counter is
running with none or a low prescaler value must be done with care since the CTC mode does
not have the double buffering feature. If the new value written to OCR2A is lower than the
current value of TCNT2, the counter will miss the compare match. The counter will then have to
count to its maximum value (0xFF) and wrap around starting at 0x00 before the compare match
can occur.
For generating a waveform output in CTC mode, the OC2A output can be set to toggle its logical
level on each compare match by setting the Compare Output mode bits to toggle mode
(COM2A1:0 = 1). The OC2A value will not be visible on the port pin unless the data direction for
the pin is set to output. The waveform generated will have a maximum frequency of fOC2A =
fclk_I/O/2 when OCR2A is set to zero (0x00). The waveform frequency is defined by the following
equation:
The N variable represents the prescale factor (1, 8, 32, 64, 128, 256, or 1024).
As for the Normal mode of operation, the TOV2 Flag is set in the same timer clock cycle that the
counter counts from MAX to 0x00.
18.7.3 Fast PWM Mode
The fast Pulse Width Modulation or fast PWM mode (WGM22:0 = 3 or 7) provides a high
frequency PWM waveform generation option. The fast PWM differs from the other PWM option
by its single-slope operation. The counter counts from BOTTOM to TOP then restarts from
BOTTOM. TOP is defined as 0xFF when WGM2:0 = 3, and OCR2A when MGM2:0 = 7. In non-
inverting Compare Output mode, the Output Compare (OC2x) is cleared on the compare match
between TCNT2 and OCR2x, and set at BOTTOM. In inverting Compare Output mode, the
output is set on compare match and cleared at BOTTOM. Due to the single-slope operation, the
operating frequency of the fast PWM mode can be twice as high as the phase correct PWM
mode that uses dual-slope operation. This high frequency makes the fast PWM mode well suited
for power regulation, rectification, and DAC applications. High frequency allows physically small
sized external components (coils, capacitors), and therefore reduces total system cost.
In fast PWM mode, the counter is incremented until the counter value matches the TOP value.
The counter is then cleared at the following timer clock cycle. The timing diagram for the fast
TCNTn
OCnx
(Toggle)
OCnx Interrupt Flag Set
1 4
Period
2 3
(COMnx1:0 = 1)
fOCnx
fclk_I/O
2N1OCRnx+
--------------------------------------------------=
F—~|~~l~+—+——+——+——4
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 162
PWM mode is shown in Figure 18-6. The TCNT2 value is in the timing diagram shown as a
histogram for illustrating the single-slope operation. The diagram includes non-inverted and
inverted PWM outputs. The small horizontal line marks on the TCNT2 slopes represent compare
matches between OCR2x and TCNT2.
Figure 18-6. Fast PWM Mode, Timing Diagram
The Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOV2) is set each time the counter reaches TOP. If the
interrupt is enabled, the interrupt handler routine can be used for updating the compare value.
In fast PWM mode, the compare unit allows generation of PWM waveforms on the OC2x pin.
Setting the COM2x1:0 bits to two will produce a non-inverted PWM and an inverted PWM output
can be generated by setting the COM2x1:0 to three. TOP is defined as 0xFF when WGM2:0 = 3,
and OCR2A when MGM2:0 = 7. (See Table 18-3 on page 169). The actual OC2x value will only
be visible on the port pin if the data direction for the port pin is set as output. The PWM
waveform is generated by setting (or clearing) the OC2x Register at the compare match
between OCR2x and TCNT2, and clearing (or setting) the OC2x Register at the timer clock cycle
the counter is cleared (changes from TOP to BOTTOM).
The PWM frequency for the output can be calculated by the following equation:
The N variable represents the prescale factor (1, 8, 32, 64, 128, 256, or 1024).
The extreme values for the OCR2A Register represent special cases when generating a PWM
waveform output in the fast PWM mode. If the OCR2A is set equal to BOTTOM, the output will
be a narrow spike for each MAX+1 timer clock cycle. Setting the OCR2A equal to MAX will result
in a constantly high or low output (depending on the polarity of the output set by the COM2A1:0
bits.)
A frequency (with 50% duty cycle) waveform output in fast PWM mode can be achieved by
setting OC2x to toggle its logical level on each compare match (COM2x1:0 = 1). The waveform
generated will have a maximum frequency of foc2 = fclk_I/O/2 when OCR2A is set to zero. This
feature is similar to the OC2A toggle in CTC mode, except the double buffer feature of the
Output Compare unit is enabled in the fast PWM mode.
TCNTn
OCRnx Update and
TOVn Interrupt Flag Set
1
Period
2 3
OCnx
OCnx
(COMnx1:0 = 2)
(COMnx1:0 = 3)
OCRnx Interrupt Flag Set
4 5 6 7
fOCnxPWM
fclk_I/O
N256
------------------=
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 163
18.7.4 Phase Correct PWM Mode
The phase correct PWM mode (WGM22:0 = 1 or 5) provides a high resolution phase correct
PWM waveform generation option. The phase correct PWM mode is based on a dual-slope
operation. The counter counts repeatedly from BOTTOM to TOP and then from TOP to
BOTTOM. TOP is defined as 0xFF when WGM2:0 = 3, and OCR2A when MGM2:0 = 7. In non-
inverting Compare Output mode, the Output Compare (OC2x) is cleared on the compare match
between TCNT2 and OCR2x while upcounting, and set on the compare match while
downcounting. In inverting Output Compare mode, the operation is inverted. The dual-slope
operation has lower maximum operation frequency than single slope operation. However, due to
the symmetric feature of the dual-slope PWM modes, these modes are preferred for motor
control applications.
In phase correct PWM mode the counter is incremented until the counter value matches TOP.
When the counter reaches TOP, it changes the count direction. The TCNT2 value will be equal
to TOP for one timer clock cycle. The timing diagram for the phase correct PWM mode is shown
on Figure 18-7. The TCNT2 value is in the timing diagram shown as a histogram for illustrating
the dual-slope operation. The diagram includes non-inverted and inverted PWM outputs. The
small horizontal line marks on the TCNT2 slopes represent compare matches between OCR2x
and TCNT2.
Figure 18-7. Phase Correct PWM Mode, Timing Diagram
The Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOV2) is set each time the counter reaches BOTTOM. The
Interrupt Flag can be used to generate an interrupt each time the counter reaches the BOTTOM
value.
In phase correct PWM mode, the compare unit allows generation of PWM waveforms on the
OC2x pin. Setting the COM2x1:0 bits to two will produce a non-inverted PWM. An inverted PWM
output can be generated by setting the COM2x1:0 to three. TOP is defined as 0xFF when
WGM2:0 = 3, and OCR2A when MGM2:0 = 7 (See Table 18-4 on page 170). The actual OC2x
value will only be visible on the port pin if the data direction for the port pin is set as output. The
PWM waveform is generated by clearing (or setting) the OC2x Register at the compare match
TOVn Interrupt Flag Set
OCnx Interrupt Flag Set
1 2 3
TCNTn
Period
OCnx
OCnx
(COMnx1:0 = 2)
(COMnx1:0 = 3)
OCRnx Update
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 164
between OCR2x and TCNT2 when the counter increments, and setting (or clearing) the OC2x
Register at compare match between OCR2x and TCNT2 when the counter decrements. The
PWM frequency for the output when using phase correct PWM can be calculated by the
following equation:
The N variable represents the prescale factor (1, 8, 32, 64, 128, 256, or 1024).
The extreme values for the OCR2A Register represent special cases when generating a PWM
waveform output in the phase correct PWM mode. If the OCR2A is set equal to BOTTOM, the
output will be continuously low and if set equal to MAX the output will be continuously high for
non-inverted PWM mode. For inverted PWM the output will have the opposite logic values.
At the very start of period 2 in Figure 18-7 OCnx has a transition from high to low even though
there is no Compare Match. The point of this transition is to ensure symmetry around BOTTOM.
There are two cases that give a transition without Compare Match.
• OCR2A changes its value from MAX, like in Figure 18-7. When the OCR2A value is MAX
the OCn pin value is the same as the result of a down-counting compare match. To ensure
symmetry around BOTTOM the OCn value at MAX must correspond to the result of an up-
counting Compare Match.
• The timer starts counting from a value higher than the one in OCR2A, and for that reason
misses the Compare Match and hence the OCn change that would have happened on the
way up.
18.8 Timer/Counter Timing Diagrams
The following figures show the Timer/Counter in synchronous mode, and the timer clock (clkT2)
is therefore shown as a clock enable signal. In asynchronous mode, clkI/O should be replaced by
the Timer/Counter Oscillator clock. The figures include information on when Interrupt Flags are
set. Figure 18-8 contains timing data for basic Timer/Counter operation. The figure shows the
count sequence close to the MAX value in all modes other than phase correct PWM mode.
Figure 18-8. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, no Prescaling
Figure 18-9 shows the same timing data, but with the prescaler enabled.
fOCnxPCPWM
fclk_I/O
N510
------------------=
clk
Tn
(clk
I/O
/1)
TOVn
clk
I/O
TCNTn MAX - 1 MAX BOTTOM BOTTOM + 1
\‘j: Hi; H_\r:'
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 165
Figure 18-9. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, with Prescaler (fclk_I/O/8)
Figure 18-10 shows the setting of OCF2A in all modes except CTC mode.
Figure 18-10. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, Setting of OCF2A, with Prescaler (fclk_I/O/8)
Figure 18-11 shows the setting of OCF2A and the clearing of TCNT2 in CTC mode.
Figure 18-11. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, Clear Timer on Compare Match mode, with Prescaler
(fclk_I/O/8)
TOVn
TCNTn MAX - 1 MAX BOTTOM BOTTOM + 1
clkI/O
clkTn
(clk
I/O
/8)
OCFnx
OCRnx
TCNTn
OCRnx Value
OCRnx - 1 OCRnx OCRnx + 1 OCRnx + 2
clk
I/O
clk
Tn
(clk
I/O
/8)
OCFnx
OCRnx
TCNTn
(CTC)
TOP
TOP - 1 TOP BOTTOM BOTTOM + 1
clk
I/O
clk
Tn
(clk
I/O
/8)
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 166
18.9 Asynchronous Operation of Timer/Counter2
When Timer/Counter2 operates asynchronously, some considerations must be taken.
• Warning: When switching between asynchronous and synchronous clocking of
Timer/Counter2, the Timer Registers TCNT2, OCR2x, and TCCR2x might be corrupted. A
safe procedure for switching clock source is:
1. Disable the Timer/Counter2 interrupts by clearing OCIE2x and TOIE2.
2. Select clock source by setting AS2 as appropriate.
3. Write new values to TCNT2, OCR2x, and TCCR2x.
4. To switch to asynchronous operation: Wait for TCN2xUB, OCR2xUB, and
TCR2xUB.
5. Clear the Timer/Counter2 Interrupt Flags.
6. Enable interrupts, if needed.
• The CPU main clock frequency must be more than four times the Oscillator frequency.
• When writing to one of the registers TCNT2, OCR2x, or TCCR2x, the value is transferred
to a temporary register, and latched after two positive edges on TOSC1. The user should
not write a new value before the contents of the temporary register have been transferred
to its destination. Each of the five mentioned registers have their individual temporary
register, which means that e.g. writing to TCNT2 does not disturb an OCR2x write in
progress. To detect that a transfer to the destination register has taken place, the
Asynchronous Status Register – ASSR has been implemented.
• When entering Power-save or ADC Noise Reduction mode after having written to TCNT2,
OCR2x, or TCCR2x, the user must wait until the written register has been updated if
Timer/Counter2 is used to wake up the device. Otherwise, the MCU will enter sleep mode
before the changes are effective. This is particularly important if any of the Output
Compare2 interrupt is used to wake up the device, since the Output Compare function is
disabled during writing to OCR2x or TCNT2. If the write cycle is not finished, and the MCU
enters sleep mode before the corresponding OCR2xUB bit returns to zero, the device will
never receive a compare match interrupt, and the MCU will not wake up.
• If Timer/Counter2 is used to wake the device up from Power-save or ADC Noise
Reduction mode, precautions must be taken if the user wants to re-enter one of these
modes: If re-entering sleep mode within the TOSC1 cycle, the interrupt will immidiately
occur and the device wake up again. The result is multiple interrupts and wake-ups within
one TOSC1 cycle from the first interrupt. If the user is in doubt whether the time before re-
entering Power-save or ADC Noise Reduction mode is sufficient, the following algorithm
can be used to ensure that one TOSC1 cycle has elapsed:
1. Write a value to TCCR2x, TCNT2, or OCR2x.
2. Wait until the corresponding Update Busy Flag in ASSR returns to zero.
3. Enter Power-save or ADC Noise Reduction mode.
• When the asynchronous operation is selected, the 32.768 kHz Oscillator for
Timer/Counter2 is always running, except in Power-down and Standby modes. After a
Power-up Reset or wake-up from Power-down or Standby mode, the user should be
aware of the fact that this Oscillator might take as long as one second to stabilize. The
user is advised to wait for at least one second before using Timer/Counter2 after power-up
or wake-up from Power-down or Standby mode. The contents of all Timer/Counter2
Registers must be considered lost after a wake-up from Power-down or Standby mode
‘H fl H
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 167
due to unstable clock signal upon start-up, no matter whether the Oscillator is in use or a
clock signal is applied to the TOSC1 pin.
• Description of wake up from Power-save or ADC Noise Reduction mode when the timer is
clocked asynchronously: When the interrupt condition is met, the wake up process is
started on the following cycle of the timer clock, that is, the timer is always advanced by at
least one before the processor can read the counter value. After wake-up, the MCU is
halted for four cycles, it executes the interrupt routine, and resumes execution from the
instruction following SLEEP.
• Reading of the TCNT2 Register shortly after wake-up from Power-save may give an
incorrect result. Since TCNT2 is clocked on the asynchronous TOSC clock, reading
TCNT2 must be done through a register synchronized to the internal I/O clock domain.
Synchronization takes place for every rising TOSC1 edge. When waking up from Power-
save mode, and the I/O clock (clkI/O) again becomes active, TCNT2 will read as the
previous value (before entering sleep) until the next rising TOSC1 edge. The phase of the
TOSC clock after waking up from Power-save mode is essentially unpredictable, as it
depends on the wake-up time. The recommended procedure for reading TCNT2 is thus as
follows:
1. Write any value to either of the registers OCR2x or TCCR2x.
2. Wait for the corresponding Update Busy Flag to be cleared.
3. Read TCNT2.
During asynchronous operation, the synchronization of the Interrupt Flags for the asynchronous
timer takes 3 processor cycles plus one timer cycle. The timer is therefore advanced by at least
one before the processor can read the timer value causing the setting of the Interrupt Flag. The
Output Compare pin is changed on the timer clock and is not synchronized to the processor
clock.
18.10 Timer/Counter Prescaler
Figure 18-12. Prescaler for Timer/Counter2
10-BIT T/C PRESCALER
TIMER/COUNTER2 CLOCK SOURCE
clkI/O clkT2S
TOSC1
AS2
CS20
CS21
CS22
clkT2S
/8
clkT2S
/64
clkT2S
/128
clkT2S
/1024
clkT2S
/256
clkT2S
/32
0
PSRASY
Clear
clkT2
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 168
The clock source for Timer/Counter2 is named clkT2S. clkT2S is by default connected to the main
system I/O clock clkIO. By setting the AS2 bit in ASSR, Timer/Counter2 is asynchronously
clocked from the TOSC1 pin. This enables use of Timer/Counter2 as a Real Time Counter
(RTC). When AS2 is set, pins TOSC1 and TOSC2 are disconnected from Port C. A crystal can
then be connected between the TOSC1 and TOSC2 pins to serve as an independent clock
source for Timer/Counter2. The Oscillator is optimized for use with a 32.768 kHz crystal.
For Timer/Counter2, the possible prescaled selections are: clkT2S/8, clkT2S/32, clkT2S/64,
clkT2S/128, clkT2S/256, and clkT2S/1024. Additionally, clkT2S as well as 0 (stop) may be selected.
Setting the PSRASY bit in GTCCR resets the prescaler. This allows the user to operate with a
predictable prescaler.
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 169
18.11 Register Description
18.11.1 TCCR2A – Timer/Counter Control Register A
• Bits 7:6 – COM2A1:0: Compare Match Output A Mode
These bits control the Output Compare pin (OC2A) behavior. If one or both of the COM2A1:0
bits are set, the OC2A output overrides the normal port functionality of the I/O pin it is connected
to. However, note that the Data Direction Register (DDR) bit corresponding to the OC2A pin
must be set in order to enable the output driver.
When OC2A is connected to the pin, the function of the COM2A1:0 bits depends on the
WGM22:0 bit setting. Table 18-2 shows the COM2A1:0 bit functionality when the WGM22:0 bits
are set to a normal or CTC mode (non-PWM).
Table 18-3 shows the COM2A1:0 bit functionality when the WGM21:0 bits are set to fast PWM
mode.
Note: 1. A special case occurs when OCR2A equals TOP and COM2A1 is set. In this case, the
Compare Match is ignored, but the set or clear is done at BOTTOM. See “Fast PWM Mode”
on page 161 for more details.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
(0xB0) COM2A1 COM2A0 COM2B1 COM2B0 – – WGM21 WGM20 TCCR2A
Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R R R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Table 18-2. Compare Output Mode, non-PWM Mode
COM2A1 COM2A0 Description
0 0 Normal port operation, OC0A disconnected.
0 1 Toggle OC2A on Compare Match
1 0 Clear OC2A on Compare Match
1 1 Set OC2A on Compare Match
Table 18-3. Compare Output Mode, Fast PWM Mode(1)
COM2A1 COM2A0 Description
0 0 Normal port operation, OC2A disconnected.
01
WGM22 = 0: Normal Port Operation, OC0A Disconnected.
WGM22 = 1: Toggle OC2A on Compare Match.
10
Clear OC2A on Compare Match, set OC2A at BOTTOM,
(non-inverting mode).
11
Set OC2A on Compare Match, clear OC2A at BOTTOM,
(inverting mode).
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 170
Table 18-4 shows the COM2A1:0 bit functionality when the WGM22:0 bits are set to phase
correct PWM mode.
Note: 1. A special case occurs when OCR2A equals TOP and COM2A1 is set. In this case, the
Compare Match is ignored, but the set or clear is done at TOP. See “Phase Correct PWM
Mode” on page 163 for more details.
• Bits 5:4 – COM2B1:0: Compare Match Output B Mode
These bits control the Output Compare pin (OC2B) behavior. If one or both of the COM2B1:0
bits are set, the OC2B output overrides the normal port functionality of the I/O pin it is connected
to. However, note that the Data Direction Register (DDR) bit corresponding to the OC2B pin
must be set in order to enable the output driver.
When OC2B is connected to the pin, the function of the COM2B1:0 bits depends on the
WGM22:0 bit setting. Table 18-5 shows the COM2B1:0 bit functionality when the WGM22:0 bits
are set to a normal or CTC mode (non-PWM).
Table 18-6 shows the COM2B1:0 bit functionality when the WGM22:0 bits are set to fast PWM
mode.
Note: 1. A special case occurs when OCR2B equals TOP and COM2B1 is set. In this case, the
Compare Match is ignored, but the set or clear is done at BOTTOM. See “Phase Correct
PWM Mode” on page 163 for more details.
Table 18-4. Compare Output Mode, Phase Correct PWM Mode(1)
COM2A1 COM2A0 Description
0 0 Normal port operation, OC2A disconnected.
01
WGM22 = 0: Normal Port Operation, OC2A Disconnected.
WGM22 = 1: Toggle OC2A on Compare Match.
10
Clear OC2A on Compare Match when up-counting. Set OC2A on
Compare Match when down-counting.
11
Set OC2A on Compare Match when up-counting. Clear OC2A on
Compare Match when down-counting.
Table 18-5. Compare Output Mode, non-PWM Mode
COM2B1 COM2B0 Description
0 0 Normal port operation, OC2B disconnected.
0 1 Toggle OC2B on Compare Match
1 0 Clear OC2B on Compare Match
1 1 Set OC2B on Compare Match
Table 18-6. Compare Output Mode, Fast PWM Mode(1)
COM2B1 COM2B0 Description
0 0 Normal port operation, OC2B disconnected.
01Reserved
10
Clear OC2B on Compare Match, set OC2B at BOTTOM,
(non-inverting mode).
11
Set OC2B on Compare Match, clear OC2B at BOTTOM,
(inverting mode).
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 171
Table 18-7 shows the COM2B1:0 bit functionality when the WGM22:0 bits are set to phase
correct PWM mode.
Note: 1. A special case occurs when OCR2B equals TOP and COM2B1 is set. In this case, the
Compare Match is ignored, but the set or clear is done at TOP. See “Phase Correct PWM
Mode” on page 163 for more details.
• Bits 3, 2 – Reserved
These bits are reserved bits in the ATmega48P/88P/168P and will always read as zero.
• Bits 1:0 – WGM21:0: Waveform Generation Mode
Combined with the WGM22 bit found in the TCCR2B Register, these bits control the counting
sequence of the counter, the source for maximum (TOP) counter value, and what type of
waveform generation to be used, see Table 18-8. Modes of operation supported by the
Timer/Counter unit are: Normal mode (counter), Clear Timer on Compare Match (CTC) mode,
and two types of Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) modes (see “Modes of Operation” on page
160).
Notes: 1. MAX= 0xFF
2. BOTTOM= 0x00
Table 18-7. Compare Output Mode, Phase Correct PWM Mode(1)
COM2B1 COM2B0 Description
0 0 Normal port operation, OC2B disconnected.
01Reserved
10
Clear OC2B on Compare Match when up-counting. Set OC2B on
Compare Match when down-counting.
11
Set OC2B on Compare Match when up-counting. Clear OC2B on
Compare Match when down-counting.
Table 18-8. Waveform Generation Mode Bit Description
Mode WGM2 WGM1 WGM0
Timer/Counter
Mode of
Operation TOP
Update of
OCRx at
TOV Flag
Set on(1)(2)
0 0 0 0 Normal 0xFF Immediate MAX
10 0 1
PWM, Phase
Correct 0xFF TOP BOTTOM
2 0 1 0 CTC OCRA Immediate MAX
3 0 1 1 Fast PWM 0xFF BOTTOM MAX
41 0 0Reserved – – –
51 0 1
PWM, Phase
Correct OCRA TOP BOTTOM
61 1 0Reserved – – –
7 1 1 1 Fast PWM OCRA BOTTOM TOP
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 172
18.11.2 TCCR2B – Timer/Counter Control Register B
• Bit 7 – FOC2A: Force Output Compare A
The FOC2A bit is only active when the WGM bits specify a non-PWM mode.
However, for ensuring compatibility with future devices, this bit must be set to zero when
TCCR2B is written when operating in PWM mode. When writing a logical one to the FOC2A bit,
an immediate Compare Match is forced on the Waveform Generation unit. The OC2A output is
changed according to its COM2A1:0 bits setting. Note that the FOC2A bit is implemented as a
strobe. Therefore it is the value present in the COM2A1:0 bits that determines the effect of the
forced compare.
A FOC2A strobe will not generate any interrupt, nor will it clear the timer in CTC mode using
OCR2A as TOP.
The FOC2A bit is always read as zero.
• Bit 6 – FOC2B: Force Output Compare B
The FOC2B bit is only active when the WGM bits specify a non-PWM mode.
However, for ensuring compatibility with future devices, this bit must be set to zero when
TCCR2B is written when operating in PWM mode. When writing a logical one to the FOC2B bit,
an immediate Compare Match is forced on the Waveform Generation unit. The OC2B output is
changed according to its COM2B1:0 bits setting. Note that the FOC2B bit is implemented as a
strobe. Therefore it is the value present in the COM2B1:0 bits that determines the effect of the
forced compare.
A FOC2B strobe will not generate any interrupt, nor will it clear the timer in CTC mode using
OCR2B as TOP.
The FOC2B bit is always read as zero.
• Bits 5:4 – Reserved
These bits are reserved bits in the ATmega48P/88P/168P and will always read as zero.
• Bit 3 – WGM22: Waveform Generation Mode
See the description in the “TCCR2A – Timer/Counter Control Register A” on page 169.
• Bit 2:0 – CS22:0: Clock Select
The three Clock Select bits select the clock source to be used by the Timer/Counter, see Table
18-9 on page 173.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
(0xB1) FOC2A FOC2B – – WGM22 CS22 CS21 CS20 TCCR2B
Read/Write W W R R R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 173
If external pin modes are used for the Timer/Counter0, transitions on the T0 pin will clock the
counter even if the pin is configured as an output. This feature allows software control of the
counting.
18.11.3 TCNT2 – Timer/Counter Register
The Timer/Counter Register gives direct access, both for read and write operations, to the
Timer/Counter unit 8-bit counter. Writing to the TCNT2 Register blocks (removes) the Compare
Match on the following timer clock. Modifying the counter (TCNT2) while the counter is running,
introduces a risk of missing a Compare Match between TCNT2 and the OCR2x Registers.
18.11.4 OCR2A – Output Compare Register A
The Output Compare Register A contains an 8-bit value that is continuously compared with the
counter value (TCNT2). A match can be used to generate an Output Compare interrupt, or to
generate a waveform output on the OC2A pin.
18.11.5 OCR2B – Output Compare Register B
The Output Compare Register B contains an 8-bit value that is continuously compared with the
counter value (TCNT2). A match can be used to generate an Output Compare interrupt, or to
generate a waveform output on the OC2B pin.
Table 18-9. Clock Select Bit Description
CS22 CS21 CS20 Description
0 0 0 No clock source (Timer/Counter stopped).
001clk
T2S/(No prescaling)
010clk
T2S/8 (From prescaler)
011clk
T2S/32 (From prescaler)
100clk
T2S/64 (From prescaler)
101clk
T2S/128 (From prescaler)
110clk
T2S/256 (From prescaler)
111clk
T2S/1024 (From prescaler)
Bit 76543210
(0xB2) TCNT2[7:0] TCNT2
Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 76543210
(0xB3) OCR2A[7:0] OCR2A
Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 76543210
(0xB4) OCR2B[7:0] OCR2B
Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 174
18.11.6 TIMSK2 – Timer/Counter2 Interrupt Mask Register
• Bit 2 – OCIE2B: Timer/Counter2 Output Compare Match B Interrupt Enable
When the OCIE2B bit is written to one and the I-bit in the Status Register is set (one), the
Timer/Counter2 Compare Match B interrupt is enabled. The corresponding interrupt is executed
if a compare match in Timer/Counter2 occurs, i.e., when the OCF2B bit is set in the
Timer/Counter 2 Interrupt Flag Register – TIFR2.
• Bit 1 – OCIE2A: Timer/Counter2 Output Compare Match A Interrupt Enable
When the OCIE2A bit is written to one and the I-bit in the Status Register is set (one), the
Timer/Counter2 Compare Match A interrupt is enabled. The corresponding interrupt is executed
if a compare match in Timer/Counter2 occurs, i.e., when the OCF2A bit is set in the
Timer/Counter 2 Interrupt Flag Register – TIFR2.
• Bit 0 – TOIE2: Timer/Counter2 Overflow Interrupt Enable
When the TOIE2 bit is written to one and the I-bit in the Status Register is set (one), the
Timer/Counter2 Overflow interrupt is enabled. The corresponding interrupt is executed if an
overflow in Timer/Counter2 occurs, i.e., when the TOV2 bit is set in the Timer/Counter2 Interrupt
Flag Register – TIFR2.
18.11.7 TIFR2 – Timer/Counter2 Interrupt Flag Register
• Bit 2 – OCF2B: Output Compare Flag 2 B
The OCF2B bit is set (one) when a compare match occurs between the Timer/Counter2 and the
data in OCR2B – Output Compare Register2. OCF2B is cleared by hardware when executing
the corresponding interrupt handling vector. Alternatively, OCF2B is cleared by writing a logic
one to the flag. When the I-bit in SREG, OCIE2B (Timer/Counter2 Compare match Interrupt
Enable), and OCF2B are set (one), the Timer/Counter2 Compare match Interrupt is executed.
• Bit 1 – OCF2A: Output Compare Flag 2 A
The OCF2A bit is set (one) when a compare match occurs between the Timer/Counter2 and the
data in OCR2A – Output Compare Register2. OCF2A is cleared by hardware when executing
the corresponding interrupt handling vector. Alternatively, OCF2A is cleared by writing a logic
one to the flag. When the I-bit in SREG, OCIE2A (Timer/Counter2 Compare match Interrupt
Enable), and OCF2A are set (one), the Timer/Counter2 Compare match Interrupt is executed.
• Bit 0 – TOV2: Timer/Counter2 Overflow Flag
The TOV2 bit is set (one) when an overflow occurs in Timer/Counter2. TOV2 is cleared by
hardware when executing the corresponding interrupt handling vector. Alternatively, TOV2 is
cleared by writing a logic one to the flag. When the SREG I-bit, TOIE2A (Timer/Counter2
Bit 76543 2 1 0
(0x70) –––––OCIE2BOCIE2ATOIE2TIMSK2
Read/Write RRRRR R/WR/WR/W
Initial Value 00000 0 0 0
Bit 76543210
0x17 (0x37) –––––OCF2BOCF2ATOV2TIFR2
Read/Write R R R R R R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 175
Overflow Interrupt Enable), and TOV2 are set (one), the Timer/Counter2 Overflow interrupt is
executed. In PWM mode, this bit is set when Timer/Counter2 changes counting direction at
0x00.
18.11.8 ASSR – Asynchronous Status Register
• Bit 7 – RES: Reserved bit
This bit is reserved and will always read as zero.
• Bit 6 – EXCLK: Enable External Clock Input
When EXCLK is written to one, and asynchronous clock is selected, the external clock input
buffer is enabled and an external clock can be input on Timer Oscillator 1 (TOSC1) pin instead
of a 32 kHz crystal. Writing to EXCLK should be done before asynchronous operation is
selected. Note that the crystal Oscillator will only run when this bit is zero.
• Bit 5 – AS2: Asynchronous Timer/Counter2
When AS2 is written to zero, Timer/Counter2 is clocked from the I/O clock, clkI/O. When AS2 is
written to one, Timer/Counter2 is clocked from a crystal Oscillator connected to the Timer
Oscillator 1 (TOSC1) pin. When the value of AS2 is changed, the contents of TCNT2, OCR2A,
OCR2B, TCCR2A and TCCR2B might be corrupted.
• Bit 4 – TCN2UB: Timer/Counter2 Update Busy
When Timer/Counter2 operates asynchronously and TCNT2 is written, this bit becomes set.
When TCNT2 has been updated from the temporary storage register, this bit is cleared by
hardware. A logical zero in this bit indicates that TCNT2 is ready to be updated with a new value.
• Bit 3 – OCR2AUB: Output Compare Register2 Update Busy
When Timer/Counter2 operates asynchronously and OCR2A is written, this bit becomes set.
When OCR2A has been updated from the temporary storage register, this bit is cleared by
hardware. A logical zero in this bit indicates that OCR2A is ready to be updated with a new
value.
• Bit 2 – OCR2BUB: Output Compare Register2 Update Busy
When Timer/Counter2 operates asynchronously and OCR2B is written, this bit becomes set.
When OCR2B has been updated from the temporary storage register, this bit is cleared by
hardware. A logical zero in this bit indicates that OCR2B is ready to be updated with a new
value.
• Bit 1 – TCR2AUB: Timer/Counter Control Register2 Update Busy
When Timer/Counter2 operates asynchronously and TCCR2A is written, this bit becomes set.
When TCCR2A has been updated from the temporary storage register, this bit is cleared by
hardware. A logical zero in this bit indicates that TCCR2A is ready to be updated with a new
value.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
(0xB6) – EXCLK AS2 TCN2UB OCR2AUB OCR2BUB TCR2AUB TCR2BUB ASSR
Read/Write R R/W R/W R R R R R
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 176
• Bit 0 – TCR2BUB: Timer/Counter Control Register2 Update Busy
When Timer/Counter2 operates asynchronously and TCCR2B is written, this bit becomes set.
When TCCR2B has been updated from the temporary storage register, this bit is cleared by
hardware. A logical zero in this bit indicates that TCCR2B is ready to be updated with a new
value.
If a write is performed to any of the five Timer/Counter2 Registers while its update busy flag is
set, the updated value might get corrupted and cause an unintentional interrupt to occur.
The mechanisms for reading TCNT2, OCR2A, OCR2B, TCCR2A and TCCR2B are different.
When reading TCNT2, the actual timer value is read. When reading OCR2A, OCR2B, TCCR2A
and TCCR2B the value in the temporary storage register is read.
18.11.9 GTCCR – General Timer/Counter Control Register
• Bit 1 – PSRASY: Prescaler Reset Timer/Counter2
When this bit is one, the Timer/Counter2 prescaler will be reset. This bit is normally cleared
immediately by hardware. If the bit is written when Timer/Counter2 is operating in asynchronous
mode, the bit will remain one until the prescaler has been reset. The bit will not be cleared by
hardware if the TSM bit is set. Refer to the description of the “Bit 7 – TSM: Timer/Counter
Synchronization Mode” on page 154 for a description of the Timer/Counter Synchronization
mode.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0x23 (0x43) TSM – – – – – PSRASY PSRSYNC GTCCR
Read/Write R/W R R R R R R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
S 1 MISC M I M Mos‘ XTAL M35 L53 5 g Cl l ‘ BEITSHIFTREGISTER ‘ 9 READ DATA BUFFER 5 cc E z o o z SPICLOCKMASTER CLO K E SELECT CLOCK s sCK LOCK; M § E ‘g m u: m o E m m g & 8 MSTR SPI CONTROL ‘ SPE :3 cc 4 < v="" c:="" i:="" 0="" y="" m="" cc="">— o z :1 m u %;HH‘ 8%$8§$%%& |sm STATUS REG‘STER \ SF" CONTROL REGISTER 8 8 SPI INTERRUPT INTERNAL REQUEST DATA BUS
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 177
19. SPI – Serial Peripheral Interface
19.1 Features
•Full-duplex, Three-wire Synchronous Data Transfer
•Master or Slave Operation
•LSB First or MSB First Data Transfer
•Seven Programmable Bit Rates
•End of Transmission Interrupt Flag
•Write Collision Flag Protection
•Wake-up from Idle Mode
•Double Speed (CK/2) Master SPI Mode
19.2 Overview
The Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) allows high-speed synchronous data transfer between the
ATmega48P/88P/168P and peripheral devices or between several AVR devices.
The USART can also be used in Master SPI mode, see “USART in SPI Mode” on page 214. The
PRSPI bit in “Minimizing Power Consumption” on page 51 must be written to zero to enable SPI
module.
Figure 19-1. SPI Block Diagram(1)
Note: 1. Refer to Figure 1-1 on page 10, and Table 14-3 on page 92 for SPI pin placement.
SPI2X
SPI2X
DIVIDER
/2/4/8/16/32/64/128
S—MB MASTER LSB W50 MISC S—MB SLAVE LSB _ BIT SH‘FT REG‘STER _ B‘T SH‘FT REG‘STER Sp‘ sex sex CLOCK GENERATOR 7 7 55 55
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 178
The interconnection between Master and Slave CPUs with SPI is shown in Figure 19-2 on page
178. The system consists of two shift Registers, and a Master clock generator. The SPI Master
initiates the communication cycle when pulling low the Slave Select SS pin of the desired Slave.
Master and Slave prepare the data to be sent in their respective shift Registers, and the Master
generates the required clock pulses on the SCK line to interchange data. Data is always shifted
from Master to Slave on the Master Out – Slave In, MOSI, line, and from Slave to Master on the
Master In – Slave Out, MISO, line. After each data packet, the Master will synchronize the Slave
by pulling high the Slave Select, SS, line.
When configured as a Master, the SPI interface has no automatic control of the SS line. This
must be handled by user software before communication can start. When this is done, writing a
byte to the SPI Data Register starts the SPI clock generator, and the hardware shifts the eight
bits into the Slave. After shifting one byte, the SPI clock generator stops, setting the end of
Transmission Flag (SPIF). If the SPI Interrupt Enable bit (SPIE) in the SPCR Register is set, an
interrupt is requested. The Master may continue to shift the next byte by writing it into SPDR, or
signal the end of packet by pulling high the Slave Select, SS line. The last incoming byte will be
kept in the Buffer Register for later use.
When configured as a Slave, the SPI interface will remain sleeping with MISO tri-stated as long
as the SS pin is driven high. In this state, software may update the contents of the SPI Data
Register, SPDR, but the data will not be shifted out by incoming clock pulses on the SCK pin
until the SS pin is driven low. As one byte has been completely shifted, the end of Transmission
Flag, SPIF is set. If the SPI Interrupt Enable bit, SPIE, in the SPCR Register is set, an interrupt
is requested. The Slave may continue to place new data to be sent into SPDR before reading
the incoming data. The last incoming byte will be kept in the Buffer Register for later use.
Figure 19-2. SPI Master-slave Interconnection
The system is single buffered in the transmit direction and double buffered in the receive
direction. This means that bytes to be transmitted cannot be written to the SPI Data Register
before the entire shift cycle is completed. When receiving data, however, a received character
must be read from the SPI Data Register before the next character has been completely shifted
in. Otherwise, the first byte is lost.
In SPI Slave mode, the control logic will sample the incoming signal of the SCK pin. To ensure
correct sampling of the clock signal, the minimum low and high periods should be:
Low periods: Longer than 2 CPU clock cycles.
High periods: Longer than 2 CPU clock cycles.
SHIFT
ENABLE
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 179
When the SPI is enabled, the data direction of the MOSI, MISO, SCK, and SS pins is overridden
according to Table 19-1 on page 179. For more details on automatic port overrides, refer to
“Alternate Port Functions” on page 90.
Note: 1. See “Alternate Functions of Port B” on page 92 for a detailed description of how to define the
direction of the user defined SPI pins.
The following code examples show how to initialize the SPI as a Master and how to perform a
simple transmission. DDR_SPI in the examples must be replaced by the actual Data Direction
Register controlling the SPI pins. DD_MOSI, DD_MISO and DD_SCK must be replaced by the
actual data direction bits for these pins. E.g. if MOSI is placed on pin PB5, replace DD_MOSI
with DDB5 and DDR_SPI with DDRB.
Table 19-1. SPI Pin Overrides(1)
Pin Direction, Master SPI Direction, Slave SPI
MOSI User Defined Input
MISO Input User Defined
SCK User Defined Input
SS User Defined Input
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 180
Note: 1. See ”About Code Examples” on page 16.
Assembly Code Example(1)
SPI_MasterInit:
; Set MOSI and SCK output, all others input
ldi r17,(1<<DD_MOSI)|(1<<DD_SCK)
out DDR_SPI,r17
; Enable SPI, Master, set clock rate fck/16
ldi r17,(1<<SPE)|(1<<MSTR)|(1<<SPR0)
out SPCR,r17
ret
SPI_MasterTransmit:
; Start transmission of data (r16)
out SPDR,r16
Wait_Transmit:
; Wait for transmission complete
in r16, SPSR
sbrs r16, SPIF
rjmp Wait_Transmit
ret
C Code Example(1)
void SPI_MasterInit(void)
{
/* Set MOSI and SCK output, all others input */
DDR_SPI = (1<<DD_MOSI)|(1<<DD_SCK);
/* Enable SPI, Master, set clock rate fck/16 */
SPCR = (1<<SPE)|(1<<MSTR)|(1<<SPR0);
}
void SPI_MasterTransmit(char cData)
{
/* Start transmission */
SPDR = cData;
/* Wait for transmission complete */
while(!(SPSR & (1<<SPIF)))
;
}
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 181
The following code examples show how to initialize the SPI as a Slave and how to perform a
simple reception.
Note: 1. See ”About Code Examples” on page 16.
Assembly Code Example(1)
SPI_SlaveInit:
; Set MISO output, all others input
ldi r17,(1<<DD_MISO)
out DDR_SPI,r17
; Enable SPI
ldi r17,(1<<SPE)
out SPCR,r17
ret
SPI_SlaveReceive:
; Wait for reception complete
sbis SPSR,SPIF
rjmp SPI_SlaveReceive
; Read received data and return
in r16,SPDR
ret
C Code Example(1)
void SPI_SlaveInit(void)
{
/* Set MISO output, all others input */
DDR_SPI = (1<<DD_MISO);
/* Enable SPI */
SPCR = (1<<SPE);
}
char SPI_SlaveReceive(void)
{
/* Wait for reception complete */
while(!(SPSR & (1<<SPIF)))
;
/* Return Data Register */
return SPDR;
}
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 182
19.3 SS Pin Functionality
19.3.1 Slave Mode
When the SPI is configured as a Slave, the Slave Select (SS) pin is always input. When SS is
held low, the SPI is activated, and MISO becomes an output if configured so by the user. All
other pins are inputs. When SS is driven high, all pins are inputs, and the SPI is passive, which
means that it will not receive incoming data. Note that the SPI logic will be reset once the SS pin
is driven high.
The SS pin is useful for packet/byte synchronization to keep the slave bit counter synchronous
with the master clock generator. When the SS pin is driven high, the SPI slave will immediately
reset the send and receive logic, and drop any partially received data in the Shift Register.
19.3.2 Master Mode
When the SPI is configured as a Master (MSTR in SPCR is set), the user can determine the
direction of the SS pin.
If SS is configured as an output, the pin is a general output pin which does not affect the SPI
system. Typically, the pin will be driving the SS pin of the SPI Slave.
If SS is configured as an input, it must be held high to ensure Master SPI operation. If the SS pin
is driven low by peripheral circuitry when the SPI is configured as a Master with the SS pin
defined as an input, the SPI system interprets this as another master selecting the SPI as a
slave and starting to send data to it. To avoid bus contention, the SPI system takes the following
actions:
1. The MSTR bit in SPCR is cleared and the SPI system becomes a Slave. As a result of the
SPI becoming a Slave, the MOSI and SCK pins become inputs.
2. The SPIF Flag in SPSR is set, and if the SPI interrupt is enabled, and the I-bit in SREG is
set, the interrupt routine will be executed.
Thus, when interrupt-driven SPI transmission is used in Master mode, and there exists a
possibility that SS is driven low, the interrupt should always check that the MSTR bit is still set. If
the MSTR bit has been cleared by a slave select, it must be set by the user to re-enable SPI
Master mode.
19.4 Data Modes
There are four combinations of SCK phase and polarity with respect to serial data, which are
determined by control bits CPHA and CPOL. The SPI data transfer formats are shown in Figure
19-3 and Figure 19-4 on page 183. Data bits are shifted out and latched in on opposite edges of
the SCK signal, ensuring sufficient time for data signals to stabilize. This is clearly seen by
summarizing Table 19-3 on page 184 and Table 19-4 on page 184, as done in Table 19-2.
Table 19-2. SPI Modes
SPI Mode Conditions Leading Edge Trailing eDge
0 CPOL=0, CPHA=0 Sample (Rising) Setup (Falling)
1 CPOL=0, CPHA=1 Setup (Rising) Sample (Falling)
2 CPOL=1, CPHA=0 Sample (Falling) Setup (Rising)
3 CPOL=1, CPHA=1 Setup (Falling) Sample (Rising)
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 183
Figure 19-3. SPI Transfer Format with CPHA = 0
Figure 19-4. SPI Transfer Format with CPHA = 1
Bit 1
Bit 6
LSB
MSB
SCK (CPOL = 0)
mode 0
SAMPLE I
MOSI/MISO
CHANGE 0
MOSI PIN
CHANGE 0
MISO PIN
SCK (CPOL = 1)
mode 2
SS
MSB
LSB
Bit 6
Bit 1
Bit 5
Bit 2
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 2
Bit 5
MSB first (DORD = 0)
LSB first (DORD = 1)
SCK (CPOL = 0)
mode 1
SAMPLE I
MOSI/MISO
CHANGE 0
MOSI PIN
CHANGE 0
MISO PIN
SCK (CPOL = 1)
mode 3
SS
MSB
LSB
Bit 6
Bit 1
Bit 5
Bit 2
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 2
Bit 5
Bit 1
Bit 6
LSB
MSB
MSB first (DORD = 0)
LSB first (DORD = 1)
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 184
19.5 Register Description
19.5.1 SPCR – SPI Control Register
• Bit 7 – SPIE: SPI Interrupt Enable
This bit causes the SPI interrupt to be executed if SPIF bit in the SPSR Register is set and the if
the Global Interrupt Enable bit in SREG is set.
• Bit 6 – SPE: SPI Enable
When the SPE bit is written to one, the SPI is enabled. This bit must be set to enable any SPI
operations.
• Bit 5 – DORD: Data Order
When the DORD bit is written to one, the LSB of the data word is transmitted first.
When the DORD bit is written to zero, the MSB of the data word is transmitted first.
• Bit 4 – MSTR: Master/Slave Select
This bit selects Master SPI mode when written to one, and Slave SPI mode when written logic
zero. If SS is configured as an input and is driven low while MSTR is set, MSTR will be cleared,
and SPIF in SPSR will become set. The user will then have to set MSTR to re-enable SPI
Master mode.
• Bit 3 – CPOL: Clock Polarity
When this bit is written to one, SCK is high when idle. When CPOL is written to zero, SCK is low
when idle. Refer to Figure 19-3 and Figure 19-4 for an example. The CPOL functionality is
summarized below:
• Bit 2 – CPHA: Clock Phase
The settings of the Clock Phase bit (CPHA) determine if data is sampled on the leading (first) or
trailing (last) edge of SCK. Refer to Figure 19-3 and Figure 19-4 for an example. The CPOL
functionality is summarized below:
Bit 76543210
0x2C (0x4C) SPIE SPE DORD MSTR CPOL CPHA SPR1 SPR0 SPCR
Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Table 19-3. CPOL Functionality
CPOL Leading Edge Trailing Edge
0 Rising Falling
1 Falling Rising
Table 19-4. CPHA Functionality
CPHA Leading Edge Trailing Edge
0 Sample Setup
1 Setup Sample
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 185
• Bits 1, 0 – SPR1, SPR0: SPI Clock Rate Select 1 and 0
These two bits control the SCK rate of the device configured as a Master. SPR1 and SPR0 have
no effect on the Slave. The relationship between SCK and the Oscillator Clock frequency fosc is
shown in the following table:
19.5.2 SPSR – SPI Status Register
• Bit 7 – SPIF: SPI Interrupt Flag
When a serial transfer is complete, the SPIF Flag is set. An interrupt is generated if SPIE in
SPCR is set and global interrupts are enabled. If SS is an input and is driven low when the SPI is
in Master mode, this will also set the SPIF Flag. SPIF is cleared by hardware when executing the
corresponding interrupt handling vector. Alternatively, the SPIF bit is cleared by first reading the
SPI Status Register with SPIF set, then accessing the SPI Data Register (SPDR).
• Bit 6 – WCOL: Write COLlision Flag
The WCOL bit is set if the SPI Data Register (SPDR) is written during a data transfer. The
WCOL bit (and the SPIF bit) are cleared by first reading the SPI Status Register with WCOL set,
and then accessing the SPI Data Register.
• Bit 5:1 – Reserved
These bits are reserved bits in the ATmega48P/88P/168P and will always read as zero.
• Bit 0 – SPI2X: Double SPI Speed Bit
When this bit is written logic one the SPI speed (SCK Frequency) will be doubled when the SPI
is in Master mode (see Table 19-5). This means that the minimum SCK period will be two CPU
clock periods. When the SPI is configured as Slave, the SPI is only ensured to work at fosc/4 or
lower.
The SPI interface on the ATmega48P/88P/168P is also used for program memory and
EEPROM downloading or uploading. See page 319 for serial programming and verification.
Table 19-5. Relationship Between SCK and the Oscillator Frequency
SPI2X SPR1 SPR0 SCK Frequency
000fosc/4
001fosc/16
010fosc/64
011
fosc/128
100fosc/2
101fosc/8
110
fosc/32
111fosc/64
Bit 76543210
0x2D (0x4D) SPIF WCOL – – – – – SPI2X SPSR
Read/Write RRRRRRRR/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 186
19.5.3 SPDR – SPI Data Register
The SPI Data Register is a read/write register used for data transfer between the Register File
and the SPI Shift Register. Writing to the register initiates data transmission. Reading the
register causes the Shift Register Receive buffer to be read.
Bit 76543210
0x2E (0x4E) MSB LSB SPDR
Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial ValueXXXXXXXXUndefined
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 187
20. USART0
20.1 Features
•Full Duplex Operation (Independent Serial Receive and Transmit Registers)
•Asynchronous or Synchronous Operation
•Master or Slave Clocked Synchronous Operation
•High Resolution Baud Rate Generator
•Supports Serial Frames with 5, 6, 7, 8, or 9 Data Bits and 1 or 2 Stop Bits
•Odd or Even Parity Generation and Parity Check Supported by Hardware
•Data OverRun Detection
•Framing Error Detection
•Noise Filtering Includes False Start Bit Detection and Digital Low Pass Filter
•Three Separate Interrupts on TX Complete, TX Data Register Empty and RX Complete
•Multi-processor Communication Mode
•Double Speed Asynchronous Communication Mode
20.2 Overview
The Universal Synchronous and Asynchronous serial Receiver and Transmitter (USART) is a
highly flexible serial communication device.
The USART0 can also be used in Master SPI mode, see “USART in SPI Mode” on page 214.
The Power Reduction USART bit, PRUSART0, in “Minimizing Power Consumption” on page 51
must be disabled by writing a logical zero to it.
A simplified block diagram of the USART Transmitter is shown in Figure 20-1 on page 188. CPU
accessible I/O Registers and I/O pins are shown in bold.
The dashed boxes in the block diagram separate the three main parts of the USART (listed from
the top): Clock Generator, Transmitter and Receiver. Control Registers are shared by all units.
The Clock Generation logic consists of synchronization logic for external clock input used by
synchronous slave operation, and the baud rate generator. The XCKn (Transfer Clock) pin is
only used by synchronous transfer mode. The Transmitter consists of a single write buffer, a
serial Shift Register, Parity Generator and Control logic for handling different serial frame
formats. The write buffer allows a continuous transfer of data without any delay between frames.
The Receiver is the most complex part of the USART module due to its clock and data recovery
units. The recovery units are used for asynchronous data reception. In addition to the recovery
units, the Receiver includes a Parity Checker, Control logic, a Shift Register and a two level
receive buffer (UDRn). The Receiver supports the same frame formats as the Transmitter, and
can detect Frame Error, Data OverRun and Parity Errors.
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 188
Figure 20-1. USART Block Diagram(1)
Note: 1. Refer to Figure 1-1 on page 10 and Table 14-9 on page 98 for USART0 pin placement.
20.3 Clock Generation
The Clock Generation logic generates the base clock for the Transmitter and Receiver. The
USART supports four modes of clock operation: Normal asynchronous, Double Speed
asynchronous, Master synchronous and Slave synchronous mode. The UMSELn bit in USART
Control and Status Register C (UCSRnC) selects between asynchronous and synchronous
operation. Double Speed (asynchronous mode only) is controlled by the U2Xn found in the
UCSRnA Register. When using synchronous mode (UMSELn = 1), the Data Direction Register
for the XCKn pin (DDR_XCKn) controls whether the clock source is internal (Master mode) or
external (Slave mode). The XCKn pin is only active when using synchronous mode.
PARITY
GENERATOR
UBRRn [H:L]
UDRn(Transmit)
UCSRnA UCSRnB UCSRnC
BAUD RATE GENERATOR
TRANSMIT SHIFT REGISTER
RECEIVE SHIFT REGISTER RxDn
TxDn
PIN
CONTROL
UDRn (Receive)
PIN
CONTROL
XCKn
DATA
RECOVERY
CLOCK
RECOVERY
PIN
CONTROL
TX
CONTROL
RX
CONTROL
PARITY
CHECKER
DATA BUS
OSC
SYNC LOGIC
Clock Generator
Transmitter
Receiver
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 189
Figure 20-2 shows a block diagram of the clock generation logic.
Figure 20-2. Clock Generation Logic, Block Diagram
Signal description:
txclk: Transmitter clock (Internal Signal).
rxclk: Receiver base clock (Internal Signal).
xcki: Input from XCK pin (internal Signal). Used for synchronous slave operation.
xcko: Clock output to XCK pin (Internal Signal). Used for synchronous master
operation.
fosc: XTAL pin frequency (System Clock).
20.3.1 Internal Clock Generation – The Baud Rate Generator
Internal clock generation is used for the asynchronous and the synchronous master modes of
operation. The description in this section refers to Figure 20-2.
The USART Baud Rate Register (UBRRn) and the down-counter connected to it function as a
programmable prescaler or baud rate generator. The down-counter, running at system clock
(fosc), is loaded with the UBRRn value each time the counter has counted down to zero or when
the UBRRnL Register is written. A clock is generated each time the counter reaches zero. This
clock is the baud rate generator clock output (= fosc/(UBRRn+1)). The Transmitter divides the
baud rate generator clock output by 2, 8 or 16 depending on mode. The baud rate generator
output is used directly by the Receiver’s clock and data recovery units. However, the recovery
units use a state machine that uses 2, 8 or 16 states depending on mode set by the state of the
UMSELn, U2Xn and DDR_XCKn bits.
Prescaling
Down-Counter /2
UBRRn
/4 /2
foscn
UBRRn+1
Sync
Register
OSC
XCKn
Pin
txclk
U2Xn
UMSELn
DDR_XCKn
0
1
0
1
xcki
xcko
DDR_XCKn rxclk
0
1
1
0
Edge
Detector
UCPOLn
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 190
Table 20-1 contains equations for calculating the baud rate (in bits per second) and for
calculating the UBRRn value for each mode of operation using an internally generated clock
source.
Note: 1. The baud rate is defined to be the transfer rate in bit per second (bps)
BAUD: Baud rate (in bits per second, bps)
fOSC: System Oscillator clock frequency
UBRRn: Contents of the UBRRnH and UBRRnL Registers, (0-4095)
Some examples of UBRRn values for some system clock frequencies are found in Table 20-9
(see page 210).
20.3.2 Double Speed Operation (U2Xn)
The transfer rate can be doubled by setting the U2Xn bit in UCSRnA. Setting this bit only has
effect for the asynchronous operation. Set this bit to zero when using synchronous operation.
Setting this bit will reduce the divisor of the baud rate divider from 16 to 8, effectively doubling
the transfer rate for asynchronous communication. Note however that the Receiver will in this
case only use half the number of samples (reduced from 16 to 8) for data sampling and clock
recovery, and therefore a more accurate baud rate setting and system clock are required when
this mode is used. For the Transmitter, there are no downsides.
Table 20-1. Equations for Calculating Baud Rate Register Setting
Operating Mode
Equation for Calculating Baud
Rate(1)
Equation for Calculating
UBRRn Value
Asynchronous Normal mode
(U2Xn = 0)
Asynchronous Double Speed
mode (U2Xn = 1)
Synchronous Master mode
BAUD fOSC
16 UBRRn1+
------------------------------------------=
UBRRnfOSC
16BAUD
------------------------1–=
BAUD fOSC
8UBRRn1+
---------------------------------------=
UBRRnfOSC
8BAUD
-------------------- 1–=
BAUD fOSC
2UBRRn1+
---------------------------------------=
UBRRnfOSC
2BAUD
-------------------- 1–=
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 191
20.3.3 External Clock
External clocking is used by the synchronous slave modes of operation. The description in this
section refers to Figure 20-2 for details.
External clock input from the XCKn pin is sampled by a synchronization register to minimize the
chance of meta-stability. The output from the synchronization register must then pass through
an edge detector before it can be used by the Transmitter and Receiver. This process
introduces a two CPU clock period delay and therefore the maximum external XCKn clock
frequency is limited by the following equation:
Note that fosc depends on the stability of the system clock source. It is therefore recommended to
add some margin to avoid possible loss of data due to frequency variations.
20.3.4 Synchronous Clock Operation
When synchronous mode is used (UMSELn = 1), the XCKn pin will be used as either clock input
(Slave) or clock output (Master). The dependency between the clock edges and data sampling
or data change is the same. The basic principle is that data input (on RxDn) is sampled at the
opposite XCKn clock edge of the edge the data output (TxDn) is changed.
Figure 20-3. Synchronous Mode XCKn Timing.
The UCPOLn bit UCRSC selects which XCKn clock edge is used for data sampling and which is
used for data change. As Figure 20-3 shows, when UCPOLn is zero the data will be changed at
rising XCKn edge and sampled at falling XCKn edge. If UCPOLn is set, the data will be changed
at falling XCKn edge and sampled at rising XCKn edge.
20.4 Frame Formats
A serial frame is defined to be one character of data bits with synchronization bits (start and stop
bits), and optionally a parity bit for error checking. The USART accepts all 30 combinations of
the following as valid frame formats:
• 1 start bit
• 5, 6, 7, 8, or 9 data bits
• no, even or odd parity bit
• 1 or 2 stop bits
fXCK
fOSC
4
-----------
RxD / TxD
XCK
RxD / TxD
XCK
UCPOL = 0
UCPOL = 1
Sample
Sample
+——+ \/XXXXXXXXX/ 1\
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 192
A frame starts with the start bit followed by the least significant data bit. Then the next data bits,
up to a total of nine, are succeeding, ending with the most significant bit. If enabled, the parity bit
is inserted after the data bits, before the stop bits. When a complete frame is transmitted, it can
be directly followed by a new frame, or the communication line can be set to an idle (high) state.
Figure 20-4 illustrates the possible combinations of the frame formats. Bits inside brackets are
optional.
Figure 20-4. Frame Formats
St: Start bit, always low.
(n): Data bits (0 to 8).
P: Parity bit. Can be odd or even.
Sp: Stop bit, always high.
IDLE: No transfers on the communication line (RxDn or TxDn). An IDLE line must be high.
The frame format used by the USART is set by the UCSZn2:0, UPMn1:0 and USBSn bits in
UCSRnB and UCSRnC. The Receiver and Transmitter use the same setting. Note that changing
the setting of any of these bits will corrupt all ongoing communication for both the Receiver and
Transmitter.
The USART Character SiZe (UCSZn2:0) bits select the number of data bits in the frame. The
USART Parity mode (UPMn1:0) bits enable and set the type of parity bit. The selection between
one or two stop bits is done by the USART Stop Bit Select (USBSn) bit. The Receiver ignores
the second stop bit. An FE (Frame Error) will therefore only be detected in the cases where the
first stop bit is zero.
20.4.1 Parity Bit Calculation
The parity bit is calculated by doing an exclusive-or of all the data bits. If odd parity is used, the
result of the exclusive or is inverted. The relation between the parity bit and data bits is as
follows:
Peven: Parity bit using even parity
Podd: Parity bit using odd parity
dn: Data bit n of the character
If used, the parity bit is located between the last data bit and first stop bit of a serial frame.
20.5 USART Initialization
The USART has to be initialized before any communication can take place. The initialization
process normally consists of setting the baud rate, setting frame format and enabling the
Transmitter or the Receiver depending on the usage. For interrupt driven USART operation, the
10 2 3 4 [5] [6] [7] [8] [P]St Sp1 [Sp2] (St / IDLE)(IDLE)
FRAME
Peven dn1–d3d2d1d00
Podd

dn1–d3d2d1d01
=
=
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 193
Global Interrupt Flag should be cleared (and interrupts globally disabled) when doing the
initialization.
Before doing a re-initialization with changed baud rate or frame format, be sure that there are no
ongoing transmissions during the period the registers are changed. The TXCn Flag can be used
to check that the Transmitter has completed all transfers, and the RXC Flag can be used to
check that there are no unread data in the receive buffer. Note that the TXCn Flag must be
cleared before each transmission (before UDRn is written) if it is used for this purpose.
The following simple USART initialization code examples show one assembly and one C
function that are equal in functionality. The examples assume asynchronous operation using
polling (no interrupts enabled) and a fixed frame format. The baud rate is given as a function
parameter. For the assembly code, the baud rate parameter is assumed to be stored in the
r17:r16 Registers.
Note: 1. See ”About Code Examples” on page 16.
More advanced initialization routines can be made that include frame format as parameters,
disable interrupts and so on. However, many applications use a fixed setting of the baud and
control registers, and for these types of applications the initialization code can be placed directly
in the main routine, or be combined with initialization code for other I/O modules.
Assembly Code Example(1)
USART_Init:
; Set baud rate
out UBRRnH, r17
out UBRRnL, r16
; Enable receiver and transmitter
ldi r16, (1<<RXENn)|(1<<TXENn)
out UCSRnB,r16
; Set frame format: 8data, 2stop bit
ldi r16, (1<<USBSn)|(3<<UCSZn0)
out UCSRnC,r16
ret
C Code Example(1)
#define FOSC 1843200 // Clock Speed
#define BAUD 9600
#define MYUBRR FOSC/16/BAUD-1
void main( void )
{
...
USART_Init(MYUBRR)
...
}
void USART_Init( unsigned int ubrr)
{
/*Set baud rate */
UBRR0H = (unsigned char)(ubrr>>8);
UBRR0L = (unsigned char)ubrr;
Enable receiver and transmitter */
UCSR0B = (1<<RXEN0)|(1<<TXEN0);
/* Set frame format: 8data, 2stop bit */
UCSR0C = (1<<USBS0)|(3<<UCSZ00);
}
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 194
20.6 Data Transmission – The USART Transmitter
The USART Transmitter is enabled by setting the Transmit Enable (TXEN) bit in the UCSRnB
Register. When the Transmitter is enabled, the normal port operation of the TxDn pin is
overridden by the USART and given the function as the Transmitter’s serial output. The baud
rate, mode of operation and frame format must be set up once before doing any transmissions.
If synchronous operation is used, the clock on the XCKn pin will be overridden and used as
transmission clock.
20.6.1 Sending Frames with 5 to 8 Data Bit
A data transmission is initiated by loading the transmit buffer with the data to be transmitted. The
CPU can load the transmit buffer by writing to the UDRn I/O location. The buffered data in the
transmit buffer will be moved to the Shift Register when the Shift Register is ready to send a new
frame. The Shift Register is loaded with new data if it is in idle state (no ongoing transmission) or
immediately after the last stop bit of the previous frame is transmitted. When the Shift Register is
loaded with new data, it will transfer one complete frame at the rate given by the Baud Register,
U2Xn bit or by XCKn depending on mode of operation.
The following code examples show a simple USART transmit function based on polling of the
Data Register Empty (UDREn) Flag. When using frames with less than eight bits, the most
significant bits written to the UDRn are ignored. The USART has to be initialized before the
function can be used. For the assembly code, the data to be sent is assumed to be stored in
Register R16
Note: 1. See ”About Code Examples” on page 16.
The function simply waits for the transmit buffer to be empty by checking the UDREn Flag,
before loading it with new data to be transmitted. If the Data Register Empty interrupt is utilized,
the interrupt routine writes the data into the buffer.
20.6.2 Sending Frames with 9 Data Bit
If 9-bit characters are used (UCSZn = 7), the ninth bit must be written to the TXB8 bit in
UCSRnB before the low byte of the character is written to UDRn. The following code examples
Assembly Code Example(1)
USART_Transmit:
; Wait for empty transmit buffer
sbis UCSRnA,UDREn
rjmp USART_Transmit
; Put data (r16) into buffer, sends the data
out UDRn,r16
ret
C Code Example(1)
void USART_Transmit( unsigned char data )
{
/* Wait for empty transmit buffer */
while ( !( UCSRnA & (1<<UDREn)) )
;
/* Put data into buffer, sends the data */
UDRn = data;
}
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 195
show a transmit function that handles 9-bit characters. For the assembly code, the data to be
sent is assumed to be stored in registers R17:R16.
Notes: 1. These transmit functions are written to be general functions. They can be optimized if the
contents of the UCSRnB is static. For example, only the TXB8 bit of the UCSRnB Register is
used after initialization.
2. See ”About Code Examples” on page 16.
The ninth bit can be used for indicating an address frame when using multi processor
communication mode or for other protocol handling as for example synchronization.
20.6.3 Transmitter Flags and Interrupts
The USART Transmitter has two flags that indicate its state: USART Data Register Empty
(UDREn) and Transmit Complete (TXCn). Both flags can be used for generating interrupts.
The Data Register Empty (UDREn) Flag indicates whether the transmit buffer is ready to receive
new data. This bit is set when the transmit buffer is empty, and cleared when the transmit buffer
contains data to be transmitted that has not yet been moved into the Shift Register. For
compatibility with future devices, always write this bit to zero when writing the UCSRnA Register.
When the Data Register Empty Interrupt Enable (UDRIEn) bit in UCSRnB is written to one, the
USART Data Register Empty Interrupt will be executed as long as UDREn is set (provided that
global interrupts are enabled). UDREn is cleared by writing UDRn. When interrupt-driven data
transmission is used, the Data Register Empty interrupt routine must either write new data to
UDRn in order to clear UDREn or disable the Data Register Empty interrupt, otherwise a new
interrupt will occur once the interrupt routine terminates.
Assembly Code Example(1)(2)
USART_Transmit:
; Wait for empty transmit buffer
sbis UCSRnA,UDREn
rjmp USART_Transmit
; Copy 9th bit from r17 to TXB8
cbi UCSRnB,TXB8
sbrc r17,0
sbi UCSRnB,TXB8
; Put LSB data (r16) into buffer, sends the data
out UDRn,r16
ret
C Code Example(1)(2)
void USART_Transmit( unsigned int data )
{
/* Wait for empty transmit buffer */
while ( !( UCSRnA & (1<<UDREn))) )
;
/* Copy 9th bit to TXB8 */
UCSRnB &= ~(1<<TXB8);
if ( data & 0x0100 )
UCSRnB |= (1<<TXB8);
/* Put data into buffer, sends the data */
UDRn = data;
}
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 196
The Transmit Complete (TXCn) Flag bit is set one when the entire frame in the Transmit Shift
Register has been shifted out and there are no new data currently present in the transmit buffer.
The TXCn Flag bit is automatically cleared when a transmit complete interrupt is executed, or it
can be cleared by writing a one to its bit location. The TXCn Flag is useful in half-duplex
communication interfaces (like the RS-485 standard), where a transmitting application must
enter receive mode and free the communication bus immediately after completing the
transmission.
When the Transmit Compete Interrupt Enable (TXCIEn) bit in UCSRnB is set, the USART
Transmit Complete Interrupt will be executed when the TXCn Flag becomes set (provided that
global interrupts are enabled). When the transmit complete interrupt is used, the interrupt
handling routine does not have to clear the TXCn Flag, this is done automatically when the
interrupt is executed.
20.6.4 Parity Generator
The Parity Generator calculates the parity bit for the serial frame data. When parity bit is enabled
(UPMn1 = 1), the transmitter control logic inserts the parity bit between the last data bit and the
first stop bit of the frame that is sent.
20.6.5 Disabling the Transmitter
The disabling of the Transmitter (setting the TXEN to zero) will not become effective until
ongoing and pending transmissions are completed, i.e., when the Transmit Shift Register and
Transmit Buffer Register do not contain data to be transmitted. When disabled, the Transmitter
will no longer override the TxDn pin.
20.7 Data Reception – The USART Receiver
The USART Receiver is enabled by writing the Receive Enable (RXENn) bit in the
UCSRnB Register to one. When the Receiver is enabled, the normal pin operation of the RxDn
pin is overridden by the USART and given the function as the Receiver’s serial input. The baud
rate, mode of operation and frame format must be set up once before any serial reception can
be done. If synchronous operation is used, the clock on the XCKn pin will be used as transfer
clock.
20.7.1 Receiving Frames with 5 to 8 Data Bits
The Receiver starts data reception when it detects a valid start bit. Each bit that follows the start
bit will be sampled at the baud rate or XCKn clock, and shifted into the Receive Shift Register
until the first stop bit of a frame is received. A second stop bit will be ignored by the Receiver.
When the first stop bit is received, i.e., a complete serial frame is present in the Receive Shift
Register, the contents of the Shift Register will be moved into the receive buffer. The receive
buffer can then be read by reading the UDRn I/O location.
The following code example shows a simple USART receive function based on polling of the
Receive Complete (RXCn) Flag. When using frames with less than eight bits the most significant
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 197
bits of the data read from the UDRn will be masked to zero. The USART has to be initialized
before the function can be used.
Note: 1. See ”About Code Examples” on page 16.
For I/O Registers located in extended I/O map, “IN”, “OUT”, “SBIS”, “SBIC”, “CBI”, and “SBI”
instructions must be replaced with instructions that allow access to extended I/O. Typically
“LDS” and “STS” combined with “SBRS”, “SBRC”, “SBR”, and “CBR”.
The function simply waits for data to be present in the receive buffer by checking the RXCn Flag,
before reading the buffer and returning the value.
20.7.2 Receiving Frames with 9 Data Bits
If 9-bit characters are used (UCSZn=7) the ninth bit must be read from the RXB8n bit in
UCSRnB before reading the low bits from the UDRn. This rule applies to the FEn, DORn and
UPEn Status Flags as well. Read status from UCSRnA, then data from UDRn. Reading the
UDRn I/O location will change the state of the receive buffer FIFO and consequently the TXB8n,
FEn, DORn and UPEn bits, which all are stored in the FIFO, will change.
The following code example shows a simple USART receive function that handles both nine bit
characters and the status bits.
Assembly Code Example(1)
USART_Receive:
; Wait for data to be received
sbis UCSRnA, RXCn
rjmp USART_Receive
; Get and return received data from buffer
in r16, UDRn
ret
C Code Example(1)
unsigned char USART_Receive( void )
{
/* Wait for data to be received */
while ( !(UCSRnA & (1<<RXCn)) )
;
/* Get and return received data from buffer */
return UDRn;
}
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 198
Note: 1. See ”About Code Examples” on page 16.
For I/O Registers located in extended I/O map, “IN”, “OUT”, “SBIS”, “SBIC”, “CBI”, and “SBI”
instructions must be replaced with instructions that allow access to extended I/O. Typically
“LDS” and “STS” combined with “SBRS”, “SBRC”, “SBR”, and “CBR”.
The receive function example reads all the I/O Registers into the Register File before any
computation is done. This gives an optimal receive buffer utilization since the buffer location
read will be free to accept new data as early as possible.
20.7.3 Receive Compete Flag and Interrupt
The USART Receiver has one flag that indicates the Receiver state.
The Receive Complete (RXCn) Flag indicates if there are unread data present in the receive
buffer. This flag is one when unread data exist in the receive buffer, and zero when the receive
Assembly Code Example(1)
USART_Receive:
; Wait for data to be received
sbis UCSRnA, RXCn
rjmp USART_Receive
; Get status and 9th bit, then data from buffer
in r18, UCSRnA
in r17, UCSRnB
in r16, UDRn
; If error, return -1
andi r18,(1<<FEn)|(1<<DORn)|(1<<UPEn)
breq USART_ReceiveNoError
ldi r17, HIGH(-1)
ldi r16, LOW(-1)
USART_ReceiveNoError:
; Filter the 9th bit, then return
lsr r17
andi r17, 0x01
ret
C Code Example(1)
unsigned int USART_Receive( void )
{
unsigned char status, resh, resl;
/* Wait for data to be received */
while ( !(UCSRnA & (1<<RXCn)) )
;
/* Get status and 9th bit, then data */
/* from buffer */
status = UCSRnA;
resh = UCSRnB;
resl = UDRn;
/* If error, return -1 */
if ( status & (1<<FEn)|(1<<DORn)|(1<<UPEn) )
return -1;
/* Filter the 9th bit, then return */
resh = (resh >> 1) & 0x01;
return ((resh << 8) | resl);
}
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 199
buffer is empty (i.e., does not contain any unread data). If the Receiver is disabled (RXENn = 0),
the receive buffer will be flushed and consequently the RXCn bit will become zero.
When the Receive Complete Interrupt Enable (RXCIEn) in UCSRnB is set, the USART Receive
Complete interrupt will be executed as long as the RXCn Flag is set (provided that global
interrupts are enabled). When interrupt-driven data reception is used, the receive complete
routine must read the received data from UDRn in order to clear the RXCn Flag, otherwise a
new interrupt will occur once the interrupt routine terminates.
20.7.4 Receiver Error Flags
The USART Receiver has three Error Flags: Frame Error (FEn), Data OverRun (DORn) and
Parity Error (UPEn). All can be accessed by reading UCSRnA. Common for the Error Flags is
that they are located in the receive buffer together with the frame for which they indicate the
error status. Due to the buffering of the Error Flags, the UCSRnA must be read before the
receive buffer (UDRn), since reading the UDRn I/O location changes the buffer read location.
Another equality for the Error Flags is that they can not be altered by software doing a write to
the flag location. However, all flags must be set to zero when the UCSRnA is written for upward
compatibility of future USART implementations. None of the Error Flags can generate interrupts.
The Frame Error (FEn) Flag indicates the state of the first stop bit of the next readable frame
stored in the receive buffer. The FEn Flag is zero when the stop bit was correctly read (as one),
and the FEn Flag will be one when the stop bit was incorrect (zero). This flag can be used for
detecting out-of-sync conditions, detecting break conditions and protocol handling. The FEn
Flag is not affected by the setting of the USBSn bit in UCSRnC since the Receiver ignores all,
except for the first, stop bits. For compatibility with future devices, always set this bit to zero
when writing to UCSRnA.
The Data OverRun (DORn) Flag indicates data loss due to a receiver buffer full condition. A
Data OverRun occurs when the receive buffer is full (two characters), it is a new character
waiting in the Receive Shift Register, and a new start bit is detected. If the DORn Flag is set
there was one or more serial frame lost between the frame last read from UDRn, and the next
frame read from UDRn. For compatibility with future devices, always write this bit to zero when
writing to UCSRnA. The DORn Flag is cleared when the frame received was successfully moved
from the Shift Register to the receive buffer.
The Parity Error (UPEn) Flag indicates that the next frame in the receive buffer had a Parity
Error when received. If Parity Check is not enabled the UPEn bit will always be read zero. For
compatibility with future devices, always set this bit to zero when writing to UCSRnA. For more
details see “Parity Bit Calculation” on page 192 and “Parity Checker” on page 199.
20.7.5 Parity Checker
The Parity Checker is active when the high USART Parity mode (UPMn1) bit is set. Type of
Parity Check to be performed (odd or even) is selected by the UPMn0 bit. When enabled, the
Parity Checker calculates the parity of the data bits in incoming frames and compares the result
with the parity bit from the serial frame. The result of the check is stored in the receive buffer
together with the received data and stop bits. The Parity Error (UPEn) Flag can then be read by
software to check if the frame had a Parity Error.
The UPEn bit is set if the next character that can be read from the receive buffer had a Parity
Error when received and the Parity Checking was enabled at that point (UPMn1 = 1). This bit is
valid until the receive buffer (UDRn) is read.
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 200
20.7.6 Disabling the Receiver
In contrast to the Transmitter, disabling of the Receiver will be immediate. Data from ongoing
receptions will therefore be lost. When disabled (i.e., the RXENn is set to zero) the Receiver will
no longer override the normal function of the RxDn port pin. The Receiver buffer FIFO will be
flushed when the Receiver is disabled. Remaining data in the buffer will be lost
20.7.7 Flushing the Receive Buffer
The receiver buffer FIFO will be flushed when the Receiver is disabled, i.e., the buffer will be
emptied of its contents. Unread data will be lost. If the buffer has to be flushed during normal
operation, due to for instance an error condition, read the UDRn I/O location until the RXCn Flag
is cleared. The following code example shows how to flush the receive buffer.
Note: 1. See ”About Code Examples” on page 16.
For I/O Registers located in extended I/O map, “IN”, “OUT”, “SBIS”, “SBIC”, “CBI”, and “SBI”
instructions must be replaced with instructions that allow access to extended I/O. Typically
“LDS” and “STS” combined with “SBRS”, “SBRC”, “SBR”, and “CBR”.
20.8 Asynchronous Data Reception
The USART includes a clock recovery and a data recovery unit for handling asynchronous data
reception. The clock recovery logic is used for synchronizing the internally generated baud rate
clock to the incoming asynchronous serial frames at the RxDn pin. The data recovery logic
samples and low pass filters each incoming bit, thereby improving the noise immunity of the
Receiver. The asynchronous reception operational range depends on the accuracy of the
internal baud rate clock, the rate of the incoming frames, and the frame size in number of bits.
20.8.1 Asynchronous Clock Recovery
The clock recovery logic synchronizes internal clock to the incoming serial frames. Figure 20-5
illustrates the sampling process of the start bit of an incoming frame. The sample rate is 16 times
the baud rate for Normal mode, and eight times the baud rate for Double Speed mode. The
horizontal arrows illustrate the synchronization variation due to the sampling process. Note the
larger time variation when using the Double Speed mode (U2Xn = 1) of operation. Samples
denoted zero are samples done when the RxDn line is idle (i.e., no communication activity).
Assembly Code Example(1)
USART_Flush:
sbis UCSRnA, RXCn
ret
in r16, UDRn
rjmp USART_Flush
C Code Example(1)
void USART_Flush( void )
{
unsigned char dummy;
while ( UCSRnA & (1<<RXCn) ) dummy = UDRn;
}
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 201
Figure 20-5. Start Bit Sampling
When the clock recovery logic detects a high (idle) to low (start) transition on the RxDn line, the
start bit detection sequence is initiated. Let sample 1 denote the first zero-sample as shown in
the figure. The clock recovery logic then uses samples 8, 9, and 10 for Normal mode, and
samples 4, 5, and 6 for Double Speed mode (indicated with sample numbers inside boxes on
the figure), to decide if a valid start bit is received. If two or more of these three samples have
logical high levels (the majority wins), the start bit is rejected as a noise spike and the Receiver
starts looking for the next high to low-transition. If however, a valid start bit is detected, the clock
recovery logic is synchronized and the data recovery can begin. The synchronization process is
repeated for each start bit.
20.8.2 Asynchronous Data Recovery
When the receiver clock is synchronized to the start bit, the data recovery can begin. The data
recovery unit uses a state machine that has 16 states for each bit in Normal mode and eight
states for each bit in Double Speed mode. Figure 20-6 shows the sampling of the data bits and
the parity bit. Each of the samples is given a number that is equal to the state of the recovery
unit.
Figure 20-6. Sampling of Data and Parity Bit
The decision of the logic level of the received bit is taken by doing a majority voting of the logic
value to the three samples in the center of the received bit. The center samples are emphasized
on the figure by having the sample number inside boxes. The majority voting process is done as
follows: If two or all three samples have high levels, the received bit is registered to be a logic 1.
If two or all three samples have low levels, the received bit is registered to be a logic 0. This
majority voting process acts as a low pass filter for the incoming signal on the RxDn pin. The
recovery process is then repeated until a complete frame is received. Including the first stop bit.
Note that the Receiver only uses the first stop bit of a frame.
Figure 20-7 on page 202 shows the sampling of the stop bit and the earliest possible beginning
of the start bit of the next frame.
12345678 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 12
STARTIDLE
00
BIT 0
3
1234 5 678120
RxD
Sample
(U2X = 0)
Sample
(U2X = 1)
12345678 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1
BIT n
1234 5 6781
RxD
Sample
(U2X = 0)
Sample
(U2X = 1)
(D+1)S (D+2)S
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 202
Figure 20-7. Stop Bit Sampling and Next Start Bit Sampling
The same majority voting is done to the stop bit as done for the other bits in the frame. If the stop
bit is registered to have a logic 0 value, the Frame Error (FEn) Flag will be set.
A new high to low transition indicating the start bit of a new frame can come right after the last of
the bits used for majority voting. For Normal Speed mode, the first low level sample can be at
point marked (A) in Figure 20-7. For Double Speed mode the first low level must be delayed to
(B). (C) marks a stop bit of full length. The early start bit detection influences the operational
range of the Receiver.
20.8.3 Asynchronous Operational Range
The operational range of the Receiver is dependent on the mismatch between the received bit
rate and the internally generated baud rate. If the Transmitter is sending frames at too fast or too
slow bit rates, or the internally generated baud rate of the Receiver does not have a similar (see
Table 20-2 on page 203) base frequency, the Receiver will not be able to synchronize the
frames to the start bit.
The following equations can be used to calculate the ratio of the incoming data rate and internal
receiver baud rate.
D: Sum of character size and parity size (D = 5 to 10 bit)
S: Samples per bit. S = 16 for Normal Speed mode and S = 8 for Double Speed
mode.
SF: First sample number used for majority voting. SF = 8 for normal speed and SF = 4
for Double Speed mode.
SM: Middle sample number used for majority voting. SM = 9 for normal speed and
SM= 5 for Double Speed mode.
Rslow is the ratio of the slowest incoming data rate that can be accepted in relation to the
receiver baud rate. Rfast is the ratio of the fastest incoming data rate that can be
accepted in relation to the receiver baud rate.
Table 20-2 on page 203 and Table 20-3 on page 203 list the maximum receiver baud rate error
that can be tolerated. Note that Normal Speed mode has higher toleration of baud rate
variations.
12345678 9 10 0/1 0/1 0/1
STOP 1
1234 5 6 0/1
RxD
Sample
(U2X = 0)
Sample
(U2X = 1)
(A) (B) (C)
Rslow
D1+S
S1–DSSF
++
-------------------------------------------=
Rfast
D2+S
D1+SS
M
+
-----------------------------------=
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 203
The recommendations of the maximum receiver baud rate error was made under the
assumption that the Receiver and Transmitter equally divides the maximum total error.
There are two possible sources for the receivers baud rate error. The Receiver’s system clock
(XTAL) will always have some minor instability over the supply voltage range and the
temperature range. When using a crystal to generate the system clock, this is rarely a problem,
but for a resonator the system clock may differ more than 2% depending of the resonators
tolerance. The second source for the error is more controllable. The baud rate generator can not
always do an exact division of the system frequency to get the baud rate wanted. In this case an
UBRRn value that gives an acceptable low error can be used if possible.
20.9 Multi-processor Communication Mode
Setting the Multi-processor Communication mode (MPCMn) bit in UCSRnA enables a filtering
function of incoming frames received by the USART Receiver. Frames that do not contain
address information will be ignored and not put into the receive buffer. This effectively reduces
the number of incoming frames that has to be handled by the CPU, in a system with multiple
MCUs that communicate via the same serial bus. The Transmitter is unaffected by the MPCMn
setting, but has to be used differently when it is a part of a system utilizing the Multi-processor
Communication mode.
If the Receiver is set up to receive frames that contain 5 to 8 data bits, then the first stop bit
indicates if the frame contains data or address information. If the Receiver is set up for frames
with nine data bits, then the ninth bit (RXB8n) is used for identifying address and data frames.
Table 20-2. Recommended Maximum Receiver Baud Rate Error for Normal Speed Mode (U2Xn =
0)
D
# (Data+Parity Bit) Rslow (%) Rfast (%) Max Total Error (%)
Recommended Max
Receiver Error (%)
5 93.20 106.67 +6.67/-6.8 ± 3.0
6 94.12 105.79 +5.79/-5.88 ± 2.5
7 94.81 105.11 +5.11/-5.19 ± 2.0
8 95.36 104.58 +4.58/-4.54 ± 2.0
9 95.81 104.14 +4.14/-4.19 ± 1.5
10 96.17 103.78 +3.78/-3.83 ± 1.5
Table 20-3. Recommended Maximum Receiver Baud Rate Error for Double Speed Mode (U2Xn =
1)
D
# (Data+Parity Bit) Rslow (%) Rfast (%) Max Total Error (%)
Recommended Max
Receiver Error (%)
5 94.12 105.66 +5.66/-5.88 ± 2.5
6 94.92 104.92 +4.92/-5.08 ± 2.0
7 95.52 104,35 +4.35/-4.48 ± 1.5
8 96.00 103.90 +3.90/-4.00 ± 1.5
9 96.39 103.53 +3.53/-3.61 ± 1.5
10 96.70 103.23 +3.23/-3.30 ± 1.0
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 204
When the frame type bit (the first stop or the ninth bit) is one, the frame contains an address.
When the frame type bit is zero the frame is a data frame.
The Multi-processor Communication mode enables several slave MCUs to receive data from a
master MCU. This is done by first decoding an address frame to find out which MCU has been
addressed. If a particular slave MCU has been addressed, it will receive the following data
frames as normal, while the other slave MCUs will ignore the received frames until another
address frame is received.
20.9.1 Using MPCMn
For an MCU to act as a master MCU, it can use a 9-bit character frame format (UCSZn = 7). The
ninth bit (TXB8n) must be set when an address frame (TXB8n = 1) or cleared when a data frame
(TXB = 0) is being transmitted. The slave MCUs must in this case be set to use a 9-bit character
frame format.
The following procedure should be used to exchange data in Multi-processor Communication
mode:
1. All Slave MCUs are in Multi-processor Communication mode (MPCMn in
UCSRnA is set).
2. The Master MCU sends an address frame, and all slaves receive and read this frame. In
the Slave MCUs, the RXCn Flag in UCSRnA will be set as normal.
3. Each Slave MCU reads the UDRn Register and determines if it has been selected. If so, it
clears the MPCMn bit in UCSRnA, otherwise it waits for the next address byte and keeps
the MPCMn setting.
4. The addressed MCU will receive all data frames until a new address frame is received.
The other Slave MCUs, which still have the MPCMn bit set, will ignore the data frames.
5. When the last data frame is received by the addressed MCU, the addressed MCU sets the
MPCMn bit and waits for a new address frame from master. The process then repeats
from 2.
Using any of the 5- to 8-bit character frame formats is possible, but impractical since the
Receiver must change between using n and n+1 character frame formats. This makes full-
duplex operation difficult since the Transmitter and Receiver uses the same character size
setting. If 5- to 8-bit character frames are used, the Transmitter must be set to use two stop bit
(USBSn = 1) since the first stop bit is used for indicating the frame type.
Do not use Read-Modify-Write instructions (SBI and CBI) to set or clear the MPCMn bit. The
MPCMn bit shares the same I/O location as the TXCn Flag and this might accidentally be
cleared when using SBI or CBI instructions.
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 205
20.10 Register Description
20.10.1 UDRn – USART I/O Data Register n
The USART Transmit Data Buffer Register and USART Receive Data Buffer Registers share the
same I/O address referred to as USART Data Register or UDRn. The Transmit Data Buffer
Register (TXB) will be the destination for data written to the UDRn Register location. Reading
the UDRn Register location will return the contents of the Receive Data Buffer Register (RXB).
For 5-, 6-, or 7-bit characters the upper unused bits will be ignored by the Transmitter and set to
zero by the Receiver.
The transmit buffer can only be written when the UDREn Flag in the UCSRnA Register is set.
Data written to UDRn when the UDREn Flag is not set, will be ignored by the USART
Transmitter. When data is written to the transmit buffer, and the Transmitter is enabled, the
Transmitter will load the data into the Transmit Shift Register when the Shift Register is empty.
Then the data will be serially transmitted on the TxDn pin.
The receive buffer consists of a two level FIFO. The FIFO will change its state whenever the
receive buffer is accessed. Due to this behavior of the receive buffer, do not use Read-Modify-
Write instructions (SBI and CBI) on this location. Be careful when using bit test instructions
(SBIC and SBIS), since these also will change the state of the FIFO.
20.10.2 UCSRnA – USART Control and Status Register n A
• Bit 7 – RXCn: USART Receive Complete
This flag bit is set when there are unread data in the receive buffer and cleared when the receive
buffer is empty (i.e., does not contain any unread data). If the Receiver is disabled, the receive
buffer will be flushed and consequently the RXCn bit will become zero. The RXCn Flag can be
used to generate a Receive Complete interrupt (see description of the RXCIEn bit).
• Bit 6 – TXCn: USART Transmit Complete
This flag bit is set when the entire frame in the Transmit Shift Register has been shifted out and
there are no new data currently present in the transmit buffer (UDRn). The TXCn Flag bit is
automatically cleared when a transmit complete interrupt is executed, or it can be cleared by
writing a one to its bit location. The TXCn Flag can generate a Transmit Complete interrupt (see
description of the TXCIEn bit).
• Bit 5 – UDREn: USART Data Register Empty
The UDREn Flag indicates if the transmit buffer (UDRn) is ready to receive new data. If UDREn
is one, the buffer is empty, and therefore ready to be written. The UDREn Flag can generate a
Bit 76543210
RXB[7:0] UDRn (Read)
TXB[7:0] UDRn (Write)
Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 76543210
RXCn TXCn UDREn FEn DORn UPEn U2Xn MPCMn UCSRnA
Read/Write RR/WR R R RR/WR/W
Initial Value00100000
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 206
Data Register Empty interrupt (see description of the UDRIEn bit). UDREn is set after a reset to
indicate that the Transmitter is ready.
• Bit 4 – FEn: Frame Error
This bit is set if the next character in the receive buffer had a Frame Error when received. I.e.,
when the first stop bit of the next character in the receive buffer is zero. This bit is valid until the
receive buffer (UDRn) is read. The FEn bit is zero when the stop bit of received data is one.
Always set this bit to zero when writing to UCSRnA.
• Bit 3 – DORn: Data OverRun
This bit is set if a Data OverRun condition is detected. A Data OverRun occurs when the receive
buffer is full (two characters), it is a new character waiting in the Receive Shift Register, and a
new start bit is detected. This bit is valid until the receive buffer (UDRn) is read. Always set this
bit to zero when writing to UCSRnA.
• Bit 2 – UPEn: USART Parity Error
This bit is set if the next character in the receive buffer had a Parity Error when received and the
Parity Checking was enabled at that point (UPMn1 = 1). This bit is valid until the receive buffer
(UDRn) is read. Always set this bit to zero when writing to UCSRnA.
• Bit 1 – U2Xn: Double the USART Transmission Speed
This bit only has effect for the asynchronous operation. Write this bit to zero when using
synchronous operation.
Writing this bit to one will reduce the divisor of the baud rate divider from 16 to 8 effectively
doubling the transfer rate for asynchronous communication.
• Bit 0 – MPCMn: Multi-processor Communication Mode
This bit enables the Multi-processor Communication mode. When the MPCMn bit is written to
one, all the incoming frames received by the USART Receiver that do not contain address
information will be ignored. The Transmitter is unaffected by the MPCMn setting. For more
detailed information see “Multi-processor Communication Mode” on page 203.
20.10.3 UCSRnB – USART Control and Status Register n B
• Bit 7 – RXCIEn: RX Complete Interrupt Enable n
Writing this bit to one enables interrupt on the RXCn Flag. A USART Receive Complete interrupt
will be generated only if the RXCIEn bit is written to one, the Global Interrupt Flag in SREG is
written to one and the RXCn bit in UCSRnA is set.
• Bit 6 – TXCIEn: TX Complete Interrupt Enable n
Writing this bit to one enables interrupt on the TXCn Flag. A USART Transmit Complete interrupt
will be generated only if the TXCIEn bit is written to one, the Global Interrupt Flag in SREG is
written to one and the TXCn bit in UCSRnA is set.
Bit 76543210
RXCIEn TXCIEn UDRIEn RXENn TXENn UCSZn2 RXB8n TXB8n UCSRnB
Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R R/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 207
• Bit 5 – UDRIEn: USART Data Register Empty Interrupt Enable n
Writing this bit to one enables interrupt on the UDREn Flag. A Data Register Empty interrupt will
be generated only if the UDRIEn bit is written to one, the Global Interrupt Flag in SREG is written
to one and the UDREn bit in UCSRnA is set.
• Bit 4 – RXENn: Receiver Enable n
Writing this bit to one enables the USART Receiver. The Receiver will override normal port
operation for the RxDn pin when enabled. Disabling the Receiver will flush the receive buffer
invalidating the FEn, DORn, and UPEn Flags.
• Bit 3 – TXENn: Transmitter Enable n
Writing this bit to one enables the USART Transmitter. The Transmitter will override normal port
operation for the TxDn pin when enabled. The disabling of the Transmitter (writing TXENn to
zero) will not become effective until ongoing and pending transmissions are completed, i.e.,
when the Transmit Shift Register and Transmit Buffer Register do not contain data to be
transmitted. When disabled, the Transmitter will no longer override the TxDn port.
• Bit 2 – UCSZn2: Character Size n
The UCSZn2 bits combined with the UCSZn1:0 bit in UCSRnC sets the number of data bits
(Character SiZe) in a frame the Receiver and Transmitter use.
• Bit 1 – RXB8n: Receive Data Bit 8 n
RXB8n is the ninth data bit of the received character when operating with serial frames with nine
data bits. Must be read before reading the low bits from UDRn.
• Bit 0 – TXB8n: Transmit Data Bit 8 n
TXB8n is the ninth data bit in the character to be transmitted when operating with serial frames
with nine data bits. Must be written before writing the low bits to UDRn.
20.10.4 UCSRnC – USART Control and Status Register n C
• Bits 7:6 – UMSELn1:0 USART Mode Select
These bits select the mode of operation of the USARTn as shown in Table 20-4.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
UMSELn1 UMSELn0 UPMn1 UPMn0 USBSn UCSZn1 UCSZn0 UCPOLn UCSRnC
Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0
Table 20-4. UMSELn Bits Settings
UMSELn1 UMSELn0 Mode
0 0 Asynchronous USART
0 1 Synchronous USART
1 0 (Reserved)
1 1 Master SPI (MSPIM)(1)
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 208
Note: 1. See “USART in SPI Mode” on page 214 for full description of the Master SPI Mode (MSPIM)
operation
• Bits 5:4 – UPMn1:0: Parity Mode
These bits enable and set type of parity generation and check. If enabled, the Transmitter will
automatically generate and send the parity of the transmitted data bits within each frame. The
Receiver will generate a parity value for the incoming data and compare it to the UPMn setting.
If a mismatch is detected, the UPEn Flag in UCSRnA will be set.
• Bit 3 – USBSn: Stop Bit Select
This bit selects the number of stop bits to be inserted by the Transmitter. The Receiver ignores
this setting.
• Bit 2:1 – UCSZn1:0: Character Size
The UCSZn1:0 bits combined with the UCSZn2 bit in UCSRnB sets the number of data bits
(Character SiZe) in a frame the Receiver and Transmitter use.
• Bit 0 – UCPOLn: Clock Polarity
This bit is used for synchronous mode only. Write this bit to zero when asynchronous mode is
used. The UCPOLn bit sets the relationship between data output change and data input sample,
and the synchronous clock (XCKn).
Table 20-5. UPMn Bits Settings
UPMn1 UPMn0 Parity Mode
0 0 Disabled
01Reserved
1 0 Enabled, Even Parity
1 1 Enabled, Odd Parity
Table 20-6. USBS Bit Settings
USBSn Stop Bit(s)
01-bit
12-bit
Table 20-7. UCSZn Bits Settings
UCSZn2 UCSZn1 UCSZn0 Character Size
0005-bit
0016-bit
0107-bit
0118-bit
1 0 0 Reserved
1 0 1 Reserved
1 1 0 Reserved
1119-bit
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 209
20.10.5 UBRRnL and UBRRnH – USART Baud Rate Registers
• Bit 15:12 – Reserved Bits
These bits are reserved for future use. For compatibility with future devices, these bit must be
written to zero when UBRRnH is written.
• Bit 11:0 – UBRR11:0: USART Baud Rate Register
This is a 12-bit register which contains the USART baud rate. The UBRRnH contains the four
most significant bits, and the UBRRnL contains the eight least significant bits of the USART
baud rate. Ongoing transmissions by the Transmitter and Receiver will be corrupted if the baud
rate is changed. Writing UBRRnL will trigger an immediate update of the baud rate prescaler.
20.11 Examples of Baud Rate Setting
For standard crystal and resonator frequencies, the most commonly used baud rates for
asynchronous operation can be generated by using the UBRRn settings in Table 20-9. UBRRn
values which yield an actual baud rate differing less than 0.5% from the target baud rate, are
bold in the table. Higher error ratings are acceptable, but the Receiver will have less noise
resistance when the error ratings are high, especially for large serial frames (see “Asynchronous
Operational Range” on page 202). The error values are calculated using the following equation:
Table 20-8. UCPOLn Bit Settings
UCPOLn
Transmitted Data Changed (Output of
TxDn Pin)
Received Data Sampled (Input on RxDn
Pin)
0 Rising XCKn Edge Falling XCKn Edge
1 Falling XCKn Edge Rising XCKn Edge
Bit 151413121110 9 8
– – – – UBRRn[11:8] UBRRnH
UBRRn[7:0] UBRRnL
76543210
Read/Write R R R R R/W R/W R/W R/W
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
00000000
Error[%] BaudRateClosest Match
BaudRate
-------------------------------------------------- 1–


100%=
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 210
Note: 1. UBRRn = 0, Error = 0.0%
Table 20-9. Examples of UBRRn Settings for Commonly Used Oscillator Frequencies
Baud
Rate
(bps)
fosc = 1.0000 MHz fosc = 1.8432 MHz fosc = 2.0000 MHz
U2Xn = 0 U2Xn = 1 U2Xn = 0 U2Xn = 1 U2Xn = 0 U2Xn = 1
UBRRn Error UBRRn Error UBRRn Error UBRRn Error UBRRn Error UBRRn Error
2400 25 0.2% 51 0.2% 47 0.0% 95 0.0% 51 0.2% 103 0.2%
4800 12 0.2% 25 0.2% 23 0.0% 47 0.0% 25 0.2% 51 0.2%
9600 6 -7.0% 12 0.2% 11 0.0% 23 0.0% 12 0.2% 25 0.2%
14.4k 3 8.5% 8 -3.5% 7 0.0% 15 0.0% 8 -3.5% 16 2.1%
19.2k 2 8.5% 6 -7.0% 5 0.0% 11 0.0% 6 -7.0% 12 0.2%
28.8k 1 8.5% 3 8.5% 3 0.0% 7 0.0% 3 8.5% 8 -3.5%
38.4k 1 -18.6% 2 8.5% 2 0.0% 5 0.0% 2 8.5% 6 -7.0%
57.6k 0 8.5% 1 8.5% 1 0.0% 3 0.0% 1 8.5% 3 8.5%
76.8k – – 1 -18.6% 1 -25.0% 2 0.0% 1 -18.6% 2 8.5%
115.2k – – 0 8.5% 0 0.0% 1 0.0% 0 8.5% 1 8.5%
230.4k––––––00.0%––––
250k––––––––––00.0%
Max.(1) 62.5 kbps 125 kbps 115.2 kbps 230.4 kbps 125 kbps 250 kbps
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 211
Table 20-10. Examples of UBRRn Settings for Commonly Used Oscillator Frequencies (Continued)
Baud
Rate
(bps)
fosc = 3.6864 MHz fosc = 4.0000 MHz fosc = 7.3728 MHz
U2Xn = 0U2Xn = 1U2Xn = 0U2Xn = 1U2Xn = 0U2Xn = 1
UBRRn Error UBRRn Error UBRRn Error UBRRn Error UBRRn Error UBRRn Error
2400 95 0.0% 191 0.0% 103 0.2% 207 0.2% 191 0.0% 383 0.0%
4800 47 0.0% 95 0.0% 51 0.2% 103 0.2% 95 0.0% 191 0.0%
9600 230.0%470.0%250.2%510.2%470.0%950.0%
14.4k 15 0.0% 31 0.0% 16 2.1% 34 -0.8% 31 0.0% 63 0.0%
19.2k 11 0.0% 23 0.0% 12 0.2% 25 0.2% 23 0.0% 47 0.0%
28.8k 7 0.0%150.0% 8 -3.5%162.1%150.0%310.0%
38.4k 5 0.0% 11 0.0% 6 -7.0% 12 0.2% 11 0.0% 23 0.0%
57.6k 3 0.0% 7 0.0% 3 8.5% 8 -3.5% 7 0.0% 15 0.0%
76.8k 2 0.0% 5 0.0% 2 8.5% 6 -7.0% 5 0.0% 11 0.0%
115.2k 1 0.0% 3 0.0% 1 8.5% 3 8.5% 3 0.0% 7 0.0%
230.4k 0 0.0% 1 0.0% 0 8.5% 1 8.5% 1 0.0% 3 0.0%
250k 0 -7.8% 1 -7.8% 0 0.0% 1 0.0% 1 -7.8% 3 -7.8%
0.5M – – 0 -7.8% – – 0 0.0% 0 -7.8% 1 -7.8%
1M ––––––––––0-7.8%
Max. (1) 230.4 kbps 460.8 kbps 250 kbps 0.5 Mbps 460.8 kbps 921.6 kbps
1. UBRRn = 0, Error = 0.0%
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 212
Table 20-11. Examples of UBRRn Settings for Commonly Used Oscillator Frequencies (Continued)
Baud
Rate
(bps)
fosc = 8.0000 MHz fosc = 11.0592 MHz fosc = 14.7456 MHz
U2Xn = 0U2Xn = 1U2Xn = 0U2Xn = 1U2Xn = 0U2Xn = 1
UBRRn Error UBRRn Error UBRRn Error UBRRn Error UBRRn Error UBRRn Error
2400 207 0.2% 416 -0.1% 287 0.0% 575 0.0% 383 0.0% 767 0.0%
4800 103 0.2% 207 0.2% 143 0.0% 287 0.0% 191 0.0% 383 0.0%
9600 51 0.2% 103 0.2% 71 0.0% 143 0.0% 95 0.0% 191 0.0%
14.4k 34 -0.8% 68 0.6% 47 0.0% 95 0.0% 63 0.0% 127 0.0%
19.2k 25 0.2% 51 0.2% 35 0.0% 71 0.0% 47 0.0% 95 0.0%
28.8k 16 2.1% 34 -0.8% 23 0.0% 47 0.0% 31 0.0% 63 0.0%
38.4k 12 0.2% 25 0.2% 17 0.0% 35 0.0% 23 0.0% 47 0.0%
57.6k 8 -3.5% 16 2.1% 11 0.0% 23 0.0% 15 0.0% 31 0.0%
76.8k 6 -7.0% 12 0.2% 8 0.0% 17 0.0% 11 0.0% 23 0.0%
115.2k 3 8.5% 8 -3.5% 5 0.0% 11 0.0% 7 0.0% 15 0.0%
230.4k 1 8.5% 3 8.5% 2 0.0% 5 0.0% 3 0.0% 7 0.0%
250k 1 0.0% 3 0.0% 2 -7.8% 5 -7.8% 3 -7.8% 6 5.3%
0.5M 0 0.0% 1 0.0% – – 2 -7.8% 1 -7.8% 3 -7.8%
1M ––00.0%––––0-7.8%1-7.8%
Max. (1) 0.5 Mbps 1 Mbps 691.2 kbps 1.3824 Mbps 921.6 kbps 1.8432 Mbps
1. UBRRn = 0, Error = 0.0%
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 213
Table 20-12. Examples of UBRRn Settings for Commonly Used Oscillator Frequencies (Continued)
Baud
Rate
(bps)
fosc = 16.0000 MHz fosc = 18.4320 MHz fosc = 20.0000 MHz
U2Xn = 0U2Xn = 1U2Xn = 0U2Xn = 1U2Xn = 0U2Xn = 1
UBRRn Error UBRRn Error UBRRn Error UBRRn Error UBRRn Error UBRRn Error
2400 416 -0.1% 832 0.0% 479 0.0% 959 0.0% 520 0.0% 1041 0.0%
4800 207 0.2% 416 -0.1% 239 0.0% 479 0.0% 259 0.2% 520 0.0%
9600 103 0.2% 207 0.2% 119 0.0% 239 0.0% 129 0.2% 259 0.2%
14.4k 68 0.6% 138 -0.1% 79 0.0% 159 0.0% 86 -0.2% 173 -0.2%
19.2k 51 0.2% 103 0.2% 59 0.0% 119 0.0% 64 0.2% 129 0.2%
28.8k 34 -0.8% 68 0.6% 39 0.0% 79 0.0% 42 0.9% 86 -0.2%
38.4k 25 0.2% 51 0.2% 29 0.0% 59 0.0% 32 -1.4% 64 0.2%
57.6k 16 2.1% 34 -0.8% 19 0.0% 39 0.0% 21 -1.4% 42 0.9%
76.8k 12 0.2% 25 0.2% 14 0.0% 29 0.0% 15 1.7% 32 -1.4%
115.2k 8 -3.5% 16 2.1% 9 0.0% 19 0.0% 10 -1.4% 21 -1.4%
230.4k 3 8.5% 8 -3.5% 4 0.0% 9 0.0% 4 8.5% 10 -1.4%
250k 3 0.0% 7 0.0% 4 -7.8% 8 2.4% 4 0.0% 9 0.0%
0.5M 1 0.0% 3 0.0% – – 4 -7.8% – – 4 0.0%
1M 00.0%10.0%––––––––
Max. (1) 1 Mbps 2 Mbps 1.152 Mbps 2.304 Mbps 1.25 Mbps 2.5 Mbps
1. UBRRn = 0, Error = 0.0%
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 214
21. USART in SPI Mode
21.1 Features
•Full Duplex, Three-wire Synchronous Data Transfer
•Master Operation
•Supports all four SPI Modes of Operation (Mode 0, 1, 2, and 3)
•LSB First or MSB First Data Transfer (Configurable Data Order)
•Queued Operation (Double Buffered)
•High Resolution Baud Rate Generator
•High Speed Operation (fXCKmax = fCK/2)
•Flexible Interrupt Generation
21.2 Overview
The Universal Synchronous and Asynchronous serial Receiver and Transmitter (USART) can be
set to a master SPI compliant mode of operation.
Setting both UMSELn1:0 bits to one enables the USART in MSPIM logic. In this mode of
operation the SPI master control logic takes direct control over the USART resources. These
resources include the transmitter and receiver shift register and buffers, and the baud rate
generator. The parity generator and checker, the data and clock recovery logic, and the RX and
TX control logic is disabled. The USART RX and TX control logic is replaced by a common SPI
transfer control logic. However, the pin control logic and interrupt generation logic is identical in
both modes of operation.
The I/O register locations are the same in both modes. However, some of the functionality of the
control registers changes when using MSPIM.
21.3 Clock Generation
The Clock Generation logic generates the base clock for the Transmitter and Receiver. For
USART MSPIM mode of operation only internal clock generation (i.e. master operation) is
supported. The Data Direction Register for the XCKn pin (DDR_XCKn) must therefore be set to
one (i.e. as output) for the USART in MSPIM to operate correctly. Preferably the DDR_XCKn
should be set up before the USART in MSPIM is enabled (i.e. TXENn and RXENn bit set to
one).
The internal clock generation used in MSPIM mode is identical to the USART synchronous
master mode. The baud rate or UBRRn setting can therefore be calculated using the same
equations, see Table 21-1:
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 215
Note: 1. The baud rate is defined to be the transfer rate in bit per second (bps)
BAUD: Baud rate (in bits per second, bps)
fOSC: System Oscillator clock frequency
UBRRn: Contents of the UBRRnH and UBRRnL Registers, (0-4095)
21.4 SPI Data Modes and Timing
There are four combinations of XCKn (SCK) phase and polarity with respect to serial data, which
are determined by control bits UCPHAn and UCPOLn. The data transfer timing diagrams are
shown in Figure 21-1. Data bits are shifted out and latched in on opposite edges of the XCKn
signal, ensuring sufficient time for data signals to stabilize. The UCPOLn and UCPHAn
functionality is summarized in Table 21-2. Note that changing the setting of any of these bits will
corrupt all ongoing communication for both the Receiver and Transmitter.
Figure 21-1. UCPHAn and UCPOLn data transfer timing diagrams.
Table 21-1. Equations for Calculating Baud Rate Register Setting
Operating Mode
Equation for Calculating Baud
Rate(1)
Equation for Calculating UBRRn
Value
Synchronous Master
mode
BAUD fOSC
2UBRRn1+
---------------------------------------=
UBRRnfOSC
2BAUD
-------------------- 1–=
Table 21-2. UCPOLn and UCPHAn Functionality
UCPOLn UCPHAn SPI Mode Leading Edge Trailing Edge
0 0 0 Sample (Rising) Setup (Falling)
0 1 1 Setup (Rising) Sample (Falling)
1 0 2 Sample (Falling) Setup (Rising)
1 1 3 Setup (Falling) Sample (Rising)
XCK
Data setup (TXD)
Data sample (RXD)
XCK
Data setup (TXD)
Data sample (RXD)
XCK
Data setup (TXD)
Data sample (RXD)
XCK
Data setup (TXD)
Data sample (RXD)
UCPOL=0 UCPOL=1
UCPHA=0 UCPHA=1
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 216
21.5 Frame Formats
A serial frame for the MSPIM is defined to be one character of 8 data bits. The USART in MSPIM
mode has two valid frame formats:
• 8-bit data with MSB first
• 8-bit data with LSB first
A frame starts with the least or most significant data bit. Then the next data bits, up to a total of
eight, are succeeding, ending with the most or least significant bit accordingly. When a complete
frame is transmitted, a new frame can directly follow it, or the communication line can be set to
an idle (high) state.
The UDORDn bit in UCSRnC sets the frame format used by the USART in MSPIM mode. The
Receiver and Transmitter use the same setting. Note that changing the setting of any of these
bits will corrupt all ongoing communication for both the Receiver and Transmitter.
16-bit data transfer can be achieved by writing two data bytes to UDRn. A UART transmit
complete interrupt will then signal that the 16-bit value has been shifted out.
21.5.1 USART MSPIM Initialization
The USART in MSPIM mode has to be initialized before any communication can take place. The
initialization process normally consists of setting the baud rate, setting master mode of operation
(by setting DDR_XCKn to one), setting frame format and enabling the Transmitter and the
Receiver. Only the transmitter can operate independently. For interrupt driven USART
operation, the Global Interrupt Flag should be cleared (and thus interrupts globally disabled)
when doing the initialization.
Note: To ensure immediate initialization of the XCKn output the baud-rate register (UBRRn) must be
zero at the time the transmitter is enabled. Contrary to the normal mode USART operation the
UBRRn must then be written to the desired value after the transmitter is enabled, but before the
first transmission is started. Setting UBRRn to zero before enabling the transmitter is not
necessary if the initialization is done immediately after a reset since UBRRn is reset to zero.
Before doing a re-initialization with changed baud rate, data mode, or frame format, be sure that
there is no ongoing transmissions during the period the registers are changed. The TXCn Flag
can be used to check that the Transmitter has completed all transfers, and the RXCn Flag can
be used to check that there are no unread data in the receive buffer. Note that the TXCn Flag
must be cleared before each transmission (before UDRn is written) if it is used for this purpose.
The following simple USART initialization code examples show one assembly and one C
function that are equal in functionality. The examples assume polling (no interrupts enabled).
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 217
The baud rate is given as a function parameter. For the assembly code, the baud rate parameter
is assumed to be stored in the r17:r16 registers.
Note: 1. See ”About Code Examples” on page 16.
Assembly Code Example(1)
USART_Init:
clr r18
out UBRRnH,r18
out UBRRnL,r18
; Setting the XCKn port pin as output, enables master
mode.
sbi XCKn_DDR, XCKn
; Set MSPI mode of operation and SPI data mode 0.
ldi r18,
(1<<UMSELn1)|(1<<UMSELn0)|(0<<UCPHAn)|(0<<UCPOLn)
out UCSRnC,r18
; Enable receiver and transmitter.
ldi r18, (1<<RXENn)|(1<<TXENn)
out UCSRnB,r18
; Set baud rate.
; IMPORTANT: The Baud Rate must be set after the
transmitter is enabled!
out UBRRnH, r17
out UBRRnL, r18
ret
C Code Example(1)
void USART_Init( unsigned int baud )
{
UBRRn = 0;
/* Setting the XCKn port pin as output, enables master
mode. */
XCKn_DDR |= (1<<XCKn);
/* Set MSPI mode of operation and SPI data mode 0. */
UCSRnC =
(1<<UMSELn1)|(1<<UMSELn0)|(0<<UCPHAn)|(0<<UCPOLn);
/* Enable receiver and transmitter. */
UCSRnB = (1<<RXENn)|(1<<TXENn);
/* Set baud rate. */
/* IMPORTANT: The Baud Rate must be set after the
transmitter is enabled */
UBRRn = baud;
}
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 218
21.6 Data Transfer
Using the USART in MSPI mode requires the Transmitter to be enabled, i.e. the TXENn bit in
the UCSRnB register is set to one. When the Transmitter is enabled, the normal port operation
of the TxDn pin is overridden and given the function as the Transmitter's serial output. Enabling
the receiver is optional and is done by setting the RXENn bit in the UCSRnB register to one.
When the receiver is enabled, the normal pin operation of the RxDn pin is overridden and given
the function as the Receiver's serial input. The XCKn will in both cases be used as the transfer
clock.
After initialization the USART is ready for doing data transfers. A data transfer is initiated by
writing to the UDRn I/O location. This is the case for both sending and receiving data since the
transmitter controls the transfer clock. The data written to UDRn is moved from the transmit
buffer to the shift register when the shift register is ready to send a new frame.
Note: To keep the input buffer in sync with the number of data bytes transmitted, the UDRn register must
be read once for each byte transmitted. The input buffer operation is identical to normal USART
mode, i.e. if an overflow occurs the character last received will be lost, not the first data in the buf-
fer. This means that if four bytes are transferred, byte 1 first, then byte 2, 3, and 4, and the UDRn
is not read before all transfers are completed, then byte 3 to be received will be lost, and not byte
1.
The following code examples show a simple USART in MSPIM mode transfer function based on
polling of the Data Register Empty (UDREn) Flag and the Receive Complete (RXCn) Flag. The
USART has to be initialized before the function can be used. For the assembly code, the data to
be sent is assumed to be stored in Register R16 and the data received will be available in the
same register (R16) after the function returns.
The function simply waits for the transmit buffer to be empty by checking the UDREn Flag,
before loading it with new data to be transmitted. The function then waits for data to be present
in the receive buffer by checking the RXCn Flag, before reading the buffer and returning the
value.
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 219
Note: 1. See ”About Code Examples” on page 16.
21.6.1 Transmitter and Receiver Flags and Interrupts
The RXCn, TXCn, and UDREn flags and corresponding interrupts in USART in MSPIM mode
are identical in function to the normal USART operation. However, the receiver error status flags
(FE, DOR, and PE) are not in use and is always read as zero.
21.6.2 Disabling the Transmitter or Receiver
The disabling of the transmitter or receiver in USART in MSPIM mode is identical in function to
the normal USART operation.
Assembly Code Example(1)
USART_MSPIM_Transfer:
; Wait for empty transmit buffer
sbis UCSRnA, UDREn
rjmp USART_MSPIM_Transfer
; Put data (r16) into buffer, sends the data
out UDRn,r16
; Wait for data to be received
USART_MSPIM_Wait_RXCn:
sbis UCSRnA, RXCn
rjmp USART_MSPIM_Wait_RXCn
; Get and return received data from buffer
in r16, UDRn
ret
C Code Example(1)
unsigned char USART_Receive( void )
{
/* Wait for empty transmit buffer */
while ( !( UCSRnA & (1<<UDREn)) );
/* Put data into buffer, sends the data */
UDRn = data;
/* Wait for data to be received */
while ( !(UCSRnA & (1<<RXCn)) );
/* Get and return received data from buffer */
return UDRn;
}
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 220
21.7 AVR USART MSPIM vs. AVR SPI
The USART in MSPIM mode is fully compatible with the AVR SPI regarding:
• Master mode timing diagram.
• The UCPOLn bit functionality is identical to the SPI CPOL bit.
• The UCPHAn bit functionality is identical to the SPI CPHA bit.
• The UDORDn bit functionality is identical to the SPI DORD bit.
However, since the USART in MSPIM mode reuses the USART resources, the use of the
USART in MSPIM mode is somewhat different compared to the SPI. In addition to differences of
the control register bits, and that only master operation is supported by the USART in MSPIM
mode, the following features differ between the two modules:
• The USART in MSPIM mode includes (double) buffering of the transmitter. The SPI has no
buffer.
• The USART in MSPIM mode receiver includes an additional buffer level.
• The SPI WCOL (Write Collision) bit is not included in USART in MSPIM mode.
• The SPI double speed mode (SPI2X) bit is not included. However, the same effect is
achieved by setting UBRRn accordingly.
• Interrupt timing is not compatible.
• Pin control differs due to the master only operation of the USART in MSPIM mode.
A comparison of the USART in MSPIM mode and the SPI pins is shown in Table 21-3 on page
220.
Table 21-3. Comparison of USART in MSPIM mode and SPI pins.
USART_MSPIM SPI Comment
TxDn MOSI Master Out only
RxDn MISO Master In only
XCKn SCK (Functionally identical)
(N/A) SS Not supported by USART in
MSPIM
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 221
21.8 Register Description
The following section describes the registers used for SPI operation using the USART.
21.8.1 UDRn – USART MSPIM I/O Data Register
The function and bit description of the USART data register (UDRn) in MSPI mode is identical to
normal USART operation. See “UDRn – USART I/O Data Register n” on page 205.
21.8.2 UCSRnA – USART MSPIM Control and Status Register n A
• Bit 7 – RXCn: USART Receive Complete
This flag bit is set when there are unread data in the receive buffer and cleared when the receive
buffer is empty (i.e., does not contain any unread data). If the Receiver is disabled, the receive
buffer will be flushed and consequently the RXCn bit will become zero. The RXCn Flag can be
used to generate a Receive Complete interrupt (see description of the RXCIEn bit).
• Bit 6 – TXCn: USART Transmit Complete
This flag bit is set when the entire frame in the Transmit Shift Register has been shifted out and
there are no new data currently present in the transmit buffer (UDRn). The TXCn Flag bit is
automatically cleared when a transmit complete interrupt is executed, or it can be cleared by
writing a one to its bit location. The TXCn Flag can generate a Transmit Complete interrupt (see
description of the TXCIEn bit).
• Bit 5 – UDREn: USART Data Register Empty
The UDREn Flag indicates if the transmit buffer (UDRn) is ready to receive new data. If UDREn
is one, the buffer is empty, and therefore ready to be written. The UDREn Flag can generate a
Data Register Empty interrupt (see description of the UDRIE bit). UDREn is set after a reset to
indicate that the Transmitter is ready.
• Bit 4:0 – Reserved Bits in MSPI mode
When in MSPI mode, these bits are reserved for future use. For compatibility with future devices,
these bits must be written to zero when UCSRnA is written.
21.8.3 UCSRnB – USART MSPIM Control and Status Register n B
• Bit 7 – RXCIEn: RX Complete Interrupt Enable
Writing this bit to one enables interrupt on the RXCn Flag. A USART Receive Complete interrupt
will be generated only if the RXCIEn bit is written to one, the Global Interrupt Flag in SREG is
written to one and the RXCn bit in UCSRnA is set.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
RXCn TXCn UDREn - - - - - UCSRnA
Read/Write R R/W R R R R R R
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0
Bit 7 6543210
RXCIEn TXCIEn UDRIE RXENn TXENn - - - UCSRnB
Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R R R
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 222
• Bit 6 – TXCIEn: TX Complete Interrupt Enable
Writing this bit to one enables interrupt on the TXCn Flag. A USART Transmit Complete interrupt
will be generated only if the TXCIEn bit is written to one, the Global Interrupt Flag in SREG is
written to one and the TXCn bit in UCSRnA is set.
• Bit 5 – UDRIE: USART Data Register Empty Interrupt Enable
Writing this bit to one enables interrupt on the UDREn Flag. A Data Register Empty interrupt will
be generated only if the UDRIE bit is written to one, the Global Interrupt Flag in SREG is written
to one and the UDREn bit in UCSRnA is set.
• Bit 4 – RXENn: Receiver Enable
Writing this bit to one enables the USART Receiver in MSPIM mode. The Receiver will override
normal port operation for the RxDn pin when enabled. Disabling the Receiver will flush the
receive buffer. Only enabling the receiver in MSPI mode (i.e. setting RXENn=1 and TXENn=0)
has no meaning since it is the transmitter that controls the transfer clock and since only master
mode is supported.
• Bit 3 – TXENn: Transmitter Enable
Writing this bit to one enables the USART Transmitter. The Transmitter will override normal port
operation for the TxDn pin when enabled. The disabling of the Transmitter (writing TXENn to
zero) will not become effective until ongoing and pending transmissions are completed, i.e.,
when the Transmit Shift Register and Transmit Buffer Register do not contain data to be
transmitted. When disabled, the Transmitter will no longer override the TxDn port.
• Bit 2:0 – Reserved Bits in MSPI mode
When in MSPI mode, these bits are reserved for future use. For compatibility with future devices,
these bits must be written to zero when UCSRnB is written.
21.8.4 UCSRnC – USART MSPIM Control and Status Register n C
• Bit 7:6 – UMSELn1:0: USART Mode Select
These bits select the mode of operation of the USART as shown in Table 21-4. See “UCSRnC –
USART Control and Status Register n C” on page 207 for full description of the normal USART
operation. The MSPIM is enabled when both UMSELn bits are set to one. The UDORDn,
UCPHAn, and UCPOLn can be set in the same write operation where the MSPIM is enabled.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
UMSELn1 UMSELn0 - - - UDORDn UCPHAn UCPOLn UCSRnC
Read/Write R/W R/W R R R R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0
Table 21-4. UMSELn Bits Settings
UMSELn1 UMSELn0 Mode
0 0 Asynchronous USART
0 1 Synchronous USART
1 0 Reserved
1 1 Master SPI (MSPIM)
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 223
• Bit 5:3 – Reserved Bits in MSPI mode
When in MSPI mode, these bits are reserved for future use. For compatibility with future devices,
these bits must be written to zero when UCSRnC is written.
• Bit 2 – UDORDn: Data Order
When set to one the LSB of the data word is transmitted first. When set to zero the MSB of the
data word is transmitted first. Refer to the Frame Formats section page 4 for details.
• Bit 1 – UCPHAn: Clock Phase
The UCPHAn bit setting determine if data is sampled on the leasing edge (first) or tailing (last)
edge of XCKn. Refer to the SPI Data Modes and Timing section page 4 for details.
• Bit 0 – UCPOLn: Clock Polarity
The UCPOLn bit sets the polarity of the XCKn clock. The combination of the UCPOLn and
UCPHAn bit settings determine the timing of the data transfer. Refer to the SPI Data Modes and
Timing section page 4 for details.
21.8.5 USART MSPIM Baud Rate Registers – UBRRnL and UBRRnH
The function and bit description of the baud rate registers in MSPI mode is identical to normal
USART operation. See “UBRRnL and UBRRnH – USART Baud Rate Registers” on page 209.
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 224
22. 2-wire Serial Interface
22.1 Features
•Simple Yet Powerful and Flexible Communication Interface, only two Bus Lines Needed
•Both Master and Slave Operation Supported
•Device can Operate as Transmitter or Receiver
•7-bit Address Space Allows up to 128 Different Slave Addresses
•Multi-master Arbitration Support
•Up to 400 kHz Data Transfer Speed
•Slew-rate Limited Output Drivers
•Noise Suppression Circuitry Rejects Spikes on Bus Lines
•Fully Programmable Slave Address with General Call Support
•Address Recognition Causes Wake-up When AVR is in Sleep Mode
•Compatible with Philips’ I2C protocol
22.2 2-wire Serial Interface Bus Definition
The 2-wire Serial Interface (TWI) is ideally suited for typical microcontroller applications. The
TWI protocol allows the systems designer to interconnect up to 128 different devices using only
two bi-directional bus lines, one for clock (SCL) and one for data (SDA). The only external
hardware needed to implement the bus is a single pull-up resistor for each of the TWI bus lines.
All devices connected to the bus have individual addresses, and mechanisms for resolving bus
contention are inherent in the TWI protocol.
Figure 22-1. TWI Bus Interconnection
Device 1 Device 2 Device 3 Device n
SDA
SCL
........ R1 R2
V
CC
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 225
22.2.1 TWI Terminology
The following definitions are frequently encountered in this section.
The PRTWI bit in “Minimizing Power Consumption” on page 51 must be written to zero to enable
the 2-wire Serial Interface.
22.2.2 Electrical Interconnection
As depicted in Figure 22-1, both bus lines are connected to the positive supply voltage through
pull-up resistors. The bus drivers of all TWI-compliant devices are open-drain or open-collector.
This implements a wired-AND function which is essential to the operation of the interface. A low
level on a TWI bus line is generated when one or more TWI devices output a zero. A high level
is output when all TWI devices tri-state their outputs, allowing the pull-up resistors to pull the line
high. Note that all AVR devices connected to the TWI bus must be powered in order to allow any
bus operation.
The number of devices that can be connected to the bus is only limited by the bus capacitance
limit of 400 pF and the 7-bit slave address space. A detailed specification of the electrical
characteristics of the TWI is given in “2-wire Serial Interface Characteristics” on page 333. Two
different sets of specifications are presented there, one relevant for bus speeds below 100 kHz,
and one valid for bus speeds up to 400 kHz.
Table 22-1. TWI Terminology
Term Description
Master The device that initiates and terminates a transmission. The Master also generates the
SCL clock.
Slave The device addressed by a Master.
Transmitter The device placing data on the bus.
Receiver The device reading data from the bus.
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 226
22.3 Data Transfer and Frame Format
22.3.1 Transferring Bits
Each data bit transferred on the TWI bus is accompanied by a pulse on the clock line. The level
of the data line must be stable when the clock line is high. The only exception to this rule is for
generating start and stop conditions.
Figure 22-2. Data Validity
22.3.2 START and STOP Conditions
The Master initiates and terminates a data transmission. The transmission is initiated when the
Master issues a START condition on the bus, and it is terminated when the Master issues a
STOP condition. Between a START and a STOP condition, the bus is considered busy, and no
other master should try to seize control of the bus. A special case occurs when a new START
condition is issued between a START and STOP condition. This is referred to as a REPEATED
START condition, and is used when the Master wishes to initiate a new transfer without
relinquishing control of the bus. After a REPEATED START, the bus is considered busy until the
next STOP. This is identical to the START behavior, and therefore START is used to describe
both START and REPEATED START for the remainder of this datasheet, unless otherwise
noted. As depicted below, START and STOP conditions are signalled by changing the level of
the SDA line when the SCL line is high.
Figure 22-3. START, REPEATED START and STOP conditions
SDA
SCL
Data Stable Data Stable
Data Change
SDA
SCL
START STOPREPEATED START
STOP START
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 227
22.3.3 Address Packet Format
All address packets transmitted on the TWI bus are 9 bits long, consisting of 7 address bits, one
READ/WRITE control bit and an acknowledge bit. If the READ/WRITE bit is set, a read
operation is to be performed, otherwise a write operation should be performed. When a Slave
recognizes that it is being addressed, it should acknowledge by pulling SDA low in the ninth SCL
(ACK) cycle. If the addressed Slave is busy, or for some other reason can not service the
Master’s request, the SDA line should be left high in the ACK clock cycle. The Master can then
transmit a STOP condition, or a REPEATED START condition to initiate a new transmission. An
address packet consisting of a slave address and a READ or a WRITE bit is called SLA+R or
SLA+W, respectively.
The MSB of the address byte is transmitted first. Slave addresses can freely be allocated by the
designer, but the address 0000 000 is reserved for a general call.
When a general call is issued, all slaves should respond by pulling the SDA line low in the ACK
cycle. A general call is used when a Master wishes to transmit the same message to several
slaves in the system. When the general call address followed by a Write bit is transmitted on the
bus, all slaves set up to acknowledge the general call will pull the SDA line low in the ack cycle.
The following data packets will then be received by all the slaves that acknowledged the general
call. Note that transmitting the general call address followed by a Read bit is meaningless, as
this would cause contention if several slaves started transmitting different data.
All addresses of the format 1111 xxx should be reserved for future purposes.
Figure 22-4. Address Packet Format
22.3.4 Data Packet Format
All data packets transmitted on the TWI bus are nine bits long, consisting of one data byte and
an acknowledge bit. During a data transfer, the Master generates the clock and the START and
STOP conditions, while the Receiver is responsible for acknowledging the reception. An
Acknowledge (ACK) is signalled by the Receiver pulling the SDA line low during the ninth SCL
cycle. If the Receiver leaves the SDA line high, a NACK is signalled. When the Receiver has
received the last byte, or for some reason cannot receive any more bytes, it should inform the
Transmitter by sending a NACK after the final byte. The MSB of the data byte is transmitted first.
SDA
SCL
START
12 789
Addr MSB Addr LSB R/W ACK
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 228
Figure 22-5. Data Packet Format
22.3.5 Combining Address and Data Packets into a Transmission
A transmission basically consists of a START condition, a SLA+R/W, one or more data packets
and a STOP condition. An empty message, consisting of a START followed by a STOP
condition, is illegal. Note that the Wired-ANDing of the SCL line can be used to implement
handshaking between the Master and the Slave. The Slave can extend the SCL low period by
pulling the SCL line low. This is useful if the clock speed set up by the Master is too fast for the
Slave, or the Slave needs extra time for processing between the data transmissions. The Slave
extending the SCL low period will not affect the SCL high period, which is determined by the
Master. As a consequence, the Slave can reduce the TWI data transfer speed by prolonging the
SCL duty cycle.
Figure 22-6 shows a typical data transmission. Note that several data bytes can be transmitted
between the SLA+R/W and the STOP condition, depending on the software protocol
implemented by the application software.
Figure 22-6. Typical Data Transmission
22.4 Multi-master Bus Systems, Arbitration and Synchronization
The TWI protocol allows bus systems with several masters. Special concerns have been taken
in order to ensure that transmissions will proceed as normal, even if two or more masters initiate
a transmission at the same time. Two problems arise in multi-master systems:
• An algorithm must be implemented allowing only one of the masters to complete the
transmission. All other masters should cease transmission when they discover that they
have lost the selection process. This selection process is called arbitration. When a
contending master discovers that it has lost the arbitration process, it should immediately
12 789
Data MSB Data LSB ACK
Aggregate
SDA
SDA from
Transmitter
SDA from
Receiver
SCL from
Master
SLA+R/W Data Byte
STOP, REPEATED
START or Next
Data Byte
12 789
Data Byte
Data MSB Data LSB ACK
SDA
SCL
START
12 789
Addr MSB Addr LSB R/W ACK
SLA+R/W STOP
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 229
switch to Slave mode to check whether it is being addressed by the winning master. The
fact that multiple masters have started transmission at the same time should not be
detectable to the slaves, i.e. the data being transferred on the bus must not be corrupted.
• Different masters may use different SCL frequencies. A scheme must be devised to
synchronize the serial clocks from all masters, in order to let the transmission proceed in a
lockstep fashion. This will facilitate the arbitration process.
The wired-ANDing of the bus lines is used to solve both these problems. The serial clocks from
all masters will be wired-ANDed, yielding a combined clock with a high period equal to the one
from the Master with the shortest high period. The low period of the combined clock is equal to
the low period of the Master with the longest low period. Note that all masters listen to the SCL
line, effectively starting to count their SCL high and low time-out periods when the combined
SCL line goes high or low, respectively.
Figure 22-7. SCL Synchronization Between Multiple Masters
Arbitration is carried out by all masters continuously monitoring the SDA line after outputting
data. If the value read from the SDA line does not match the value the Master had output, it has
lost the arbitration. Note that a Master can only lose arbitration when it outputs a high SDA value
while another Master outputs a low value. The losing Master should immediately go to Slave
mode, checking if it is being addressed by the winning Master. The SDA line should be left high,
but losing masters are allowed to generate a clock signal until the end of the current data or
address packet. Arbitration will continue until only one Master remains, and this may take many
bits. If several masters are trying to address the same Slave, arbitration will continue into the
data packet.
TA
low
TA
high
SCL from
Master A
SCL from
Master B
SCL Bus
Line
TB
low
TB
high
Masters Start
Counting Low Period
Masters Start
Counting High Period
M / / g z ““““ x x L L« p “““ m“m“““
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 230
Figure 22-8. Arbitration Between Two Masters
Note that arbitration is not allowed between:
• A REPEATED START condition and a data bit.
• A STOP condition and a data bit.
• A REPEATED START and a STOP condition.
It is the user software’s responsibility to ensure that these illegal arbitration conditions never
occur. This implies that in multi-master systems, all data transfers must use the same
composition of SLA+R/W and data packets. In other words: All transmissions must contain the
same number of data packets, otherwise the result of the arbitration is undefined.
SDA from
Master A
SDA from
Master B
SDA Line
Synchronized
SCL Line
START Master A Loses
Arbitration, SDAA SDA
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 231
22.5 Overview of the TWI Module
The TWI module is comprised of several submodules, as shown in Figure 22-9. All registers
drawn in a thick line are accessible through the AVR data bus.
Figure 22-9. Overview of the TWI Module
22.5.1 SCL and SDA Pins
These pins interface the AVR TWI with the rest of the MCU system. The output drivers contain a
slew-rate limiter in order to conform to the TWI specification. The input stages contain a spike
suppression unit removing spikes shorter than 50 ns. Note that the internal pull-ups in the AVR
pads can be enabled by setting the PORT bits corresponding to the SCL and SDA pins, as
explained in the I/O Port section. The internal pull-ups can in some systems eliminate the need
for external ones.
22.5.2 Bit Rate Generator Unit
This unit controls the period of SCL when operating in a Master mode. The SCL period is
controlled by settings in the TWI Bit Rate Register (TWBR) and the Prescaler bits in the TWI
Status Register (TWSR). Slave operation does not depend on Bit Rate or Prescaler settings, but
the CPU clock frequency in the Slave must be at least 16 times higher than the SCL frequency.
TWI Unit
Address Register
(TWAR)
Address Match Unit
Address Comparator
Control Unit
Control Register
(TWCR)
Status Register
(TWSR)
State Machine and
Status control
SCL
Slew-rate
Control
Spike
Filter
SDA
Slew-rate
Control
Spike
Filter
Bit Rate Generator
Bit Rate Register
(TWBR)
Prescaler
Bus Interface Unit
START / STOP
Control
Arbitration detection Ack
Spike Suppression
Address/Data Shift
Register (TWDR)
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 232
Note that slaves may prolong the SCL low period, thereby reducing the average TWI bus clock
period. The SCL frequency is generated according to the following equation:
• TWBR = Value of the TWI Bit Rate Register.
•PrescalerValue = Value of the prescaler, see Table 22-7 on page 255.
Note: Pull-up resistor values should be selected according to the SCL frequency and the capacitive bus
line load. See Table 29-6 on page 333 for value of pull-up resistor.
22.5.3 Bus Interface Unit
This unit contains the Data and Address Shift Register (TWDR), a START/STOP Controller and
Arbitration detection hardware. The TWDR contains the address or data bytes to be transmitted,
or the address or data bytes received. In addition to the 8-bit TWDR, the Bus Interface Unit also
contains a register containing the (N)ACK bit to be transmitted or received. This (N)ACK
Register is not directly accessible by the application software. However, when receiving, it can
be set or cleared by manipulating the TWI Control Register (TWCR). When in Transmitter mode,
the value of the received (N)ACK bit can be determined by the value in the TWSR.
The START/STOP Controller is responsible for generation and detection of START, REPEATED
START, and STOP conditions. The START/STOP controller is able to detect START and STOP
conditions even when the AVR MCU is in one of the sleep modes, enabling the MCU to wake up
if addressed by a Master.
If the TWI has initiated a transmission as Master, the Arbitration Detection hardware
continuously monitors the transmission trying to determine if arbitration is in process. If the TWI
has lost an arbitration, the Control Unit is informed. Correct action can then be taken and
appropriate status codes generated.
22.5.4 Address Match Unit
The Address Match unit checks if received address bytes match the seven-bit address in the
TWI Address Register (TWAR). If the TWI General Call Recognition Enable (TWGCE) bit in the
TWAR is written to one, all incoming address bits will also be compared against the General Call
address. Upon an address match, the Control Unit is informed, allowing correct action to be
taken. The TWI may or may not acknowledge its address, depending on settings in the TWCR.
The Address Match unit is able to compare addresses even when the AVR MCU is in sleep
mode, enabling the MCU to wake up if addressed by a Master.
If another interrupt (e.g., INT0) occurs during TWI Power-down address match and wakes up the
CPU, the TWI aborts operation and return to it’s idle state. If this cause any problems, ensure
that TWI Address Match is the only enabled interrupt when entering Power-down(1).
Note: 1. This applies to all device revisions except ATmega88P revision C or newer.
22.5.5 Control Unit
The Control unit monitors the TWI bus and generates responses corresponding to settings in the
TWI Control Register (TWCR). When an event requiring the attention of the application occurs
on the TWI bus, the TWI Interrupt Flag (TWINT) is asserted. In the next clock cycle, the TWI
Status Register (TWSR) is updated with a status code identifying the event. The TWSR only
contains relevant status information when the TWI Interrupt Flag is asserted. At all other times,
the TWSR contains a special status code indicating that no relevant status information is
SCL frequency CPU Clock frequency
16 2(TWBR) PrescalerValue+
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------=
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 233
available. As long as the TWINT Flag is set, the SCL line is held low. This allows the application
software to complete its tasks before allowing the TWI transmission to continue.
The TWINT Flag is set in the following situations:
• After the TWI has transmitted a START/REPEATED START condition.
• After the TWI has transmitted SLA+R/W.
• After the TWI has transmitted an address byte.
• After the TWI has lost arbitration.
• After the TWI has been addressed by own slave address or general call.
• After the TWI has received a data byte.
• After a STOP or REPEATED START has been received while still addressed as a Slave.
• When a bus error has occurred due to an illegal START or STOP condition.
22.6 Using the TWI
The AVR TWI is byte-oriented and interrupt based. Interrupts are issued after all bus events, like
reception of a byte or transmission of a START condition. Because the TWI is interrupt-based,
the application software is free to carry on other operations during a TWI byte transfer. Note that
the TWI Interrupt Enable (TWIE) bit in TWCR together with the Global Interrupt Enable bit in
SREG allow the application to decide whether or not assertion of the TWINT Flag should
generate an interrupt request. If the TWIE bit is cleared, the application must poll the TWINT
Flag in order to detect actions on the TWI bus.
When the TWINT Flag is asserted, the TWI has finished an operation and awaits application
response. In this case, the TWI Status Register (TWSR) contains a value indicating the current
state of the TWI bus. The application software can then decide how the TWI should behave in
the next TWI bus cycle by manipulating the TWCR and TWDR Registers.
Figure 22-10 is a simple example of how the application can interface to the TWI hardware. In
this example, a Master wishes to transmit a single data byte to a Slave. This description is quite
abstract, a more detailed explanation follows later in this section. A simple code example
implementing the desired behavior is also presented.
Figure 22-10. Interfacing the Application to the TWI in a Typical Transmission
START SLA+W A Data A STOP
1. Application
writes to TWCR to
initiate
transmission of
START
2. TWINT set.
Status code indicates
START condition sent
4. TWINT set.
Status code indicates
SLA+W sent, ACK
received
6. TWINT set.
Status code indicates
data sent, ACK received
3. Check TWSR to see if START was
sent. Application loads SLA+W into
TWDR, and loads appropriate control
signals into TWCR, makin sure that
TWINT is written to one,
and TWSTA is written to zero.
5. Check TWSR to see if SLA+W was
sent and ACK received.
Application loads data into TWDR, and
loads appropriate control signals into
TWCR, making sure that TWINT is
written to one
7. Check TWSR to see if data was sent
and ACK received.
Application loads appropriate control
signals to send STOP into TWCR,
making sure that TWINT is written to one
TWI bus
Indicates
TWINT set
Application
Action
TWI
Hardware
Action
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 234
1. The first step in a TWI transmission is to transmit a START condition. This is done by
writing a specific value into TWCR, instructing the TWI hardware to transmit a START
condition. Which value to write is described later on. However, it is important that the
TWINT bit is set in the value written. Writing a one to TWINT clears the flag. The TWI will
not start any operation as long as the TWINT bit in TWCR is set. Immediately after the
application has cleared TWINT, the TWI will initiate transmission of the START condition.
2. When the START condition has been transmitted, the TWINT Flag in TWCR is set, and
TWSR is updated with a status code indicating that the START condition has successfully
been sent.
3. The application software should now examine the value of TWSR, to make sure that the
START condition was successfully transmitted. If TWSR indicates otherwise, the
application software might take some special action, like calling an error routine.
Assuming that the status code is as expected, the application must load SLA+W into
TWDR. Remember that TWDR is used both for address and data. After TWDR has been
loaded with the desired SLA+W, a specific value must be written to TWCR, instructing the
TWI hardware to transmit the SLA+W present in TWDR. Which value to write is described
later on. However, it is important that the TWINT bit is set in the value written. Writing a
one to TWINT clears the flag. The TWI will not start any operation as long as the TWINT
bit in TWCR is set. Immediately after the application has cleared TWINT, the TWI will
initiate transmission of the address packet.
4. When the address packet has been transmitted, the TWINT Flag in TWCR is set, and
TWSR is updated with a status code indicating that the address packet has successfully
been sent. The status code will also reflect whether a Slave acknowledged the packet or
not.
5. The application software should now examine the value of TWSR, to make sure that the
address packet was successfully transmitted, and that the value of the ACK bit was as
expected. If TWSR indicates otherwise, the application software might take some special
action, like calling an error routine. Assuming that the status code is as expected, the
application must load a data packet into TWDR. Subsequently, a specific value must be
written to TWCR, instructing the TWI hardware to transmit the data packet present in
TWDR. Which value to write is described later on. However, it is important that the TWINT
bit is set in the value written. Writing a one to TWINT clears the flag. The TWI will not start
any operation as long as the TWINT bit in TWCR is set. Immediately after the application
has cleared TWINT, the TWI will initiate transmission of the data packet.
6. When the data packet has been transmitted, the TWINT Flag in TWCR is set, and TWSR
is updated with a status code indicating that the data packet has successfully been sent.
The status code will also reflect whether a Slave acknowledged the packet or not.
7. The application software should now examine the value of TWSR, to make sure that the
data packet was successfully transmitted, and that the value of the ACK bit was as
expected. If TWSR indicates otherwise, the application software might take some special
action, like calling an error routine. Assuming that the status code is as expected, the
application must write a specific value to TWCR, instructing the TWI hardware to transmit
a STOP condition. Which value to write is described later on. However, it is important that
the TWINT bit is set in the value written. Writing a one to TWINT clears the flag. The TWI
will not start any operation as long as the TWINT bit in TWCR is set. Immediately after the
application has cleared TWINT, the TWI will initiate transmission of the STOP condition.
Note that TWINT is NOT set after a STOP condition has been sent.
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 235
Even though this example is simple, it shows the principles involved in all TWI transmissions.
These can be summarized as follows:
• When the TWI has finished an operation and expects application response, the TWINT
Flag is set. The SCL line is pulled low until TWINT is cleared.
• When the TWINT Flag is set, the user must update all TWI Registers with the value
relevant for the next TWI bus cycle. As an example, TWDR must be loaded with the value
to be transmitted in the next bus cycle.
• After all TWI Register updates and other pending application software tasks have been
completed, TWCR is written. When writing TWCR, the TWINT bit should be set. Writing a
one to TWINT clears the flag. The TWI will then commence executing whatever operation
was specified by the TWCR setting.
In the following an assembly and C implementation of the example is given. Note that the code
below assumes that several definitions have been made, for example by using include-files.
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 236
Assembly Code Example C Example Comments
1
ldi
r16,
(1<<TWINT)|(1<<TWSTA
)|
(1<<TWEN)
out
TWCR, r16
TWCR =
(1<<TWINT)|(1<<TWSTA)
|
(1<<TWEN) Send START condition
2
wait1:
in
r16,TWCR
sbrs
r16,TWINT
rjmp
wait1
while (!(TWCR &
(1<<TWINT)))
;Wait for TWINT Flag set. This
indicates that the START
condition has been transmitted
3
in
r16,TWSR
andi
r16, 0xF8
cpi
r16, START
brne
ERROR
if ((TWSR & 0xF8) !=
START)
ERROR();
Check value of TWI Status
Register. Mask prescaler bits. If
status different from START go to
ERROR
ldi
r16, SLA_W
out
TWDR, r16
ldi
r16, (1<<TWINT) |
(1<<TWEN)
out
TWCR, r16
TWDR = SLA_W;
TWCR = (1<<TWINT) |
(1<<TWEN); Load SLA_W into TWDR
Register. Clear TWINT bit in
TWCR to start transmission of
address
4
wait2:
in
r16,TWCR
sbrs
r16,TWINT
rjmp
wait2
while (!(TWCR &
(1<<TWINT)))
;Wait for TWINT Flag set. This
indicates that the SLA+W has
been transmitted, and
ACK/NACK has been received.
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 237
22.7 Transmission Modes
The TWI can operate in one of four major modes. These are named Master Transmitter (MT),
Master Receiver (MR), Slave Transmitter (ST) and Slave Receiver (SR). Several of these
modes can be used in the same application. As an example, the TWI can use MT mode to write
data into a TWI EEPROM, MR mode to read the data back from the EEPROM. If other masters
are present in the system, some of these might transmit data to the TWI, and then SR mode
would be used. It is the application software that decides which modes are legal.
5
in
r16,TWSR
andi
r16, 0xF8
cpi
r16, MT_SLA_ACK
brne
ERROR
if ((TWSR & 0xF8) !=
MT_SLA_ACK)
ERROR();
Check value of TWI Status
Register. Mask prescaler bits. If
status different from
MT_SLA_ACK go to ERROR
ldi
r16, DATA
out
TWDR, r16
ldi
r16, (1<<TWINT) |
(1<<TWEN)
out
TWCR, r16
TWDR = DATA;
TWCR = (1<<TWINT) |
(1<<TWEN);
Load DATA into TWDR Register.
Clear TWINT bit in TWCR to start
transmission of data
6
wait3:
in
r16,TWCR
sbrs
r16,TWINT
rjmp
wait3
while (!(TWCR &
(1<<TWINT)))
;Wait for TWINT Flag set. This
indicates that the DATA has been
transmitted, and ACK/NACK has
been received.
7
in
r16,TWSR
andi
r16, 0xF8
cpi
r16, MT_DATA_ACK
brne
ERROR
if ((TWSR & 0xF8) !=
MT_DATA_ACK)
ERROR();
Check value of TWI Status
Register. Mask prescaler bits. If
status different from
MT_DATA_ACK go to ERROR
ldi
r16,
(1<<TWINT)|(1<<TWEN)
|
(1<<TWSTO)
out
TWCR, r16
TWCR =
(1<<TWINT)|(1<<TWEN)|
(1<<TWSTO);
Transmit STOP condition
Assembly Code Example C Example Comments
M
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 238
The following sections describe each of these modes. Possible status codes are described
along with figures detailing data transmission in each of the modes. These figures contain the
following abbreviations:
S: START condition
Rs: REPEATED START condition
R: Read bit (high level at SDA)
W: Write bit (low level at SDA)
A: Acknowledge bit (low level at SDA)
A: Not acknowledge bit (high level at SDA)
Data: 8-bit data byte
P: STOP condition
SLA: Slave Address
In Figure 22-12 to Figure 22-18, circles are used to indicate that the TWINT Flag is set. The
numbers in the circles show the status code held in TWSR, with the prescaler bits masked to
zero. At these points, actions must be taken by the application to continue or complete the TWI
transfer. The TWI transfer is suspended until the TWINT Flag is cleared by software.
When the TWINT Flag is set, the status code in TWSR is used to determine the appropriate
software action. For each status code, the required software action and details of the following
serial transfer are given in Table 22-2 to Table 22-5. Note that the prescaler bits are masked to
zero in these tables.
22.7.1 Master Transmitter Mode
In the Master Transmitter mode, a number of data bytes are transmitted to a Slave Receiver
(see Figure 22-11). In order to enter a Master mode, a START condition must be transmitted.
The format of the following address packet determines whether Master Transmitter or Master
Receiver mode is to be entered. If SLA+W is transmitted, MT mode is entered, if SLA+R is
transmitted, MR mode is entered. All the status codes mentioned in this section assume that the
prescaler bits are zero or are masked to zero.
Figure 22-11. Data Transfer in Master Transmitter Mode
A START condition is sent by writing the following value to TWCR:
TWCR TWINT TWEA TWSTA TWSTO TWWC TWEN –TWIE
value 1 X10X10 X
Device 1
MASTER
TRANSMITTER
Device 2
SLAVE
RECEIVER
Device 3 Device n
SDA
SCL
........
R1 R2
V
CC
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 239
TWEN must be set to enable the 2-wire Serial Interface, TWSTA must be written to one to
transmit a START condition and TWINT must be written to one to clear the TWINT Flag. The
TWI will then test the 2-wire Serial Bus and generate a START condition as soon as the bus
becomes free. After a START condition has been transmitted, the TWINT Flag is set by
hardware, and the status code in TWSR will be 0x08 (see Table 22-2). In order to enter MT
mode, SLA+W must be transmitted. This is done by writing SLA+W to TWDR. Thereafter the
TWINT bit should be cleared (by writing it to one) to continue the transfer. This is accomplished
by writing the following value to TWCR:
When SLA+W have been transmitted and an acknowledgement bit has been received, TWINT is
set again and a number of status codes in TWSR are possible. Possible status codes in Master
mode are 0x18, 0x20, or 0x38. The appropriate action to be taken for each of these status codes
is detailed in Table 22-2.
When SLA+W has been successfully transmitted, a data packet should be transmitted. This is
done by writing the data byte to TWDR. TWDR must only be written when TWINT is high. If not,
the access will be discarded, and the Write Collision bit (TWWC) will be set in the TWCR
Register. After updating TWDR, the TWINT bit should be cleared (by writing it to one) to
continue the transfer. This is accomplished by writing the following value to TWCR:
This scheme is repeated until the last byte has been sent and the transfer is ended by
generating a STOP condition or a repeated START condition. A STOP condition is generated by
writing the following value to TWCR:
A REPEATED START condition is generated by writing the following value to TWCR:
After a repeated START condition (state 0x10) the 2-wire Serial Interface can access the same
Slave again, or a new Slave without transmitting a STOP condition. Repeated START enables
the Master to switch between Slaves, Master Transmitter mode and Master Receiver mode
without losing control of the bus.
TWCR TWINT TWEA TWSTA TWSTO TWWC TWEN –TWIE
value 1 X00X10 X
TWCR TWINT TWEA TWSTA TWSTO TWWC TWEN –TWIE
value 1 X00X10 X
TWCR TWINT TWEA TWSTA TWSTO TWWC TWEN –TWIE
value 1 X01X10 X
TWCR TWINT TWEA TWSTA TWSTO TWWC TWEN –TWIE
value 1 X10X10 X
Table 22-2. Status codes for Master Transmitter Mode
Status Code
(TWSR)
Prescaler Bits
are 0
Status of the 2-wire Serial Bus
and 2-wire Serial Interface
Hardware
Application Software Response
Next Action Taken by TWI Hardware
To/from TWDR To TWCR
STA STO TWIN
T
TWE
A
0x08 A START condition has been
transmitted
Load SLA+W 0 0 1 X SLA+W will be transmitted;
ACK or NOT ACK will be received
0x10 A repeated START condition
has been transmitted
Load SLA+W or
Load SLA+R
0
0
0
0
1
1
X
X
SLA+W will be transmitted;
ACK or NOT ACK will be received
SLA+R will be transmitted;
Logic will switch to Master Receiver mode
0x18 SLA+W has been transmitted;
ACK has been received
Load data byte or
No TWDR action or
No TWDR action or
No TWDR action
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
X
X
X
X
Data byte will be transmitted and ACK or NOT ACK will
be received
Repeated START will be transmitted
STOP condition will be transmitted and
TWSTO Flag will be reset
STOP condition followed by a START condition will be
transmitted and TWSTO Flag will be reset
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 240
0x20 SLA+W has been transmitted;
NOT ACK has been received
Load data byte or
No TWDR action or
No TWDR action or
No TWDR action
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
X
X
X
X
Data byte will be transmitted and ACK or NOT ACK will
be received
Repeated START will be transmitted
STOP condition will be transmitted and
TWSTO Flag will be reset
STOP condition followed by a START condition will be
transmitted and TWSTO Flag will be reset
0x28 Data byte has been transmit-
ted;
ACK has been received
Load data byte or
No TWDR action or
No TWDR action or
No TWDR action
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
X
X
X
X
Data byte will be transmitted and ACK or NOT ACK will
be received
Repeated START will be transmitted
STOP condition will be transmitted and
TWSTO Flag will be reset
STOP condition followed by a START condition will be
transmitted and TWSTO Flag will be reset
0x30 Data byte has been transmit-
ted;
NOT ACK has been received
Load data byte or
No TWDR action or
No TWDR action or
No TWDR action
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
X
X
X
X
Data byte will be transmitted and ACK or NOT ACK will
be received
Repeated START will be transmitted
STOP condition will be transmitted and
TWSTO Flag will be reset
STOP condition followed by a START condition will be
transmitted and TWSTO Flag will be reset
0x38 Arbitration lost in SLA+W or
data bytes
No TWDR action or
No TWDR action
0
1
0
0
1
1
X
X
2-wire Serial Bus will be released and not addressed
Slave mode entered
A START condition will be transmitted when the bus
becomes free
Table 22-2. Status codes for Master Transmitter Mode
as
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 241
Figure 22-12. Formats and States in the Master Transmitter Mode
22.7.2 Master Receiver Mode
In the Master Receiver mode, a number of data bytes are received from a Slave Transmitter
(Slave see Figure 22-13). In order to enter a Master mode, a START condition must be
transmitted. The format of the following address packet determines whether Master Transmitter
or Master Receiver mode is to be entered. If SLA+W is transmitted, MT mode is entered, if
SLA+R is transmitted, MR mode is entered. All the status codes mentioned in this section
assume that the prescaler bits are zero or are masked to zero.
S SLA W A DATA A P
$08 $18 $28
R SLA W
$10
AP
$20
P
$30
A or A
$38
A
Other master
continues
A or A
$38
Other master
continues
R
A
$68
Other master
continues
$78 $B0
To corresponding
states in slave mode
MT
M
R
Successfull
transmission
to a slave
receiver
Next transfer
started with a
repeated start
condition
Not acknowledge
received after the
slave address
Not acknowledge
received after a data
byte
Arbitration lost in slave
address or data byte
Arbitration lost and
addressed as slave
DATA A
n
From master to slave
From slave to master
Any number of data bytes
and their associated acknowledge bits
This number (contained in TWSR) corresponds
to a defined state of the 2-Wire Serial Bus. The
p
rescaler bits are zero or masked to zero
S
M
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 242
Figure 22-13. Data Transfer in Master Receiver Mode
A START condition is sent by writing the following value to TWCR:
TWEN must be written to one to enable the 2-wire Serial Interface, TWSTA must be written to
one to transmit a START condition and TWINT must be set to clear the TWINT Flag. The TWI
will then test the 2-wire Serial Bus and generate a START condition as soon as the bus
becomes free. After a START condition has been transmitted, the TWINT Flag is set by
hardware, and the status code in TWSR will be 0x08 (See Table 22-2). In order to enter MR
mode, SLA+R must be transmitted. This is done by writing SLA+R to TWDR. Thereafter the
TWINT bit should be cleared (by writing it to one) to continue the transfer. This is accomplished
by writing the following value to TWCR:
When SLA+R have been transmitted and an acknowledgement bit has been received, TWINT is
set again and a number of status codes in TWSR are possible. Possible status codes in Master
mode are 0x38, 0x40, or 0x48. The appropriate action to be taken for each of these status codes
is detailed in Table 22-3. Received data can be read from the TWDR Register when the TWINT
Flag is set high by hardware. This scheme is repeated until the last byte has been received.
After the last byte has been received, the MR should inform the ST by sending a NACK after the
last received data byte. The transfer is ended by generating a STOP condition or a repeated
START condition. A STOP condition is generated by writing the following value to TWCR:
A REPEATED START condition is generated by writing the following value to TWCR:
After a repeated START condition (state 0x10) the 2-wire Serial Interface can access the same
Slave again, or a new Slave without transmitting a STOP condition. Repeated START enables
TWCR TWINT TWEA TWSTA TWSTO TWWC TWEN –TWIE
value 1 X10X10 X
TWCR TWINT TWEA TWSTA TWSTO TWWC TWEN –TWIE
value 1 X00X10 X
TWCR TWINT TWEA TWSTA TWSTO TWWC TWEN –TWIE
value 1 X01X10 X
TWCR TWINT TWEA TWSTA TWSTO TWWC TWEN –TWIE
value 1 X10X10 X
Device 1
MASTER
RECEIVER
Device 2
SLAVE
TRANSMITTER
Device 3 Device n
SDA
SCL
........
R1 R2
V
CC
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 243
the Master to switch between Slaves, Master Transmitter mode and Master Receiver mode
without losing control over the bus.
Table 22-3. Status codes for Master Receiver Mode
Status Code
(TWSR)
Prescaler Bits
are 0
Status of the 2-wire Serial Bus
and 2-wire Serial Interface
Hardware
Application Software Response
Next Action Taken by TWI Hardware
To/from TWDR
To TWCR
STA STO TWIN
T
TWE
A
0x08 A START condition has been
transmitted
Load SLA+R 0 0 1 X SLA+R will be transmitted
ACK or NOT ACK will be received
0x10 A repeated START condition
has been transmitted
Load SLA+R or
Load SLA+W
0
0
0
0
1
1
X
X
SLA+R will be transmitted
ACK or NOT ACK will be received
SLA+W will be transmitted
Logic will switch to Master Transmitter mode
0x38 Arbitration lost in SLA+R or
NOT ACK bit
No TWDR action or
No TWDR action
0
1
0
0
1
1
X
X
2-wire Serial Bus will be released and not addressed
Slave mode will be entered
A START condition will be transmitted when the bus
becomes free
0x40 SLA+R has been transmitted;
ACK has been received
No TWDR action or
No TWDR action
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
Data byte will be received and NOT ACK will be
returned
Data byte will be received and ACK will be returned
0x48 SLA+R has been transmitted;
NOT ACK has been received
No TWDR action or
No TWDR action or
No TWDR action
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
X
X
X
Repeated START will be transmitted
STOP condition will be transmitted and TWSTO Flag
will be reset
STOP condition followed by a START condition will be
transmitted and TWSTO Flag will be reset
0x50 Data byte has been received;
ACK has been returned
Read data byte or
Read data byte
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
Data byte will be received and NOT ACK will be
returned
Data byte will be received and ACK will be returned
0x58 Data byte has been received;
NOT ACK has been returned
Read data byte or
Read data byte or
Read data byte
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
X
X
X
Repeated START will be transmitted
STOP condition will be transmitted and TWSTO Flag
will be reset
STOP condition followed by a START condition will be
transmitted and TWSTO Flag will be reset
$1: as
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 244
Figure 22-14. Formats and States in the Master Receiver Mode
22.7.3 Slave Receiver Mode
In the Slave Receiver mode, a number of data bytes are received from a Master Transmitter
(see Figure 22-15). All the status codes mentioned in this section assume that the prescaler bits
are zero or are masked to zero.
Figure 22-15. Data transfer in Slave Receiver mode
S SLA R A DATA A
$08 $40 $50
SLA R
$10
AP
$48
A or A
$38
Other master
continues
$38
Other master
continues
W
A
$68
Other master
continues
$78 $B0
To corresponding
states in slave mode
MR
M
T
Successfull
reception
from a slave
receiver
Next transfer
started with a
repeated start
condition
Not acknowledge
received after the
slave address
Arbitration lost in slave
address or data byte
Arbitration lost and
addressed as slave
DATA A
n
From master to slave
From slave to master
Any number of data bytes
and their associated acknowledge bits
This number (contained in TWSR) corresponds
to a defined state of the 2-Wire Serial Bus. The
p
rescaler bits are zero or masked to zero
PDATA A
$58
A
R
S
Device 3 Device n
SDA
SCL
........
R1 R2
V
CC
Device 2
MASTER
TRANSMITTER
Device 1
SLAVE
RECEIVER
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 245
To initiate the Slave Receiver mode, TWAR and TWCR must be initialized as follows:
The upper 7 bits are the address to which the 2-wire Serial Interface will respond when
addressed by a Master. If the LSB is set, the TWI will respond to the general call address (0x00),
otherwise it will ignore the general call address.
TWEN must be written to one to enable the TWI. The TWEA bit must be written to one to enable
the acknowledgement of the device’s own slave address or the general call address. TWSTA
and TWSTO must be written to zero.
When TWAR and TWCR have been initialized, the TWI waits until it is addressed by its own
slave address (or the general call address if enabled) followed by the data direction bit. If the
direction bit is “0” (write), the TWI will operate in SR mode, otherwise ST mode is entered. After
its own slave address and the write bit have been received, the TWINT Flag is set and a valid
status code can be read from TWSR. The status code is used to determine the appropriate
software action. The appropriate action to be taken for each status code is detailed in Table 22-
4. The Slave Receiver mode may also be entered if arbitration is lost while the TWI is in the
Master mode (see states 0x68 and 0x78).
If the TWEA bit is reset during a transfer, the TWI will return a “Not Acknowledge” (“1”) to SDA
after the next received data byte. This can be used to indicate that the Slave is not able to
receive any more bytes. While TWEA is zero, the TWI does not acknowledge its own slave
address. However, the 2-wire Serial Bus is still monitored and address recognition may resume
at any time by setting TWEA. This implies that the TWEA bit may be used to temporarily isolate
the TWI from the 2-wire Serial Bus.
In all sleep modes other than Idle mode, the clock system to the TWI is turned off. If the TWEA
bit is set, the interface can still acknowledge its own slave address or the general call address by
using the 2-wire Serial Bus clock as a clock source. The part will then wake up from sleep and
the TWI will hold the SCL clock low during the wake up and until the TWINT Flag is cleared (by
writing it to one). Further data reception will be carried out as normal, with the AVR clocks
running as normal. Observe that if the AVR is set up with a long start-up time, the SCL line may
be held low for a long time, blocking other data transmissions.
Note that the 2-wire Serial Interface Data Register – TWDR does not reflect the last byte present
on the bus when waking up from these Sleep modes.
TWAR TWA6 TWA5 TWA4 TWA3 TWA2 TWA1 TWA0 TWGCE
value Device’s Own Slave Address
TWCR TWINT TWEA TWSTA TWSTO TWWC TWEN –TWIE
value 0100010 X
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 246
Table 22-4. Status Codes for Slave Receiver Mode
Status Code
(TWSR)
Prescaler Bits
are 0
Status of the 2-wire Serial Bus
and 2-wire Serial Interface Hard-
ware
Application Software Response
Next Action Taken by TWI Hardware
To/from TWDR
To TWCR
STA STO TWIN
T
TWE
A
0x60 Own SLA+W has been received;
ACK has been returned
No TWDR action or
No TWDR action
X
X
0
0
1
1
0
1
Data byte will be received and NOT ACK will be
returned
Data byte will be received and ACK will be returned
0x68 Arbitration lost in SLA+R/W as
Master; own SLA+W has been
received; ACK has been returned
No TWDR action or
No TWDR action
X
X
0
0
1
1
0
1
Data byte will be received and NOT ACK will be
returned
Data byte will be received and ACK will be returned
0x70 General call address has been
received; ACK has been returned
No TWDR action or
No TWDR action
X
X
0
0
1
1
0
1
Data byte will be received and NOT ACK will be
returned
Data byte will be received and ACK will be returned
0x78 Arbitration lost in SLA+R/W as
Master; General call address has
been received; ACK has been
returned
No TWDR action or
No TWDR action
X
X
0
0
1
1
0
1
Data byte will be received and NOT ACK will be
returned
Data byte will be received and ACK will be returned
0x80 Previously addressed with own
SLA+W; data has been received;
ACK has been returned
Read data byte or
Read data byte
X
X
0
0
1
1
0
1
Data byte will be received and NOT ACK will be
returned
Data byte will be received and ACK will be returned
0x88 Previously addressed with own
SLA+W; data has been received;
NOT ACK has been returned
Read data byte or
Read data byte or
Read data byte or
Read data byte
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
Switched to the not addressed Slave mode;
no recognition of own SLA or GCA
Switched to the not addressed Slave mode;
own SLA will be recognized;
GCA will be recognized if TWGCE = “1”
Switched to the not addressed Slave mode;
no recognition of own SLA or GCA;
a START condition will be transmitted when the bus
becomes free
Switched to the not addressed Slave mode;
own SLA will be recognized;
GCA will be recognized if TWGCE = “1”;
a START condition will be transmitted when the bus
becomes free
0x90 Previously addressed with
general call; data has been re-
ceived; ACK has been returned
Read data byte or
Read data byte
X
X
0
0
1
1
0
1
Data byte will be received and NOT ACK will be
returned
Data byte will be received and ACK will be returned
0x98 Previously addressed with
general call; data has been
received; NOT ACK has been
returned
Read data byte or
Read data byte or
Read data byte or
Read data byte
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
Switched to the not addressed Slave mode;
no recognition of own SLA or GCA
Switched to the not addressed Slave mode;
own SLA will be recognized;
GCA will be recognized if TWGCE = “1”
Switched to the not addressed Slave mode;
no recognition of own SLA or GCA;
a START condition will be transmitted when the bus
becomes free
Switched to the not addressed Slave mode;
own SLA will be recognized;
GCA will be recognized if TWGCE = “1”;
a START condition will be transmitted when the bus
becomes free
0xA0 A STOP condition or repeated
START condition has been
received while still addressed as
Slave
No action 0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
Switched to the not addressed Slave mode;
no recognition of own SLA or GCA
Switched to the not addressed Slave mode;
own SLA will be recognized;
GCA will be recognized if TWGCE = “1”
Switched to the not addressed Slave mode;
no recognition of own SLA or GCA;
a START condition will be transmitted when the bus
becomes free
Switched to the not addressed Slave mode;
own SLA will be recognized;
GCA will be recognized if TWGCE = “1”;
a START condition will be transmitted when the bus
becomes free
as
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 247
Figure 22-16. Formats and States in the Slave Receiver Mode
22.7.4 Slave Transmitter Mode
In the Slave Transmitter mode, a number of data bytes are transmitted to a Master Receiver
(see Figure 22-17). All the status codes mentioned in this section assume that the prescaler bits
are zero or are masked to zero.
Figure 22-17. Data Transfer in Slave Transmitter Mode
S SLA W A DATA A
$60 $80
$88
A
$68
Reception of the own
slave address and one or
more data bytes. All are
acknowledged
Last data byte received
is not acknowledged
Arbitration lost as master
and addressed as slave
Reception of the general call
address and one or more data
bytes
Last data byte received is
not acknowledged
n
From master to slave
From slave to master
Any number of data bytes
and their associated acknowledge bits
This number (contained in TWSR) corresponds
to a defined state of the 2-Wire Serial Bus. The
prescaler bits are zero or masked to zero
P or SDATA A
$80 $A0
P or SA
ADATAA
$70 $90
$98
A
$78
P or SDATA A
$90 $A0
P or SA
General Call
Arbitration lost as master and
addressed as slave by general call
DATA A
Device 3 Device n
SDA
SCL
........
R1 R2
V
CC
Device 2
MASTER
RECEIVER
Device 1
SLAVE
TRANSMITTER
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 248
To initiate the Slave Transmitter mode, TWAR and TWCR must be initialized as follows:
The upper seven bits are the address to which the 2-wire Serial Interface will respond when
addressed by a Master. If the LSB is set, the TWI will respond to the general call address (0x00),
otherwise it will ignore the general call address.
TWEN must be written to one to enable the TWI. The TWEA bit must be written to one to enable
the acknowledgement of the device’s own slave address or the general call address. TWSTA
and TWSTO must be written to zero.
When TWAR and TWCR have been initialized, the TWI waits until it is addressed by its own
slave address (or the general call address if enabled) followed by the data direction bit. If the
direction bit is “1” (read), the TWI will operate in ST mode, otherwise SR mode is entered. After
its own slave address and the write bit have been received, the TWINT Flag is set and a valid
status code can be read from TWSR. The status code is used to determine the appropriate
software action. The appropriate action to be taken for each status code is detailed in Table 22-
5. The Slave Transmitter mode may also be entered if arbitration is lost while the TWI is in the
Master mode (see state 0xB0).
If the TWEA bit is written to zero during a transfer, the TWI will transmit the last byte of the
transfer. State 0xC0 or state 0xC8 will be entered, depending on whether the Master Receiver
transmits a NACK or ACK after the final byte. The TWI is switched to the not addressed Slave
mode, and will ignore the Master if it continues the transfer. Thus the Master Receiver receives
all “1” as serial data. State 0xC8 is entered if the Master demands additional data bytes (by
transmitting ACK), even though the Slave has transmitted the last byte (TWEA zero and
expecting NACK from the Master).
While TWEA is zero, the TWI does not respond to its own slave address. However, the 2-wire
Serial Bus is still monitored and address recognition may resume at any time by setting TWEA.
This implies that the TWEA bit may be used to temporarily isolate the TWI from the 2-wire Serial
Bus.
In all sleep modes other than Idle mode, the clock system to the TWI is turned off. If the TWEA
bit is set, the interface can still acknowledge its own slave address or the general call address by
using the 2-wire Serial Bus clock as a clock source. The part will then wake up from sleep and
the TWI will hold the SCL clock will low during the wake up and until the TWINT Flag is cleared
(by writing it to one). Further data transmission will be carried out as normal, with the AVR clocks
running as normal. Observe that if the AVR is set up with a long start-up time, the SCL line may
be held low for a long time, blocking other data transmissions.
Note that the 2-wire Serial Interface Data Register – TWDR does not reflect the last byte present
on the bus when waking up from these sleep modes.
TWAR TWA6 TWA5 TWA4 TWA3 TWA2 TWA1 TWA0 TWGCE
value Device’s Own Slave Address
TWCR TWINT TWEA TWSTA TWSTO TWWC TWEN –TWIE
value 0100010 X
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 249
Table 22-5. Status Codes for Slave Transmitter Mode
Status Code
(TWSR)
Prescaler
Bits
are 0
Status of the 2-wire Serial Bus
and 2-wire Serial Interface Hard-
ware
Application Software Response
Next Action Taken by TWI Hardware
To/from TWDR
To TWCR
STA STO TWIN
T
TWE
A
0xA8 Own SLA+R has been received;
ACK has been returned
Load data byte or
Load data byte
X
X
0
0
1
1
0
1
Last data byte will be transmitted and NOT ACK should
be received
Data byte will be transmitted and ACK should be re-
ceived
0xB0 Arbitration lost in SLA+R/W as
Master; own SLA+R has been
received; ACK has been returned
Load data byte or
Load data byte
X
X
0
0
1
1
0
1
Last data byte will be transmitted and NOT ACK should
be received
Data byte will be transmitted and ACK should be re-
ceived
0xB8 Data byte in TWDR has been
transmitted; ACK has been
received
Load data byte or
Load data byte
X
X
0
0
1
1
0
1
Last data byte will be transmitted and NOT ACK should
be received
Data byte will be transmitted and ACK should be re-
ceived
0xC0 Data byte in TWDR has been
transmitted; NOT ACK has been
received
No TWDR action or
No TWDR action or
No TWDR action or
No TWDR action
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
Switched to the not addressed Slave mode;
no recognition of own SLA or GCA
Switched to the not addressed Slave mode;
own SLA will be recognized;
GCA will be recognized if TWGCE = “1”
Switched to the not addressed Slave mode;
no recognition of own SLA or GCA;
a START condition will be transmitted when the bus
becomes free
Switched to the not addressed Slave mode;
own SLA will be recognized;
GCA will be recognized if TWGCE = “1”;
a START condition will be transmitted when the bus
becomes free
0xC8 Last data byte in TWDR has been
transmitted (TWEA = “0”); ACK
has been received
No TWDR action or
No TWDR action or
No TWDR action or
No TWDR action
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
Switched to the not addressed Slave mode;
no recognition of own SLA or GCA
Switched to the not addressed Slave mode;
own SLA will be recognized;
GCA will be recognized if TWGCE = “1”
Switched to the not addressed Slave mode;
no recognition of own SLA or GCA;
a START condition will be transmitted when the bus
becomes free
Switched to the not addressed Slave mode;
own SLA will be recognized;
GCA will be recognized if TWGCE = “1”;
a START condition will be transmitted when the bus
becomes free
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 250
Figure 22-18. Formats and States in the Slave Transmitter Mode
22.7.5 Miscellaneous States
There are two status codes that do not correspond to a defined TWI state, see Table 22-6.
Status 0xF8 indicates that no relevant information is available because the TWINT Flag is not
set. This occurs between other states, and when the TWI is not involved in a serial transfer.
Status 0x00 indicates that a bus error has occurred during a 2-wire Serial Bus transfer. A bus
error occurs when a START or STOP condition occurs at an illegal position in the format frame.
Examples of such illegal positions are during the serial transfer of an address byte, a data byte,
or an acknowledge bit. When a bus error occurs, TWINT is set. To recover from a bus error, the
TWSTO Flag must set and TWINT must be cleared by writing a logic one to it. This causes the
TWI to enter the not addressed Slave mode and to clear the TWSTO Flag (no other bits in
TWCR are affected). The SDA and SCL lines are released, and no STOP condition is
transmitted.
22.7.6 Combining Several TWI Modes
In some cases, several TWI modes must be combined in order to complete the desired action.
Consider for example reading data from a serial EEPROM. Typically, such a transfer involves
the following steps:
1. The transfer must be initiated.
2. The EEPROM must be instructed what location should be read.
3. The reading must be performed.
4. The transfer must be finished.
S SLA R A DATA A
$A8 $B8
A
$B0
Reception of the own
slave address and one or
more data bytes
Last data byte transmitted.
Switched to not addressed
slave (TWEA = '0')
Arbitration lost as master
and addressed as slave
n
From master to slave
From slave to master
Any number of data bytes
and their associated acknowledge bits
This number (contained in TWSR) corresponds
to a defined state of the 2-Wire Serial Bus. The
prescaler bits are zero or masked to zero
P or SDATA
$C0
DATA A
A
$C8
P or SAll 1's
A
Table 22-6. Miscellaneous States
Status Code
(TWSR)
Prescaler Bits
are 0
Status of the 2-wire Serial Bus
and 2-wire Serial Interface
Hardware
Application Software Response
Next Action Taken by TWI Hardware
To/from TWDR
To TWCR
STA STO TWIN
T
TWE
A
0xF8 No relevant state information
available; TWINT = “0”
No TWDR action No TWCR action Wait or proceed current transfer
0x00 Bus error due to an illegal
START or STOP condition
No TWDR action 0 1 1 X Only the internal hardware is affected, no STOP condi-
tion is sent on the bus. In all cases, the bus is released
and TWSTO is cleared.
][
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 251
Note that data is transmitted both from Master to Slave and vice versa. The Master must instruct
the Slave what location it wants to read, requiring the use of the MT mode. Subsequently, data
must be read from the Slave, implying the use of the MR mode. Thus, the transfer direction must
be changed. The Master must keep control of the bus during all these steps, and the steps
should be carried out as an atomical operation. If this principle is violated in a multi master
system, another Master can alter the data pointer in the EEPROM between steps 2 and 3, and
the Master will read the wrong data location. Such a change in transfer direction is accomplished
by transmitting a REPEATED START between the transmission of the address byte and
reception of the data. After a REPEATED START, the Master keeps ownership of the bus. The
following figure shows the flow in this transfer.
Figure 22-19. Combining Several TWI Modes to Access a Serial EEPROM
22.8 Multi-master Systems and Arbitration
If multiple masters are connected to the same bus, transmissions may be initiated
simultaneously by one or more of them. The TWI standard ensures that such situations are
handled in such a way that one of the masters will be allowed to proceed with the transfer, and
that no data will be lost in the process. An example of an arbitration situation is depicted below,
where two masters are trying to transmit data to a Slave Receiver.
Figure 22-20. An Arbitration Example
Several different scenarios may arise during arbitration, as described below:
• Two or more masters are performing identical communication with the same Slave. In this
case, neither the Slave nor any of the masters will know about the bus contention.
• Two or more masters are accessing the same Slave with different data or direction bit. In
this case, arbitration will occur, either in the READ/WRITE bit or in the data bits. The
masters trying to output a one on SDA while another Master outputs a zero will lose the
arbitration. Losing masters will switch to not addressed Slave mode or wait until the bus is
free and transmit a new START condition, depending on application software action.
Master Transmitter Master Receiver
S = START Rs = REPEATED START P = STOP
Transmitted from master to slave Transmitted from slave to master
S SLA+W A ADDRESS A Rs SLA+R A DATA A P
Device 1
MASTER
TRANSMITTER
Device 2
MASTER
TRANSMITTER
Device 3
SLAVE
RECEIVER
Device n
SDA
SCL
........ R1 R2
V
CC
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 252
• Two or more masters are accessing different slaves. In this case, arbitration will occur in
the SLA bits. Masters trying to output a one on SDA while another Master outputs a zero
will lose the arbitration. Masters losing arbitration in SLA will switch to Slave mode to
check if they are being addressed by the winning Master. If addressed, they will switch to
SR or ST mode, depending on the value of the READ/WRITE bit. If they are not being
addressed, they will switch to not addressed Slave mode or wait until the bus is free and
transmit a new START condition, depending on application software action.
This is summarized in Figure 22-21. Possible status values are given in circles.
Figure 22-21. Possible Status Codes Caused by Arbitration
22.9 Register Description
22.9.1 TWBR – TWI Bit Rate Register
• Bits 7..0 – TWI Bit Rate Register
TWBR selects the division factor for the bit rate generator. The bit rate generator is a frequency
divider which generates the SCL clock frequency in the Master modes. See “Bit Rate Generator
Unit” on page 231 for calculating bit rates.
22.9.2 TWCR – TWI Control Register
The TWCR is used to control the operation of the TWI. It is used to enable the TWI, to initiate a
Master access by applying a START condition to the bus, to generate a Receiver acknowledge,
to generate a stop condition, and to control halting of the bus while the data to be written to the
Own
Address / General Call
received
Arbitration lost in SLA
TWI bus will be released and not addressed slave mode will be entered
A START condition will be transmitted when the bus becomes free
No
Arbitration lost in Data
Direction
Ye s
Write
Data byte will be received and NOT ACK will be returned
Data byte will be received and ACK will be returned
Last data byte will be transmitted and NOT ACK should be received
Data byte will be transmitted and ACK should be received
Read
B0
68/78
38
SLASTART Data STOP
Bit 76543210
(0xB8) TWBR7 TWBR6 TWBR5 TWBR4 TWBR3 TWBR2 TWBR1 TWBR0 TWBR
Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 76543210
(0xBC) TWINT TWEA TWSTA TWSTO TWWC TWEN – TWIE TWCR
Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R R/W R R/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 253
bus are written to the TWDR. It also indicates a write collision if data is attempted written to
TWDR while the register is inaccessible.
• Bit 7 – TWINT: TWI Interrupt Flag
This bit is set by hardware when the TWI has finished its current job and expects application
software response. If the I-bit in SREG and TWIE in TWCR are set, the MCU will jump to the
TWI Interrupt Vector. While the TWINT Flag is set, the SCL low period is stretched. The TWINT
Flag must be cleared by software by writing a logic one to it. Note that this flag is not
automatically cleared by hardware when executing the interrupt routine. Also note that clearing
this flag starts the operation of the TWI, so all accesses to the TWI Address Register (TWAR),
TWI Status Register (TWSR), and TWI Data Register (TWDR) must be complete before clearing
this flag.
• Bit 6 – TWEA: TWI Enable Acknowledge Bit
The TWEA bit controls the generation of the acknowledge pulse. If the TWEA bit is written to
one, the ACK pulse is generated on the TWI bus if the following conditions are met:
1. The device’s own slave address has been received.
2. A general call has been received, while the TWGCE bit in the TWAR is set.
3. A data byte has been received in Master Receiver or Slave Receiver mode.
By writing the TWEA bit to zero, the device can be virtually disconnected from the 2-wire Serial
Bus temporarily. Address recognition can then be resumed by writing the TWEA bit to one
again.
• Bit 5 – TWSTA: TWI START Condition Bit
The application writes the TWSTA bit to one when it desires to become a Master on the 2-wire
Serial Bus. The TWI hardware checks if the bus is available, and generates a START condition
on the bus if it is free. However, if the bus is not free, the TWI waits until a STOP condition is
detected, and then generates a new START condition to claim the bus Master status. TWSTA
must be cleared by software when the START condition has been transmitted.
• Bit 4 – TWSTO: TWI STOP Condition Bit
Writing the TWSTO bit to one in Master mode will generate a STOP condition on the 2-wire
Serial Bus. When the STOP condition is executed on the bus, the TWSTO bit is cleared
automatically. In Slave mode, setting the TWSTO bit can be used to recover from an error
condition. This will not generate a STOP condition, but the TWI returns to a well-defined
unaddressed Slave mode and releases the SCL and SDA lines to a high impedance state.
• Bit 3 – TWWC: TWI Write Collision Flag
The TWWC bit is set when attempting to write to the TWI Data Register – TWDR when TWINT is
low. This flag is cleared by writing the TWDR Register when TWINT is high.
• Bit 2 – TWEN: TWI Enable Bit
The TWEN bit enables TWI operation and activates the TWI interface. When TWEN is written to
one, the TWI takes control over the I/O pins connected to the SCL and SDA pins, enabling the
slew-rate limiters and spike filters. If this bit is written to zero, the TWI is switched off and all TWI
transmissions are terminated, regardless of any ongoing operation.
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 254
• Bit 1 – Res: Reserved Bit
This bit is a reserved bit and will always read as zero.
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 255
• Bit 0 – TWIE: TWI Interrupt Enable
When this bit is written to one, and the I-bit in SREG is set, the TWI interrupt request will be
activated for as long as the TWINT Flag is high.
22.9.3 TWSR – TWI Status Register
• Bits 7:3 – TWS: TWI Status
These 5 bits reflect the status of the TWI logic and the 2-wire Serial Bus. The different status
codes are described later in this section. Note that the value read from TWSR contains both the
5-bit status value and the 2-bit prescaler value. The application designer should mask the
prescaler bits to zero when checking the Status bits. This makes status checking independent of
prescaler setting. This approach is used in this datasheet, unless otherwise noted.
• Bit 2 – Res: Reserved Bit
This bit is reserved and will always read as zero.
• Bits 1:0 – TWPS: TWI Prescaler Bits
These bits can be read and written, and control the bit rate prescaler.
To calculate bit rates, see “Bit Rate Generator Unit” on page 231. The value of TWPS1:0 is used
in the equation.
22.9.4 TWDR – TWI Data Register
In Transmit mode, TWDR contains the next byte to be transmitted. In Receive mode, the TWDR
contains the last byte received. It is writable while the TWI is not in the process of shifting a byte.
This occurs when the TWI Interrupt Flag (TWINT) is set by hardware. Note that the Data
Register cannot be initialized by the user before the first interrupt occurs. The data in TWDR
remains stable as long as TWINT is set. While data is shifted out, data on the bus is
simultaneously shifted in. TWDR always contains the last byte present on the bus, except after a
wake up from a sleep mode by the TWI interrupt. In this case, the contents of TWDR is
Bit 76543210
(0xB9) TWS7 TWS6 TWS5 TWS4 TWS3 – TWPS1 TWPS0 TWSR
Read/Write RRRRRRR/WR/W
Initial Value 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0
Table 22-7. TWI Bit Rate Prescaler
TWPS1 TWPS0 Prescaler Value
001
014
1016
1164
Bit 76543210
(0xBB) TWD7 TWD6 TWD5 TWD4 TWD3 TWD2 TWD1 TWD0 TWDR
Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 256
undefined. In the case of a lost bus arbitration, no data is lost in the transition from Master to
Slave. Handling of the ACK bit is controlled automatically by the TWI logic, the CPU cannot
access the ACK bit directly.
• Bits 7:0 – TWD: TWI Data Register
These eight bits constitute the next data byte to be transmitted, or the latest data byte received
on the 2-wire Serial Bus.
22.9.5 TWAR – TWI (Slave) Address Register
The TWAR should be loaded with the 7-bit Slave address (in the seven most significant bits of
TWAR) to which the TWI will respond when programmed as a Slave Transmitter or Receiver,
and not needed in the Master modes. In multi master systems, TWAR must be set in masters
which can be addressed as Slaves by other Masters.
The LSB of TWAR is used to enable recognition of the general call address (0x00). There is an
associated address comparator that looks for the slave address (or general call address if
enabled) in the received serial address. If a match is found, an interrupt request is generated.
• Bits 7:1 – TWA: TWI (Slave) Address Register
These seven bits constitute the slave address of the TWI unit.
• Bit 0 – TWGCE: TWI General Call Recognition Enable Bit
If set, this bit enables the recognition of a General Call given over the 2-wire Serial Bus.
22.9.6 TWAMR – TWI (Slave) Address Mask Register
• Bits 7:1 – TWAM: TWI Address Mask
The TWAMR can be loaded with a 7-bit Salve Address mask. Each of the bits in TWAMR can
mask (disable) the corresponding address bits in the TWI Address Register (TWAR). If the mask
bit is set to one then the address match logic ignores the compare between the incoming
address bit and the corresponding bit in TWAR. Figure 22-22 shown the address match logic in
detail.
Bit 76543210
(0xBA) TWA6 TWA5 TWA4 TWA3 TWA2 TWA1 TWA0 TWGCE TWAR
Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0
Bit 76543210
(0xBD) TWAM[6:0] – TWAMR
Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 257
Figure 22-22. TWI Address Match Logic, Block Diagram
• Bit 0 – Res: Reserved Bit
This bit is an unused bit in the ATmega48P/88P/168P, and will always read as zero.
Addre
ss
Match
Address Bit Comparator 0
Address Bit Comparator 6..1
TWAR0
TWAMR0
Address
Bit 0
NND vcc Acn 4» mm \NTERRUW saga ¢ 1 AC‘S‘ AC‘SQ Am: ANALOG comm»: \ 0H mo Am AUG 2. m nu “ma: Am meczwux —>
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 258
23. Analog Comparator
23.1 Overview
The Analog Comparator compares the input values on the positive pin AIN0 and negative pin
AIN1. When the voltage on the positive pin AIN0 is higher than the voltage on the negative pin
AIN1, the Analog Comparator output, ACO, is set. The comparator’s output can be set to trigger
the Timer/Counter1 Input Capture function. In addition, the comparator can trigger a separate
interrupt, exclusive to the Analog Comparator. The user can select Interrupt triggering on
comparator output rise, fall or toggle. A block diagram of the comparator and its surrounding
logic is shown in Figure 23-1.
The Power Reduction ADC bit, PRADC, in “Minimizing Power Consumption” on page 51 must
be disabled by writing a logical zero to be able to use the ADC input MUX.
Figure 23-1. Analog Comparator Block Diagram(1)(2)
Notes: 1. See Table 23-1 on page 259.
2. Refer to Figure 1-1 on page 10 and Table 14-9 on page 98 for Analog Comparator pin
placement.
23.2 Analog Comparator Multiplexed Input
It is possible to select any of the ADC7:0 pins to replace the negative input to the Analog
Comparator. The ADC multiplexer is used to select this input, and consequently, the ADC must
be switched off to utilize this feature. If the Analog Comparator Multiplexer Enable bit (ACME in
ADCSRB) is set and the ADC is switched off (ADEN in ADCSRA is zero), MUX2:0 in ADMUX
select the input pin to replace the negative input to the Analog Comparator, as shown in Table
23-1. If ACME is cleared or ADEN is set, AIN1 is applied to the negative input to the Analog
Comparator
ACBG
BANDGAP
REFERENCE
ADC MULTIPLEXER
OUTPUT
ACME
ADEN
(1)
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 259
.
23.3 Register Description
23.3.1 ADCSRB – ADC Control and Status Register B
• Bit 6 – ACME: Analog Comparator Multiplexer Enable
When this bit is written logic one and the ADC is switched off (ADEN in ADCSRA is zero), the
ADC multiplexer selects the negative input to the Analog Comparator. When this bit is written
logic zero, AIN1 is applied to the negative input of the Analog Comparator. For a detailed
description of this bit, see “Analog Comparator Multiplexed Input” on page 258.
23.3.2 ACSR – Analog Comparator Control and Status Register
• Bit 7 – ACD: Analog Comparator Disable
When this bit is written logic one, the power to the Analog Comparator is switched off. This bit
can be set at any time to turn off the Analog Comparator. This will reduce power consumption in
Active and Idle mode. When changing the ACD bit, the Analog Comparator Interrupt must be
disabled by clearing the ACIE bit in ACSR. Otherwise an interrupt can occur when the bit is
changed.
• Bit 6 – ACBG: Analog Comparator Bandgap Select
When this bit is set, a fixed bandgap reference voltage replaces the positive input to the Analog
Comparator. When this bit is cleared, AIN0 is applied to the positive input of the Analog
Comparator. When the bandgap referance is used as input to the Analog Comparator, it will take
Table 23-1. Analog Comparator Multiplexed Input
ACME ADEN MUX2..0 Analog Comparator Negative Input
0 x xxx AIN1
1 1 xxx AIN1
1 0 000 ADC0
1 0 001 ADC1
1 0 010 ADC2
1 0 011 ADC3
1 0 100 ADC4
1 0 101 ADC5
1 0 110 ADC6
1 0 111 ADC7
Bit 7 6543210
(0x7B) –ACME–––ADTS2 ADTS1 ADTS0 ADCSRB
Read/Write R R/W R R R R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 0000000
Bit 76543210
0x30 (0x50) ACD ACBG ACO ACI ACIE ACIC ACIS1 ACIS0 ACSR
Read/Write R/W R/W R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 0 N/A 0 0 0 0 0
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 260
a certain time for the voltage to stabilize. If not stabilized, the first conversion may give a wrong
value. See “Internal Voltage Reference” on page 58
• Bit 5 – ACO: Analog Comparator Output
The output of the Analog Comparator is synchronized and then directly connected to ACO. The
synchronization introduces a delay of 1 - 2 clock cycles.
• Bit 4 – ACI: Analog Comparator Interrupt Flag
This bit is set by hardware when a comparator output event triggers the interrupt mode defined
by ACIS1 and ACIS0. The Analog Comparator interrupt routine is executed if the ACIE bit is set
and the I-bit in SREG is set. ACI is cleared by hardware when executing the corresponding
interrupt handling vector. Alternatively, ACI is cleared by writing a logic one to the flag.
• Bit 3 – ACIE: Analog Comparator Interrupt Enable
When the ACIE bit is written logic one and the I-bit in the Status Register is set, the Analog
Comparator interrupt is activated. When written logic zero, the interrupt is disabled.
• Bit 2 – ACIC: Analog Comparator Input Capture Enable
When written logic one, this bit enables the input capture function in Timer/Counter1 to be
triggered by the Analog Comparator. The comparator output is in this case directly connected to
the input capture front-end logic, making the comparator utilize the noise canceler and edge
select features of the Timer/Counter1 Input Capture interrupt. When written logic zero, no
connection between the Analog Comparator and the input capture function exists. To make the
comparator trigger the Timer/Counter1 Input Capture interrupt, the ICIE1 bit in the Timer
Interrupt Mask Register (TIMSK1) must be set.
• Bits 1, 0 – ACIS1, ACIS0: Analog Comparator Interrupt Mode Select
These bits determine which comparator events that trigger the Analog Comparator interrupt. The
different settings are shown in Table 23-2.
When changing the ACIS1/ACIS0 bits, the Analog Comparator Interrupt must be disabled by
clearing its Interrupt Enable bit in the ACSR Register. Otherwise an interrupt can occur when the
bits are changed.
Table 23-2. ACIS1/ACIS0 Settings
ACIS1 ACIS0 Interrupt Mode
0 0 Comparator Interrupt on Output Toggle.
01Reserved
1 0 Comparator Interrupt on Falling Output Edge.
1 1 Comparator Interrupt on Rising Output Edge.
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 261
23.3.3 DIDR1 – Digital Input Disable Register 1
• Bit 7:2 – Reserved
These bits are unused bits in the ATmega48P/88P/168P, and will always read as zero.
• Bit 1, 0 – AIN1D, AIN0D: AIN1, AIN0 Digital Input Disable
When this bit is written logic one, the digital input buffer on the AIN1/0 pin is disabled. The
corresponding PIN Register bit will always read as zero when this bit is set. When an analog
signal is applied to the AIN1/0 pin and the digital input from this pin is not needed, this bit should
be written logic one to reduce power consumption in the digital input buffer.
Bit 76543210
(0x7F) ––––––AIN1DAIN0DDIDR1
Read/Write RRRRRRR/WR/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 262
24. Analog-to-Digital Converter
24.1 Features
•10-bit Resolution
•0.5 LSB Integral Non-linearity
•± 2 LSB Absolute Accuracy
•13 - 260 µs Conversion Time
•Up to 76.9 kSPS (Up to 15 kSPS at Maximum Resolution)
•6 Multiplexed Single Ended Input Channels
•2 Additional Multiplexed Single Ended Input Channels (TQFP and QFN/MLF Package only)
•Temperature Sensor Input Channel
•Optional Left Adjustment for ADC Result Readout
•0 - VCC ADC Input Voltage Range
•Selectable 1.1V ADC Reference Voltage
•Free Running or Single Conversion Mode
•Interrupt on ADC Conversion Complete
•Sleep Mode Noise Canceler
24.2 Overview
The ATmega48P/88P/168P features a 10-bit successive approximation ADC. The ADC is
connected to an 8-channel Analog Multiplexer which allows eight single-ended voltage inputs
constructed from the pins of Port A. The single-ended voltage inputs refer to 0V (GND).
The ADC contains a Sample and Hold circuit which ensures that the input voltage to the ADC is
held at a constant level during conversion. A block diagram of the ADC is shown in Figure 24-1
on page 263.
The ADC has a separate analog supply voltage pin, AVCC. AVCC must not differ more than ±
0.3V from VCC. See the paragraph “ADC Noise Canceler” on page 268 on how to connect this
pin.
Internal reference voltages of nominally 1.1V or AVCC are provided On-chip. The voltage
reference may be externally decoupled at the AREF pin by a capacitor for better noise
performance.
The Power Reduction ADC bit, PRADC, in “Minimizing Power Consumption” on page 51 must
be disabled by writing a logical zero to enable the ADC.
The ADC converts an analog input voltage to a 10-bit digital value through successive
approximation. The minimum value represents GND and the maximum value represents the
voltage on the AREF pin minus 1 LSB. Optionally, AVCC or an internal 1.1V reference voltage
may be connected to the AREF pin by writing to the REFSn bits in the ADMUX Register. The
internal voltage reference may thus be decoupled by an external capacitor at the AREF pin to
improve noise immunity.
¢H A L41
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 263
Figure 24-1. Analog to Digital Converter Block Schematic Operation,
The analog input channel is selected by writing to the MUX bits in ADMUX. Any of the ADC input
pins, as well as GND and a fixed bandgap voltage reference, can be selected as single ended
inputs to the ADC. The ADC is enabled by setting the ADC Enable bit, ADEN in ADCSRA.
Voltage reference and input channel selections will not go into effect until ADEN is set. The ADC
does not consume power when ADEN is cleared, so it is recommended to switch off the ADC
before entering power saving sleep modes.
The ADC generates a 10-bit result which is presented in the ADC Data Registers, ADCH and
ADCL. By default, the result is presented right adjusted, but can optionally be presented left
adjusted by setting the ADLAR bit in ADMUX.
If the result is left adjusted and no more than 8-bit precision is required, it is sufficient to read
ADCH. Otherwise, ADCL must be read first, then ADCH, to ensure that the content of the Data
Registers belongs to the same conversion. Once ADCL is read, ADC access to Data Registers
is blocked. This means that if ADCL has been read, and a conversion completes before ADCH is
ADC CONVERSION
COMPLETE IRQ
8-BIT DATA BUS
15 0
ADC MULTIPLEXER
SELECT (ADMUX) ADC CTRL. & STATUS
REGISTER (ADCSRA) ADC DATA REGISTER
(ADCH/ADCL)
MUX2
ADIE
ADFR
ADSC
ADEN
ADIF ADIF
MUX1
MUX0
ADPS0
ADPS1
ADPS2
MUX3
CONVERSION LOGIC
10-BIT DAC
+
-
SAMPLE & HOLD
COMPARATOR
INTERNAL 1.1V
REFERENCE
MUX DECODER
AVCC
ADC7
ADC6
ADC5
ADC4
ADC3
ADC2
ADC1
ADC0
REFS0
REFS1
ADLAR
CHANNEL SELECTION
ADC[9:0]
ADC MULTIPLEXER
OUTPUT
AREF
BANDGAP
REFERENCE
PRESCALER
GND
INPUT
MUX
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 264
read, neither register is updated and the result from the conversion is lost. When ADCH is read,
ADC access to the ADCH and ADCL Registers is re-enabled.
The ADC has its own interrupt which can be triggered when a conversion completes. When ADC
access to the Data Registers is prohibited between reading of ADCH and ADCL, the interrupt
will trigger even if the result is lost.
24.3 Starting a Conversion
A single conversion is started by disabling the Power Reduction ADC bit, PRADC, in “Minimizing
Power Consumption” on page 51 by writing a logical zero to it and writing a logical one to the
ADC Start Conversion bit, ADSC. This bit stays high as long as the conversion is in progress
and will be cleared by hardware when the conversion is completed. If a different data channel is
selected while a conversion is in progress, the ADC will finish the current conversion before
performing the channel change.
Alternatively, a conversion can be triggered automatically by various sources. Auto Triggering is
enabled by setting the ADC Auto Trigger Enable bit, ADATE in ADCSRA. The trigger source is
selected by setting the ADC Trigger Select bits, ADTS in ADCSRB (See description of the ADTS
bits for a list of the trigger sources). When a positive edge occurs on the selected trigger signal,
the ADC prescaler is reset and a conversion is started. This provides a method of starting
conversions at fixed intervals. If the trigger signal still is set when the conversion completes, a
new conversion will not be started. If another positive edge occurs on the trigger signal during
conversion, the edge will be ignored. Note that an Interrupt Flag will be set even if the specific
interrupt is disabled or the Global Interrupt Enable bit in SREG is cleared. A conversion can thus
be triggered without causing an interrupt. However, the Interrupt Flag must be cleared in order to
trigger a new conversion at the next interrupt event.
Figure 24-2. ADC Auto Trigger Logic
Using the ADC Interrupt Flag as a trigger source makes the ADC start a new conversion as soon
as the ongoing conversion has finished. The ADC then operates in Free Running mode,
constantly sampling and updating the ADC Data Register. The first conversion must be started
by writing a logical one to the ADSC bit in ADCSRA. In this mode the ADC will perform
successive conversions independently of whether the ADC Interrupt Flag, ADIF is cleared or
not.
ADSC
ADIF
SOURCE 1
SOURCE n
ADTS[2:0]
CONVERSION
LOGIC
PRESCALER
START CLKADC
.
.
.
.EDGE
DETECTOR
ADATE
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 265
If Auto Triggering is enabled, single conversions can be started by writing ADSC in ADCSRA to
one. ADSC can also be used to determine if a conversion is in progress. The ADSC bit will be
read as one during a conversion, independently of how the conversion was started.
24.4 Prescaling and Conversion Timing
Figure 24-3. ADC Prescaler
By default, the successive approximation circuitry requires an input clock frequency between 50
kHz and 200 kHz to get maximum resolution. If a lower resolution than 10 bits is needed, the
input clock frequency to the ADC can be higher than 200 kHz to get a higher sample rate.
The ADC module contains a prescaler, which generates an acceptable ADC clock frequency
from any CPU frequency above 100 kHz. The prescaling is set by the ADPS bits in ADCSRA.
The prescaler starts counting from the moment the ADC is switched on by setting the ADEN bit
in ADCSRA. The prescaler keeps running for as long as the ADEN bit is set, and is continuously
reset when ADEN is low.
When initiating a single ended conversion by setting the ADSC bit in ADCSRA, the conversion
starts at the following rising edge of the ADC clock cycle.
A normal conversion takes 13 ADC clock cycles. The first conversion after the ADC is switched
on (ADEN in ADCSRA is set) takes 25 ADC clock cycles in order to initialize the analog circuitry.
When the bandgap reference voltage is used as input to the ADC, it will take a certain time for
the voltage to stabilize. If not stabilized, the first value read after the first conversion may be
wrong.
The actual sample-and-hold takes place 1.5 ADC clock cycles after the start of a normal
conversion and 13.5 ADC clock cycles after the start of an first conversion. When a conversion
is complete, the result is written to the ADC Data Registers, and ADIF is set. In Single
Conversion mode, ADSC is cleared simultaneously. The software may then set ADSC again,
and a new conversion will be initiated on the first rising ADC clock edge.
When Auto Triggering is used, the prescaler is reset when the trigger event occurs. This assures
a fixed delay from the trigger event to the start of conversion. In this mode, the sample-and-hold
takes place two ADC clock cycles after the rising edge on the trigger source signal. Three
additional CPU clock cycles are used for synchronization logic.
7-BIT ADC PRESCALER
ADC CLOCK SOURCE
CK
ADPS0
ADPS1
ADPS2
CK/128
CK/2
CK/4
CK/8
CK/16
CK/32
CK/64
Reset
ADEN
START
9 «\‘+\ //
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 266
In Free Running mode, a new conversion will be started immediately after the conversion
completes, while ADSC remains high. For a summary of conversion times, see Table 24-1 on
page 267.
Figure 24-4. ADC Timing Diagram, First Conversion (Single Conversion Mode)
Figure 24-5. ADC Timing Diagram, Single Conversion
Figure 24-6. ADC Timing Diagram, Auto Triggered Conversion
Sign and MSB of Result
LSB of Result
ADC Clock
ADSC
Sample & Hold
ADIF
ADCH
ADCL
Cycle Number
ADEN
1212
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 1 2
First Conversion Next
Conversion
3
MUX and REFS
Update
MUX and REFS
Update
Conversion
Complete
123456789 10 11 12 13
Sign and MSB of Result
LSB of Result
ADC Clock
ADSC
ADIF
ADCH
ADCL
Cycle Number 12
One Conversion Next Conversion
3
Sample & Hold
MUX and REFS
Update
Conversion
Complete MUX and REFS
Update
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910 11 12 13
Sign and MSB of Result
LSB of Result
ADC Clock
Trigger
Source
ADIF
ADCH
ADCL
Cycle Number 12
One Conversion Next Conversion
Conversion
Complete
Prescaler
Reset
ADATE
Prescaler
Reset
Sample &
Hold
MUX and REFS
Update
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 267
Figure 24-7. ADC Timing Diagram, Free Running Conversion
24.5 Changing Channel or Reference Selection
The MUXn and REFS1:0 bits in the ADMUX Register are single buffered through a temporary
register to which the CPU has random access. This ensures that the channels and reference
selection only takes place at a safe point during the conversion. The channel and reference
selection is continuously updated until a conversion is started. Once the conversion starts, the
channel and reference selection is locked to ensure a sufficient sampling time for the ADC.
Continuous updating resumes in the last ADC clock cycle before the conversion completes
(ADIF in ADCSRA is set). Note that the conversion starts on the following rising ADC clock edge
after ADSC is written. The user is thus advised not to write new channel or reference selection
values to ADMUX until one ADC clock cycle after ADSC is written.
If Auto Triggering is used, the exact time of the triggering event can be indeterministic. Special
care must be taken when updating the ADMUX Register, in order to control which conversion
will be affected by the new settings.
If both ADATE and ADEN is written to one, an interrupt event can occur at any time. If the
ADMUX Register is changed in this period, the user cannot tell if the next conversion is based
on the old or the new settings. ADMUX can be safely updated in the following ways:
1. When ADATE or ADEN is cleared.
2. During conversion, minimum one ADC clock cycle after the trigger event.
3. After a conversion, before the Interrupt Flag used as trigger source is cleared.
When updating ADMUX in one of these conditions, the new settings will affect the next ADC
conversion.
Table 24-1. ADC Conversion Time
Condition
Sample & Hold
(Cycles from Start of Conversion)
Conversion Time
(Cycles)
First conversion 13.5 25
Normal conversions, single ended 1.5 13
Auto Triggered conversions 2 13.5
11 12 13
Sign and MSB of Result
LSB of Result
ADC Clock
ADSC
ADIF
ADCH
ADCL
Cycle Number 12
One Conversion Next Conversion
34
Conversion
Complete
Sample & Hold
MUX and REFS
Update
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 268
24.5.1 ADC Input Channels
When changing channel selections, the user should observe the following guidelines to ensure
that the correct channel is selected:
In Single Conversion mode, always select the channel before starting the conversion. The
channel selection may be changed one ADC clock cycle after writing one to ADSC. However,
the simplest method is to wait for the conversion to complete before changing the channel
selection.
In Free Running mode, always select the channel before starting the first conversion. The
channel selection may be changed one ADC clock cycle after writing one to ADSC. However,
the simplest method is to wait for the first conversion to complete, and then change the channel
selection. Since the next conversion has already started automatically, the next result will reflect
the previous channel selection. Subsequent conversions will reflect the new channel selection.
24.5.2 ADC Voltage Reference
The reference voltage for the ADC (VREF) indicates the conversion range for the ADC. Single
ended channels that exceed VREF will result in codes close to 0x3FF. VREF can be selected as
either AVCC, internal 1.1V reference, or external AREF pin.
AVCC is connected to the ADC through a passive switch. The internal 1.1V reference is
generated from the internal bandgap reference (VBG) through an internal amplifier. In either
case, the external AREF pin is directly connected to the ADC, and the reference voltage can be
made more immune to noise by connecting a capacitor between the AREF pin and ground. VREF
can also be measured at the AREF pin with a high impedance voltmeter. Note that VREF is a high
impedance source, and only a capacitive load should be connected in a system.
If the user has a fixed voltage source connected to the AREF pin, the user may not use the other
reference voltage options in the application, as they will be shorted to the external voltage. If no
external voltage is applied to the AREF pin, the user may switch between AVCC and 1.1V as
reference selection. The first ADC conversion result after switching reference voltage source
may be inaccurate, and the user is advised to discard this result.
24.6 ADC Noise Canceler
The ADC features a noise canceler that enables conversion during sleep mode to reduce noise
induced from the CPU core and other I/O peripherals. The noise canceler can be used with ADC
Noise Reduction and Idle mode. To make use of this feature, the following procedure should be
used:
a. Make sure that the ADC is enabled and is not busy converting. Single Conversion
mode must be selected and the ADC conversion complete interrupt must be
enabled.
1. Enter ADC Noise Reduction mode (or Idle mode). The ADC will start a conversion
once the CPU has been halted.
2. If no other interrupts occur before the ADC conversion completes, the ADC interrupt
will wake up the CPU and execute the ADC Conversion Complete interrupt routine.
If another interrupt wakes up the CPU before the ADC conversion is complete, that
interrupt will be executed, and an ADC Conversion Complete interrupt request will
be generated when the ADC conversion completes. The CPU will remain in active
mode until a new sleep command is executed.
°—H—
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 269
Note that the ADC will not be automatically turned off when entering other sleep modes than Idle
mode and ADC Noise Reduction mode. The user is advised to write zero to ADEN before
entering such sleep modes to avoid excessive power consumption.
24.6.1 Analog Input Circuitry
The analog input circuitry for single ended channels is illustrated in Figure 24-8. An analog
source applied to ADCn is subjected to the pin capacitance and input leakage of that pin,
regardless of whether that channel is selected as input for the ADC. When the channel is
selected, the source must drive the S/H capacitor through the series resistance (combined
resistance in the input path).
The ADC is optimized for analog signals with an output impedance of approximately 10 k or
less. If such a source is used, the sampling time will be negligible. If a source with higher
impedance is used, the sampling time will depend on how long time the source needs to charge
the S/H capacitor, with can vary widely. The user is recommended to only use low impedance
sources with slowly varying signals, since this minimizes the required charge transfer to the S/H
capacitor.
Signal components higher than the Nyquist frequency (fADC/2) should not be present for either
kind of channels, to avoid distortion from unpredictable signal convolution. The user is advised
to remove high frequency components with a low-pass filter before applying the signals as
inputs to the ADC.
Figure 24-8. Analog Input Circuitry
24.6.2 Analog Noise Canceling Techniques
Digital circuitry inside and outside the device generates EMI which might affect the accuracy of
analog measurements. If conversion accuracy is critical, the noise level can be reduced by
applying the following techniques:
a. Keep analog signal paths as short as possible. Make sure analog tracks run over the
analog ground plane, and keep them well away from high-speed switching digital
tracks.
1. The AVCC pin on the device should be connected to the digital VCC supply voltage
via an LC network as shown in Figure 24-9.
2. Use the ADC noise canceler function to reduce induced noise from the CPU.
3. If any ADC [3:0] port pins are used as digital outputs, it is essential that these do not
switch while a conversion is in progress. However, using the 2-wire Interface (ADC4
ADCn
IIH
1..100 kΩ
CS/H= 14 pF
VCC/2
IIL
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 270
and ADC5) will only affect the conversion on ADC4 and ADC5 and not the other
ADC channels.
Figure 24-9. ADC Power Connections
24.6.3 ADC Accuracy Definitions
An n-bit single-ended ADC converts a voltage linearly between GND and VREF in 2n steps
(LSBs). The lowest code is read as 0, and the highest code is read as 2n-1.
Several parameters describe the deviation from the ideal behavior:
• Offset: The deviation of the first transition (0x000 to 0x001) compared to the ideal
transition (at 0.5 LSB). Ideal value: 0 LSB.
GND
VCC
PC5 (ADC5/SCL)
PC4 (ADC4/SDA)
PC3 (ADC3)
PC2 (ADC2)
PC1 (ADC1)
PC0 (ADC0)
ADC7
GND
AREF
AVCC
ADC6
PB5
10µH
100nF Analog Ground Plane
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 271
Figure 24-10. Offset Error
• Gain error: After adjusting for offset, the gain error is found as the deviation of the last
transition (0x3FE to 0x3FF) compared to the ideal transition (at 1.5 LSB below maximum).
Ideal value: 0 LSB
Figure 24-11. Gain Error
• Integral Non-linearity (INL): After adjusting for offset and gain error, the INL is the
maximum deviation of an actual transition compared to an ideal transition for any code.
Ideal value: 0 LSB.
Output Code
V
REF
Input Voltage
Ideal ADC
Actual ADC
Offset
Error
Output Code
V
REF
Input Voltage
Ideal ADC
Actual ADC
Gain
Error
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 272
Figure 24-12. Integral Non-linearity (INL)
• Differential Non-linearity (DNL): The maximum deviation of the actual code width (the
interval between two adjacent transitions) from the ideal code width (1 LSB). Ideal value: 0
LSB.
Figure 24-13. Differential Non-linearity (DNL)
• Quantization Error: Due to the quantization of the input voltage into a finite number of
codes, a range of input voltages (1 LSB wide) will code to the same value. Always ±0.5
LSB.
• Absolute accuracy: The maximum deviation of an actual (unadjusted) transition compared
to an ideal transition for any code. This is the compound effect of offset, gain error,
differential error, non-linearity, and quantization error. Ideal value: ±0.5 LSB.
Output Code
V
REF
Input Voltage
Ideal ADC
Actual ADC
INL
Output Code
0x3FF
0x000
0VREF Input Voltage
DNL
1 LSB
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 273
24.7 ADC Conversion Result
After the conversion is complete (ADIF is high), the conversion result can be found in the ADC
Result Registers (ADCL, ADCH).
For single ended conversion, the result is
where VIN is the voltage on the selected input pin and VREF the selected voltage reference (see
Table 24-3 on page 274 and Table 24-4 on page 275). 0x000 represents analog ground, and
0x3FF represents the selected reference voltage minus one LSB.
24.8 Temperature Measurement
The temperature measurement is based on an on-chip temperature sensor that is coupled to a
single ended ADC8 channel. Selecting the ADC8 channel by writing the MUX3:0 bits in ADMUX
register to "1000" enables the temperature sensor. The internal 1.1V voltage reference must
also be selected for the ADC voltage reference source in the temperature sensor measurement.
When the temperature sensor is enabled, the ADC converter can be used in single conversion
mode to measure the voltage over the temperature sensor.
The measured voltage has a linear relationship to the temperature as described in Table 24-2.
The voltage sensitivity is approximately 1 mV/°C and the accuracy of the temperature
measurement is +/- 10°C.
The values described in Table 24-2 are typical values. However, due to the process variation the
temperature sensor output voltage varies from one chip to another. To be capable of achieving
more accurate results the temperature measurement can be calibrated in the application
software. The software calibration requires that a calibration value is measured and stored in a
register or EEPROM for each chip, as a part of the production test. The software calibration can
be done utilizing the formula:
T = { [(ADCH << 8) | ADCL] - TOS} / k
where ADCn are the ADC data registers, k is a fixed coefficient and TOS is the temperature
sensor offset value determined and stored into EEPROM as a part of the production test.
ADC VIN 1024
VREF
--------------------------=
Table 24-2. Temperature vs. Sensor Output Voltage (Typical Case)
Temperature / C-45C+25C+85C
Voltage / mV 242 mV 314 mV 380 mV
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 274
24.9 Register Description
24.9.1 ADMUX – ADC Multiplexer Selection Register
• Bit 7:6 – REFS1:0: Reference Selection Bits
These bits select the voltage reference for the ADC, as shown in Table 24-3. If these bits are
changed during a conversion, the change will not go in effect until this conversion is complete
(ADIF in ADCSRA is set). The internal voltage reference options may not be used if an external
reference voltage is being applied to the AREF pin.
• Bit 5 – ADLAR: ADC Left Adjust Result
The ADLAR bit affects the presentation of the ADC conversion result in the ADC Data Register.
Write one to ADLAR to left adjust the result. Otherwise, the result is right adjusted. Changing the
ADLAR bit will affect the ADC Data Register immediately, regardless of any ongoing
conversions. For a complete description of this bit, see “ADCL and ADCH – The ADC Data
Register” on page 277.
• Bit 4 – Res: Reserved Bit
This bit is an unused bit in the ATmega48P/88P/168P, and will always read as zero.
• Bits 3:0 – MUX3:0: Analog Channel Selection Bits
The value of these bits selects which analog inputs are connected to the ADC. See Table 24-4
for details. If these bits are changed during a conversion, the change will not go in effect until this
conversion is complete (ADIF in ADCSRA is set).
Bit 76543210
(0x7C) REFS1 REFS0 ADLAR – MUX3 MUX2 MUX1 MUX0 ADMUX
Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value00000000
Table 24-3. Voltage Reference Selections for ADC
REFS1 REFS0 Voltage Reference Selection
0 0 AREF, Internal Vref turned off
01
AVCC with external capacitor at AREF pin
10Reserved
1 1 Internal 1.1V Voltage Reference with external capacitor at AREF pin
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 275
Note: 1. For Temperature Sensor.
24.9.2 ADCSRA – ADC Control and Status Register A
• Bit 7 – ADEN: ADC Enable
Writing this bit to one enables the ADC. By writing it to zero, the ADC is turned off. Turning the
ADC off while a conversion is in progress, will terminate this conversion.
• Bit 6 – ADSC: ADC Start Conversion
In Single Conversion mode, write this bit to one to start each conversion. In Free Running mode,
write this bit to one to start the first conversion. The first conversion after ADSC has been written
after the ADC has been enabled, or if ADSC is written at the same time as the ADC is enabled,
will take 25 ADC clock cycles instead of the normal 13. This first conversion performs
initialization of the ADC.
ADSC will read as one as long as a conversion is in progress. When the conversion is complete,
it returns to zero. Writing zero to this bit has no effect.
Table 24-4. Input Channel Selections
MUX[3:0] Single Ended Input
0000 ADC0
0001 ADC1
0010 ADC2
0011 ADC3
0100 ADC4
0101 ADC5
0110 ADC6
0111 ADC7
1000 ADC8(1)
1001 (reserved)
1010 (reserved)
1011 (reserved)
1100 (reserved)
1101 (reserved)
1110 1.1V (VBG)
1111 0V (GND)
Bit 76543210
(0x7A) ADEN ADSC ADATE ADIF ADIE ADPS2 ADPS1 ADPS0 ADCSRA
Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 276
• Bit 5 – ADATE: ADC Auto Trigger Enable
When this bit is written to one, Auto Triggering of the ADC is enabled. The ADC will start a
conversion on a positive edge of the selected trigger signal. The trigger source is selected by
setting the ADC Trigger Select bits, ADTS in ADCSRB.
• Bit 4 – ADIF: ADC Interrupt Flag
This bit is set when an ADC conversion completes and the Data Registers are updated. The
ADC Conversion Complete Interrupt is executed if the ADIE bit and the I-bit in SREG are set.
ADIF is cleared by hardware when executing the corresponding interrupt handling vector.
Alternatively, ADIF is cleared by writing a logical one to the flag. Beware that if doing a Read-
Modify-Write on ADCSRA, a pending interrupt can be disabled. This also applies if the SBI and
CBI instructions are used.
• Bit 3 – ADIE: ADC Interrupt Enable
When this bit is written to one and the I-bit in SREG is set, the ADC Conversion Complete
Interrupt is activated.
• Bits 2:0 – ADPS2:0: ADC Prescaler Select Bits
These bits determine the division factor between the system clock frequency and the input clock
to the ADC.
Table 24-5. ADC Prescaler Selections
ADPS2 ADPS1 ADPS0 Division Factor
000 2
001 2
010 4
011 8
100 16
101 32
110 64
111 128
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 277
24.9.3 ADCL and ADCH – The ADC Data Register
24.9.3.1 ADLAR = 0
24.9.3.2 ADLAR = 1
When an ADC conversion is complete, the result is found in these two registers.
When ADCL is read, the ADC Data Register is not updated until ADCH is read. Consequently, if
the result is left adjusted and no more than 8-bit precision is required, it is sufficient to read
ADCH. Otherwise, ADCL must be read first, then ADCH.
The ADLAR bit in ADMUX, and the MUXn bits in ADMUX affect the way the result is read from
the registers. If ADLAR is set, the result is left adjusted. If ADLAR is cleared (default), the result
is right adjusted.
• ADC9:0: ADC Conversion Result
These bits represent the result from the conversion, as detailed in “ADC Conversion Result” on
page 273.
24.9.4 ADCSRB – ADC Control and Status Register B
• Bit 7, 5:3 – Reserved
These bits are reserved for future use. To ensure compatibility with future devices, these bist
must be written to zero when ADCSRB is written.
• Bit 2:0 – ADTS2:0: ADC Auto Trigger Source
If ADATE in ADCSRA is written to one, the value of these bits selects which source will trigger
an ADC conversion. If ADATE is cleared, the ADTS2:0 settings will have no effect. A conversion
will be triggered by the rising edge of the selected Interrupt Flag. Note that switching from a
trigger source that is cleared to a trigger source that is set, will generate a positive edge on the
Bit 151413121110 9 8
(0x79) – – – – – – ADC9 ADC8 ADCH
(0x78) ADC7 ADC6 ADC5 ADC4 ADC3 ADC2 ADC1 ADC0 ADCL
76543210
Read/Write RRRRRRRR
RRRRRRRR
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
00000000
Bit 151413121110 9 8
(0x79) ADC9 ADC8 ADC7 ADC6 ADC5 ADC4 ADC3 ADC2 ADCH
(0x78) ADC1 ADC0 – – – – – – ADCL
76543210
Read/Write RRRRRRRR
RRRRRRRR
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
00000000
Bit 7 6543210
(0x7B) – ACME – – – ADTS2 ADTS1 ADTS0 ADCSRB
Read/Write R R/W R R R R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 0000000
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 278
trigger signal. If ADEN in ADCSRA is set, this will start a conversion. Switching to Free Running
mode (ADTS[2:0]=0) will not cause a trigger event, even if the ADC Interrupt Flag is set.
24.9.5 DIDR0 – Digital Input Disable Register 0
• Bits 7:6 – Reserved
These bits are reserved for future use. To ensure compatibility with future devices, these bits
must be written to zero when DIDR0 is written.
• Bit 5:0 – ADC5D:ADC0D: ADC5:0 Digital Input Disable
When this bit is written logic one, the digital input buffer on the corresponding ADC pin is
disabled. The corresponding PIN Register bit will always read as zero when this bit is set. When
an analog signal is applied to the ADC5:0 pin and the digital input from this pin is not needed,
this bit should be written logic one to reduce power consumption in the digital input buffer.
Note that ADC pins ADC7 and ADC6 do not have digital input buffers, and therefore do not
require Digital Input Disable bits.
Table 24-6. ADC Auto Trigger Source Selections
ADTS2 ADTS1 ADTS0 Trigger Source
0 0 0 Free Running mode
0 0 1 Analog Comparator
0 1 0 External Interrupt Request 0
0 1 1 Timer/Counter0 Compare Match A
1 0 0 Timer/Counter0 Overflow
1 0 1 Timer/Counter1 Compare Match B
1 1 0 Timer/Counter1 Overflow
1 1 1 Timer/Counter1 Capture Event
Bit 76543210
(0x7E) – – ADC5D ADC4D ADC3D ADC2D ADC1D ADC0D DIDR0
Read/Write R R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 279
25. debugWIRE On-chip Debug System
25.1 Features
•Complete Program Flow Control
•Emulates All On-chip Functions, Both Digital and Analog, except RESET Pin
•Real-time Operation
•Symbolic Debugging Support (Both at C and Assembler Source Level, or for Other HLLs)
•Unlimited Number of Program Break Points (Using Software Break Points)
•Non-intrusive Operation
•Electrical Characteristics Identical to Real Device
•Automatic Configuration System
•High-Speed Operation
•Programming of Non-volatile Memories
25.2 Overview
The debugWIRE On-chip debug system uses a One-wire, bi-directional interface to control the
program flow, execute AVR instructions in the CPU and to program the different non-volatile
memories.
25.3 Physical Interface
When the debugWIRE Enable (DWEN) Fuse is programmed and Lock bits are unprogrammed,
the debugWIRE system within the target device is activated. The RESET port pin is configured
as a wire-AND (open-drain) bi-directional I/O pin with pull-up enabled and becomes the
communication gateway between target and emulator.
Figure 25-1. The debugWIRE Setup
Figure 25-1 shows the schematic of a target MCU, with debugWIRE enabled, and the emulator
connector. The system clock is not affected by debugWIRE and will always be the clock source
selected by the CKSEL Fuses.
dW
GND
dW(RESET)
VCC
1.8 - 5.5V
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 280
When designing a system where debugWIRE will be used, the following observations must be
made for correct operation:
• Pull-up resistors on the dW/(RESET) line must not be smaller than 10k. The pull-up
resistor is not required for debugWIRE functionality.
• Connecting the RESET pin directly to VCC will not work.
• Capacitors connected to the RESET pin must be disconnected when using debugWire.
• All external reset sources must be disconnected.
25.4 Software Break Points
debugWIRE supports Program memory Break Points by the AVR Break instruction. Setting a
Break Point in Atmel Studio will insert a BREAK instruction in the Program memory. The
instruction replaced by the BREAK instruction will be stored. When program execution is
continued, the stored instruction will be executed before continuing from the Program memory.
A break can be inserted manually by putting the BREAK instruction in the program.
The Flash must be re-programmed each time a Break Point is changed. This is automatically
handled by Atmel Studio through the debugWIRE interface. The use of Break Points will
therefore reduce the Flash Data retention. Devices used for debugging purposes should not be
shipped to end customers.
25.5 Limitations of debugWIRE
The debugWIRE communication pin (dW) is physically located on the same pin as External
Reset (RESET). An External Reset source is therefore not supported when the debugWIRE is
enabled.
A programmed DWEN Fuse enables some parts of the clock system to be running in all sleep
modes. This will increase the power consumption while in sleep. Thus, the DWEN Fuse should
be disabled when debugWire is not used.
25.6 Register Description
The following section describes the registers used with the debugWire.
25.6.1 DWDR – debugWire Data Register
The DWDR Register provides a communication channel from the running program in the MCU
to the debugger. This register is only accessible by the debugWIRE and can therefore not be
used as a general purpose register in the normal operations.
Bit 76543210
DWDR[7:0] DWDR
Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 281
26. Self-Programming the Flash, ATmega48P
26.1 Overview
In ATmega48P, there is no Read-While-Write support, and no separate Boot Loader Section.
The SPM instruction can be executed from the entire Flash.
The device provides a Self-Programming mechanism for downloading and uploading program
code by the MCU itself. The Self-Programming can use any available data interface and
associated protocol to read code and write (program) that code into the Program memory.
The Program memory is updated in a page by page fashion. Before programming a page with
the data stored in the temporary page buffer, the page must be erased. The temporary page
buffer is filled one word at a time using SPM and the buffer can be filled either before the Page
Erase command or between a Page Erase and a Page Write operation:
Alternative 1, fill the buffer before a Page Erase
• Fill temporary page buffer
• Perform a Page Erase
• Perform a Page Write
Alternative 2, fill the buffer after Page Erase
• Perform a Page Erase
• Fill temporary page buffer
• Perform a Page Write
If only a part of the page needs to be changed, the rest of the page must be stored (for example
in the temporary page buffer) before the erase, and then be re-written. When using alternative 1,
the Boot Loader provides an effective Read-Modify-Write feature which allows the user software
to first read the page, do the necessary changes, and then write back the modified data. If
alternative 2 is used, it is not possible to read the old data while loading since the page is
already erased. The temporary page buffer can be accessed in a random sequence. It is
essential that the page address used in both the Page Erase and Page Write operation is
addressing the same page.
26.1.1 Performing Page Erase by SPM
To execute Page Erase, set up the address in the Z-pointer, write “00000011” to SPMCSR and
execute SPM within four clock cycles after writing SPMCSR. The data in R1 and R0 is ignored.
The page address must be written to PCPAGE in the Z-register. Other bits in the Z-pointer will
be ignored during this operation.
• The CPU is halted during the Page Erase operation.
26.1.2 Filling the Temporary Buffer (Page Loading)
To write an instruction word, set up the address in the Z-pointer and data in R1:R0, write
“00000001” to SPMCSR and execute SPM within four clock cycles after writing SPMCSR. The
content of PCWORD in the Z-register is used to address the data in the temporary buffer. The
temporary buffer will auto-erase after a Page Write operation or by writing the RWWSRE bit in
SPMCSR. It is also erased after a system reset. Note that it is not possible to write more than
one time to each address without erasing the temporary buffer.
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 282
If the EEPROM is written in the middle of an SPM Page Load operation, all data loaded will be
lost.
26.1.3 Performing a Page Write
To execute Page Write, set up the address in the Z-pointer, write “00000101” to SPMCSR and
execute SPM within four clock cycles after writing SPMCSR. The data in R1 and R0 is ignored.
The page address must be written to PCPAGE. Other bits in the Z-pointer must be written to
zero during this operation.
• The CPU is halted during the Page Write operation.
26.2 Addressing the Flash During Self-Programming
The Z-pointer is used to address the SPM commands.
Since the Flash is organized in pages (see Table 28-9 on page 310), the Program Counter can
be treated as having two different sections. One section, consisting of the least significant bits, is
addressing the words within a page, while the most significant bits are addressing the pages.
This is shown in Figure 27-3 on page 295. Note that the Page Erase and Page Write operations
are addressed independently. Therefore it is of major importance that the software addresses
the same page in both the Page Erase and Page Write operation.
The LPM instruction uses the Z-pointer to store the address. Since this instruction addresses the
Flash byte-by-byte, also the LSB (bit Z0) of the Z-pointer is used.
Figure 26-1. Addressing the Flash During SPM(1)
Note: 1. The different variables used in Figure 27-3 are listed in Table 28-9 on page 310.
Bit 151413121110 9 8
ZH (R31) Z15 Z14 Z13 Z12 Z11 Z10 Z9 Z8
ZL (R30) Z7 Z6 Z5 Z4 Z3 Z2 Z1 Z0
76543210
PROGRAM MEMORY
0115
Z - REGISTER
BIT
0
ZPAGEMSB
WORD ADDRESS
WITHIN A PAGE
PAGE ADDRESS
WITHIN THE FLASH
ZPCMSB
INSTRUCTION WORD
PAGE PCWORD[PAGEMSB:0]:
00
01
02
PAGEEND
PAGE
PCWORDPCPAGE
PCMSB PAGEMSB
PROGRAM
COUNTER
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 283
26.2.1 EEPROM Write Prevents Writing to SPMCSR
Note that an EEPROM write operation will block all software programming to Flash. Reading the
Fuses and Lock bits from software will also be prevented during the EEPROM write operation. It
is recommended that the user checks the status bit (EEPE) in the EECR Register and verifies
that the bit is cleared before writing to the SPMCSR Register.
26.2.2 Reading the Fuse and Lock Bits from Software
It is possible to read both the Fuse and Lock bits from software. To read the Lock bits, load the
Z-pointer with 0x0001 and set the BLBSET and SELFPRGEN bits in SPMCSR. When an LPM
instruction is executed within three CPU cycles after the BLBSET and SELFPRGEN bits are set
in SPMCSR, the value of the Lock bits will be loaded in the destination register. The BLBSET
and SELFPRGEN bits will auto-clear upon completion of reading the Lock bits or if no LPM
instruction is executed within three CPU cycles or no SPM instruction is executed within four
CPU cycles. When BLBSET and SELFPRGEN are cleared, LPM will work as described in the
Instruction set Manual.
The algorithm for reading the Fuse Low byte is similar to the one described above for reading
the Lock bits. To read the Fuse Low byte, load the Z-pointer with 0x0000 and set the BLBSET
and SELFPRGEN bits in SPMCSR. When an LPM instruction is executed within three cycles
after the BLBSET and SELFPRGEN bits are set in the SPMCSR, the value of the Fuse Low byte
(FLB) will be loaded in the destination register as shown below.See Table 28-5 on page 308 for
a detailed description and mapping of the Fuse Low byte.
Similarly, when reading the Fuse High byte (FHB), load 0x0003 in the Z-pointer. When an LPM
instruction is executed within three cycles after the BLBSET and SELFPRGEN bits are set in the
SPMCSR, the value of the Fuse High byte will be loaded in the destination register as shown
below. See Table 28-4 on page 307 for detailed description and mapping of the Extended Fuse
byte.
Similarly, when reading the Extended Fuse byte (EFB), load 0x0002 in the Z-pointer. When an
LPM instruction is executed within three cycles after the BLBSET and SELFPRGEN bits are set
in the SPMCSR, the value of the Extended Fuse byte will be loaded in the destination register as
shown below. See Table 28-5 on page 308 for detailed description and mapping of the Extended
Fuse byte.
Fuse and Lock bits that are programmed, will be read as zero. Fuse and Lock bits that are
unprogrammed, will be read as one.
Bit 76543210
Rd ––––––LB2LB1
Bit 76543210
Rd FLB7 FLB6 FLB5 FLB4 FLB3 FLB2 FLB1 FLB0
Bit 76543210
Rd FHB7 FHB6 FHB5 FHB4 FHB3 FHB2 FHB1 FHB0
Bit 76543210
Rd FHB7 FHB6 FHB5 FHB4 FHB3 FHB2 FHB1 FHB0
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 284
26.2.3 Preventing Flash Corruption
During periods of low VCC, the Flash program can be corrupted because the supply voltage is
too low for the CPU and the Flash to operate properly. These issues are the same as for board
level systems using the Flash, and the same design solutions should be applied.
A Flash program corruption can be caused by two situations when the voltage is too low. First, a
regular write sequence to the Flash requires a minimum voltage to operate correctly. Secondly,
the CPU itself can execute instructions incorrectly, if the supply voltage for executing instructions
is too low.
Flash corruption can easily be avoided by following these design recommendations (one is
sufficient):
1. Keep the AVR RESET active (low) during periods of insufficient power supply voltage.
This can be done by enabling the internal Brown-out Detector (BOD) if the operating
voltage matches the detection level. If not, an external low VCC reset protection circuit can
be used. If a reset occurs while a write operation is in progress, the write operation will be
completed provided that the power supply voltage is sufficient.
2. Keep the AVR core in Power-down sleep mode during periods of low VCC. This will prevent
the CPU from attempting to decode and execute instructions, effectively protecting the
SPMCSR Register and thus the Flash from unintentional writes.
26.2.4 Programming Time for Flash when Using SPM
The calibrated RC Oscillator is used to time Flash accesses. Table 27-6 shows the typical
programming time for Flash accesses from the CPU.
Note: 1. Minimum and maximum programming time is per individual operation.
Table 26-1. SPM Programming Time(1)
Symbol Min Programming Time Max Programming Time
Flash write (Page Erase, Page Write, and
write Lock bits by SPM) 3.7 ms 4.5 ms
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 285
26.2.5 Simple Assembly Code Example for a Boot Loader
Note that the RWWSB bit will always be read as zero in ATmega48P. Nevertheless, it is
recommended to check this bit as shown in the code example, to ensure compatibility with
devices supporting Read-While-Write.
;-the routine writes one page of data from RAM to Flash
; the first data location in RAM is pointed to by the Y
pointer
; the first data location in Flash is pointed to by the Z-
pointer
;-error handling is not included
;-the routine must be placed inside the Boot space
; (at least the Do_spm sub routine). Only code inside NRWW
section can
; be read during Self-Programming (Page Erase and Page
Write).
;-registers used: r0, r1, temp1 (r16), temp2 (r17), looplo
(r24),
; loophi (r25), spmcrval (r20)
; storing and restoring of registers is not included in the
routine
; register usage can be optimized at the expense of code
size
;-It is assumed that either the interrupt table is moved to
the Boot
; loader section or that the interrupts are disabled.
.equ PAGESIZEB = PAGESIZE*2 ;PAGESIZEB is
page size in BYTES, not words
.org SMALLBOOTSTART
Write_page:
; Page Erase
ldi spmcrval, (1<<PGERS) | (1<<SELFPRGEN)
rcall Do_spm
; re-enable the RWW section
ldi spmcrval, (1<<RWWSRE) | (1<<SELFPRGEN)
rcall Do_spm
; transfer data from RAM to Flash page buffer
ldi looplo, low(PAGESIZEB) ;init loop
variable
ldi loophi, high(PAGESIZEB) ;not required
for PAGESIZEB<=256
Wrloop:
ld r0, Y+
ld r1, Y+
ldi spmcrval, (1<<SELFPRGEN)
rcall Do_spm
adiw ZH:ZL, 2
sbiw loophi:looplo, 2 ;use subi for
PAGESIZEB<=256
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 286
brne Wrloop
; execute Page Write
subi ZL, low(PAGESIZEB) ;restore
pointer
sbci ZH, high(PAGESIZEB) ;not required
for PAGESIZEB<=256
ldi spmcrval, (1<<PGWRT) | (1<<SELFPRGEN)
rcall Do_spm
; re-enable the RWW section
ldi spmcrval, (1<<RWWSRE) | (1<<SELFPRGEN)
rcall Do_spm
; read back and check, optional
ldi looplo, low(PAGESIZEB) ;init loop
variable
ldi loophi, high(PAGESIZEB) ;not required
for PAGESIZEB<=256
subi YL, low(PAGESIZEB) ;restore
pointer
sbci YH, high(PAGESIZEB)
Rdloop:
lpm r0, Z+
ld r1, Y+
cpse r0, r1
rjmp Error
sbiw loophi:looplo, 1 ;use subi for
PAGESIZEB<=256
brne Rdloop
; return to RWW section
; verify that RWW section is safe to read
Return:
in temp1, SPMCSR
sbrs temp1, RWWSB ; If RWWSB is
set, the RWW section is not ready yet
ret
; re-enable the RWW section
ldi spmcrval, (1<<RWWSRE) | (1<<SELFPRGEN)
rcall Do_spm
rjmp Return
Do_spm:
; check for previous SPM complete
Wait_spm:
in temp1, SPMCSR
sbrc temp1, SELFPRGEN
rjmp Wait_spm
; input: spmcrval determines SPM action
; disable interrupts if enabled, store status
in temp2, SREG
cli
; check that no EEPROM write access is present
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 287
Wait_ee:
sbic EECR, EEPE
rjmp Wait_ee
; SPM timed sequence
out SPMCSR, spmcrval
spm
; restore SREG (to enable interrupts if originally
enabled)
out SREG, temp2
ret
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 288
26.3 Register Description
26.3.1 SPMCSR – Store Program Memory Control and Status Register
The Store Program Memory Control and Status Register contains the control bits needed to
control the Program memory operations.
• Bit 7 – SPMIE: SPM Interrupt Enable
When the SPMIE bit is written to one, and the I-bit in the Status Register is set (one), the SPM
ready interrupt will be enabled. The SPM ready Interrupt will be executed as long as the
SELFPRGEN bit in the SPMCSR Register is cleared. The interrupt will not be generated during
EEPROM write or SPM.
• Bit 6 – RWWSB: Read-While-Write Section Busy
This bit is for compatibility with devices supporting Read-While-Write. It will always read as zero
in ATmega48P.
• Bit 5 – Res: Reserved Bit
This bit is a reserved bit in the ATmega48P/88P/168P and will always read as zero.
• Bit 4 – RWWSRE: Read-While-Write Section Read Enable
The functionality of this bit in ATmega48P is a subset of the functionality in ATmega88P/168P. If
the RWWSRE bit is written while filling the temporary page buffer, the temporary page buffer will
be cleared and the data will be lost.
• Bit 3 – BLBSET: Boot Lock Bit Set
The functionality of this bit in ATmega48P is a subset of the functionality in ATmega88P/168P.
An LPM instruction within three cycles after BLBSET and SELFPRGEN are set in the SPMCSR
Register, will read either the Lock bits or the Fuse bits (depending on Z0 in the Z-pointer) into the
destination register. See “Reading the Fuse and Lock Bits from Software” on page 283 for
details.
• Bit 2 – PGWRT: Page Write
If this bit is written to one at the same time as SELFPRGEN, the next SPM instruction within four
clock cycles executes Page Write, with the data stored in the temporary buffer. The page
address is taken from the high part of the Z-pointer. The data in R1 and R0 are ignored. The
PGWRT bit will auto-clear upon completion of a Page Write, or if no SPM instruction is executed
within four clock cycles. The CPU is halted during the entire Page Write operation.
• Bit 1 – PGERS: Page Erase
If this bit is written to one at the same time as SELFPRGEN, the next SPM instruction within four
clock cycles executes Page Erase. The page address is taken from the high part of the Z-
pointer. The data in R1 and R0 are ignored. The PGERS bit will auto-clear upon completion of a
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0x37 (0x57) SPMIE RWWSB – RWWSRE BLBSET PGWRT PGERS SELFPRGEN SPMCSR
Read/Write R/W R R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 289
Page Erase, or if no SPM instruction is executed within four clock cycles. The CPU is halted
during the entire Page Write operation.
• Bit 0 – SELFPRGEN: Self Programming Enable
This bit enables the SPM instruction for the next four clock cycles. If written to one together with
either RWWSRE, BLBSET, PGWRT, or PGERS, the following SPM instruction will have a
special meaning, see description above. If only SELFPRGEN is written, the following SPM
instruction will store the value in R1:R0 in the temporary page buffer addressed by the Z-pointer.
The LSB of the Z-pointer is ignored. The SELFPRGEN bit will auto-clear upon completion of an
SPM instruction, or if no SPM instruction is executed within four clock cycles. During Page Erase
and Page Write, the SELFPRGEN bit remains high until the operation is completed.
Writing any other combination than “10001”, “01001”, “00101”, “00011” or “00001” in the lower
five bits will have no effect.
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 290
27. Boot Loader Support – Read-While-Write Self-Programming, ATmega88P
and ATmega168P
27.1 Features
•Read-While-Write Self-Programming
•Flexible Boot Memory Size
•High Security (Separate Boot Lock Bits for a Flexible Protection)
•Separate Fuse to Select Reset Vector
•Optimized Page(1) Size
•Code Efficient Algorithm
•Efficient Read-Modify-Write Support
Note: 1. A page is a section in the Flash consisting of several bytes (see Table 28-9 on page 310) used
during programming. The page organization does not affect normal operation.
27.2 Overview
In ATmega88P and ATmega168P, the Boot Loader Support provides a real Read-While-Write
Self-Programming mechanism for downloading and uploading program code by the MCU itself.
This feature allows flexible application software updates controlled by the MCU using a Flash-
resident Boot Loader program. The Boot Loader program can use any available data interface
and associated protocol to read code and write (program) that code into the Flash memory, or
read the code from the program memory. The program code within the Boot Loader section has
the capability to write into the entire Flash, including the Boot Loader memory. The Boot Loader
can thus even modify itself, and it can also erase itself from the code if the feature is not needed
anymore. The size of the Boot Loader memory is configurable with fuses and the Boot Loader
has two separate sets of Boot Lock bits which can be set independently. This gives the user a
unique flexibility to select different levels of protection.
27.3 Application and Boot Loader Flash Sections
The Flash memory is organized in two main sections, the Application section and the Boot
Loader section (see Figure 27-2). The size of the different sections is configured by the
BOOTSZ Fuses as shown in Table 27-7 on page 302 and Figure 27-2. These two sections can
have different level of protection since they have different sets of Lock bits.
27.3.1 Application Section
The Application section is the section of the Flash that is used for storing the application code.
The protection level for the Application section can be selected by the application Boot Lock bits
(Boot Lock bits 0), see Table 27-2 on page 294. The Application section can never store any
Boot Loader code since the SPM instruction is disabled when executed from the Application
section.
27.3.2 BLS – Boot Loader Section
While the Application section is used for storing the application code, the The Boot Loader
software must be located in the BLS since the SPM instruction can initiate a programming when
executing from the BLS only. The SPM instruction can access the entire Flash, including the
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 291
BLS itself. The protection level for the Boot Loader section can be selected by the Boot Loader
Lock bits (Boot Lock bits 1), see Table 27-3 on page 294.
27.4 Read-While-Write and No Read-While-Write Flash Sections
Whether the CPU supports Read-While-Write or if the CPU is halted during a Boot Loader
software update is dependent on which address that is being programmed. In addition to the two
sections that are configurable by the BOOTSZ Fuses as described above, the Flash is also
divided into two fixed sections, the Read-While-Write (RWW) section and the No Read-While-
Write (NRWW) section. The limit between the RWW- and NRWW sections is given in Table 27-
8 on page 302 and Figure 27-2 on page 293. The main difference between the two sections is:
• When erasing or writing a page located inside the RWW section, the NRWW section can
be read during the operation.
• When erasing or writing a page located inside the NRWW section, the CPU is halted
during the entire operation.
Note that the user software can never read any code that is located inside the RWW section
during a Boot Loader software operation. The syntax “Read-While-Write section” refers to which
section that is being programmed (erased or written), not which section that actually is being
read during a Boot Loader software update.
27.4.1 RWW – Read-While-Write Section
If a Boot Loader software update is programming a page inside the RWW section, it is possible
to read code from the Flash, but only code that is located in the NRWW section. During an on-
going programming, the software must ensure that the RWW section never is being read. If the
user software is trying to read code that is located inside the RWW section (i.e., by a
call/jmp/lpm or an interrupt) during programming, the software might end up in an unknown
state. To avoid this, the interrupts should either be disabled or moved to the Boot Loader
section. The Boot Loader section is always located in the NRWW section. The RWW Section
Busy bit (RWWSB) in the Store Program Memory Control and Status Register (SPMCSR) will be
read as logical one as long as the RWW section is blocked for reading. After a programming is
completed, the RWWSB must be cleared by software before reading code located in the RWW
section. See “SPMCSR – Store Program Memory Control and Status Register” on page 304. for
details on how to clear RWWSB.
27.4.2 NRWW – No Read-While-Write Section
The code located in the NRWW section can be read when the Boot Loader software is updating
a page in the RWW section. When the Boot Loader code updates the NRWW section, the CPU
is halted during the entire Page Erase or Page Write operation.
Table 27-1. Read-While-Write Features
Which Section does the Z-
pointer Address during
the Programming?
Which Section can be
read during
Programming? CPU Halted?
Read-While-Write
Supported?
RWW Section NRWW Section No Yes
NRWW Section None Yes No
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 292
Figure 27-1. Read-While-Write vs. No Read-While-Write
Read-While-Write
(RWW) Section
No Read-While-Write
(NRWW) Section
Z-pointer
Addresses RWW
Section
Z-pointer
Addresses NRWW
Section
CPU is Halted
During the Operation
Code Located in
NRWW Section
Can be Read During
the Operation
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 293
Figure 27-2. Memory Sections
Note: 1. The parameters in the figure above are given in Table 27-7 on page 302.
27.5 Boot Loader Lock Bits
If no Boot Loader capability is needed, the entire Flash is available for application code. The
Boot Loader has two separate sets of Boot Lock bits which can be set independently. This gives
the user a unique flexibility to select different levels of protection.
The user can select:
• To protect the entire Flash from a software update by the MCU.
• To protect only the Boot Loader Flash section from a software update by the MCU.
• To protect only the Application Flash section from a software update by the MCU.
• Allow software update in the entire Flash.
See Table 27-2 and Table 27-3 for further details. The Boot Lock bits can be set in software and
in Serial or Parallel Programming mode, but they can be cleared by a Chip Erase command
only. The general Write Lock (Lock Bit mode 2) does not control the programming of the Flash
memory by SPM instruction. Similarly, the general Read/Write Lock (Lock Bit mode 1) does not
control reading nor writing by LPM/SPM, if it is attempted.
0x0000
Flashend
Program Memory
BOOTSZ = '11'
Application Flash Section
Boot Loader Flash Section Flashend
Program Memory
BOOTSZ = '10'
0x0000
Program Memory
BOOTSZ = '01'
Program Memory
BOOTSZ = '00'
Application Flash Section
Boot Loader Flash Section
0x0000
Flashend
Application Flash Section
Flashend
End RWW
Start NRWW
Application Flash Section
Boot Loader Flash Section
Boot Loader Flash Section
End RWW
Start NRWW
End RWW
Start NRWW
0x0000
End RWW, End Application
Start NRWW, Start Boot Loader
Application Flash SectionApplication Flash Section
Application Flash Section
Read-While-Write SectionNo Read-While-Write Section Read-While-Write SectionNo Read-While-Write Section
Read-While-Write SectionNo Read-While-Write SectionRead-While-Write SectionNo Read-While-Write Section
End Application
Start Boot Loader
End Application
Start Boot Loader
End Application
Start Boot Loader
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 294
Note: 1. “1” means unprogrammed, “0” means programmed
Note: 1. “1” means unprogrammed, “0” means programmed
27.6 Entering the Boot Loader Program
Entering the Boot Loader takes place by a jump or call from the application program. This may
be initiated by a trigger such as a command received via USART, or SPI interface. Alternatively,
the Boot Reset Fuse can be programmed so that the Reset Vector is pointing to the Boot Flash
start address after a reset. In this case, the Boot Loader is started after a reset. After the
application code is loaded, the program can start executing the application code. Note that the
fuses cannot be changed by the MCU itself. This means that once the Boot Reset Fuse is
programmed, the Reset Vector will always point to the Boot Loader Reset and the fuse can only
be changed through the serial or parallel programming interface.
Note: 1. “1” means unprogrammed, “0” means programmed
Table 27-2. Boot Lock Bit0 Protection Modes (Application Section)(1)
BLB0 Mode BLB02 BLB01 Protection
111
No restrictions for SPM or LPM accessing the Application
section.
2 1 0 SPM is not allowed to write to the Application section.
300
SPM is not allowed to write to the Application section, and LPM
executing from the Boot Loader section is not allowed to read
from the Application section. If Interrupt Vectors are placed in
the Boot Loader section, interrupts are disabled while executing
from the Application section.
401
LPM executing from the Boot Loader section is not allowed to
read from the Application section. If Interrupt Vectors are placed
in the Boot Loader section, interrupts are disabled while
executing from the Application section.
Table 27-3. Boot Lock Bit1 Protection Modes (Boot Loader Section)(1)
BLB1 Mode BLB12 BLB11 Protection
111
No restrictions for SPM or LPM accessing the Boot Loader
section.
2 1 0 SPM is not allowed to write to the Boot Loader section.
300
SPM is not allowed to write to the Boot Loader section, and LPM
executing from the Application section is not allowed to read
from the Boot Loader section. If Interrupt Vectors are placed in
the Application section, interrupts are disabled while executing
from the Boot Loader section.
401
LPM executing from the Application section is not allowed to
read from the Boot Loader section. If Interrupt Vectors are
placed in the Application section, interrupts are disabled while
executing from the Boot Loader section.
Table 27-4. Boot Reset Fuse(1)
BOOTRST Reset Address
1 Reset Vector = Application Reset (address 0x0000)
0 Reset Vector = Boot Loader Reset (see Table 27-7 on page 302)
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 295
27.7 Addressing the Flash During Self-Programming
The Z-pointer is used to address the SPM commands.
Since the Flash is organized in pages (see Table 28-9 on page 310), the Program Counter can
be treated as having two different sections. One section, consisting of the least significant bits, is
addressing the words within a page, while the most significant bits are addressing the pages.
This is1 shown in Figure 27-3. Note that the Page Erase and Page Write operations are
addressed independently. Therefore it is of major importance that the Boot Loader software
addresses the same page in both the Page Erase and Page Write operation. Once a
programming operation is initiated, the address is latched and the Z-pointer can be used for
other operations.
The only SPM operation that does not use the Z-pointer is Setting the Boot Loader Lock bits.
The content of the Z-pointer is ignored and will have no effect on the operation. The LPM
instruction does also use the Z-pointer to store the address. Since this instruction addresses the
Flash byte-by-byte, also the LSB (bit Z0) of the Z-pointer is used.
Figure 27-3. Addressing the Flash During SPM(1)
Note: 1. The different variables used in Figure 27-3 are listed in Table 27-9 on page 302.
27.8 Self-Programming the Flash
The program memory is updated in a page by page fashion. Before programming a page with
the data stored in the temporary page buffer, the page must be erased. The temporary page
buffer is filled one word at a time using SPM and the buffer can be filled either before the Page
Erase command or between a Page Erase and a Page Write operation:
Bit 151413121110 9 8
ZH (R31) Z15 Z14 Z13 Z12 Z11 Z10 Z9 Z8
ZL (R30) Z7 Z6 Z5 Z4 Z3 Z2 Z1 Z0
76543210
PROGRAM MEMORY
0115
Z - REGISTER
BIT
0
ZPAGEMSB
WORD ADDRESS
WITHIN A PAGE
PAGE ADDRESS
WITHIN THE FLASH
ZPCMSB
INSTRUCTION WORD
PAGE PCWORD[PAGEMSB:0]:
00
01
02
PAGEEND
PAGE
PCWORDPCPAGE
PCMSB PAGEMSB
PROGRAM
COUNTER
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 296
Alternative 1, fill the buffer before a Page Erase
• Fill temporary page buffer
• Perform a Page Erase
• Perform a Page Write
Alternative 2, fill the buffer after Page Erase
• Perform a Page Erase
• Fill temporary page buffer
• Perform a Page Write
If only a part of the page needs to be changed, the rest of the page must be stored (for example
in the temporary page buffer) before the erase, and then be rewritten. When using alternative 1,
the Boot Loader provides an effective Read-Modify-Write feature which allows the user software
to first read the page, do the necessary changes, and then write back the modified data. If
alternative 2 is used, it is not possible to read the old data while loading since the page is
already erased. The temporary page buffer can be accessed in a random sequence. It is
essential that the page address used in both the Page Erase and Page Write operation is
addressing the same page. See “Simple Assembly Code Example for a Boot Loader” on page
299 for an assembly code example.
27.8.1 Performing Page Erase by SPM
To execute Page Erase, set up the address in the Z-pointer, write “X0000011” to SPMCSR and
execute SPM within four clock cycles after writing SPMCSR. The data in R1 and R0 is ignored.
The page address must be written to PCPAGE in the Z-register. Other bits in the Z-pointer will
be ignored during this operation.
• Page Erase to the RWW section: The NRWW section can be read during the Page Erase.
• Page Erase to the NRWW section: The CPU is halted during the operation.
27.8.2 Filling the Temporary Buffer (Page Loading)
To write an instruction word, set up the address in the Z-pointer and data in R1:R0, write
“00000001” to SPMCSR and execute SPM within four clock cycles after writing SPMCSR. The
content of PCWORD in the Z-register is used to address the data in the temporary buffer. The
temporary buffer will auto-erase after a Page Write operation or by writing the RWWSRE bit in
SPMCSR. It is also erased after a system reset. Note that it is not possible to write more than
one time to each address without erasing the temporary buffer.
If the EEPROM is written in the middle of an SPM Page Load operation, all data loaded will be
lost.
27.8.3 Performing a Page Write
To execute Page Write, set up the address in the Z-pointer, write “X0000101” to SPMCSR and
execute SPM within four clock cycles after writing SPMCSR. The data in R1 and R0 is ignored.
The page address must be written to PCPAGE. Other bits in the Z-pointer must be written to
zero during this operation.
• Page Write to the RWW section: The NRWW section can be read during the Page Write.
• Page Write to the NRWW section: The CPU is halted during the operation.
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 297
27.8.4 Using the SPM Interrupt
If the SPM interrupt is enabled, the SPM interrupt will generate a constant interrupt when the
SELFPRGEN bit in SPMCSR is cleared. This means that the interrupt can be used instead of
polling the SPMCSR Register in software. When using the SPM interrupt, the Interrupt Vectors
should be moved to the BLS section to avoid that an interrupt is accessing the RWW section
when it is blocked for reading. How to move the interrupts is described in “Interrupts” on page
66.
27.8.5 Consideration While Updating BLS
Special care must be taken if the user allows the Boot Loader section to be updated by leaving
Boot Lock bit11 unprogrammed. An accidental write to the Boot Loader itself can corrupt the
entire Boot Loader, and further software updates might be impossible. If it is not necessary to
change the Boot Loader software itself, it is recommended to program the Boot Lock bit11 to
protect the Boot Loader software from any internal software changes.
27.8.6 Prevent Reading the RWW Section During Self-Programming
During Self-Programming (either Page Erase or Page Write), the RWW section is always
blocked for reading. The user software itself must prevent that this section is addressed during
the self programming operation. The RWWSB in the SPMCSR will be set as long as the RWW
section is busy. During Self-Programming the Interrupt Vector table should be moved to the BLS
as described in “Watchdog Timer” on page 59, or the interrupts must be disabled. Before
addressing the RWW section after the programming is completed, the user software must clear
the RWWSB by writing the RWWSRE. See “Simple Assembly Code Example for a Boot Loader”
on page 299 for an example.
27.8.7 Setting the Boot Loader Lock Bits by SPM
To set the Boot Loader Lock bits and general Lock Bits, write the desired data to R0, write
“X0001001” to SPMCSR and execute SPM within four clock cycles after writing SPMCSR.
See Table 27-2 and Table 27-3 for how the different settings of the Boot Loader bits affect the
Flash access.
If bits 5:0 in R0 are cleared (zero), the corresponding Lock bit will be programmed if an SPM
instruction is executed within four cycles after BLBSET and SELFPRGEN are set in SPMCSR.
The Z-pointer is don’t care during this operation, but for future compatibility it is recommended to
load the Z-pointer with 0x0001 (same as used for reading the lOck bits). For future compatibility it
is also recommended to set bits 7 and 6 in R0 to “1” when writing the Lock bits. When
programming the Lock bits the entire Flash can be read during the operation.
27.8.8 EEPROM Write Prevents Writing to SPMCSR
Note that an EEPROM write operation will block all software programming to Flash. Reading the
Fuses and Lock bits from software will also be prevented during the EEPROM write operation. It
is recommended that the user checks the status bit (EEPE) in the EECR Register and verifies
that the bit is cleared before writing to the SPMCSR Register.
Bit 76543210
R0 1 1 BLB12 BLB11 BLB02 BLB01 LB2 LB1
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 298
27.8.9 Reading the Fuse and Lock Bits from Software
It is possible to read both the Fuse and Lock bits from software. To read the Lock bits, load the
Z-pointer with 0x0001 and set the BLBSET and SELFPRGEN bits in SPMCSR. When an LPM
instruction is executed within three CPU cycles after the BLBSET and SELFPRGEN bits are set
in SPMCSR, the value of the Lock bits will be loaded in the destination register. The BLBSET
and SELFPRGEN bits will auto-clear upon completion of reading the Lock bits or if no LPM
instruction is executed within three CPU cycles or no SPM instruction is executed within four
CPU cycles. When BLBSET and SELFPRGEN are cleared, LPM will work as described in the
Instruction set Manual.
The algorithm for reading the Fuse Low byte is similar to the one described above for reading
the Lock bits. To read the Fuse Low byte, load the Z-pointer with 0x0000 and set the BLBSET
and SELFPRGEN bits in SPMCSR. When an LPM instruction is executed within three cycles
after the BLBSET and SELFPRGEN bits are set in the SPMCSR, the value of the Fuse Low byte
(FLB) will be loaded in the destination register as shown below. Refer to Table 28-5 on page 308
for a detailed description and mapping of the Fuse Low byte.
Similarly, when reading the Fuse High byte, load 0x0003 in the Z-pointer. When an LPM
instruction is executed within three cycles after the BLBSET and SELFPRGEN bits are set in the
SPMCSR, the value of the Fuse High byte (FHB) will be loaded in the destination register as
shown below. Refer to Table 28-6 on page 308 for detailed description and mapping of the Fuse
High byte.
When reading the Extended Fuse byte, load 0x0002 in the Z-pointer. When an LPM instruction
is executed within three cycles after the BLBSET and SELFPRGEN bits are set in the SPMCSR,
the value of the Extended Fuse byte (EFB) will be loaded in the destination register as shown
below. Refer to Table 28-4 on page 307 for detailed description and mapping of the Extended
Fuse byte.
Fuse and Lock bits that are programmed, will be read as zero. Fuse and Lock bits that are
unprogrammed, will be read as one.
27.8.10 Reading the Signature Row from Software
To read the Signature Row from software, load the Z-pointer with the signature byte address
given in Table 27-5 on page 299 and set the SIGRD and SPMEN bits in SPMCSR. When an
LPM instruction is executed within three CPU cycles after the SIGRD and SPMEN bits are set in
SPMCSR, the signature byte value will be loaded in the destination register. The SIGRD and
SPMEN bits will auto-clear upon completion of reading the Signature Row Lock bits or if no LPM
instruction is executed within three CPU cycles. When SIGRD and SPMEN are cleared, LPM will
work as described in the Instruction set Manual.
Bit 76543210
Rd – – BLB12 BLB11 BLB02 BLB01 LB2 LB1
Bit 76543210
Rd FLB7 FLB6 FLB5 FLB4 FLB3 FLB2 FLB1 FLB0
Bit 76543210
Rd FHB7 FHB6 FHB5 FHB4 FHB3 FHB2 FHB1 FHB0
Bit 76543210
Rd – – – – EFB3 EFB2 EFB1 EFB0
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 299
Note: All other addresses are reserved for future use.
27.8.11 Preventing Flash Corruption
During periods of low VCC, the Flash program can be corrupted because the supply voltage is
too low for the CPU and the Flash to operate properly. These issues are the same as for board
level systems using the Flash, and the same design solutions should be applied.
A Flash program corruption can be caused by two situations when the voltage is too low. First, a
regular write sequence to the Flash requires a minimum voltage to operate correctly. Secondly,
the CPU itself can execute instructions incorrectly, if the supply voltage for executing instructions
is too low.
Flash corruption can easily be avoided by following these design recommendations (one is
sufficient):
1. If there is no need for a Boot Loader update in the system, program the Boot Loader Lock
bits to prevent any Boot Loader software updates.
2. Keep the AVR RESET active (low) during periods of insufficient power supply voltage.
This can be done by enabling the internal Brown-out Detector (BOD) if the operating
voltage matches the detection level. If not, an external low VCC reset protection circuit can
be used. If a reset occurs while a write operation is in progress, the write operation will be
completed provided that the power supply voltage is sufficient.
3. Keep the AVR core in Power-down sleep mode during periods of low VCC. This will prevent
the CPU from attempting to decode and execute instructions, effectively protecting the
SPMCSR Register and thus the Flash from unintentional writes.
27.8.12 Programming Time for Flash when Using SPM
The calibrated RC Oscillator is used to time Flash accesses. Table 27-6 shows the typical
programming time for Flash accesses from the CPU.
Note: 1. Minimum and maximum programming time is per individual operation.
27.8.13 Simple Assembly Code Example for a Boot Loader
;-the routine writes one page of data from RAM to Flash
; the first data location in RAM is pointed to by the Y
pointer
Table 27-5. Signature Row Addressing
Signature Byte Z-Pointer Address
Device Signature Byte 1 0x0000
Device Signature Byte 2 0x0002
Device Signature Byte 3 0x0004
RC Oscillator Calibration Byte 0x0001
Table 27-6. SPM Programming Time(1)
Symbol Min Programming Time Max Programming Time
Flash write (Page Erase, Page Write, and
write Lock bits by SPM) 3.7 ms 4.5 ms
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 300
; the first data location in Flash is pointed to by the Z-
pointer
;-error handling is not included
;-the routine must be placed inside the Boot space
; (at least the Do_spm sub routine). Only code inside NRWW
section can
; be read during Self-Programming (Page Erase and Page
Write).
;-registers used: r0, r1, temp1 (r16), temp2 (r17), looplo
(r24),
; loophi (r25), spmcrval (r20)
; storing and restoring of registers is not included in the
routine
; register usage can be optimized at the expense of code
size
;-It is assumed that either the interrupt table is moved to
the Boot
; loader section or that the interrupts are disabled.
.equ PAGESIZEB = PAGESIZE*2 ;PAGESIZEB is
page size in BYTES, not words
.org SMALLBOOTSTART
Write_page:
; Page Erase
ldi spmcrval, (1<<PGERS) | (1<<SELFPRGEN)
call Do_spm
; re-enable the RWW section
ldi spmcrval, (1<<RWWSRE) | (1<<SELFPRGEN)
call Do_spm
; transfer data from RAM to Flash page buffer
ldi looplo, low(PAGESIZEB) ;init loop
variable
ldi loophi, high(PAGESIZEB) ;not required
for PAGESIZEB<=256
Wrloop:
ld r0, Y+
ld r1, Y+
ldi spmcrval, (1<<SELFPRGEN)
call Do_spm
adiw ZH:ZL, 2
sbiw loophi:looplo, 2 ;use subi for
PAGESIZEB<=256
brne Wrloop
; execute Page Write
subi ZL, low(PAGESIZEB) ;restore
pointer
sbci ZH, high(PAGESIZEB) ;not required
for PAGESIZEB<=256
ldi spmcrval, (1<<PGWRT) | (1<<SELFPRGEN)
call Do_spm
; re-enable the RWW section
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 301
ldi spmcrval, (1<<RWWSRE) | (1<<SELFPRGEN)
call Do_spm
; read back and check, optional
ldi looplo, low(PAGESIZEB) ;init loop
variable
ldi loophi, high(PAGESIZEB) ;not required
for PAGESIZEB<=256
subi YL, low(PAGESIZEB) ;restore
pointer
sbci YH, high(PAGESIZEB)
Rdloop:
lpm r0, Z+
ld r1, Y+
cpse r0, r1
jmp Error
sbiw loophi:looplo, 1 ;use subi for
PAGESIZEB<=256
brne Rdloop
; return to RWW section
; verify that RWW section is safe to read
Return:
in temp1, SPMCSR
sbrs temp1, RWWSB ; If RWWSB is
set, the RWW section is not ready yet
ret
; re-enable the RWW section
ldi spmcrval, (1<<RWWSRE) | (1<<SELFPRGEN)
call Do_spm
rjmp Return
Do_spm:
; check for previous SPM complete
Wait_spm:
in temp1, SPMCSR
sbrc temp1, SELFPRGEN
rjmp Wait_spm
; input: spmcrval determines SPM action
; disable interrupts if enabled, store status
in temp2, SREG
cli
; check that no EEPROM write access is present
Wait_ee:
sbic EECR, EEPE
rjmp Wait_ee
; SPM timed sequence
out SPMCSR, spmcrval
spm
; restore SREG (to enable interrupts if originally
enabled)
out SREG, temp2
ret
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 302
27.8.14 ATmega88P Boot Loader Parameters
In Table 27-7 through Table 27-9, the parameters used in the description of the self programming are given.
Note: The different BOOTSZ Fuse configurations are shown in Figure 27-2 on page 293.
For details about these two section, see “NRWW – No Read-While-Write Section” on page 291 and “RWW – Read-While-
Write Section” on page 291
Note: 1. Z15:Z13: always ignored
Z0: should be zero for all SPM commands, byte select for the LPM instruction.
See “Addressing the Flash During Self-Programming” on page 295 for details about the use of Z-pointer during Self-
Programming.
Table 27-7. Boot Size Configuration, ATmega88P
BOOTSZ1 BOOTSZ0
Boot
Size Pages
Application
Flash
Section
Boot
Loader
Flash
Section
End
Application
Section
Boot Reset Address (Start Boot Loader
Section)
1 1 128 words 4 0x000 - 0xF7F 0xF80 - 0xFFF 0xF7F 0xF80
1 0 256 words 8 0x000 - 0xEFF 0xF00 - 0xFFF 0xEFF 0xF00
0 1 512 words 16 0x000 - 0xDFF 0xE00 - 0xFFF 0xDFF 0xE00
0 0 1024 words 32 0x000 - 0xBFF 0xC00 - 0xFFF 0xBFF 0xC00
Table 27-8. Read-While-Write Limit, ATmega88P
Section Pages Address
Read-While-Write section (RWW) 96 0x000 - 0xBFF
No Read-While-Write section (NRWW) 32 0xC00 - 0xFFF
Table 27-9. Explanation of Different Variables used in Figure 27-3 and the Mapping to the Z-pointer, ATmega88P
Variable
Corresponding
Z-value(1) Description
PCMSB 11 Most significant bit in the Program Counter. (The Program Counter is
12 bits PC[11:0])
PAGEMSB 4 Most significant bit which is used to address the words within one
page (32 words in a page requires 5 bits PC [4:0]).
ZPCMSB Z12 Bit in Z-register that is mapped to PCMSB. Because Z0 is not used,
the ZPCMSB equals PCMSB + 1.
ZPAGEMSB Z5 Bit in Z-register that is mapped to PAGEMSB. Because Z0 is not
used, the ZPAGEMSB equals PAGEMSB + 1.
PCPAGE PC[11:5] Z12:Z6 Program counter page address: Page select, for page erase and
page write
PCWORD PC[4:0] Z5:Z1 Program counter word address: Word select, for filling temporary
buffer (must be zero during page write operation)
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 303
27.8.15 ATmega168P Boot Loader Parameters
In Table 27-10 through Table 27-12, the parameters used in the description of the self programming are given.
Note: The different BOOTSZ Fuse configurations are shown in Figure 27-2 on page 293.
For details about these two section, see “NRWW – No Read-While-Write Section” on page 291 and “RWW – Read-While-
Write Section” on page 291
Note: 1. Z15:Z14: always ignored
Z0: should be zero for all SPM commands, byte select for the LPM instruction.
See “Addressing the Flash During Self-Programming” on page 295 for details about the use of Z-pointer during Self-
Programming.
Table 27-10. Boot Size Configuration, ATmega168P
BOOTSZ1 BOOTSZ0
Boot
Size Pages
Application
Flash
Section
Boot
Loader
Flash
Section
End
Application
Section
Boot Reset Address (Start Boot
Loader Section)
1 1 128 words 2 0x0000 - 0x1F7F 0x1F80 - 0x1FFF 0x1F7F 0x1F80
1 0 256 words 4 0x0000 - 0x1EFF 0x1F00 - 0x1FFF 0x1EFF 0x1F00
0 1 512 words 8 0x0000 - 0x1DFF 0x1E00 - 0x1FFF 0x1DFF 0x1E00
0 0 1024 words 16 0x0000 - 0x1BFF 0x1C00 - 0x1FFF 0x1BFF 0x1C00
Table 27-11. Read-While-Write Limit, ATmega168P
Section Pages Address
Read-While-Write section (RWW) 112 0x0000 - 0x1BFF
No Read-While-Write section (NRWW) 16 0x1C00 - 0x1FFF
Table 27-12. Explanation of Different Variables used in Figure 27-3 and the Mapping to the Z-pointer, ATmega168P
Variable
Corresponding
Z-value(1) Description
PCMSB 12 Most significant bit in the Program Counter. (The Program Counter
is 13 bits PC[12:0])
PAGEMSB 5 Most significant bit which is used to address the words within
one page (64 words in a page requires 6 bits PC [5:0])
ZPCMSB Z13 Bit in Z-register that is mapped to PCMSB. Because Z0 is not used,
the ZPCMSB equals PCMSB + 1.
ZPAGEMSB Z6 Bit in Z-register that is mapped to PAGEMSB. Because Z0 is not
used, the ZPAGEMSB equals PAGEMSB + 1.
PCPAGE PC[12:6] Z13:Z7 Program counter page address: Page select, for page erase and
page write
PCWORD PC[5:0] Z6:Z1 Program counter word address: Word select, for filling temporary
buffer (must be zero during page write operation)
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 304
27.9 Register Description
27.9.1 SPMCSR – Store Program Memory Control and Status Register
The Store Program Memory Control and Status Register contains the control bits needed to
control the Boot Loader operations.
• Bit 7 – SPMIE: SPM Interrupt Enable
When the SPMIE bit is written to one, and the I-bit in the Status Register is set (one), the SPM
ready interrupt will be enabled. The SPM ready Interrupt will be executed as long as the
SELFPRGEN bit in the SPMCSR Register is cleared.
• Bit 6 – RWWSB: Read-While-Write Section Busy
When a Self-Programming (Page Erase or Page Write) operation to the RWW section is
initiated, the RWWSB will be set (one) by hardware. When the RWWSB bit is set, the RWW
section cannot be accessed. The RWWSB bit will be cleared if the RWWSRE bit is written to one
after a Self-Programming operation is completed. Alternatively the RWWSB bit will automatically
be cleared if a page load operation is initiated.
• Bit 5 – Res: Reserved Bit
This bit is a reserved bit in the ATmega48P/88P/168P and always read as zero.
• Bit 4 – RWWSRE: Read-While-Write Section Read Enable
When programming (Page Erase or Page Write) to the RWW section, the RWW section is
blocked for reading (the RWWSB will be set by hardware). To re-enable the RWW section, the
user software must wait until the programming is completed (SELFPRGEN will be cleared).
Then, if the RWWSRE bit is written to one at the same time as SELFPRGEN, the next SPM
instruction within four clock cycles re-enables the RWW section. The RWW section cannot be
re-enabled while the Flash is busy with a Page Erase or a Page Write (SELFPRGEN is set). If
the RWWSRE bit is written while the Flash is being loaded, the Flash load operation will abort
and the data loaded will be lost.
• Bit 3 – BLBSET: Boot Lock Bit Set
If this bit is written to one at the same time as SELFPRGEN, the next SPM instruction within four
clock cycles sets Boot Lock bits and Memory Lock bits, according to the data in R0. The data in
R1 and the address in the Z-pointer are ignored. The BLBSET bit will automatically be cleared
upon completion of the Lock bit set, or if no SPM instruction is executed within four clock cycles.
An LPM instruction within three cycles after BLBSET and SELFPRGEN are set in the SPMCSR
Register, will read either the Lock bits or the Fuse bits (depending on Z0 in the Z-pointer) into the
destination register. See “Reading the Fuse and Lock Bits from Software” on page 298 for
details.
• Bit 2 – PGWRT: Page Write
If this bit is written to one at the same time as SELFPRGEN, the next SPM instruction within four
clock cycles executes Page Write, with the data stored in the temporary buffer. The page
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0x37 (0x57) SPMIE RWWSB – RWWSRE BLBSET PGWRT PGERS SELFPRGEN SPMCSR
Read/Write R/W R R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 305
address is taken from the high part of the Z-pointer. The data in R1 and R0 are ignored. The
PGWRT bit will auto-clear upon completion of a Page Write, or if no SPM instruction is executed
within four clock cycles. The CPU is halted during the entire Page Write operation if the NRWW
section is addressed.
• Bit 1 – PGERS: Page Erase
If this bit is written to one at the same time as SELFPRGEN, the next SPM instruction within four
clock cycles executes Page Erase. The page address is taken from the high part of the Z-
pointer. The data in R1 and R0 are ignored. The PGERS bit will auto-clear upon completion of a
Page Erase, or if no SPM instruction is executed within four clock cycles. The CPU is halted
during the entire Page Write operation if the NRWW section is addressed.
• Bit 0 – SELFPRGEN: Self Programming Enable
This bit enables the SPM instruction for the next four clock cycles. If written to one together with
either RWWSRE, BLBSET, PGWRT or PGERS, the following SPM instruction will have a
special meaning, see description above. If only SELFPRGEN is written, the following SPM
instruction will store the value in R1:R0 in the temporary page buffer addressed by the Z-pointer.
The LSB of the Z-pointer is ignored. The SELFPRGEN bit will auto-clear upon completion of an
SPM instruction, or if no SPM instruction is executed within four clock cycles. During Page Erase
and Page Write, the SELFPRGEN bit remains high until the operation is completed.
Writing any other combination than “10001”, “01001”, “00101”, “00011” or “00001” in the lower
five bits will have no effect.
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 306
28. Memory Programming
28.1 Program And Data Memory Lock Bits
The ATmega88P/168P/328P provides six Lock bits which can be left unprogrammed (“1”) or can
be programmed (“0”) to obtain the additional features listed in Table 28-2. The Lock bits can only
be erased to “1” with the Chip Erase command. The ATmega48P has no separate Boot Loader
section. The SPM instruction is enabled for the whole Flash if the SELFPRGEN fuse is
programmed (“0”), otherwise it is disabled.
Notes: 1. “1” means unprogrammed, “0” means programmed
2. Only on ATmega88P/168P/328P.
Notes: 1. Program the Fuse bits and Boot Lock bits before programming the LB1 and LB2.
2. “1” means unprogrammed, “0” means programmed
Table 28-1. Lock Bit Byte(1)
Lock Bit Byte Bit No Description Default Value
7 – 1 (unprogrammed)
6 – 1 (unprogrammed)
BLB12(2) 5 Boot Lock bit 1 (unprogrammed)
BLB11(2) 4 Boot Lock bit 1 (unprogrammed)
BLB02(2) 3 Boot Lock bit 1 (unprogrammed)
BLB01(2) 2 Boot Lock bit 1 (unprogrammed)
LB2 1 Lock bit 1 (unprogrammed)
LB1 0 Lock bit 1 (unprogrammed)
Table 28-2. Lock Bit Protection Modes(1)(2)
Memory Lock Bits Protection Type
LB Mode LB2 LB1
1 1 1 No memory lock features enabled.
210
Further programming of the Flash and EEPROM is disabled in
Parallel and Serial Programming mode. The Fuse bits are
locked in both Serial and Parallel Programming mode.(1)
300
Further programming and verification of the Flash and EEPROM
is disabled in Parallel and Serial Programming mode. The Boot
Lock bits and Fuse bits are locked in both Serial and Parallel
Programming mode.(1)
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 307
Notes: 1. Program the Fuse bits and Boot Lock bits before programming the LB1 and LB2.
2. “1” means unprogrammed, “0” means programmed
28.2 Fuse Bits
The ATmega48P/88P/168P has three Fuse bytes. Table 28-4 - Table 28-7 describe briefly the
functionality of all the fuses and how they are mapped into the Fuse bytes. Note that the fuses
are read as logical zero, “0”, if they are programmed.
Table 28-3. Lock Bit Protection Modes(1)(2). Only ATmega88P/168P/328P
BLB0 Mode BLB02 BLB01
111
No restrictions for SPM or LPM accessing the Application
section.
2 1 0 SPM is not allowed to write to the Application section.
300
SPM is not allowed to write to the Application section, and LPM
executing from the Boot Loader section is not allowed to read
from the Application section. If Interrupt Vectors are placed in
the Boot Loader section, interrupts are disabled while executing
from the Application section.
401
LPM executing from the Boot Loader section is not allowed to
read from the Application section. If Interrupt Vectors are placed
in the Boot Loader section, interrupts are disabled while
executing from the Application section.
BLB1 Mode BLB12 BLB11
111
No restrictions for SPM or LPM accessing the Boot Loader
section.
2 1 0 SPM is not allowed to write to the Boot Loader section.
300
SPM is not allowed to write to the Boot Loader section, and LPM
executing from the Application section is not allowed to read
from the Boot Loader section. If Interrupt Vectors are placed in
the Application section, interrupts are disabled while executing
from the Boot Loader section.
401
LPM executing from the Application section is not allowed to
read from the Boot Loader section. If Interrupt Vectors are
placed in the Application section, interrupts are disabled while
executing from the Boot Loader section.
Table 28-4. Extended Fuse Byte for ATmega48P
Extended Fuse Byte Bit No Description Default Value
–7– 1
–6– 1
–5– 1
–4– 1
–3– 1
–2– 1
–1– 1
SELFPRGEN 0 Self Programming Enable 1 (unprogrammed)
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 308
Note: 1. The default value of BOOTSZ[1:0] results in maximum Boot Size. See “Pin Name Mapping”
on page 311.
Notes: 1. See “Alternate Functions of Port C” on page 95 for description of RSTDISBL Fuse.
2. The SPIEN Fuse is not accessible in serial programming mode.
3. See “WDTCSR – Watchdog Timer Control Register” on page 63 for details.
4. See Table 29-4 on page 330 for BODLEVEL Fuse decoding.
Table 28-5. Extended Fuse Byte for ATmega88P/168P
Extended Fuse Byte Bit No Description Default Value
–7– 1
–6– 1
–5– 1
–4– 1
–3– 1
BOOTSZ1 2
Select Boot Size
(see
Table 27-7 on page 302 and
Table 27-10 on page 303
for details)
0 (programmed)(1)
BOOTSZ0 1
Select Boot Size
(see
Table 27-7 on page 302 and
Table 27-10 on page 303
for details)
0 (programmed)(1)
BOOTRST 0 Select Reset Vector 1 (unprogrammed)
Table 28-6. Fuse High Byte for ATmega48P/88P/168P
High Fuse Byte Bit No Description Default Value
RSTDISBL(1) 7 External Reset Disable 1 (unprogrammed)
DWEN 6 debugWIRE Enable 1 (unprogrammed)
SPIEN(2) 5Enable Serial Program and
Data Downloading
0 (programmed, SPI
programming enabled)
WDTON(3) 4 Watchdog Timer Always On 1 (unprogrammed)
EESAVE 3
EEPROM memory is
preserved through the Chip
Erase
1 (unprogrammed), EEPROM
not reserved
BODLEVEL2(4) 2Brown-out Detector trigger
level 1 (unprogrammed)
BODLEVEL1(4) 1Brown-out Detector trigger
level 1 (unprogrammed)
BODLEVEL0(4) 0Brown-out Detector trigger
level 1 (unprogrammed)
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 309
Note: 1. The default value of SUT1:0 results in maximum start-up time for the default clock source.
See Table 9-12 on page 42 for details.
2. The default setting of CKSEL3:0 results in internal RC Oscillator @ 8 MHz. See Table 9-11
on page 42 for details.
3. The CKOUT Fuse allows the system clock to be output on PORTB0. See “Clock Output
Buffer” on page 44 for details.
4. See “System Clock Prescaler” on page 44 for details.
The status of the Fuse bits is not affected by Chip Erase. Note that the Fuse bits are locked if
Lock bit1 (LB1) is programmed. Program the Fuse bits before programming the Lock bits.
28.2.1 Latching of Fuses
The fuse values are latched when the device enters programming mode and changes of the
fuse values will have no effect until the part leaves Programming mode. This does not apply to
the EESAVE Fuse which will take effect once it is programmed. The fuses are also latched on
Power-up in Normal mode.
28.3 Signature Bytes
All AVR microcontrollers have a three-byte signature code which identifies the device. This code
can be read in both serial and parallel mode, also when the device is locked. The three bytes
reside in a separate address space. For the ATmega48P/88P/168P the signature bytes are
given in Table 28-8.
28.4 Calibration Byte
The ATmega48P/88P/168P has a byte calibration value for the Internal RC Oscillator. This byte
resides in the high byte of address 0x000 in the signature address space. During reset, this byte
Table 28-7. Fuse Low Byte
Low Fuse Byte Bit No Description Default Value
CKDIV8(4) 7 Divide clock by 8 0 (programmed)
CKOUT(3) 6 Clock output 1 (unprogrammed)
SUT1 5 Select start-up time 1 (unprogrammed)(1)
SUT0 4 Select start-up time 0 (programmed)(1)
CKSEL3 3 Select Clock source 0 (programmed)(2)
CKSEL2 2 Select Clock source 0 (programmed)(2)
CKSEL1 1 Select Clock source 1 (unprogrammed)(2)
CKSEL0 0 Select Clock source 0 (programmed)(2)
Table 28-8. Device ID
Part
Signature Bytes Address
0x000 0x001 0x002
ATmega48P 0x1E 0x92 0x0A
ATmega88P 0x1E 0x93 0x0F
ATmega168P 0x1E 0x94 0x0B
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 310
is automatically written into the OSCCAL Register to ensure correct frequency of the calibrated
RC Oscillator.
28.5 Page Size
28.6 Parallel Programming Parameters, Pin Mapping, and Commands
This section describes how to parallel program and verify Flash Program memory, EEPROM
Data memory, Memory Lock bits, and Fuse bits in the ATmega48P/88P/168P. Pulses are
assumed to be at least 250 ns unless otherwise noted.
28.6.1 Signal Names
In this section, some pins of the ATmega48P/88P/168P are referenced by signal names
describing their functionality during parallel programming, see Figure 28-1 and Table 28-11.
Pins not described in the following table are referenced by pin names.
The XA1/XA0 pins determine the action executed when the XTAL1 pin is given a positive pulse.
The bit coding is shown in Table 28-13.
When pulsing WR or OE, the command loaded determines the action executed. The different
Commands are shown in Table 28-14.
Table 28-9. No. of Words in a Page and No. of Pages in the Flash
Device Flash Size Page Size PCWORD
No. of
Pages PCPAGE PCMSB
ATmega48P 2K words
(4K bytes) 32 words PC[4:0] 64 PC[10:5] 10
ATmega88P 4K words
(8K bytes) 32 words PC[4:0] 128 PC[11:5] 11
ATmega168P 8K words
(16K bytes) 64 words PC[5:0] 128 PC[12:6] 12
Table 28-10. No. of Words in a Page and No. of Pages in the EEPROM
Device
EEPROM
Size
Page
Size PCWORD
No. of
Pages PCPAGE EEAMSB
ATmega48P 256 bytes 4 bytes EEA[1:0] 64 EEA[7:2] 7
ATmega88P 512 bytes 4 bytes EEA[1:0] 128 EEA[8:2] 8
ATmega168P 512 bytes 4 bytes EEA[1:0] 128 EEA[8:2] 8
DATA
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 311
Figure 28-1. Parallel Programming
Note: VCC - 0.3V < AVCC < VCC + 0.3V, however, AVCC should always be within 4.5 - 5.5V
Table 28-11. Pin Name Mapping
Signal Name in
Programming Mode Pin Name I/O Function
RDY/BSY PD1 O 0: Device is busy programming, 1: Device is
ready for new command
OE PD2 I Output Enable (Active low)
WR PD3 I Write Pulse (Active low)
BS1 PD4 I Byte Select 1 (“0” selects Low byte, “1” selects
High byte)
XA0 PD5 I XTAL Action Bit 0
XA1 PD6 I XTAL Action Bit 1
PAGEL PD7 I Program memory and EEPROM Data Page
Load
BS2 PC2 I Byte Select 2 (“0” selects Low byte, “1” selects
2’nd High byte)
DATA {PC[1:0]: PB[5:0]} I/O Bi-directional Data bus (Output when OE is low)
Table 28-12. Pin Values Used to Enter Programming Mode
Pin Symbol Value
PAGEL Prog_enable[3] 0
XA1 Prog_enable[2] 0
XA0 Prog_enable[1] 0
BS1 Prog_enable[0] 0
VCC
GND
XTAL1
PD1
PD2
PD3
PD4
PD5
PD6
PC[1:0]:PB[5:0]
DATA
RESET
PD7
+12 V
BS1
XA0
XA1
OE
RDY/BSY
PAGEL
PC2
WR
BS2
AVCC
+4.5 - 5.5V
+4.5 - 5.5V
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 312
28.7 Parallel Programming
28.7.1 Enter Programming Mode
The following algorithm puts the device in Parallel (High-voltage) Programming mode:
1. Set Prog_enable pins listed in Table 28-12 on page 311 to “0000”, RESET pin to 0V and
VCC to 0V.
2. Apply 4.5 - 5.5V between VCC and GND.
Ensure that VCC reaches at least 1.8V within the next 20 µs.
1. Wait 20 - 60 µs, and apply 11.5 - 12.5V to RESET.
2. Keep the Prog_enable pins unchanged for at least 10µs after the High-voltage has been
applied to ensure the Prog_enable Signature has been latched.
3. Wait at least 300 µs before giving any parallel programming commands.
4. Exit Programming mode by power the device down or by bringing RESET pin to 0V.
If the rise time of the VCC is unable to fulfill the requirements listed above, the following
alternative algorithm can be used.
1. Set Prog_enable pins listed in Table 28-12 on page 311 to “0000”, RESET pin to 0V and
VCC to 0V.
2. Apply 4.5 - 5.5V between VCC and GND.
3. Monitor VCC, and as soon as VCC reaches 0.9 - 1.1V, apply 11.5 - 12.5V to RESET.
Table 28-13. XA1 and XA0 Coding
XA1 XA0 Action when XTAL1 is Pulsed
0 0 Load Flash or EEPROM Address (High or low address byte determined by BS1).
0 1 Load Data (High or Low data byte for Flash determined by BS1).
1 0 Load Command
1 1 No Action, Idle
Table 28-14. Command Byte Bit Coding
Command Byte Command Executed
1000 0000 Chip Erase
0100 0000 Write Fuse bits
0010 0000 Write Lock bits
0001 0000 Write Flash
0001 0001 Write EEPROM
0000 1000 Read Signature Bytes and Calibration byte
0000 0100 Read Fuse and Lock bits
0000 0010 Read Flash
0000 0011 Read EEPROM
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 313
4. Keep the Prog_enable pins unchanged for at least 10µs after the High-voltage has been
applied to ensure the Prog_enable Signature has been latched.
5. Wait until VCC actually reaches 4.5 -5.5V before giving any parallel programming
commands.
6. Exit Programming mode by power the device down or by bringing RESET pin to 0V.
28.7.2 Considerations for Efficient Programming
The loaded command and address are retained in the device during programming. For efficient
programming, the following should be considered.
• The command needs only be loaded once when writing or reading multiple memory
locations.
• Skip writing the data value 0xFF, that is the contents of the entire EEPROM (unless the
EESAVE Fuse is programmed) and Flash after a Chip Erase.
• Address high byte needs only be loaded before programming or reading a new 256 word
window in Flash or 256 byte EEPROM. This consideration also applies to Signature bytes
reading.
28.7.3 Chip Erase
The Chip Erase will erase the Flash and EEPROM(1) memories plus Lock bits. The Lock bits are
not reset until the program memory has been completely erased. The Fuse bits are not
changed. A Chip Erase must be performed before the Flash and/or EEPROM are
reprogrammed.
Note: 1. The EEPRPOM memory is preserved during Chip Erase if the EESAVE Fuse is programmed.
Load Command “Chip Erase”
1. Set XA1, XA0 to “10”. This enables command loading.
2. Set BS1 to “0”.
3. Set DATA to “1000 0000”. This is the command for Chip Erase.
4. Give XTAL1 a positive pulse. This loads the command.
5. Give WR a negative pulse. This starts the Chip Erase. RDY/BSY goes low.
6. Wait until RDY/BSY goes high before loading a new command.
28.7.4 Programming the Flash
The Flash is organized in pages, see Table 28-9 on page 310. When programming the Flash,
the program data is latched into a page buffer. This allows one page of program data to be
programmed simultaneously. The following procedure describes how to program the entire
Flash memory:
A. Load Command “Write Flash”
1. Set XA1, XA0 to “10”. This enables command loading.
2. Set BS1 to “0”.
3. Set DATA to “0001 0000”. This is the command for Write Flash.
4. Give XTAL1 a positive pulse. This loads the command.
B. Load Address Low byte
1. Set XA1, XA0 to “00”. This enables address loading.
2. Set BS1 to “0”. This selects low address.
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 314
3. Set DATA = Address low byte (0x00 - 0xFF).
4. Give XTAL1 a positive pulse. This loads the address low byte.
C. Load Data Low Byte
1. Set XA1, XA0 to “01”. This enables data loading.
2. Set DATA = Data low byte (0x00 - 0xFF).
3. Give XTAL1 a positive pulse. This loads the data byte.
D. Load Data High Byte
1. Set BS1 to “1”. This selects high data byte.
2. Set XA1, XA0 to “01”. This enables data loading.
3. Set DATA = Data high byte (0x00 - 0xFF).
4. Give XTAL1 a positive pulse. This loads the data byte.
E. Latch Data
1. Set BS1 to “1”. This selects high data byte.
2. Give PAGEL a positive pulse. This latches the data bytes. (See Figure 28-3 for signal
waveforms)
F. Repeat B through E until the entire buffer is filled or until all data within the page is loaded.
While the lower bits in the address are mapped to words within the page, the higher bits address
the pages within the FLASH. This is illustrated in Figure 28-2 on page 315. Note that if less than
eight bits are required to address words in the page (pagesize < 256), the most significant bit(s)
in the address low byte are used to address the page when performing a Page Write.
G. Load Address High byte
1. Set XA1, XA0 to “00”. This enables address loading.
2. Set BS1 to “1”. This selects high address.
3. Set DATA = Address high byte (0x00 - 0xFF).
4. Give XTAL1 a positive pulse. This loads the address high byte.
H. Program Page
1. Give WR a negative pulse. This starts programming of the entire page of data. RDY/BSY
goes low.
2. Wait until RDY/BSY goes high (See Figure 28-3 for signal waveforms).
I. Repeat B through H until the entire Flash is programmed or until all data has been
programmed.
J. End Page Programming
1. Set XA1, XA0 to “10”. This enables command loading.
2. Set DATA to “0000 0000”. This is the command for No Operation.
3. Give XTAL1 a positive pulse. This loads the command, and the internal write signals are
reset.
(.Nx
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 315
Figure 28-2. Addressing the Flash Which is Organized in Pages(1)
Note: 1. PCPAGE and PCWORD are listed in Table 28-9 on page 310.
Figure 28-3. Programming the Flash Waveforms(1)
Note: 1. “XX” is don’t care. The letters refer to the programming description above.
28.7.5 Programming the EEPROM
The EEPROM is organized in pages, see Table 28-10 on page 310. When programming the
EEPROM, the program data is latched into a page buffer. This allows one page of data to be
programmed simultaneously. The programming algorithm for the EEPROM data memory is as
follows (refer to “Programming the Flash” on page 313 for details on Command, Address and
Data loading):
1. A: Load Command “0001 0001”.
2. G: Load Address High Byte (0x00 - 0xFF).
3. B: Load Address Low Byte (0x00 - 0xFF).
4. C: Load Data (0x00 - 0xFF).
PROGRAM MEMORY
WORD ADDRESS
WITHIN A PAGE
PAGE ADDRESS
WITHIN THE FLASH
INSTRUCTION WORD
PAGE PCWORD[PAGEMSB:0]:
00
01
02
PAGEEND
PAGE
PCWORDPCPAGE
PCMSB PAGEMSB
PROGRAM
COUNTER
RDY/BSY
WR
OE
RESET +12V
PAGEL
BS2
0x10 ADDR. LOW ADDR. HIGH
DATA DATA LOW DATA HIGH ADDR. LOW DATA LOW DATA HIGH
XA1
XA0
BS1
XTAL1
XX XX XX
ABCDEBCDEGH
F
X"
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 316
5. E: Latch data (give PAGEL a positive pulse).
K: Repeat 3 through 5 until the entire buffer is filled.
L: Program EEPROM page
1. Set BS1 to “0”.
2. Give WR a negative pulse. This starts programming of the EEPROM page. RDY/BSY
goes low.
3. Wait until to RDY/BSY goes high before programming the next page (See Figure 28-4 for
signal waveforms).
Figure 28-4. Programming the EEPROM Waveforms
28.7.6 Reading the Flash
The algorithm for reading the Flash memory is as follows (refer to “Programming the Flash” on
page 313 for details on Command and Address loading):
1. A: Load Command “0000 0010”.
2. G: Load Address High Byte (0x00 - 0xFF).
3. B: Load Address Low Byte (0x00 - 0xFF).
4. Set OE to “0”, and BS1 to “0”. The Flash word low byte can now be read at DATA.
5. Set BS1 to “1”. The Flash word high byte can now be read at DATA.
6. Set OE to “1”.
28.7.7 Reading the EEPROM
The algorithm for reading the EEPROM memory is as follows (refer to “Programming the Flash”
on page 313 for details on Command and Address loading):
1. A: Load Command “0000 0011”.
2. G: Load Address High Byte (0x00 - 0xFF).
3. B: Load Address Low Byte (0x00 - 0xFF).
4. Set OE to “0”, and BS1 to “0”. The EEPROM Data byte can now be read at DATA.
5. Set OE to “1”.
RDY/BSY
WR
OE
RESET +12V
PAGEL
BS2
0x11 ADDR. HIGH
DATA ADDR. LOW DATA ADDR. LOW DATA XX
XA1
XA0
BS1
XTAL1
XX
AGBCEB C EL
K
BSY fiL/fi /_\_/f
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 317
28.7.8 Programming the Fuse Low Bits
The algorithm for programming the Fuse Low bits is as follows (refer to “Programming the Flash”
on page 313 for details on Command and Data loading):
1. A: Load Command “0100 0000”.
2. C: Load Data Low Byte. Bit n = “0” programs and bit n = “1” erases the Fuse bit.
3. Give WR a negative pulse and wait for RDY/BSY to go high.
28.7.9 Programming the Fuse High Bits
The algorithm for programming the Fuse High bits is as follows (refer to “Programming the
Flash” on page 313 for details on Command and Data loading):
1. A: Load Command “0100 0000”.
2. C: Load Data Low Byte. Bit n = “0” programs and bit n = “1” erases the Fuse bit.
3. Set BS1 to “1” and BS2 to “0”. This selects high data byte.
4. Give WR a negative pulse and wait for RDY/BSY to go high.
5. Set BS1 to “0”. This selects low data byte.
28.7.10 Programming the Extended Fuse Bits
The algorithm for programming the Extended Fuse bits is as follows (refer to “Programming the
Flash” on page 313 for details on Command and Data loading):
1. A: Load Command “0100 0000”.
2. C: Load Data Low Byte. Bit n = “0” programs and bit n = “1” erases the Fuse bit.
3. Set BS1 to “0” and BS2 to “1”. This selects extended data byte.
4. Give WR a negative pulse and wait for RDY/BSY to go high.
5. Set BS2 to “0”. This selects low data byte.
Figure 28-5. Programming the FUSES Waveforms
28.7.11 Programming the Lock Bits
The algorithm for programming the Lock bits is as follows (refer to “Programming the Flash” on
page 313 for details on Command and Data loading):
RDY/BSY
WR
OE
RESET +12V
PAGEL
0x40
DATA
DATA XX
XA1
XA0
BS1
XTAL1
AC
0x40 DATA XX
AC
Write Fuse Low byte Write Fuse high byte
0x40 DATA XX
AC
Write Extended Fuse byte
BS2
EIEI m m BSY
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 318
1. A: Load Command “0010 0000”.
2. C: Load Data Low Byte. Bit n = “0” programs the Lock bit. If LB mode 3 is programmed
(LB1 and LB2 is programmed), it is not possible to program the Boot Lock bits by any
External Programming mode.
3. Give WR a negative pulse and wait for RDY/BSY to go high.
The Lock bits can only be cleared by executing Chip Erase.
28.7.12 Reading the Fuse and Lock Bits
The algorithm for reading the Fuse and Lock bits is as follows (refer to “Programming the Flash”
on page 313 for details on Command loading):
1. A: Load Command “0000 0100”.
2. Set OE to “0”, BS2 to “0” and BS1 to “0”. The status of the Fuse Low bits can now be read
at DATA (“0” means programmed).
3. Set OE to “0”, BS2 to “1” and BS1 to “1”. The status of the Fuse High bits can now be read
at DATA (“0” means programmed).
4. Set OE to “0”, BS2 to “1”, and BS1 to “0”. The status of the Extended Fuse bits can now be
read at DATA (“0” means programmed).
5. Set OE to “0”, BS2 to “0” and BS1 to “1”. The status of the Lock bits can now be read at
DATA (“0” means programmed).
6. Set OE to “1”.
Figure 28-6. Mapping Between BS1, BS2 and the Fuse and Lock Bits During Read
28.7.13 Reading the Signature Bytes
The algorithm for reading the Signature bytes is as follows (refer to “Programming the Flash” on
page 313 for details on Command and Address loading):
1. A: Load Command “0000 1000”.
2. B: Load Address Low Byte (0x00 - 0x02).
3. Set OE to “0”, and BS1 to “0”. The selected Signature byte can now be read at DATA.
4. Set OE to “1”.
Lock Bits 0
1
BS2
Fuse High Byte
0
1
BS1
DATA
Fuse Low Byte 0
1
BS2
Extended Fuse Byte
RESET l L L)
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 319
28.7.14 Reading the Calibration Byte
The algorithm for reading the Calibration byte is as follows (refer to “Programming the Flash” on
page 313 for details on Command and Address loading):
1. A: Load Command “0000 1000”.
2. B: Load Address Low Byte, 0x00.
3. Set OE to “0”, and BS1 to “1”. The Calibration byte can now be read at DATA.
4. Set OE to “1”.
28.7.15 Parallel Programming Characteristics
For chracteristics of the Parallel Programming, see “Parallel Programming Characteristics” on
page 336.
28.8 Serial Downloading
Both the Flash and EEPROM memory arrays can be programmed using the serial SPI bus while
RESET is pulled to GND. The serial interface consists of pins SCK, MOSI (input) and MISO
(output). After RESET is set low, the Programming Enable instruction needs to be executed first
before program/erase operations can be executed. NOTE, in Table 28-15 on page 320, the pin
mapping for SPI programming is listed. Not all parts use the SPI pins dedicated for the internal
SPI interface.
Figure 28-7. Serial Programming and Verify(1)(2)
Notes: 1. If the device is clocked by the internal Oscillator, it is no need to connect a clock source to the
XTAL1 pin.
2. VCC - 0.3V < AVCC < VCC + 0.3V, however, AVCC should always be within 1.8 - 5.5V
When programming the EEPROM, an auto-erase cycle is built into the self-timed programming
operation (in the Serial mode ONLY) and there is no need to first execute the Chip Erase
instruction. The Chip Erase operation turns the content of every memory location in both the
Program and EEPROM arrays into 0xFF.
Depending on CKSEL Fuses, a valid clock must be present. The minimum low and high periods
for the serial clock (SCK) input are defined as follows:
Low:> 2 CPU clock cycles for fck < 12 MHz, 3 CPU clock cycles for fck >= 12 MHz
High:> 2 CPU clock cycles for fck < 12 MHz, 3 CPU clock cycles for fck >= 12 MHz
VCC
GND
XTAL1
SCK
MISO
MOSI
RESET
+1.8 - 5.5V
AVCC
+1.8 - 5.5V
(2)
RESET RESET
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 320
28.8.1 Serial Programming Pin Mapping
28.8.2 Serial Programming Algorithm
When writing serial data to the ATmega48P/88P/168P, data is clocked on the rising edge of
SCK.
When reading data from the ATmega48P/88P/168P, data is clocked on the falling edge of SCK.
See Figure 28-9 for timing details.
To program and verify the ATmega48P/88P/168P in the serial programming mode, the following
sequence is recommended (See Serial Programming Instruction set in Table 28-17 on page
321):
1. Power-up sequence:
Apply power between VCC and GND while RESET and SCK are set to “0”. In some
systems, the programmer can not ensure that SCK is held low during power-up. In this
case, RESET must be given a positive pulse of at least two CPU clock cycles duration
after SCK has been set to “0”.
2. Wait for at least 20 ms and enable serial programming by sending the Programming
Enable serial instruction to pin MOSI.
3. The serial programming instructions will not work if the communication is out of
synchronization. When in sync. the second byte (0x53), will echo back when issuing the
third byte of the Programming Enable instruction. Whether the echo is correct or not, all
four bytes of the instruction must be transmitted. If the 0x53 did not echo back, give
RESET a positive pulse and issue a new Programming Enable command.
4. The Flash is programmed one page at a time. The memory page is loaded one byte at a
time by supplying the 6 LSB of the address and data together with the Load Program
Memory Page instruction. To ensure correct loading of the page, the data low byte must
be loaded before data high byte is applied for a given address. The Program Memory
Page is stored by loading the Write Program Memory Page instruction with the 7 MSB of
the address. If polling (RDY/BSY) is not used, the user must wait at least tWD_FLASH before
issuing the next page (See Table 28-16). Accessing the serial programming interface
before the Flash write operation completes can result in incorrect programming.
5. A: The EEPROM array is programmed one byte at a time by supplying the address and
data together with the appropriate Write instruction. An EEPROM memory location is first
automatically erased before new data is written. If polling (RDY/BSY) is not used, the user
must wait at least tWD_EEPROM before issuing the next byte (See Table 28-16). In a chip
erased device, no 0xFFs in the data file(s) need to be programmed.
B: The EEPROM array is programmed one page at a time. The Memory page is loaded
one byte at a time by supplying the 6 LSB of the address and data together with the Load
EEPROM Memory Page instruction. The EEPROM Memory Page is stored by loading the
Write EEPROM Memory Page Instruction with the 7 MSB of the address. When using
EEPROM page access only byte locations loaded with the Load EEPROM Memory Page
Table 28-15. Pin Mapping Serial Programming
Symbol Pins I/O Description
MOSI PB3 I Serial Data in
MISO PB4 O Serial Data out
SCK PB5 I Serial Clock
RESET
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 321
instruction is altered. The remaining locations remain unchanged. If polling (RDY/BSY) is
not used, the used must wait at least tWD_EEPROM before issuing the next byte (See Table
28-16). In a chip erased device, no 0xFF in the data file(s) need to be programmed.
6. Any memory location can be verified by using the Read instruction which returns the
content at the selected address at serial output MISO.
7. At the end of the programming session, RESET can be set high to commence normal
operation.
8. Power-off sequence (if needed):
Set RESET to “1”.
Turn VCC power off.
28.8.3 Serial Programming Instruction set
Table 28-17 on page 321 and Figure 28-8 on page 323 describes the Instruction set.
Table 28-16. Typical Wait Delay Before Writing the Next Flash or EEPROM Location
Symbol Minimum Wait Delay
tWD_FLASH 4.5 ms
tWD_EEPROM 3.6 ms
tWD_ERASE 9.0 ms
Table 28-17. Serial Programming Instruction Set (Hexadecimal values)
Instruction/Operation
Instruction Format
Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte4
Programming Enable $AC $53 $00 $00
Chip Erase (Program Memory/EEPROM) $AC $80 $00 $00
Poll RDY/BSY $F0 $00 $00 data byte out
Load Instructions
Load Extended Address byte(1) $4D $00 Extended adr $00
Load Program Memory Page, High byte $48 $00 adr LSB high data byte in
Load Program Memory Page, Low byte $40 $00 adr LSB low data byte in
Load EEPROM Memory Page (page access) $C1 $00 0000 000aa data byte in
Read Instructions
Read Program Memory, High byte $28 adr MSB adr LSB high data byte out
Read Program Memory, Low byte $20 adr MSB adr LSB low data byte out
Read EEPROM Memory $A0 0000 00aa aaaa aaaa data byte out
Read Lock bits $58 $00 $00 data byte out
Read Signature Byte $30 $00 0000 000aa data byte out
Read Fuse bits $50 $00 $00 data byte out
Read Fuse High bits $58 $08 $00 data byte out
Read Extended Fuse Bits $50 $08 $00 data byte out
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 322
Notes: 1. Not all instructions are applicable for all parts.
2. a = address.
3. Bits are programmed ‘0’, unprogrammed ‘1’.
4. To ensure future compatibility, unused Fuses and Lock bits should be unprogrammed (‘1’) .
5. Refer to the correspondig section for Fuse and Lock bits, Calibration and Signature bytes and Page size.
6. Instructions accessing program memory use a word address. This address may be random within the page range.
7. See htt://www.microchip.com for Application Notes regarding programming and programmers.
If the LSB in RDY/BSY data byte out is ‘1’, a programming operation is still pending. Wait until
this bit returns ‘0’ before the next instruction is carried out.
Within the same page, the low data byte must be loaded prior to the high data byte.
After data is loaded to the page buffer, program the EEPROM page, see Figure 28-8 on page
323.
Read Calibration Byte $38 $00 $00 data byte out
Write Instructions(6)
Write Program Memory Page $4C adr MSB adr LSB $00
Write EEPROM Memory $C0 0000 00aa aaaa aaaa data byte in
Write EEPROM Memory Page (page access) $C2 0000 00aa aaaa aa00 $00
Write Lock bits $AC $E0 $00 data byte in
Write Fuse bits $AC $A0 $00 data byte in
Write Fuse High bits $AC $A8 $00 data byte in
Write Extended Fuse Bits $AC $A4 $00 data byte in
Table 28-17. Serial Programming Instruction Set (Hexadecimal values) (Continued)
Instruction/Operation
Instruction Format
Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte4
Adm/53 L} \\ mm sts @5me x55 SE Hflflflflflflfl TTTTTTTT
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 323
Figure 28-8. Serial Programming Instruction example
28.8.4 SPI Serial Programming Characteristics
Figure 28-9. Serial Programming Waveforms
For characteristics of the SPI module, refer to “SPI Timing Characteristics” on page 331.
Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4
Adr MSB
Adr LSB
Bit 15 B 0
Serial Programming Instruction
Program Memory/
EEPROM Memory
Page 0
Page 1
Page 2
Page N-1
Page Buffer
Write Program Memory Page/
Write EEPROM Memory Page
Load Program Memory Page (High/Low Byte)/
Load EEPROM Memory Page (page access)
Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4
Bit 15 B 0
Adr MSB
Adr LSB
Page Offset
Page Number
Adr
dr M
r MS
SB
A
A
Adr
dr LS
LSB
SB
MSB
MSB
LSB
LSB
SERIAL CLOCK INPUT
(SCK)
SERIAL DATA INPUT
(MOSI)
(MISO)
SAMPLE
SERIAL DATA OUTPUT
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 324
29. Electrical Characteristics
29.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings*
29.2 DC Characteristics
.
Operating Temperature. . . . . . . . . . . -55°C to +125°C *NOTICE: Stresses beyond those listed under “Absolute
Maximum Ratings” may cause permanent dam-
age to the device. This is a stress rating only and
functional operation of the device at these or
other conditions beyond those indicated in the
operational sections of this specification is not
implied. Exposure to absolute maximum rating
conditions for extended periods may affect
device reliability.
Storage Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . -65°C to +150°C
Voltage on any Pin except RESET
with respect to Ground . . . . . . . . . . -0.5V to VCC+0.5V
Voltage on RESET with respect to Ground-0.5V to +13.0V
Maximum Operating Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.0V
DC Current per I/O Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40.0 mA
DC Current VCC and GND Pins . . . . . . . . . . 200.0 mA
TA = -40C to 85C, VCC = 1.8V to 5.5V (unless otherwise noted)
Symbol Parameter Condition Min. Typ. Max. Units
VIL
Input Low Voltage, except
XTAL1 and RESET pin
VCC = 1.8V - 2.4V
VCC = 2.4V - 5.5V
-0.5
-0.5
0.2VCC(1)
0.3VCC(1) V
VIH
Input High Voltage, except
XTAL1 and RESET pins
VCC = 1.8V - 2.4V
VCC = 2.4V - 5.5V
0.7VCC(2)
0.6VCC(2)
VCC + 0.5
VCC + 0.5 V
VIL1
Input Low Voltage,
XTAL1 pin VCC = 1.8V - 5.5V -0.5 0.1VCC(1) V
VIH1
Input High Voltage,
XTAL1 pin
VCC = 1.8V - 2.4V
VCC = 2.4V - 5.5V
0.8VCC(2)
0.7VCC(2)
VCC + 0.5
VCC + 0.5 V
VIL2
Input Low Voltage,
RESET pin VCC = 1.8V - 5.5V -0.5 0.1VCC(1) V
VIH2
Input High Voltage,
RESET pin VCC = 1.8V - 5.5V 0.9VCC(2) VCC + 0.5 V
VIL3
Input Low Voltage,
RESET pin as I/O
VCC = 1.8V - 2.4V
VCC = 2.4V - 5.5V
-0.5
-0.5
0.2VCC(1)
0.3VCC(1) V
VIH3
Input High Voltage,
RESET pin as I/O
VCC = 1.8V - 2.4V
VCC = 2.4V - 5.5V
0.7VCC(2)
0.6VCC(2)
VCC + 0.5
VCC + 0.5 V
VOL
Output Low Voltage(3)
except RESET pin
IOL = 20 mA, VCC = 5V
IOL = 10 mA, VCC = 3V
0.9
0.6 V
VOH
Output High Voltage(4)
except Reset pin
IOH = -20 mA, VCC = 5V
IOH = -10 mA, VCC = 3V
4.2
2.3 V
IIL
Input Leakage
Current I/O Pin
VCC = 5.5V, pin low
(absolute value) 1µA
IIH
Input Leakage
Current I/O Pin
VCC = 5.5V, pin high
(absolute value) 1µA
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 325
Notes: 1. “Max” means the highest value where the pin is ensured to be read as low
2. “Min” means the lowest value where the pin is ensured to be read as high
3. Although each I/O port can sink more than the test conditions (20 mA at VCC = 5V, 10 mA at VCC = 3V) under steady state
conditions (non-transient), the following must be observed:
ATmega48P/88P/168P:
1] The sum of all IOL, for ports C0 - C5, ADC7, ADC6 should not exceed 100 mA.
2] The sum of all IOL, for ports B0 - B5, D5 - D7, XTAL1, XTAL2 should not exceed 100 mA.
3] The sum of all IOL, for ports D0 - D4, RESET should not exceed 100 mA.
If IOL exceeds the test condition, VOL may exceed the related specification. Pins are not ensured to sink current greater than
the listed test condition.
4. Although each I/O port can source more than the test conditions (20 mA at VCC = 5V, 10 mA at VCC = 3V) under steady state
conditions (non-transient), the following must be observed:
ATmega48P/88P/168P:
1] The sum of all IOH, for ports C0 - C5, D0- D4, ADC7, RESET should not exceed 150 mA.
2] The sum of all IOH, for ports B0 - B5, D5 - D7, ADC6, XTAL1, XTAL2 should not exceed 150 mA.
If IIOH exceeds the test condition, VOH may exceed the related specification. Pins are not ensured to source current greater
than the listed test condition.
29.2.1 ATmega48P DC Characteristics
Notes: 1. Values with “Minimizing Power Consumption” on page10.10 enabled (0xFF).
RRST Reset Pull-up Resistor 30 60 k
RPU I/O Pin Pull-up Resistor 20 50 k
VACIO
Analog Comparator
Input Offset Voltage
VCC = 5V
Vin = VCC/2 <10 40 mV
IACLK
Analog Comparator
Input Leakage Current
VCC = 5V
Vin = VCC/2 -50 50 nA
tACID
Analog Comparator
Propagation Delay
VCC = 2.7V
VCC = 4.0V
750
500 ns
TA = -40C to 85C, VCC = 1.8V to 5.5V (unless otherwise noted) (Continued)
Symbol Parameter Condition Min. Typ. Max. Units
TA = -40C to 85C, VCC = 1.8V to 5.5V (unless otherwise noted)
Symbol Parameter Condition Min. Typ.(2) Max. Units
ICC
Power Supply Current(1)
Active 1 MHz, VCC = 2V 0.3 0.5 mA
Active 4 MHz, VCC = 3V 1.9 2.5 mA
Active 8 MHz, VCC = 5V 6.8 9 mA
Idle 1 MHz, VCC = 2V 0.06 0.15 mA
Idle 4 MHz, VCC = 3V 0.4 0.7 mA
Idle 8 MHz, VCC = 5V 1.6 2.7 mA
Power-save mode(3)(4)
32 kHz TOSC enabled,
VCC = 1.8V 0.75 1.6 µA
32 kHz TOSC enabled,
VCC = 3V 0.85 2.6 µA
Power-down mode(3) WDT enabled, VCC = 3V 4.2 8 µA
WDT disabled, VCC = 3V 0.18 2 µA
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 326
2. Typical values at 25C. Maximum values are test limits in production.
3. The current consumption values include input leakage current.
4. Maximum values are characterized values and not test limits in production.
29.2.2 ATmega88P DC Characteristics
Notes: 1. Values with “Minimizing Power Consumption” on page10.10 enabled (0xFF).
2. Typical values at 25C. Maximum values are test limits in production.
3. The current consumption values include input leakage current.
4. Maximum values are characterized values and not test limits in production.
TA = -40C to 85C, VCC = 1.8V to 5.5V (unless otherwise noted)
Symbol Parameter Condition Min. Typ.(2) Max. Units
ICC
Power Supply Current(1)
Active 1 MHz, VCC = 2V 0.3 0.5 mA
Active 4 MHz, VCC = 3V 1.7 2.5 mA
Active 8 MHz, VCC = 5V 6.3 9 mA
Idle 1 MHz, VCC = 2V 0.05 0.15 mA
Idle 4 MHz, VCC = 3V 0.3 0.7 mA
Idle 8 MHz, VCC = 5V 1.4 2.7 mA
Power-save mode(3)(4)
32 kHz TOSC enabled,
VCC = 1.8V 0.72 1.6 µA
32 kHz TOSC enabled,
VCC = 3V 0.9 2.6 µA
Power-down mode(3) WDT enabled, VCC = 3V 4.4 8 µA
WDT disabled, VCC = 3V 0.2 2 µA
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 327
29.2.3 ATmega168P DC Characteristics
Notes: 1. Values with “Minimizing Power Consumption” on page10.10 enabled (0xFF).
2. Typical values at 25C. Maximum values are test limits in production.
3. The current consumption values include input leakage current.
4. Maximum values are characterized values and not test limits in production.
29.3 Speed Grades
Maximum frequency is dependent on VCC. As shown in Figure 29-1 and Figure 29-2, the
Maximum Frequency vs. VCC curve is linear between 1.8V < VCC < 2.7V and between 2.7V <
VCC < 4.5V.
Figure 29-1. Maximum Frequency vs. VCC, ATmega48P/88P/168PV
TA = -40C to 85C, VCC = 1.8V to 5.5V (unless otherwise noted)
Symbol Parameter Condition Min. Typ.(2) Max. Units
ICC
Power Supply Current(1)
Active 1 MHz, VCC = 2V 0.3 0.5 mA
Active 4 MHz, VCC = 3V 1.8 2.5 mA
Active 8 MHz, VCC = 5V 6.7 9 mA
Idle 1 MHz, VCC = 2V 0.06 0.15 mA
Idle 4 MHz, VCC = 3V 0.4 0.7 mA
Idle 8 MHz, VCC = 5V 1.7 2.7 mA
Power-save mode(3)(4)
32 kHz TOSC enabled,
VCC = 1.8V 0.8 1.6 µA
32 kHz TOSC enabled,
VCC = 3V 0.9 2.6 µA
Power-down mode(3) WDT enabled, VCC = 3V 4.6 8 µA
WDT disabled, VCC = 3V 0.1 2 µA
4 MHz
1.8V 2.7V 4.5V
10 MHz
20 MHz
5.5V
Safe Operating Area
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 328
Figure 29-2. Maximum Frequency vs. VCC, ATmega48P/88P/168P
4 MHz
1.8V 2.7V 4.5V
10 MHz
20 MHz
5.5V
Safe Operating Area
‘chx
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 329
29.4 Clock Characteristics
29.4.1 Calibrated Internal RC Oscillator Accuracy
Notes: 1. Voltage range for ATmega48PV/88PV/168PV.
2. Voltage range for ATmega48P/88P/168P.
29.4.2 External Clock Drive Waveforms
Figure 29-3. External Clock Drive Waveforms
29.4.3 External Clock Drive
Note: All DC Characteristics contained in this datasheet are based on simulation and characterization of other AVR microcontrollers
manufactured in the same process technology. These values are preliminary values representing design targets, and will be
updated after characterization of actual silicon.
Table 29-1. Calibration Accuracy of Internal RC Oscillator
Frequency VCC Temperature Calibration Accuracy
Factory
Calibration 8.0 MHz 3V 25C±10%
User
Calibration 7.3 - 8.1 MHz 1.8V - 5.5V(1)
2.7V - 5.5V(2) -40C - 85C±1%
V
IL1
V
IH1
Table 29-2. External Clock Drive
Symbol Parameter
VCC=1.8-5.5V VCC=2.7-5.5V VCC=4.5-5.5V
UnitsMin. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.
1/tCLCL Oscillator Frequency 0 4 0 10 0 20 MHz
tCLCL Clock Period 250 100 50 ns
tCHCX High Time 100 40 20 ns
tCLCX Low Time 100 40 20 ns
tCLCH Rise Time 2.0 1.6 0.5 s
tCHCL Fall Time 2.0 1.6 0.5 s
tCLCL
Change in period from
one clock cycle to the
next
22 2%
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 330
29.5 System and Reset Characteristics
Notes: 1. Values are guidelines only.
2. The Power-on Reset will not work unless the supply voltage has been below VPOT (falling).
Notes: 1. VBOT may be below nominal minimum operating voltage for some devices. For devices where this is the case, the device is
tested down to VCC = VBOT during the production test. This ensures that a Brown-Out Reset will occur before VCC drops to a
voltage where correct operation of the microcontroller is no longer ensured. The test is performed using BODLEVEL = 110
and BODLEVEL = 101 for ATmega48P/88P/168PV, and BODLEVEL = 101 and BODLEVEL = 100 for
ATmega48P/88P/168P.
Table 29-3. Reset, Brown-out and Internal Voltage Characteristics(1)
Symbol Parameter Min Typ Max Units
VPOT
Power-on Reset Threshold Voltage (rising) 1.1 1.4 1.6 V
Power-on Reset Threshold Voltage (falling)(2) 0.6 1.3 1.6 V
SRON Power-on Slope Rate 0.01 10 V/ms
VRST RESET Pin Threshold Voltage 0.2 VCC 0.9 VCC V
tRST Minimum pulse width on RESET Pin 2.5 µs
VHYST Brown-out Detector Hysteresis 50 mV
tBOD Min Pulse Width on Brown-out Reset 2 µs
VBG Bandgap reference voltage VCC=2.7
TA=25°C 1.0 1.1 1.2 V
tBG Bandgap reference start-up time VCC=2.7
TA=25°C 40 70 µs
IBG Bandgap reference current consumption VCC=2.7
TA=25°C 10 µA
Table 29-4. BODLEVEL Fuse Coding(1)
BODLEVEL 2:0 Fuses Min VBOT Typ VBOT Max VBOT Units
111 BOD Disabled
110 1.7 1.8 2.0
V101 2.5 2.7 2.9
100 4.1 4.3 4.5
011
Reserved
010
001
000
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 331
29.6 SPI Timing Characteristics
See Figure 29-4 and Figure 29-5 for details.
Note: 1. In SPI Programming mode the minimum SCK high/low period is:
- 2 tCLCL for fCK < 12 MHz
- 3 tCLCL for fCK > 12 MHz
2. All DC Characteristics contained in this datasheet are based on simulation and
characterization of other AVR microcontrollers manufactured in the same process technology.
These values are preliminary values representing design targets, and will be updated after
characterization of actual silicon.
Table 29-5. SPI Timing Parameters
Description Mode Min Typ Max
1 SCK period Master See Table 19-5
ns
2 SCK high/low Master 50% duty cycle
3 Rise/Fall time Master 3.6
4 Setup Master 10
5 Hold Master 10
6 Out to SCK Master 0.5 • tsck
7 SCK to out Master 10
8 SCK to out high Master 10
9SS
low to out Slave 15
10 SCK period Slave 4 • tck
11 SCK high/low(1) Slave 2 • tck
12 Rise/Fall time Slave 1600
13 Setup Slave 10
14 Hold Slave tck
15 SCK to out Slave 15
16 SCK to SS high Slave 20
17 SS high to tri-state Slave 10
18 SS low to SCK Slave 20
r NM L
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 332
Figure 29-4. SPI Interface Timing Requirements (Master Mode)
Figure 29-5. SPI Interface Timing Requirements (Slave Mode)
MOSI
(Data Output)
SCK
(CPOL = 1)
MISO
(Data Input)
SCK
(CPOL = 0)
SS
MSB LSB
LSBMSB
...
...
61
22
345
8
7
MISO
(Data Output)
SCK
(CPOL = 1)
MOSI
(Data Input)
SCK
(CPOL = 0)
SS
MSB LSB
LSBMSB
...
...
10
11 11
1213 14
17
15
9
X
16
V 7 0.4V fl V 7 0.4V fl
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 333
29.7 2-wire Serial Interface Characteristics
Table 29-6 describes the requirements for devices connected to the 2-wire Serial Bus. The ATmega48P/88P/168P 2-wire
Serial Interface meets or exceeds these requirements under the noted conditions.
Timing symbols refer to Figure 29-6.
Notes: 1. In ATmega48P/88P/168P, this parameter is characterized and not 100% tested.
Table 29-6. 2-wire Serial Bus Requirements
Symbol Parameter Condition Min Max Units
VIL Input Low-voltage -0.5 0.3 VCC V
VIH Input High-voltage 0.7 VCC VCC + 0.5 V
Vhys(1) Hysteresis of Schmitt Trigger Inputs 0.05 VCC(2) –V
VOL(1) Output Low-voltage 3 mA sink current 0 0.4 V
tr(1) Rise Time for both SDA and SCL 20 + 0.1Cb(3)(2) 300 ns
tof(1) Output Fall Time from VIHmin to VILmax 10 pF < Cb < 400 pF(3) 20 + 0.1Cb(3)(2) 250 ns
tSP(1) Spikes Suppressed by Input Filter 0 50(2) ns
IiInput Current each I/O Pin 0.1VCC < Vi < 0.9VCC -10 10 µA
Ci(1) Capacitance for each I/O Pin – 10 pF
fSCL SCL Clock Frequency fCK(4) > max(16fSCL, 250kHz)(5) 0 400 kHz
Rp Value of Pull-up resistor
fSCL 100 kHz
fSCL > 100 kHz
tHD;STA Hold Time (repeated) START Condition fSCL 100 kHz 4.0 – µs
fSCL > 100 kHz 0.6 – µs
tLOW Low Period of the SCL Clock fSCL 100 kHz 4.7 – µs
fSCL > 100 kHz 1.3 – µs
tHIGH High period of the SCL clock fSCL 100 kHz 4.0 – µs
fSCL > 100 kHz 0.6 – µs
tSU;STA Set-up time for a repeated START condition fSCL 100 kHz 4.7 – µs
fSCL > 100 kHz 0.6 – µs
tHD;DAT Data hold time fSCL 100 kHz 0 3.45 µs
fSCL > 100 kHz 0 0.9 µs
tSU;DAT Data setup time fSCL 100 kHz 250 – ns
fSCL > 100 kHz 100 – ns
tSU;STO Setup time for STOP condition fSCL 100 kHz 4.0 – µs
fSCL > 100 kHz 0.6 – µs
tBUF
Bus free time between a STOP and START
condition
fSCL 100 kHz 4.7 – µs
fSCL > 100 kHz 1.3 – µs
VCC 0,4V–
3mA
----------------------------
1000ns
Cb
-----------------
VCC 0,4V–
3mA
----------------------------
300ns
Cb
--------------
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 334
2. Required only for fSCL > 100 kHz.
3. Cb = capacitance of one bus line in pF.
4. fCK = CPU clock frequency
5. This requirement applies to all ATmega48P/88P/168P 2-wire Serial Interface operation. Other devices connected to the 2-
wire Serial Bus need only obey the general fSCL requirement.
Figure 29-6. 2-wire Serial Bus Timing
t
SU;STA
t
LOW
t
HIGH
t
LOW
t
of
t
HD;STA
t
HD;DAT
t
SU;DAT
t
SU;STO
t
BUF
SCL
SDA
t
r
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 335
29.8 ADC Characteristics – Preliminary Data
Note: 1. AVCC absolute min/max: 1.8V/5.5V
Table 29-7. ADC Characteristics
Symbol Parameter Condition Min Typ Max Units
Resolution 10 Bits
Absolute accuracy (Including
INL, DNL, quantization error,
gain and offset error)
VREF = 4V, VCC = 4V,
ADC clock = 200 kHz 2LSB
VREF = 4V, VCC = 4V,
ADC clock = 1 MHz 4.5 LSB
VREF = 4V, VCC = 4V,
ADC clock = 200 kHz
Noise Reduction Mode
2LSB
VREF = 4V, VCC = 4V,
ADC clock = 1 MHz
Noise Reduction Mode
4.5 LSB
Integral Non-Linearity (INL) VREF = 4V, VCC = 4V,
ADC clock = 200 kHz 0.5 LSB
Differential Non-Linearity
(DNL)
VREF = 4V, VCC = 4V,
ADC clock = 200 kHz 0.25 LSB
Gain Error VREF = 4V, VCC = 4V,
ADC clock = 200 kHz 2LSB
Offset Error VREF = 4V, VCC = 4V,
ADC clock = 200 kHz 2LSB
Conversion Time Free Running Conversion 13 260 µs
Clock Frequency 50 1000 kHz
AVCC(1) Analog Supply Voltage VCC - 0.3 VCC + 0.3 V
VREF Reference Voltage 1.0 AVCC V
VIN Input Voltage GND VREF V
Input Bandwidth 38.5 kHz
VINT Internal Voltage Reference 1.0 1.1 1.2 V
RREF Reference Input Resistance 32 k
RAIN Analog Input Resistance 100 M
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 336
29.9 Parallel Programming Characteristics
Notes: 1. tWLRH is valid for the Write Flash, Write EEPROM, Write Fuse bits and Write Lock bits
commands.
2. tWLRH_CE is valid for the Chip Erase command.
Table 29-8. Parallel Programming Characteristics, VCC = 5V ± 10%
Symbol Parameter Min Typ Max Units
VPP Programming Enable Voltage 11.5 12.5 V
IPP Programming Enable Current 250 A
tDVXH Data and Control Valid before XTAL1 High 67 ns
tXLXH XTAL1 Low to XTAL1 High 200 ns
tXHXL XTAL1 Pulse Width High 150 ns
tXLDX Data and Control Hold after XTAL1 Low 67 ns
tXLWL XTAL1 Low to WR Low 0 ns
tXLPH XTAL1 Low to PAGEL high 0 ns
tPLXH PAGEL low to XTAL1 high 150 ns
tBVPH BS1 Valid before PAGEL High 67 ns
tPHPL PAGEL Pulse Width High 150 ns
tPLBX BS1 Hold after PAGEL Low 67 ns
tWLBX BS2/1 Hold after WR Low 67 ns
tPLWL PAGEL Low to WR Low 67 ns
tBVWL BS1 Valid to WR Low 67 ns
tWLWH WR Pulse Width Low 150 ns
tWLRL WR Low to RDY/BSY Low 0 1 s
tWLRH WR Low to RDY/BSY High(1) 3.7 4.5 ms
tWLRH_CE WR Low to RDY/BSY High for Chip Erase(2) 7.5 9 ms
tXLOL XTAL1 Low to OE Low 0 ns
tBVDV BS1 Valid to DATA valid 0 250 ns
tOLDV OE Low to DATA Valid 250 ns
tOHDZ OE High to DATA Tri-stated 250 ns
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 337
Figure 29-7. Parallel Programming Timing, Including some General Timing Requirements
Figure 29-8. Parallel Programming Timing, Loading Sequence with Timing Requirements(1)
Note: 1. The timing requirements shown in Figure 29-7 (i.e., tDVXH, tXHXL, and tXLDX) also apply to load-
ing operation.
Figure 29-9. Parallel Programming Timing, Reading Sequence (within the Same Page) with
Timing Requirements(1)
Note: 1. The timing requirements shown in Figure 29-7 (i.e., tDVXH, tXHXL, and tXLDX) also apply to read-
ing operation.
Data & Contol
(DATA, XA0/1, BS1, BS2)
XTAL1
t
XHXL
t
WLWH
t
DVXH
t
XLDX
t
PLWL
t
WLRH
WR
RDY/BSY
PAGEL
t
PHPL
t
PLBX
t
BVPH
t
XLWL
t
WLBX
t
BVWL
WLRL
XTAL1
PAGEL
t
PLXH
XLXH
tt
XLPH
ADDR0 (Low Byte) DATA (Low Byte) DATA (High Byte) ADDR1 (Low Byte)
DATA
BS1
XA0
XA1
LOAD ADDRESS
(LOW BYTE) LOAD DATA
(LOW BYTE) LOAD DATA
(HIGH BYTE)
LOAD DATA
LOAD ADDRESS
(LOW BYTE)
XTAL1
OE
ADDR0 (Low Byte) DATA (Low Byte) DATA (High Byte) ADDR1 (Low Byte)
DATA
BS1
XA0
XA1
LOAD ADDRESS
(LOW BYTE) READ DATA
(LOW BYTE) READ DATA
(HIGH BYTE) LOAD ADDRESS
(LOW BYTE)
t
BVDV
t
OLDV
t
XLOL
t
OHDZ
\\\ \\\\ \\ \\
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 338
30. Typical Characteristics
The following charts show typical behavior. These figures are not tested during manufacturing.
All current consumption measurements are performed with all I/O pins configured as inputs and
with internal pull-ups enabled. A square wave generator with rail-to-rail output is used as clock
source.
All Active- and Idle current consumption measurements are done with all bits in the PRR register
set and thus, the corresponding I/O modules are turned off. Also the Analog Comparator is
disabled during these measurements. The “Supply Current of IO Modules” on page 343, page
367 and page 391 shows the additional current consumption compared to ICC Active and ICC Idle
for every I/O module controlled by the Power Reduction Register. See “Power Reduction
Register” on page 51 for details.
The power consumption in Power-down mode is independent of clock selection.
The current consumption is a function of several factors such as: operating voltage, operating
frequency, loading of I/O pins, switching rate of I/O pins, code executed and ambient
temperature. The dominating factors are operating voltage and frequency.
The current drawn from capacitive loaded pins may be estimated (for one pin) as CL*VCC*f where
CL = load capacitance, VCC = operating voltage and f = average switching frequency of I/O pin.
The parts are characterized at frequencies higher than test limits. Parts are not ensured to
function properly at frequencies higher than the ordering code indicates.
The difference between current consumption in Power-down mode with Watchdog Timer
enabled and Power-down mode with Watchdog Timer disabled represents the differential
current drawn by the Watchdog Timer.
30.1 ATmega48P Typical Characteristics
30.1.1 Active Supply Current
Figure 30-1. Active Supply Current vs. Low Frequency (0.1-1.0 MHz).
5.5 V
5.0 V
4.5 V
4.0 V
3.3 V
2.7 V
1.8 V
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1
1.2
1.4
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
Frequency (MHz)
I
CC
(mA)
‘\ \\\ ‘\\ cc
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 339
Figure 30-2. Active Supply Current vs. Frequency (1 - 20 MHz).
Figure 30-3. Active Supply Current vs. VCC (Internal RC Oscillator, 128 kHz).
5.5 V
5.0 V
4.5 V
0
4
8
12
16
20
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
Frequency (MHz)
I
CC
(mA)
1.8 V
2.7 V
3.3 V
4.0 V
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
0.02
0.04
0.06
0.08
0.1
0.12
0.14
0.16
0.18
1.522.533.544.555.5
V
CC
(V)
I
CC
(mA)
cc cc
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 340
Figure 30-4. Active Supply Current vs. VCC (Internal RC Oscillator, 1 MHz).
Figure 30-5. Active Supply Current vs. VCC (Internal RC Oscillator, 8 MHz).
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
2
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
V
CC
(V)
I
CC
(mA)
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
V
CC
(V)
ICC (mA)
éééé/
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 341
30.1.2 Idle Supply Current
Figure 30-6. Idle Supply Current vs. Low Frequency (0.1-1.0 MHz).
Figure 30-7. Idle Supply Current vs. Frequency (1-20 MHz).
5.5 V
5.0 V
4.5 V
4.0 V
3.3 V
2.7 V
1.8 V
0
0.05
0.1
0.15
0.2
0.25
0.3
0.35
0.4
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
Frequency (MHz)
I
CC
(mA)
5.5 V
5.0 V
4.5 V
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
0 2 4 6 8 101214161820
Frequency (MHz)
I
CC
(mA)
1.8V
2.7V
3.3V
4.0V
cc cc //
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 342
Figure 30-8. Idle Supply Current vs. VCC (Internal RC Oscillator, 128 kHz).
Figure 30-9. Idle Supply Current vs. VCC (Internal RC Oscillator, 1 MHz).
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
0.01
0.02
0.03
0.04
0.05
0.06
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
V
CC
(V)
I
CC
(mA)
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
V
CC
(V)
I
CC
(mA)
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 343
Figure 30-10. Idle Supply Current vs. Vcc (Internal RC Oscillator, 8 MHz).
30.1.3 Supply Current of IO Modules
The tables and formulas below can be used to calculate the additional current consumption for
the different I/O modules in Active and Idle mode. The enabling or disabling of the I/O modules
are controlled by the Power Reduction Register. See “Power Reduction Register” on page 51 for
details.
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
0.5
1
1.5
2
2.5
3
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
V
CC
(V)
I
CC
(mA)
Table 30-1. Additional Current Consumption for the different I/O modules (absolute values)
PRR bit Typical numbers
VCC = 2V, F = 1MHz VCC = 3V, F = 4MHz VCC = 5V, F = 8MHz
PRUSART0 5.58 uA 35.6 uA 136.5 uA
PRTWI 8.97 uA 57.0 uA 231.5 uA
PRTIM2 9.84 uA 64.7 uA 263.5 uA
PRTIM1 9.80 uA 62.8 uA 247.9 uA
PRTIM0 2.31 uA 15.3 uA 60.9 uA
PRSPI 7.88 uA 51.9 uA 215.7 uA
PRADC 9.35 uA 60.5 uA 237.7 uA
I =0,()55mA (l \ (LIGI '0,155 \ 0134)=0080mA
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 344
It is possible to calculate the typical current consumption based on the numbers from Table 30-2
on page 344 for other VCC and frequency settings than listed in Table 30-1 on page 343.
Example Calculate the expected current consumption in idle mode with TIMER1, ADC, and SPI enabled
at VCC = 2.0V and F = 1MHz. From Table 30-2 on page 344, third column, we see that we need
to add 16.1% for the TIMER1, 15.5% for the ADC, and 13.4% for the SPI module. Reading from
Figure 30-6 on page 341, we find that the idle current consumption is ~0.055 mA at VCC = 2.0V
and F = 1MHz. The total current consumption in idle mode with TIMER1, ADC, and SPI enabled,
gives:
30.1.4 Power-down Supply Current
Figure 30-11. Power-Down Supply Current vs. VCC (Watchdog Timer Disabled).
Table 30-2. Additional Current Consumption (percentage) in Active and Idle mode
PRR bit
Additional Current consumption
compared to Active with external
clock (see Figure 30-1 on page
338 and Figure 30-2 on page 339)
Additional Current consumption
compared to Idle with external
clock (see Figure 30-6 on page
341 and Figure 30-7 on page 341)
PRUSART0 1.9% 9.1%
PRTWI 3.1% 14.8%
PRTIM2 3.5% 16.6%
PRTIM1 3.4% 16.1%
PRTIM0 0.8% 3.9%
PRSPI 2.8% 13.4%
PRADC 3.3% 15.5%
ICCtotal 0.055 mA (1 + 0.161 + 0.155 + 0.134)0.080 mA
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
V
CC
(V)
I
CC
(uA)
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 345
Figure 30-12. Power-Down Supply Current vs. VCC (Watchdog Timer Enabled).
30.1.5 Power-save Supply Current
Figure 30-13. Power-Save Supply Current vs. VCC (Watchdog Timer Disabled and 32 kHz Crystal
Oscillator Running).
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
V
CC
(V)
I
CC
(uA)
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8 2.3 2.8 3.3 3.8 4.3 4.8 5.3 5.8
V
CC
(V)
I
CC
(uA)
25 °C
Wm: es
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 346
30.1.6 Standby Supply Current
Figure 30-14. Standby Supply Current vs. Vcc (Watchdog Timer Disabled).
30.1.7 Pin Pull-Up
Figure 30-15. I/O Pin Pull-up Resistor Current vs. Input Voltage (VCC = 1.8 V).
6MHz_xtal
6MHz_res
4MHz_xtal
4MHz_res
450kHz_res
2MHz_xtal
2MHz_res
0
0.02
0.04
0.06
0.08
0.1
0.12
0.14
0.16
0.18
0.2
1.8 2.3 2.8 3.3 3.8 4.3 4.8 5.3 5.8
V
CC
(V)
I
CC
(mA)
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3
V
OP
(V)
I
OP
(uA)
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
Wm: Wm:
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 347
Figure 30-16. I/O Pin Pull-up Resistor Current vs. Input Voltage (VCC = 2.7 V).
Figure 30-17. I/O Pin Pull-up Resistor Current vs. Input Voltage (VCC = 5 V).
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3
V
OP
(V)
I
OP
(uA)
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
0123456
V
OP
(V)
I
OP
(uA)
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
9 Wm: 9 Wm:
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 348
Figure 30-18. Reset Pull-up Resistor Current vs. Reset Pin Voltage (VCC = 1.8 V).
Figure 30-19. Reset Pull-up Resistor Current vs. Reset Pin Voltage (VCC = 2.7 V).
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
-5
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2
V
RESET
(V)
I
RESET
(uA)
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
-10
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3
VRESET (V)
IRESET (uA)
9 Wm: Wee
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 349
Figure 30-20. Reset Pull-up Resistor Current vs. Reset Pin Voltage (VCC = 5 V).
30.1.8 Pin Driver Strength
Figure 30-21. I/O Pin Output Voltage vs. Sink Current (VCC = 3 V).
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
-20
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
0123456
VRESET (V)
IRESET (uA)
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1
I
OL
(mA)
V
OL
(V)
Wee
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 350
Figure 30-22. I/O Pin Output Voltage vs. Sink Current (VCC = 5 V).
Figure 30-23. I/O Pin Output Voltage vs. Source Current (Vcc = 3 V).
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0 5 10 15 20 25
I
OL
(mA)
V
OL
(V)
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
0.5
1
1.5
2
2.5
3
3.5
0 5 10 15 20 25
I
OH
(mA)
V
OH
(V)
"NVcc Vcc m
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 351
Figure 30-24. I/O Pin Output Voltage vs. Source Current(VCC = 5 V).
30.1.9 Pin Threshold and Hysteresis
Figure 30-25. I/O Pin Input Threshold Voltage vs. VCC (VIH, I/O Pin read as ‘1’).
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
5
5.1
0 5 10 15 20 25
I
OH
(mA)
V
OH
(V)
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
0.5
1
1.5
2
2.5
3
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
Threshold (V)
u. vs. Vcc
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 352
Figure 30-26. I/O Pin Input Threshold Voltage vs. VCC (VIL, I/O Pin read as ‘0’).
Figure 30-27. I/O Pin Input Hysteresis vs. VCC.
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
0.5
1
1.5
2
2.5
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
Threshold (V)
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
V
CC
(V)
Input Hysteresis (mV)
cc Vm cc Vn. \\
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 353
Figure 30-28. Reset Input Threshold Voltage vs. VCC (VIH, I/O Pin read as ‘1’).
Figure 30-29. Reset Input Threshold Voltage vs. VCC (VIL, I/O Pin read as ‘0’).
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
0.5
1
1.5
2
2.5
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
V
CC
(V)
Threshold (V)
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
0.5
1
1.5
2
2.5
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
V
CC
(V)
Threshold (V)
cc
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 354
Figure 30-30. Reset Pin Input Hysteresis vs. VCC.
30.1.10 BOD Threshold
Figure 30-31. BOD Thresholds vs. Temperature (BODLEVEL is 1.8 V).
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
V
CC
(V)
Input Hysteresis (mV)
1.7
1.72
1.74
1.76
1.78
1.8
1.82
1.84
1.86
1.88
1.9
-50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Temperature (
°
C)
Threshold (V)
Rising Vcc
Falling Vcc
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 355
Figure 30-32. BOD Thresholds vs. Temperature (BODLEVEL is 2.7 V).
Figure 30-33. BOD Thresholds vs. Temperature (BODLEVEL is 4.3 V).
2.6
2.65
2.7
2.75
2.8
2.85
2.9
-50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Temperature (
°
C)
Threshold (V)
Rising Vcc
Falling Vcc
4.2
4.25
4.3
4.35
4.4
4.45
4.5
-50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Temperature (
°
C)
Threshold (V)
Rising Vcc
Falling Vcc
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 356
30.1.11 Internal Oscilllator Speed
Figure 30-34. Watchdog Oscillator Frequency vs. Temperature.
Figure 30-35. Watchdog Oscillator Frequency vs. VCC.
5.5 V
4.5 V
4.0 V
3.3 V
2.7 V
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
-50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Temperature
(
°
C)
F
RC
(kHz)
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
V
CC
(V)
F
RC
(kHz)
cc \ \
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 357
Figure 30-36. Calibrated 8 MHz RC Oscillator Frequency vs. VCC.
Figure 30-37. Calibrated 8 MHz RC Oscillator Frequency vs. Temperature.
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
7.6
7.7
7.8
7.9
8
8.1
8.2
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
V
CC
(V)
F
RC
(MHz)
5.0 V
3.0 V
7.8
7.85
7.9
7.95
8
8.05
8.1
8.15
8.2
-50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Temperature
(
°
C)
F
RC
(MHz)
\ \ \\ cc AVEE \\ \\
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 358
Figure 30-38. Calibrated 8 MHz RC Oscillator Frequency vs. OSCCAL Value.
30.1.12 Current Consumption of Peripheral Units
Figure 30-39. ADC Current vs. VCC (AREF = AVCC).
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
0 16 32 48 64 80 96 112 128 144 160 176 192 208 224 240
OSCCAL (X1)
F
RC
(MHz)
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
50
100
150
200
250
300
350
400
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
V
CC
(V)
ICC (uA)
cc
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 359
Figure 30-40. Analog Comparator Current vs. VCC.
Figure 30-41. AREF External Reference Current vs. VCC.
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
1.522.533.544.555.5
V
CC
(V)
I
CC
(uA)
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
180
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
I
CC
(uA)
cc t’ VCC \\V/~
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 360
Figure 30-42. Brownout Detector Current vs. VCC.
Figure 30-43. Programming Current vs. VCC.
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
V
CC
(V)
I
CC
(uA)
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
I
CC
(mA)
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 361
30.1.13 Current Consumption in Reset and Reset Pulsewidth
Figure 30-44. Reset Supply Current vs. Low Frequency (0.1 - 1.0 MHz).
Figure 30-45. Reset Supply Current vs. Frequency (1 - 20 MHz).
5.5 V
4.5 V
4.0 V
3.3 V
2.7 V
1.8 V
0
0.05
0.1
0.15
0.2
0.25
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
Frequency (MHz)
I
CC
(mA)
5.5 V
4.5 V
0
0.5
1
1.5
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
4.5
02468101214161820
Frequency (MHz)
I
CC
(mA)
4.0 V
3.3 V
2.7 V
1.8 V
cc \\\\
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 362
Figure 30-46. Minimum Reset Pulse width vs. VCC.
30.2 ATmega88P Typical Characteristics
30.2.1 Active Supply Current
Figure 30-47. Active Supply Current vs. Low Frequency (0.1-1.0 MHz).
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
1400
1600
1800
1.5 2 2.5 33.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC
(V)
Pulsewidth (ns)
5.5 V
4.5 V
4.0 V
3.3 V
2.7 V
1.8 V
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1
1.2
1.4
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
Frequency (MHz)
I
CC
(mA)
cc
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 363
Figure 30-48. Active Supply Current vs. Frequency (1-20 MHz).
Figure 30-49. Active Supply Current vs. VCC (Internal RC Oscillator, 128 kHz).
5.5 V
4.5 V
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
02468101214161820
Frequency (MHz)
I
CC
(mA)
4 V
3.3 V
2.7 V
1.8 V
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
0.05
0.1
0.15
0.2
0.25
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
V
CC
(V)
I
CC
(mA)
cc cc
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 364
Figure 30-50. Active Supply Current vs. VCC (Internal RC Oscillator, 1 MHz).
Figure 30-51. Active Supply Current vs. VCC (Internal RC Oscillator, 8 MHz).
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
2
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
ICC (mA)
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
I
CC
(mA)
/ / / / // / /// // // //// /:: ///
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 365
30.2.2 Idle Supply Current
Figure 30-52. Idle Supply Current vs. Low Frequency (0.1-1.0 MHz).
Figure 30-53. Idle Supply Current vs. Frequency (1-20 MHz).
5.5 V
4.5 V
4.0 V
3.3 V
2.7 V
1.8 V
0
0.05
0.1
0.15
0.2
0.25
0.3
0.35
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
Frequency (MHz)
I
CC
(mA)
5.5 V
4.5 V
0
0.5
1
1.5
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
4.5
5
0 2 4 6 8 101214161820
Frequency (MHz)
I
CC
(mA)
4 V
3.3 V
2.7 V
1.8 V
W
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 366
Figure 30-54. Idle Supply Current vs. VCC (Internal RC Oscillator, 128 kHz).
Figure 30-55. Idle Supply Current vs. VCC (Internal RC Oscillator, 1 MHz).
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
0.005
0.01
0.015
0.02
0.025
0.03
0.035
0.04
0.045
0.05
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
V
CC
(V)
I
CC
(mA)
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
V
CC
(V)
I
CC
(mA)
\ \
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 367
Figure 30-56. Idle Supply Current vs. Vcc (Internal RC Oscillator, 8 MHz).
30.2.3 Supply Current of IO Modules
The tables and formulas below can be used to calculate the additional current consumption for
the different I/O modules in Active and Idle mode. The enabling or disabling of the I/O modules
are controlled by the Power Reduction Register. See “Power Reduction Register” on page 51 for
details.
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
0.5
1
1.5
2
2.5
3
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
V
CC
(V)
I
CC
(mA)
Table 30-3. Additional Current Consumption for the different I/O modules (absolute values)
PRR bit Typical numbers
VCC = 2V, F = 1MHz VCC = 3V, F = 4MHz VCC = 5V, F = 8MHz
PRUSART0 4.12 uA 26.7 uA 108.3 uA
PRTWI 8.96 uA 58.6 uA 238.2 uA
PRTIM2 9.94 uA 64.1 uA 256.3 uA
PRTIM1 8.81 uA 56.9 uA 227.0 uA
PRTIM0 2.29 uA 15.5 uA 62.3 uA
PRSPI 8.31 uA 56.8 uA 260.4 uA
PRADC 9.27 uA 58.4 uA 230.8 uA
Table 30-4. Additional Current Consumption (percentage) in Active and Idle mode
PRR bit
Additional Current consumption
compared to Active with external
clock (see Figure 30-47 on page
362 and Figure 30-48 on page
363)
Additional Current consumption
compared to Idle with external
clock (see Figure 30-52 on page
365 and Figure 30-53 on page
365)
PRUSART0 1.3% 8.0%
PRTWI 2.9% 17.6%
PRTIM2 3.2% 19.2%
I =0,()55mA (l \ ().|70 - 0,176 \ 0175)=0084mA
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 368
It is possible to calculate the typical current consumption based on the numbers from Table 30-4
on page 367 for other VCC and frequency settings than listed in Table 30-3 on page 367.
Example Calculate the expected current consumption in idle mode with TIMER1, ADC, and SPI enabled
at VCC = 2.0V and F = 1MHz. From Table 30-4 on page 367, third column, we see that we need
to add 17.0% for the TIMER1, 17.6% for the ADC, and 17.5% for the SPI module. Reading from
Figure 30-52 on page 365, we find that the idle current consumption is ~0.055 mA at VCC = 2.0V
and F = 1MHz. The total current consumption in idle mode with TIMER1, ADC, and SPI enabled,
gives:
30.2.4 Power-down Supply Current
Figure 30-57. Power-Down Supply Current vs. VCC (Watchdog Timer Disabled).
PRTIM1 2.8% 17.0%
PRTIM0 0.8% 4.6%
PRSPI 3.0% 17.5%
PRADC 2.9% 17.6%
Table 30-4. Additional Current Consumption (percentage) in Active and Idle mode (Continued)
PRR bit
Additional Current consumption
compared to Active with external
clock (see Figure 30-47 on page
362 and Figure 30-48 on page
363)
Additional Current consumption
compared to Idle with external
clock (see Figure 30-52 on page
365 and Figure 30-53 on page
365)
ICCtotal 0.055 mA (1 + 0.170 + 0.176 + 0.175)0.084 mA
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
2
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
I
CC
(uA)
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 369
Figure 30-58. Power-Down Supply Current vs. VCC (Watchdog Timer Enabled).
30.2.5 Power-save Supply Current
Figure 30-59. Power-Save Supply Current vs. VCC (Watchdog Timer Disabled and 32 kHz Crystal
Oscillator Running).
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
V
CC
(V)
I
CC
(uA)
1.6
1.4
1.2
1.0
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
V
CC
(V)
I
CC
(uA)
2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5
1.5 2.0
25 °C
/ ;/ Wm:
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 370
30.2.6 Standby Supply Current
Figure 30-60. Standby Supply Current vs. Vcc (Watchdog Timer Disabled).
30.2.7 Pin Pull-Up
Figure 30-61. I/O Pin Pull-up Resistor Current vs. Input Voltage (VCC = 1.8 V).
6MHz_xtal
6MHz_res
4MHz_xtal
4MHz_res
450kHz_res
2MHz_xtal
2MHz_res
0
0.02
0.04
0.06
0.08
0.1
0.12
0.14
0.16
0.18
1.522.533.544.555.5
VCC (V)
ICC (mA)
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2
V
OP
(V)
I
OP
(uA)
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
Wm: Wm:
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 371
Figure 30-62. I/O Pin Pull-up Resistor Current vs. Input Voltage (VCC = 2.7 V).
Figure 30-63. I/O Pin Pull-up Resistor Current vs. Input Voltage (VCC = 5 V).
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3
V
OP
(V)
I
OP
(uA)
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
0123456
V
OP
(V)
I
OP
(uA)
9 Wm: 9 Wm:
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 372
Figure 30-64. Reset Pull-up Resistor Current vs. Reset Pin Voltage (VCC = 1.8 V).
Figure 30-65. Reset Pull-up Resistor Current vs. Reset Pin Voltage (VCC = 2.7 V).
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2
VRESET (V)
IRESET (uA)
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3
V
RESET
(V)
I
RESET
(uA)
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
9 Wm: thc
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 373
Figure 30-66. Reset Pull-up Resistor Current vs. Reset Pin Voltage (VCC = 5 V).
30.2.8 Pin Driver Strength
Figure 30-67. I/O Pin Output Voltage vs. Sink Current(VCC = 3 V).
I
RESET
(uA)
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
0123456
V
RESET
(V)
I
RESET
(uA)
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1
0 5 10 15 20 25
I
OL
(mA)
VOL (V)
thc Ono
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 374
Figure 30-68. I/O Pin Output Voltage vs. Sink Current(VCC = 5 V).
Figure 30-69. I/O Pin Output Voltage vs. Source Current(Vcc = 3 V).
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0 5 10 15 20 25
I
OL
(mA)
V
OL
(V)
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
0.5
1
1.5
2
2.5
3
3.5
0 4 8 12 16 20
IOH (mA)
VOH (V)
"NVcc
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 375
Figure 30-70. I/O Pin Output Voltage vs. Source Current(VCC = 5 V).
30.2.9 Pin Threshold and Hysteresis
Figure 30-71. I/O Pin Input Threshold Voltage vs. VCC (VIH, I/O Pin read as ‘1’).
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
4
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
5
0 5 10 15 20 25
I
OH
(mA)
V
OH
(V)
Input
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
0.5
1
1.5
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
V
CC
(V)
Threshold (V)
Vcc u. vs. Vcc
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 376
Figure 30-72. I/O Pin Input Threshold Voltage vs. VCC (VIL, I/O Pin read as ‘0’).
Figure 30-73. I/O Pin Input Hysteresis vs. VCC.
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
0.5
1
1.5
2
2.5
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
V
CC
(V)
Input
Threshold (V)
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
V
CC
(V)
Input Hysteresis (mV)
cc Vm cc Vn.
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 377
Figure 30-74. Reset Input Threshold Voltage vs. VCC (VIH, I/O Pin read as ‘1’).
Figure 30-75. Reset Input Threshold Voltage vs. VCC (VIL, I/O Pin read as ‘0’).
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
0.5
1
1.5
2
2.5
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
V
CC
(V)
Threshold (V)
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
0.5
1
1.5
2
2.5
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
V
CC
(V)
Threshold (V)
cc
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 378
Figure 30-76. Reset Pin Input Hysteresis vs. VCC.
30.2.10 BOD Threshold
Figure 30-77. BOD Thresholds vs. Temperature (BODLEVEL is 1.8 V).
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
V
CC
(V)
Input Hysteresis (mV)
Rising Vcc
Falling Vcc
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
-50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Temperature
(
°
C)
Threshold (V)
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 379
Figure 30-78. BOD Thresholds vs. Temperature (BODLEVEL is 2.7 V).
Figure 30-79. BOD Thresholds vs. Temperature (BODLEVEL is 4.3 V).
Rising Vcc
Falling Vcc
2.5
2.55
2.6
2.65
2.7
2.75
2.8
2.85
2.9
2.95
3
-50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Temperature
(
°
C)
Threshold (V)
Rising Vcc
Falling Vcc
4
4.05
4.1
4.15
4.2
4.25
4.3
4.35
4.4
4.45
4.5
-50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Temperature
(
°
C)
Threshold (V)
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 380
30.2.11 Internal Oscilllator Speed
Figure 30-80. Watchdog Oscillator Frequency vs. Temperature.
Figure 30-81. Watchdog Oscillator Frequency vs. VCC.
5.5 V
4.0 V
3.3 V
2.7 V
92
94
96
98
100
102
104
106
108
110
112
-50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
Temperature
F
RC
(kHz)
(
°
C)
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5
V
CC
(V)
F
RC
(kHz)
cc \\ \\\
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 381
Figure 30-82. Calibrated 8 MHz RC Oscillator Frequency vs. VCC.
Figure 30-83. Calibrated 8 MHz RC Oscillator Frequency vs. Temperature.
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
7.6
7.7
7.8
7.9
8
8.1
8.2
8.3
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
V
CC (V)
F
RC
(MHz)
5.0 V
3.0 V
7.6
7.7
7.8
7.9
8
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
-50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
Temperature
FRC (MHz)
(
°
C)
cc Avcc \\ \\
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 382
Figure 30-84. Calibrated 8 MHz RC Oscillator Frequency vs. OSCCAL Value.
30.2.12 Current Consumption of Peripheral Units
Figure 30-85. ADC Current vs. VCC (AREF = AVCC).
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
0 16 32 48 64 80 96 112 128 144 160 176 192 208 224 240
OSCCAL (X1)
F
RC
(MHz)
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
50
100
150
200
250
300
350
400
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
ICC (uA)
cc
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 383
Figure 30-86. Analog Comparator Current vs. VCC.
Figure 30-87. AREF External Reference Current vs. VCC.
85 °C 25 °C
-40 °C
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
V
CC
(V)
I
CC
(uA)
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
V
CC
(V)
I
CC
(uA)
cc
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 384
Figure 30-88. Brownout Detector Current vs. VCC.
Figure 30-89. Programming Current vs. VCC.
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
V
CC
(V)
I
CC
(uA)
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
ICC (mA)
/ " // // ///// gé/
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 385
30.2.13 Current Consumption in Reset and Reset Pulsewidth
Figure 30-90. Reset Supply Current vs. Low Frequency (0.1 - 1.0 MHz).
Figure 30-91. Reset Supply Current vs. Frequency (1 - 20 MHz).
5.5 V
5.0 V
4.5 V
4.0 V
3.3 V
2.7 V
1.8 V
0
0.05
0.1
0.15
0.2
0.25
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
Frequency (MHz)
ICC (mA)
5.5 V
4.5 V
0
0.5
1
1.5
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
02468101214161820
Frequency (MHz)
I
CC
(mA)
4 V
3.3 V
2.7 V
1.8 V
cc \\ \\\ \\\\ \
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 386
Figure 30-92. Minimum Reset Pulse width vs. VCC.
30.3 ATmega168P Typical Characteristics
30.3.1 Active Supply Current
Figure 30-93. Active Supply Current vs. Low Frequency (0.1-1.0 MHz).
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
1400
1600
1800
2000
1.5 2 2.5 33.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC
(V)
Pulsewidth (ns)
5.5 V
4.5 V
4.0 V
3.3 V
2.7 V
1.8 V
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1
1.2
1.4
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
Frequency (MHz)
I
CC
(mA)
‘\ \\ \ \\\\ cc
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 387
Figure 30-94. Active Supply Current vs. Frequency (1-20 MHz).
Figure 30-95. Active Supply Current vs. VCC (Internal RC Oscillator, 128 kHz).
5.5 V
4.5 V
0
5
10
15
20
25
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
Frequency (MHz)
I
CC
(mA)
4.0 V
3.3 V
2.7 V
1.8 V
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
0.02
0.04
0.06
0.08
0.1
0.12
0.14
0.16
0.18
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
V
CC
(V)
I
CC
(mA)
cc cc
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 388
Figure 30-96. Active Supply Current vs. VCC (Internal RC Oscillator, 1 MHz).
Figure 30-97. Active Supply Current vs. VCC (Internal RC Oscillator, 8 MHz).
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
V
CC
(V)
I
CC
(mA)
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1.522.533.544.555.5
V
CC
(V)
ICC (mA)
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 389
30.3.2 Idle Supply Current
Figure 30-98. Idle Supply Current vs. Low Frequency (0.1-1.0 MHz).
Figure 30-99. Idle Supply Current vs. Frequency (1-20 MHz).
5.5 V
5.0 V
4.5 V
4.0 V
3.3 V
2.7 V
1.8 V
0
0.05
0.1
0.15
0.2
0.25
0.3
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
Frequency (MHz)
I
CC
(mA)
5.5 V
5.0 V
4.5 V
0
0.5
1
1.5
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
4.5
5
0 2 4 6 8 101214161820
Frequency (MHz)
ICC (mA)
4.0 V
3.3 V
2.7 V
1.8 V
cc
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 390
Figure 30-100. Idle Supply Current vs. VCC (Internal RC Oscillator, 128 kHz).
Figure 30-101. Idle Supply Current vs. VCC (Internal RC Oscillator, 1 MHz).
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
0.005
0.01
0.015
0.02
0.025
0.03
0.035
0.04
0.045
0.05
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
ICC (mA)
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
0.05
0.1
0.15
0.2
0.25
0.3
0.35
0.4
0.45
0.5
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
V
CC
(V)
I
CC
(mA)
// / //
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 391
Figure 30-102. Idle Supply Current vs. Vcc (Internal RC Oscillator, 8 MHz).
30.3.3 Supply Current of IO Modules
The tables and formulas below can be used to calculate the additional current consumption for
the different I/O modules in Active and Idle mode. The enabling or disabling of the I/O modules
are controlled by the Power Reduction Register. See “Power Reduction Register” on page 51 for
details.
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
0.5
1
1.5
2
2.5
3
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
V
CC
(V)
I
CC
(mA)
Table 30-5. Additional Current Consumption for the different I/O modules (absolute values)
PRR bit Typical numbers
VCC = 2V, F = 1MHz VCC = 3V, F = 4MHz VCC = 5V, F = 8MHz
PRUSART0 5.54 uA 34.8 uA 133.9 uA
PRTWI 10.1 uA 63.1 uA 250.6 uA
PRTIM2 10.4 uA 68.5 uA 269.4 uA
PRTIM1 9.66 uA 62.9 uA 248.1 uA
PRTIM0 2.45 uA 14.1 uA 60.8 uA
PRSPI 9.55 uA 63.8 uA 275.6 uA
PRADC 9.04 uA 58.6 uA 243.9 uA
I =0,()65mA (l \ (LISZ - 0,145 \ 0158)=0095mA cc
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 392
It is possible to calculate the typical current consumption based on the numbers from Table 30-6
on page 392 for other VCC and frequency settings than listed in Table 30-5 on page 391.
Example Calculate the expected current consumption in idle mode with TIMER1, ADC, and SPI enabled
at VCC = 2.0V and F = 1MHz. From Table 30-6 on page 392, third column, we see that we need
to add 15.2% for the TIMER1, 14.5% for the ADC, and 15.8% for the SPI module. Reading from
Figure 30-98 on page 389, we find that the idle current consumption is ~0.055 mA at VCC = 2.0V
and F = 1MHz. The total current consumption in idle mode with TIMER1, ADC, and SPI enabled,
gives:
30.3.4 Power-down Supply Current
Figure 30-103. Power-Down Supply Current vs. VCC (Watchdog Timer Disabled).
Table 30-6. Additional Current Consumption (percentage) in Active and Idle mode
PRR bit
Additional Current consumption
compared to Active with external
clock (see Figure 30-93 on page
386 and Figure 30-94 on page
387)
Additional Current consumption
compared to Idle with external
clock (see Figure 30-98 on page
389 and Figure 30-99 on page
389)
PRUSART0 1.9% 8.5%
PRTWI 3.4% 15.6%
PRTIM2 3.6% 16.5%
PRTIM1 3.4% 15.2%
PRTIM0 0.8% 3.7%
PRSPI 3.5% 15.8%
PRADC 3.2% 14.5%
ICCtotal 0.065 mA (1 + 0.152 + 0.145 + 0.158)0.095 mA
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
ICC (uA)
cc
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 393
Figure 30-104. Power-Down Supply Current vs. VCC (Watchdog Timer Enabled).
30.3.5 Power-save Supply Current
Figure 30-105. Power-Save Supply Current vs. VCC (Watchdog Timer Disabled and 32 kHz Crystal
Oscillator Running).
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
V
CC
(V)
I
CC
(uA)
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
V
CC
(V)
I
CC
(uA)
25 °C
Wm:
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 394
30.3.6 Standby Supply Current
Figure 30-106. Standby Supply Current vs. Vcc (Watchdog Timer Disabled).
30.3.7 Pin Pull-Up
Figure 30-107. I/O Pin Pull-up Resistor Current vs. Input Voltage (VCC = 1.8 V).
6MHz_xtal
6MHz_res
4MHz_xtal
4MHz_res
2MHz_xtal
2MHz_res
1MHz_res
0
0.02
0.04
0.06
0.08
0.1
0.12
0.14
0.16
0.18
0.2
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
V
CC
(V)
I
CC
(mA)
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2
V
OP
(V)
IOP (uA)
Wm: Wm:
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 395
Figure 30-108. I/O Pin Pull-up Resistor Current vs. Input Voltage (VCC = 2.7 V).
Figure 30-109. I/O Pin Pull-up Resistor Current vs. Input Voltage (VCC = 5 V).
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3
V
OP
(V)
I
OP
(uA)
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
0123456
V
OP
(V)
I
OP
(uA)
9 Wm: 9 Wm:
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 396
Figure 30-110. Reset Pull-up Resistor Current vs. Reset Pin Voltage (VCC = 1.8 V).
Figure 30-111. Reset Pull-up Resistor Current vs. Reset Pin Voltage (VCC = 2.7 V).
25 °C
85 °C
-40 °C
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
00.2
0.40.811.21.41.61.82
V
RESET
(V)
I
RESET
(uA)
0.6
-40 °C
25 °C
85 °C
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3
V
RESET
(V)
I
RESET
(uA)
9 Wm: Wee
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 397
Figure 30-112. Reset Pull-up Resistor Current vs. Reset Pin Voltage (VCC = 5 V).
30.3.8 Pin Driver Strength
Figure 30-113. I/O Pin Output Voltage vs. Sink Current(VCC = 3 V).
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
0123456
V
RESET
(V)
I
RESET
(uA)
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1
1.2
0 5 10 15 20 25
I
OL
(mA)
V
OL
(V)
Wee
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 398
Figure 30-114. I/O Pin Output Voltage vs. Sink Current(VCC = 5 V).
Figure 30-115. I/O Pin Output Voltage vs. Source Current(Vcc = 3 V).
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0 5 10 15 20 25
I
OL
(mA)
V
OL
(V)
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
0.5
1
1.5
2
2.5
3
3.5
0 5 10 15 20 25
I
OH
(mA)
V
OH
(V)
"NVcc Vcc m
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 399
Figure 30-116. I/O Pin Output Voltage vs. Source Current(VCC = 5 V).
30.3.9 Pin Threshold and Hysteresis
Figure 30-117. I/O Pin Input Threshold Voltage vs. VCC (VIH, I/O Pin read as ‘1’).
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
5
5.1
0 5 10 15 20 25
IOH (mA)
V
OH
(V)
,
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
0.5
1
1.5
2
2.5
3
3.5
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
V
CC
(V)
Threshold (V)
Vcc u. vs. Vcc \\
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 400
Figure 30-118. I/O Pin Input Threshold Voltage vs. VCC (VIL, I/O Pin read as ‘0’).
Figure 30-119. I/O Pin Input Hysteresis vs. VCC.
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
0.5
1
1.5
2
2.5
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
Threshold (V)
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC (V)
Input Hysteresis (mV)
cc Vm \\ cc Vn.
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 401
Figure 30-120. Reset Input Threshold Voltage vs. VCC (VIH, I/O Pin read as ‘1’).
Figure 30-121. Reset Input Threshold Voltage vs. VCC (VIL, I/O Pin read as ‘0’).
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
0.5
1
1.5
2
2.5
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
V
CC
(V)
Threshold (V)
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
0.5
1
1.5
2
2.5
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
V
CC
(V)
Threshold (V)
cc
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 402
Figure 30-122. Reset Pin Input Hysteresis vs. VCC.
30.3.10 BOD Threshold
Figure 30-123. BOD Thresholds vs. Temperature (BODLEVEL is 1.8 V).
85°C
25°C
-40°C
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
1.522.533.544.555.5
V
CC
(V)
Input Hysteresis (mV)
1.7
1.72
1.74
1.76
1.78
1.8
1.82
1.84
1.86
1.88
1.9
-50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Temperature
Threshold (V)
Rising Vcc
Falling Vcc
(°C)
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 403
Figure 30-124. BOD Thresholds vs. Temperature (BODLEVEL is 2.7 V).
Figure 30-125. BOD Thresholds vs. Temperature (BODLEVEL is 4.3 V).
2,5
2.55
2.6
2.65
2.7
2.75
2.8
2.85
2.9
2.95
3
-50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Temperature
(°C)
Threshold (V)
Rising Vcc
Falling Vcc
4
4.05
4.1
4.15
4.2
4.25
4.3
4.35
4.4
4.45
4.5
-50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Temperature
(°C)
Threshold (V)
Rising Vcc
Falling Vcc
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 404
30.3.11 Internal Oscilllator Speed
Figure 30-126. Watchdog Oscillator Frequency vs. Temperature.
Figure 30-127. Watchdog Oscillator Frequency vs. VCC.
5.0 V
3.3 V
2.7 V
104
106
108
110
112
114
116
118
120
0 102030405060708090100110120
Temperature
FRC (kHz)
(°C)
85 °C
25 °C
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
V
CC
(V)
F
RC
(kHz)
cc
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 405
Figure 30-128. Calibrated 8 MHz RC Oscillator Frequency vs. VCC.
Figure 30-129. Calibrated 8 MHz RC Oscillator Frequency vs. Temperature.
85 °C
25 °C
7.8
7.85
7.9
7.95
8
8.05
8.1
2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
(V)
F
RC
(MHz)
5.5 V
2.7 V
1.8 V
7.8
7.85
7.9
7.95
8
8.05
8.1
8.15
0 102030405060708090100
Temperature
FRC (MHz)
cc Avcc \\
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 406
Figure 30-130. Calibrated 8 MHz RC Oscillator Frequency vs. OSCCAL Value.
30.3.12 Current Consumption of Peripheral Units
Figure 30-131. ADC Current vs. VCC (AREF = AVCC).
85 °C
25 °C
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
0 16 32 48 64 80 96 112 128 144 160 176 192 208 224 240
OSCCAL (X1)
F
RC
(MHz)
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
100
150
200
250
300
350
400
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
V
CC
(V)
I
CC
(uA)
cc
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 407
Figure 30-132. Analog Comparator Current vs. VCC.
Figure 30-133. AREF External Reference Current vs. VCC.
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
25
35
45
55
65
75
85
95
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
V
CC
(V)
I
CC
(uA)
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
180
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
V
CC
(V)
I
CC
(uA)
cc cc
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 408
Figure 30-134. Brownout Detector Current vs. VCC.
Figure 30-135. Programming Current vs. VCC.
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
V
CC
(V)
I
CC
(uA)
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
V
CC
(V)
I
CC
(mA)
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 409
30.3.13 Current Consumption in Reset and Reset Pulsewidth
Figure 30-136. Reset Supply Current vs. Low Frequency (0.1 - 1.0 MHz).
Figure 30-137. Reset Supply Current vs. Frequency (1 - 20 MHz).
5.5 V
5.0 V
4.5 V
4.0 V
3.3 V
2.7 V
1.8 V
0
0.02
0.04
0.06
0.08
0.1
0.12
0.14
0.16
0.18
0.2
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
Frequency (MHz)
I
CC
(mA)
5.5 V
5.0 V
4.5 V
0
0.5
1
1.5
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
02468101214161820
Frequency (MHz)
ICC (mA)
4.0 V
3.3 V
2.7 V
1.8 V
cc
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 410
Figure 30-138. Minimum Reset Pulse width vs. VCC.
85 °C
25 °C
-40 °C
0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
1400
1600
1800
1.5 2 2.5 33.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
VCC
(V)
Pulsewidth (ns)
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 411
31. Register Summary
Address Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Page
(0xFF) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xFE) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xFD) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xFC) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xFB) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xFA) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xF9) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xF8) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xF7) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xF6) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xF5) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xF4) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xF3) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xF2) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xF1) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xF0) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xEF) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xEE) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xED) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xEC) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xEB) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xEA) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xE9) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xE8) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xE7) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xE6) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xE5) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xE4) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xE3) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xE2) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xE1) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xE0) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xDF) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xDE) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xDD) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xDC) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xDB) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xDA) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xD9) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xD8) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xD7) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xD6) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xD5) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xD4) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xD3) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xD2) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xD1) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xD0) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xCF) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xCE) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xCD) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xCC) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xCB) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xCA) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xC9) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xC8) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xC7) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xC6) UDR0 USART I/O Data Register 205
(0xC5) UBRR0H USART Baud Rate Register High 209
(0xC4) UBRR0L USART Baud Rate Register Low 209
(0xC3) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xC2) UCSR0C UMSEL01 UMSEL00 UPM01 UPM00 USBS0 UCSZ01 /UDORD0 UCSZ00 / UCPHA0 UCPOL0 207/222
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 412
(0xC1) UCSR0B RXCIE0 TXCIE0 UDRIE0 RXEN0 TXEN0 UCSZ02 RXB80 TXB80 206
(0xC0) UCSR0A RXC0 TXC0 UDRE0 FE0 DOR0 UPE0 U2X0 MPCM0 205
(0xBF) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xBE) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xBD) TWAMR TWAM6 TWAM5 TWAM4 TWAM3 TWAM2 TWAM1 TWAM0 –256
(0xBC) TWCR TWINT TWEA TWSTA TWSTO TWWC TWEN –TWIE 252
(0xBB) TWDR 2-wire Serial Interface Data Register 255
(0xBA) TWAR TWA6 TWA5 TWA4 TWA3 TWA2 TWA1 TWA0 TWGCE 256
(0xB9) TWSR TWS7 TWS6 TWS5 TWS4 TWS3 –TWPS1TWPS0 255
(0xB8) TWBR 2-wire Serial Interface Bit Rate Register 252
(0xB7) Reserved – – – – – – –
(0xB6) ASSR – EXCLK AS2 TCN2UB OCR2AUB OCR2BUB TCR2AUB TCR2BUB 175
(0xB5) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xB4) OCR2B Timer/Counter2 Output Compare Register B 173
(0xB3) OCR2A Timer/Counter2 Output Compare Register A 173
(0xB2) TCNT2 Timer/Counter2 (8-bit) 173
(0xB1) TCCR2B FOC2A FOC2B –– WGM22 CS22 CS21 CS20 172
(0xB0) TCCR2A COM2A1 COM2A0 COM2B1 COM2B0 ––WGM21WGM20 169
(0xAF) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xAE) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xAD) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xAC) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xAB) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xAA) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xA9) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xA8) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xA7) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xA6) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xA5) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xA4) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xA3) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xA2) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xA1) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0xA0) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0x9F) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0x9E) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0x9D) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0x9C) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0x9B) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0x9A) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0x99) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0x98) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0x97) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0x96) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0x95) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0x94) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0x93) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0x92) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0x91) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0x90) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0x8F) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0x8E) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0x8D) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0x8C) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0x8B) OCR1BH Timer/Counter1 - Output Compare Register B High Byte 149
(0x8A) OCR1BL Timer/Counter1 - Output Compare Register B Low Byte 149
(0x89) OCR1AH Timer/Counter1 - Output Compare Register A High Byte 149
(0x88) OCR1AL Timer/Counter1 - Output Compare Register A Low Byte 149
(0x87) ICR1H Timer/Counter1 - Input Capture Register High Byte 150
(0x86) ICR1L Timer/Counter1 - Input Capture Register Low Byte 150
(0x85) TCNT1H Timer/Counter1 - Counter Register High Byte 149
(0x84) TCNT1L Timer/Counter1 - Counter Register Low Byte 149
(0x83) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0x82) TCCR1C FOC1A FOC1B – – – – – –148
(0x81) TCCR1B ICNC1 ICES1 – WGM13 WGM12 CS12 CS11 CS10 147
(0x80) TCCR1A COM1A1 COM1A0 COM1B1 COM1B0 ––WGM11WGM10 144
Address Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Page
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 413
(0x7F) DIDR1 – – – – – – AIN1D AIN0D 261
(0x7E) DIDR0 –– ADC5D ADC4D ADC3D ADC2D ADC1D ADC0D 278
(0x7D) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0x7C) ADMUX REFS1 REFS0 ADLAR – MUX3 MUX2 MUX1 MUX0 274
(0x7B) ADCSRB –ACME – – – ADTS2 ADTS1 ADTS0 277
(0x7A) ADCSRA ADEN ADSC ADATE ADIF ADIE ADPS2 ADPS1 ADPS0 275
(0x79) ADCH ADC Data Register High byte 277
(0x78) ADCL ADC Data Register Low byte 277
(0x77) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0x76) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0x75) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0x74) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0x73) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0x72) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0x71) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0x70) TIMSK2 – – – – – OCIE2B OCIE2A TOIE2 174
(0x6F) TIMSK1 ––ICIE1 –– OCIE1B OCIE1A TOIE1 150
(0x6E) TIMSK0 – – – – – OCIE0B OCIE0A TOIE0 121
(0x6D) PCMSK2 PCINT23 PCINT22 PCINT21 PCINT20 PCINT19 PCINT18 PCINT17 PCINT16 84
(0x6C) PCMSK1 – PCINT14 PCINT13 PCINT12 PCINT11 PCINT10 PCINT9 PCINT8 84
(0x6B) PCMSK0 PCINT7 PCINT6 PCINT5 PCINT4 PCINT3 PCINT2 PCINT1 PCINT0 84
(0x6A) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0x69) EICRA – – – – ISC11 ISC10 ISC01 ISC00 80
(0x68) PCICR – – – – – PCIE2 PCIE1 PCIE0
(0x67) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0x66) OSCCAL Oscillator Calibration Register 46
(0x65) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0x64) PRR PRTWI PRTIM2 PRTIM0 – PRTIM1 PRSPI PRUSART0 PRADC 51
(0x63) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0x62) Reserved – – – – – – – –
(0x61) CLKPR CLKPCE – – – CLKPS3 CLKPS2 CLKPS1 CLKPS0 46
(0x60) WDTCSR WDIF WDIE WDP3 WDCE WDE WDP2 WDP1 WDP0 63
0x3F (0x5F) SREG I T H S V N Z C 18
0x3E (0x5E) SPH – – – – –(SP10)
5. SP9 SP8 21
0x3D (0x5D) SPL SP7 SP6 SP5 SP4 SP3 SP2 SP1 SP0 21
0x3C (0x5C) Reserved – – – – – – – –
0x3B (0x5B) Reserved – – – – – – – –
0x3A (0x5A) Reserved – – – – – – – –
0x39 (0x59) Reserved – – – – – – – –
0x38 (0x58) Reserved – – – – – – – –
0x37 (0x57) SPMCSR SPMIE (RWWSB)5. –(RWWSRE)
5. BLBSET PGWRT PGERS SELFPRGEN 304
0x36 (0x56) Reserved – – – – – – – –
0x35 (0x55) MCUCR – BODS BODSE PUD – – IVSEL IVCE 53/77/102
0x34 (0x54) MCUSR – – – – WDRF BORF EXTRF PORF 63
0x33 (0x53) SMCR – – – – SM2 SM1 SM0 SE 49
0x32 (0x52) Reserved – – – – – – – –
0x31 (0x51) Reserved – – – – – – – –
0x30 (0x50) ACSR ACD ACBG ACO ACI ACIE ACIC ACIS1 ACIS0 259
0x2F (0x4F) Reserved – – – – – – – –
0x2E (0x4E) SPDR SPI Data Register 186
0x2D (0x4D) SPSR SPIF WCOL – – – – –SPI2X 185
0x2C (0x4C) SPCR SPIE SPE DORD MSTR CPOL CPHA SPR1 SPR0 184
0x2B (0x4B) GPIOR2 General Purpose I/O Register 2 34
0x2A (0x4A) GPIOR1 General Purpose I/O Register 1 34
0x29 (0x49) Reserved – – – – – – – –
0x28 (0x48) OCR0B Timer/Counter0 Output Compare Register B
0x27 (0x47) OCR0A Timer/Counter0 Output Compare Register A
0x26 (0x46) TCNT0 Timer/Counter0 (8-bit)
0x25 (0x45) TCCR0B FOC0A FOC0B –– WGM02 CS02 CS01 CS00
0x24 (0x44) TCCR0A COM0A1 COM0A0 COM0B1 COM0B0 ––WGM01WGM00
0x23 (0x43) GTCCR TSM – – – – – PSRASY PSRSYNC 154/176
0x22 (0x42) EEARH (EEPROM Address Register High Byte) 5. 30
0x21 (0x41) EEARL EEPROM Address Register Low Byte 30
0x20 (0x40) EEDR EEPROM Data Register 30
0x1F (0x3F) EECR –– EEPM1 EEPM0 EERIE EEMPE EEPE EERE 30
0x1E (0x3E) GPIOR0 General Purpose I/O Register 0 34
Address Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Page
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 414
Note: 1. For compatibility with future devices, reserved bits should be written to zero if accessed. Reserved I/O memory addresses
should never be written.
2. I/O Registers within the address range 0x00 - 0x1F are directly bit-accessible using the SBI and CBI instructions. In these
registers, the value of single bits can be checked by using the SBIS and SBIC instructions.
3. Some of the Status Flags are cleared by writing a logical one to them. Note that, unlike most other AVRs, the CBI and SBI
instructions will only operate on the specified bit, and can therefore be used on registers containing such Status Flags. The
CBI and SBI instructions work with registers 0x00 to 0x1F only.
4. When using the I/O specific commands IN and OUT, the I/O addresses 0x00 - 0x3F must be used. When addressing I/O
Registers as data space using LD and ST instructions, 0x20 must be added to these addresses. The ATmega48P/88P/168P
is a complex microcontroller with more peripheral units than can be supported within the 64 location reserved in Opcode for
the IN and OUT instructions. For the Extended I/O space from 0x60 - 0xFF in SRAM, only the ST/STS/STD and
LD/LDS/LDD instructions can be used.
5. Only valid for ATmega88P/168P.
0x1D (0x3D) EIMSK – – – – – – INT1 INT0 82
0x1C (0x3C) EIFR – – – – – – INTF1 INTF0 82
0x1B (0x3B) PCIFR – – – – – PCIF2 PCIF1 PCIF0
0x1A (0x3A) Reserved – – – – – – – –
0x19 (0x39) Reserved – – – – – – – –
0x18 (0x38) Reserved – – – – – – – –
0x17 (0x37) TIFR2 – – – – – OCF2B OCF2A TOV2 174
0x16 (0x36) TIFR1 ––ICF1 –– OCF1B OCF1A TOV1 151
0x15 (0x35) TIFR0 – – – – – OCF0B OCF0A TOV0
0x14 (0x34) Reserved – – – – – – – –
0x13 (0x33) Reserved – – – – – – – –
0x12 (0x32) Reserved – – – – – – – –
0x11 (0x31) Reserved – – – – – – – –
0x10 (0x30) Reserved – – – – – – – –
0x0F (0x2F) Reserved – – – – – – – –
0x0E (0x2E) Reserved – – – – – – – –
0x0D (0x2D) Reserved – – – – – – – –
0x0C (0x2C) Reserved – – – – – – – –
0x0B (0x2B) PORTD PORTD7 PORTD6 PORTD5 PORTD4 PORTD3 PORTD2 PORTD1 PORTD0 103
0x0A (0x2A) DDRD DDD7 DDD6 DDD5 DDD4 DDD3 DDD2 DDD1 DDD0 103
0x09 (0x29) PIND PIND7 PIND6 PIND5 PIND4 PIND3 PIND2 PIND1 PIND0 103
0x08 (0x28) PORTC – PORTC6 PORTC5 PORTC4 PORTC3 PORTC2 PORTC1 PORTC0 102
0x07 (0x27) DDRC – DDC6 DDC5 DDC4 DDC3 DDC2 DDC1 DDC0 102
0x06 (0x26) PINC – PINC6 PINC5 PINC4 PINC3 PINC2 PINC1 PINC0 103
0x05 (0x25) PORTB PORTB7 PORTB6 PORTB5 PORTB4 PORTB3 PORTB2 PORTB1 PORTB0 102
0x04 (0x24) DDRB DDB7 DDB6 DDB5 DDB4 DDB3 DDB2 DDB1 DDB0 102
0x03 (0x23) PINB PINB7 PINB6 PINB5 PINB4 PINB3 PINB2 PINB1 PINB0 102
0x02 (0x22) Reserved – – – – – – – –
0x01 (0x21) Reserved – – – – – – – –
0x0 (0x20) Reserved – – – – – – – –
Address Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Page
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 415
32. Instruction Set Summary
Mnemonics Operands Description Operation Flags #Clocks
ARITHMETIC AND LOGIC INSTRUCTIONS
ADD Rd, Rr Add two Registers Rd Rd + Rr Z,C,N,V,H 1
ADC Rd, Rr Add with Carry two Registers Rd Rd + Rr + C Z,C,N,V,H 1
ADIW Rdl,K Add Immediate to Word Rdh:Rdl Rdh:Rdl + K Z,C,N,V,S 2
SUB Rd, Rr Subtract two Registers Rd Rd - Rr Z,C,N,V,H 1
SUBI Rd, K Subtract Constant from Register Rd Rd - K Z,C,N,V,H 1
SBC Rd, Rr Subtract with Carry two Registers Rd Rd - Rr - C Z,C,N,V,H 1
SBCI Rd, K Subtract with Carry Constant from Reg. Rd Rd - K - C Z,C,N,V,H 1
SBIW Rdl,K Subtract Immediate from Word Rdh:Rdl Rdh:Rdl - K Z,C,N,V,S 2
AND Rd, Rr Logical AND Registers Rd Rd Rr Z,N,V 1
ANDI Rd, K Logical AND Register and Constant Rd Rd K Z,N,V 1
OR Rd, Rr Logical OR Registers Rd Rd v Rr Z,N,V 1
ORI Rd, K Logical OR Register and Constant Rd Rd v K Z,N,V 1
EOR Rd, Rr Exclusive OR Registers Rd Rd Rr Z,N,V 1
COM Rd One’s Complement Rd 0xFF Rd Z,C,N,V 1
NEG Rd Two’s Complement Rd 0x00 Rd Z,C,N,V,H 1
SBR Rd,K Set Bit(s) in Register Rd Rd v K Z,N,V 1
CBR Rd,K Clear Bit(s) in Register Rd Rd (0xFF - K) Z,N,V 1
INC Rd Increment Rd Rd + 1 Z,N,V 1
DEC Rd Decrement Rd Rd 1 Z,N,V 1
TST Rd Test for Zero or Minus Rd Rd Rd Z,N,V 1
CLR Rd Clear Register Rd Rd Rd Z,N,V 1
SER Rd Set Register Rd 0xFF None 1
MUL Rd, Rr Multiply Unsigned R1:R0 Rd x Rr Z,C 2
MULS Rd, Rr Multiply Signed R1:R0 Rd x Rr Z,C 2
MULSU Rd, Rr Multiply Signed with Unsigned R1:R0 Rd x Rr Z,C 2
FMUL Rd, Rr Fractional Multiply Unsigned R1:R0 (Rd x Rr) << 1 Z,C 2
FMULS Rd, Rr Fractional Multiply Signed R1:R0 (Rd x Rr) << 1 Z,C 2
FMULSU Rd, Rr Fractional Multiply Signed with Unsigned R1:R0 (Rd x Rr) << 1 Z,C 2
BRANCH INSTRUCTIONS
RJMP k Relative Jump PC PC + k + 1 None 2
IJMP Indirect Jump to (Z) PC Z None 2
JMP(1) k Direct Jump PC k None 3
RCALL k Relative Subroutine Call PC PC + k + 1 None 3
ICALL Indirect Call to (Z) PC Z None 3
CALL(1) k Direct Subroutine Call PC k None 4
RET Subroutine Return PC STACK None 4
RETI Interrupt Return PC STACK I 4
CPSE Rd,Rr Compare, Skip if Equal if (Rd = Rr) PC PC + 2 or 3 None 1/2/3
CP Rd,Rr Compare Rd Rr Z, N,V,C,H 1
CPC Rd,Rr Compare with Carry Rd Rr C Z, N,V,C,H 1
CPI Rd,K Compare Register with Immediate Rd K Z, N,V,C,H 1
SBRC Rr, b Skip if Bit in Register Cleared if (Rr(b)=0) PC PC + 2 or 3 None 1/2/3
SBRS Rr, b Skip if Bit in Register is Set if (Rr(b)=1) PC PC + 2 or 3 None 1/2/3
SBIC P, b Skip if Bit in I/O Register Cleared if (P(b)=0) PC PC + 2 or 3 None 1/2/3
SBIS P, b Skip if Bit in I/O Register is Set if (P(b)=1) PC PC + 2 or 3 None 1/2/3
BRBS s, k Branch if Status Flag Set if (SREG(s) = 1) then PCPC+k + 1 None 1/2
BRBC s, k Branch if Status Flag Cleared if (SREG(s) = 0) then PCPC+k + 1 None 1/2
BREQ k Branch if Equal if (Z = 1) then PC PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRNE k Branch if Not Equal if (Z = 0) then PC PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRCS k Branch if Carry Set if (C = 1) then PC PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRCC k Branch if Carry Cleared if (C = 0) then PC PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRSH k Branch if Same or Higher if (C = 0) then PC PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRLO k Branch if Lower if (C = 1) then PC PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRMI k Branch if Minus if (N = 1) then PC PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRPL k Branch if Plus if (N = 0) then PC PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRGE k Branch if Greater or Equal, Signed if (N V= 0) then PC PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRLT k Branch if Less Than Zero, Signed if (N V= 1) then PC PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRHS k Branch if Half Carry Flag Set if (H = 1) then PC PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRHC k Branch if Half Carry Flag Cleared if (H = 0) then PC PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRTS k Branch if T Flag Set if (T = 1) then PC PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRTC k Branch if T Flag Cleared if (T = 0) then PC PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRVS k Branch if Overflow Flag is Set if (V = 1) then PC PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRVC k Branch if Overflow Flag is Cleared if (V = 0) then PC PC + k + 1 None 1/2
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 416
BRIE k Branch if Interrupt Enabled if ( I = 1) then PC PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BRID k Branch if Interrupt Disabled if ( I = 0) then PC PC + k + 1 None 1/2
BIT AND BIT-TEST INSTRUCTIONS
SBI P,b Set Bit in I/O Register I/O(P,b) 1 None 2
CBI P,b Clear Bit in I/O Register I/O(P,b) 0 None 2
LSL Rd Logical Shift Left Rd(n+1) Rd(n), Rd(0) 0 Z,C,N,V 1
LSR Rd Logical Shift Right Rd(n) Rd(n+1), Rd(7) 0 Z,C,N,V 1
ROL Rd Rotate Left Through Carry Rd(0)C,Rd(n+1) Rd(n),CRd(7) Z,C,N,V 1
ROR Rd Rotate Right Through Carry Rd(7)C,Rd(n) Rd(n+1),CRd(0) Z,C,N,V 1
ASR Rd Arithmetic Shift Right Rd(n) Rd(n+1), n=0..6 Z,C,N,V 1
SWAP Rd Swap Nibbles Rd(3..0)Rd(7..4),Rd(7..4)Rd(3..0) None 1
BSET s Flag Set SREG(s) 1 SREG(s) 1
BCLR s Flag Clear SREG(s) 0 SREG(s) 1
BST Rr, b Bit Store from Register to T T Rr(b) T 1
BLD Rd, b Bit load from T to Register Rd(b) T None 1
SEC Set Carry C 1C1
CLC Clear Carry C 0 C 1
SEN Set Negative Flag N 1N1
CLN Clear Negative Flag N 0 N 1
SEZ Set Zero Flag Z 1Z1
CLZ Clear Zero Flag Z 0 Z 1
SEI Global Interrupt Enable I 1I1
CLI Global Interrupt Disable I 0 I 1
SES Set Signed Test Flag S 1S1
CLS Clear Signed Test Flag S 0 S 1
SEV Set Twos Complement Overflow. V 1V1
CLV Clear Twos Complement Overflow V 0 V 1
SET Set T in SREG T 1T1
CLT Clear T in SREG T 0 T 1
SEH Set Half Carry Flag in SREG H 1H1
CLH Clear Half Carry Flag in SREG H 0 H 1
DATA TRANSFER INSTRUCTIONS
MOV Rd, Rr Move Between Registers Rd Rr None 1
MOVW Rd, Rr Copy Register Word Rd+1:Rd Rr+1:Rr None 1
LDI Rd, K Load Immediate Rd K None 1
LD Rd, X Load Indirect Rd (X) None 2
LD Rd, X+ Load Indirect and Post-Inc. Rd (X), X X + 1 None 2
LD Rd, - X Load Indirect and Pre-Dec. X X - 1, Rd (X) None 2
LD Rd, Y Load Indirect Rd (Y) None 2
LD Rd, Y+ Load Indirect and Post-Inc. Rd (Y), Y Y + 1 None 2
LD Rd, - Y Load Indirect and Pre-Dec. Y Y - 1, Rd (Y) None 2
LDD Rd,Y+q Load Indirect with Displacement Rd (Y + q) None 2
LD Rd, Z Load Indirect Rd (Z) None 2
LD Rd, Z+ Load Indirect and Post-Inc. Rd (Z), Z Z+1 None 2
LD Rd, -Z Load Indirect and Pre-Dec. Z Z - 1, Rd (Z) None 2
LDD Rd, Z+q Load Indirect with Displacement Rd (Z + q) None 2
LDS Rd, k Load Direct from SRAM Rd (k) None 2
ST X, Rr Store Indirect (X) Rr None 2
ST X+, Rr Store Indirect and Post-Inc. (X) Rr, X X + 1 None 2
ST - X, Rr Store Indirect and Pre-Dec. X X - 1, (X) Rr None 2
ST Y, Rr Store Indirect (Y) Rr None 2
ST Y+, Rr Store Indirect and Post-Inc. (Y) Rr, Y Y + 1 None 2
ST - Y, Rr Store Indirect and Pre-Dec. Y Y - 1, (Y) Rr None 2
STD Y+q,Rr Store Indirect with Displacement (Y + q) Rr None 2
ST Z, Rr Store Indirect (Z) Rr None 2
ST Z+, Rr Store Indirect and Post-Inc. (Z) Rr, Z Z + 1 None 2
ST -Z, Rr Store Indirect and Pre-Dec. Z Z - 1, (Z) Rr None 2
STD Z+q,Rr Store Indirect with Displacement (Z + q) Rr None 2
STS k, Rr Store Direct to SRAM (k) Rr None 2
LPM Load Program Memory R0 (Z) None 3
LPM Rd, Z Load Program Memory Rd (Z) None 3
LPM Rd, Z+ Load Program Memory and Post-Inc Rd (Z), Z Z+1 None 3
SPM Store Program Memory (Z) R1:R0 None -
IN Rd, P In Port Rd P None 1
OUT P, Rr Out Port P Rr None 1
PUSH Rr Push Register on Stack STACK Rr None 2
Mnemonics Operands Description Operation Flags #Clocks
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 417
Note: 1. These instructions are only available in ATmega168P.
POP Rd Pop Register from Stack Rd STACK None 2
MCU CONTROL INSTRUCTIONS
NOP No Operation None 1
SLEEP Sleep (see specific descr. for Sleep function) None 1
WDR Watchdog Reset (see specific descr. for WDR/timer) None 1
BREAK Break For On-chip Debug Only None N/A
Mnemonics Operands Description Operation Flags #Clocks
em 2”)
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 418
33. Ordering Information
33.1 ATmega48P
Note: 1. This device can also be supplied in wafer form. Contact your local Microchip sales office for detailed ordering information
and minimum quantities.
2. Pb-free packaging complies to the European Directive for Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS directive).Also
Halide free and fully Green.
3. See Figure 29-1 on page 327 and Figure 29-2 on page 328.
4. Tape & Reel
Speed (MHz) Power Supply (V) Ordering Code(2) Package(1) Operational Range
10(3) 1.8 - 5.5
ATmega48PV-10AU
ATmega48PV-10AUR(4)
ATmega48PV-10MMU
ATmega48PV-10MMUR(4)
ATmega48PV-10MU
ATmega48PV-10MUR(4)
ATmega48PV-10PU
32A
32A
28M1
28M1
32M1-A
32M1-A
28P3 Industrial
(-40C to 85C)
20(3) 2.7 - 5.5
ATmega48P-20AU
ATmega48P-20AUR(4)
ATmega48P-20MMU
ATmega48P-20MMUR(4)
ATmega48P-20MU
ATmega48P-20MUR(4)
ATmega48P-20PU
32A
32A
28M1
28M1
32M1-A
32M1-A
28P3
Package Type
32A 32-lead, Thin (1.0mm) Plastic Quad Flat Package (TQFP)
28M1 28-pad, 4 x 4 x 1.0 body, Lead Pitch 0.45mm Quad Flat No-Lead/Micro Lead Frame Package (QFN/MLF)
32M1-A 32-pad, 5 x 5 x 1.0 body, Lead Pitch 0.50mm Quad Flat No-Lead/Micro Lead Frame Package (QFN/MLF)
28P3 28-lead, 0.300” Wide, Plastic Dual Inline Package (PDIP)
em 2”)
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 419
33.2 ATmega88P
Note: 1. This device can also be supplied in wafer form. Contact your local Microchip sales office for detailed ordering information
and minimum quantities.
2. Pb-free packaging complies to the European Directive for Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS directive).Also
Halide free and fully Green.
3. See Figure 29-1 on page 327 and Figure 29-2 on page 328.
4. Taper & Reel.
Speed (MHz) Power Supply (V) Ordering Code(2) Package(1) Operational Range
10(3) 1.8 - 5.5
ATmega88PV-10AU
ATmega88PV-10AUR(4)
ATmega88PV-10MU
ATmega88PV-10MUR(4)
ATmega88PV-10PU
32A
32A
32M1-A
32M1-A
28P3 Industrial
(-40C to 85C)
20(3) 2.7 - 5.5
ATmega88P-20AU
ATmega88P-20AUR(4)
ATmega88P-20MU
ATmega88P-20MUR(4)
ATmega88P-20PU
32A
32A
32M1-A
32M1-A
28P3
Package Type
32A 32-lead, Thin (1.0mm) Plastic Quad Flat Package (TQFP)
28P3 28-lead, 0.300” Wide, Plastic Dual Inline Package (PDIP)
32M1-A 32-pad, 5 x 5 x 1.0 body, Lead Pitch 0.50mm Quad Flat No-Lead/Micro Lead Frame Package (QFN/MLF)
{3) em 2”)
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 420
33.3 ATmega168P
Note: 1. This device can also be supplied in wafer form. Contact your local Microchip sales office for detailed ordering information
and minimum quantities.
2. Pb-free packaging complies to the European Directive for Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS directive).Also
Halide free and fully Green.
3. See Figure 29-1 on page 327 and Figure 29-2 on page 328.
4. Taper & Reel.
Speed (MHz)(3) Power Supply (V) Ordering Code(2) Package(1) Operational Range
10 1.8 - 5.5
ATmega168PV-10AU
ATmega168PV-10AUR(4)
ATmega168PV-10MU
ATmega168PV-10MUR(4)
ATmega168PV-10PU
32A
32A
32M1-A
32M1-A
28P3 Industrial
(-40C to 85C)
20 2.7 - 5.5
ATmega168P-20AU
ATmega168P-20AUR(4)
ATmega168P-20MU
ATmega168P-20MUR(4)
ATmega168P-20PU
32A
32A
32M1-A
32M1-A
28P3
Package Type
32A 32-lead, Thin (1.0mm) Plastic Quad Flat Package (TQFP)
28P3 28-lead, 0.300” Wide, Plastic Dual Inline Package (PDIP)
32M1-A 32-pad, 5 x 5 x 1.0 body, Lead Pitch 0.50mm Quad Flat No-Lead/Micro Lead Frame Package (QFN/MLF)
fl Atmelfi
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 421
34. Packaging Information
34.1 32A
TITLE DRAWING NO. REV.
32A, 32-lead, 7 x 7mm body size, 1.0mm body thickness,
0.8mm lead pitch, thin profile plastic quad flat package (TQFP) C
32A
2010-10-20
PIN 1 IDENTIFIER
0°~7°
PIN 1
L
C
A1 A2 A
D1
D
eE1 E
B
Notes:
1. This package conforms to JEDEC reference MS-026, Variation ABA.
2. Dimensions D1 and E1 do not include mold protrusion. Allowable
protrusion is 0.25mm per side. Dimensions D1 and E1 are maximum
plastic body size dimensions including mold mismatch.
3. Lead coplanarity is 0.10mm maximum.
A – – 1.20
A1 0.05 – 0.15
A2 0.95 1.00 1.05
D 8.75 9.00 9.25
D1 6.90 7.00 7.10 Note 2
E 8.75 9.00 9.25
E1 6.90 7.00 7.10 Note 2
B 0.30 – 0.45
C 0.09 – 0.20
L 0.45 – 0.75
e 0.80 TYP
COMMON DIMENSIONS
(Unit of measure = mm)
SYMBOL MIN NOM MAX NOTE
[J p ,flQfl H H H H H TV? AtmeL
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 422
34.2 28M1
TITLE DRAWING NO.GPC REV.
28M1ZBV B
28M1, 28-pad, 4 x 4 x 1.0mm Body, Lead Pitch 0.45mm,
2.4 x 2.4mm Exposed Pad, Thermally Enhanced
Plastic Very Thin Quad Flat No Lead Package (VQFN)
10/24/08
SIDE VIEW
Pin 1 ID
BOTTOM VIEW
TOP VIEW
Note: The terminal #1 ID is a Laser-marked Feature.
D
E
e
K
A1
C
A
D2
E2
y
L
1
2
3
b
1
2
3
0.45 COMMON DIMENSIONS
(Unit of Measure = mm)
SYMBOL MIN NOM MAX NOTE
A 0.80 0.90 1.00
A1 0.00 0.02 0.05
b 0.17 0.22 0.27
C 0.20 REF
D 3.95 4.00 4.05
D2 2.35 2.40 2.45
E 3.95 4.00 4.05
E2 2.35 2.40 2.45
e 0.45
L 0.35 0.40 0.45
y 0.00 – 0.08
K 0.20 – –
R 0.20
0.4 Ref
(4x)
a Y E] E] 3% ‘m FT H} ‘LUUUUUUJ f fig E- E —E4+_‘ mLAlflfiD rrr DRAWING NO REV Atmet Mm mm.
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 423
34.3 32M1-A
COMMON DIMENSIONS
(Unit of Measure = mm)
SYMBOL MIN NOM MAX NOTE
D1
D
E1 E
e
b
A3
A2
A1
A
D2
E2
0.08 C
L
1
2
3
P
P
0
1
2
3
A 0.80 0.90 1.00
A1 – 0.02 0.05
A2 – 0.65 1.00
A3 0.20 REF
b 0.18 0.23 0.30
D
D1
D2 2.95 3.10 3.25
4.90 5.00 5.10
4.70 4.75 4.80
4.70 4.75 4.80
4.90 5.00 5.10
E
E1
E2 2.95 3.10 3.25
e 0.50 BSC
L 0.30 0.40 0.50
P – – 0.60
– – 12o
Note: JEDEC Standard MO-220, Fig. 2 (Anvil Singulation), VHHD-2 .
TOP VIE W
SIDE VIEW
B OT TOM VIE W
0
Pin 1 ID
Pin #1 Notch
(0.20 R)
K 0.20 – –
K
K
32M1-A, 32-pad, 5 x 5 x 1.0mm Body, Lead Pitch 0.50mm,
3.10mm Exposed Pad, Micro Lead F rame Package (MLF) 32M1-A
03/14/2014
F
,, E Jr \y‘ q A- AtmeL
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 424
34.4 28P3
TITLE DRAWING NO. REV.
28P3, 28-lead (0.300"/7.62mm Wide) Plastic Dual
Inline Package (PDIP) B
28P3
09/28/01
PIN
1
E1
A1
B
REF
E
B1
C
L
SEATING PLANE
A
0º ~ 15º
D
e
eB
B2
(4 PLACES)
COMMON DIMENSIONS
(Unit of Measure = mm)
SYMBOL MIN NOM MAX NOTE
A – – 4.5724
A1 0.508 – –
D 34.544 – 34.798 Note 1
E 7.620 – 8.255
E1 7.112 – 7.493 Note 1
B 0.381 – 0.533
B1 1.143 – 1.397
B2 0.762 – 1.143
L 3.175 – 3.429
C 0.203 – 0.356
eB – – 10.160
e 2.540 TYP
Note: 1. Dimensions D and E1 do not include mold Flash or Protrusion.
Mold Flash or Protrusion shall not exceed 0.25mm (0.010").
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 425
35. Errata
35.1 Errata ATmega48P
The revision letter in this section refers to the revision of the ATmega48P device.
35.1.1 Rev. K
•Full swing crystal oscillator not supported
•Power save mode current consumption increased
•Parallel programming timing modified
•Write wait delay for NVM is increased
1. Full swing crystal oscillator not supported
The full swing crystal oscillator functionality is not available in revision K.
Problem fix/Workaround:
Use alternative clock sources available in the device.
2. Power save mode current consumption increased
Current consumption in power save mode has increased as follow:
Notes: 1. The current consumption values include input leakage current.
2. Maximum values are characterized values and not test limits in production.
3. Parallel programming timing modified
The parallel programming timing is modified as follows:
Previous die revision –
ATmega48P only
New die revision –
ATmega48P only
Symbol Parameter Condition Min Typ. Max Units Min Typ. Max Units
Icc Power-save
mode(1)(2)
32 kHz
TOSC
enable,
Vcc = 1.8V
0.75 1.6 µA 1.4 1.9 µA
Previous die revision Revision K
Symbol Parameter Min Typ. Max Units Min Typ. Max Units
tWLRH_CE
/WR Low to
RDY/BSY
High for Chip
Erase
7.5 9 ms 9.8 10.5 ms
tBVDV
/BS1 Valid to
DATA valid 0 250 ns 0 335 ns
tOLDV
/OE Low to
DATA Valid 250 ns 335 ns
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 426
4. Write wait delay for NVM is increased
The write delay for non-volatile memory (NWM) is increased as follows:
35.1.2 Rev. D to J
Not sampled.
35.1.3 Rev. C
No known errata.
35.1.4 Rev. B
No known errata.
35.1.5 Rev. A
Not Sampled.
35.2 Errata ATmega88P
35.2.1 The revision letter in this section refers to the revision of the ATmega88P device.Rev. K
•Full swing crystal oscillator not supported
•Power save mode current consumption increased
•Parallel programming timing modified
•Write wait delay for NVM is increased
1. Full swing crystal oscillator not supported
The full swing crystal oscillator functionality is not available in revision K.
Problem fix/Workaround:
Use alternative clock sources available in the device.
2. Power save mode current consumption increased
Current consumption in power save mode has increased as follow:
Notes: 1. The current consumption values include input leakage current.
2. Maximum values are characterized values and not test limits in production.
Other revisions Revision K
Symbol Minimum Wait Delay Minimum Wait Delay
tWD_ERASE 9ms 10.5ms
Previous die revision Revision K
Symbol Parameter Condition Min Typ. Max Units Min Typ. Max Units
Icc Power-save
mode(1)(2)
32 kHz
TOSC
enable,
Vcc = 1.8V
0.72 1.6 µA 1.4 1.9 µA
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 427
3. Parallel programming timing modified
The parallel programming timing is modified as follows:
4. Write wait delay for NVM is increased
The write delay for non-volatile memory (NWM) is increased as follows:
35.2.2 Rev. D to J
Not sampled.
35.2.3 Rev. C
Not sampled.
35.2.4 Rev. B
No known errata.
35.2.5 Rev. A
No known errata.
Previous die revision Revision K
Symbol Parameter Min Typ. Max Units Min Typ. Max Units
tWLRH_CE
/WR Low to
RDY/BSY
High for Chip
Erase
7.5 9 ms 9.8 10.5 ms
tBVDV
/BS1 Valid to
DATA valid 0 250 ns 0 335 ns
tOLDV
/OE Low to
DATA Valid 250 ns 335 ns
Other revisions Revision K
Symbol Minimum Wait Delay Minimum Wait Delay
tWD_ERASE 9ms 10.5ms
Previous die revision Revision K Symbol Parameter can I on Min Typ. Max Units Min Typ. Max Units Z TOSC
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 428
35.3 Errata ATmega168P
The revision letter in this section refers to the revision of the ATmega168P device.
35.3.1 Rev. K
•Full swing crystal oscillator not supported
•Power save mode current consumption increased
•Parallel programming timing modified
•Write wait delay for NVM is increased
1. Full swing crystal oscillator not supported
The full swing crystal oscillator functionality is not available in revision K.
Problem fix/Workaround:
Use alternative clock sources available in the device.
2. Power save mode current consumption increased
Current consumption in power save mode has increased as follow:
Notes: 1. The current consumption values include input leakage current.
2. Maximum values are characterized values and not test limits in production.
3. Parallel programming timing modified
The parallel programming timing is modified as follows:
4. Write wait delay for NVM is increased
The write delay for non-volatile memory (NWM) is increased as follows:
Previous die revision Revision K
Symbol Parameter Condition Min Typ. Max Units Min Typ. Max Units
Icc Power-save
mode(1)(2)
32 kHz TOSC
enable, Vcc =
1.8V
0.8 1.6 µA 1.4 1.9 µA
Previous die revision Revision K
Symbol Parameter Min Typ. Max Units Min Typ. Max Units
tWLRH_CE
/WR Low to
RDY/BSY
High for Chip
Erase
7.5 9 ms 9.8 10.5 ms
tBVDV
/BS1 Valid to
DATA valid 0 250 ns 0 335 ns
tOLDV
/OE Low to
DATA Valid 250 ns 335 ns
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 429
35.3.2 Rev. D to J
Not sampled.
35.3.3 Rev. C
No known errata.
35.3.4 Rev B
No known errata.
35.3.5 Rev A
No known errata.
Other revisions Revision K
Symbol Minimum Wait Delay Minimum Wait Delay
tWD_ERASE 9ms 10.5ms
Updated the data sheet to Microchip s‘y‘e
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 430
36. Datasheet Revision History
Note that the referring page numbers in this section are referred to this document. The referring
revision in this section are referring to the document revision.
36.1 Rev. A-11/2018
36.2 Rev. 8025M-06/11
36.3 Rev. 8025L-07/10
36.4 Rev. 8025K-10/09
36.5 Rev. 8025J-05/09
36.6 Rev. 8025I-02/09
Section Changes
Data sheet
• Updated the data sheet to Microchip style
• New Microchip document number. Previous version was Atmel data sheet
Rev.8025N
1. Added Atmel QTouch Library Support and QTouch Sensing Capability Features.
2. Updated “Ordering Information” to include Tape and Reel devices.
3. Updated the data sheet with Atmel new style guide.
1. Removed from the front page, the note “Not recommended for new design”.
2. Editorial updates.
1. Updated “Low Frequency Crystal Oscillator” with the Table 9-8 on page 41.
2. Editorial updates.
1. Removed the “About” section.
2. Removed ATmega328P device and its reference from the data sheet.
3. Editorial updates.
1. Removed “preliminary” from ATmega48P/88P/168P.
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 431
36.7 Rev. 8025H-02/09
36.8 Rev. 8025G-01/09
36.9 Rev. 8025F-08/08
36.10 Rev. 8025E-08/08
1. Added Power-save Maximum values and footnote to “ATmega48P DC
Characteristics” on page 325.
2. Added Power-save Maximum values and footnote to “ATmega88P DC
Characteristics” on page 326.
3. Added Power-save Maximum values and footnote to “ATmega168P DC
Characteristics” on page 327.
4. Added Power-save Maximum values and footnote to ATmega328P on page 320.
5. Added errata for revision A, ATmega328P on page 422.
1 ATmega48P/88P not recommended for new designs.
2. Updated the footnote Note1 of the Table 9-3 on page 38.
3. Updated the Table 9-5 on page 39 by removing a footnote Note1.
4. Updated the Table 9-11 on page 42 by removing a footnote Note1.
5. Updated the footnote Note1 of the Table 9-13 on page 43.
6. Updated the footnote Note2 of the “ATmega48P DC Characteristics” on page 325
and removed TBD from the table.
7. Updated the footnote Note2 of the “ATmega88P DC Characteristics” on page 326
and removed TBD from the table.
8. Updated the footnote Note2 of the “ATmega168P DC Characteristics” on page 327
and removed TBD from the table.
9. Updated the footnote Note2 of the ATmega328P on page320 and removed TBD from
the table.
10. Updated the footnote Note1 of the Table 29-4 on page 330.
11. Replaced the Figure 30-69 on page 374 by a correct one.
12. Replaced the Figure 29-173 on page 419 by a correct one.
13. Updated “Errata” on page 425.
14. Updated ”MCUCR – MCU Control Register” on page 44.
15. Updated “TCCR2B – Timer/Counter Control Register B” on page 172.
1. Updated “Register Summary” on page 411 with Power-save numbers.
2. Added ATmega328P ”Standby Supply Current” on page 408.
1. Updated description of “Stack Pointer” on page 21.
2. Updated description of use of external capacitors in “Low Frequency Crystal
Oscillator” on page 41.
3. Updated Table 9-10 in “Low Frequency Crystal Oscillator” on page 41.
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 432
36.11 Rev. 8025D-03/08
36.12 Rev. 8025C-01/08
36.13 Rev. 8025B-01/08
4. Added note to “Address Match Unit” on page 232.
5. Added section “Reading the Signature Row from Software” on page 298.
6. Updated “Program And Data Memory Lock Bits” on page 306 to include
ATmega328P in the description.
7. Added ATmega328P DC Characteristics on page 320.
8. Updated “Speed Grades” on page 327 for ATmega328P.
9. Removed note 6 and 7 from the table “2-wire Serial Interface Characteristics” on
page 333.
10. Added figure “Minimum Reset Pulse width vs. VCC.” on page 362 for ATmega48P.
11. Added figure “Minimum Reset Pulse width vs. VCC.” on page 386 for ATmega88P.
12. Added figure “Minimum Reset Pulse width vs. VCC.” on page 410 for ATmega168P.
13. Added “Register Summary” on page 411.
14. Updated Ordering Information for “Packaging Information” on page 421.
1. Updated figures in “Speed Grades” on page 327.
2. Updated note in Table 29-4 in “System and Reset Characteristics” on page 330.
3. Ordering codes for “Packaging Information” on page 421 updated.
- ATmega328P is offered in 20 MHz option only.
4. Added Errata for ATmega328P rev. B, on page 422.
1.
Power-save Maximum values removed form “ATmega48P DC Characteristics” on
page 325, “ATmega88P DC Characteristics” on page 326, and “ATmega168P DC
Characteristics” on page 327.
1. Updated “Features” on page 1.
2. Added “Data Retention” on page 16.
3. Updated Table 9-2 on page 37.
4. Removed “Low-frequency Crystal Oscillator Internal Load Capacitance“ table
from“Low Frequency Crystal Oscillator” on page 41.
5. Removed JTD bit from “MCUCR – MCU Control Register” on page 53.
6.
Updated typical and general program setup for Reset and Interrupt Vector Addresses
in “Interrupt Vectors in ATmega168P” on page 72 and ”Interrupt Vectors in
ATmega328P” on page 65.
7. Updated Interrupt Vectors Start Address in Table 12-5 on page 73 and Table 11-7 on
page 66.
8. Updated “Temperature Measurement” on page 273.
9. Updated ATmega328P “Fuse Bits” on page 300.
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 433
36.14 Rev. 8025A-07/07
10. Removed VOL3/VOH3 rows from “DC Characteristics” on page 324.
11. Updated condition for VOL in “DC Characteristics” on page 324.
Updated max value for VIL2 in “DC Characteristics” on page 324.
12. Added “ATmega48P DC Characteristics” on page 325, “ATmega88P DC
Characteristics” on page 326, and “ATmega168P DC Characteristics” on page 327.
13. Updated “System and Reset Characteristics” on page 330.
14.
Added “ATmega48P Typical Characteristics” on page 338, “ATmega88P Typical
Characteristics” on page 362, and “ATmega168P Typical Characteristics” on page
386.
15. Updated note in “Instruction Set Summary” on page 415.
1. Initial revision.
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 434
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
Information contained in this publication regarding device
applications and the like is provided only for your convenience
and may be superseded by updates. It is your responsibility to
ensure that your application meets with your specifications.
MICROCHIP MAKES NO REPRESENTATIONS OR
WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND WHETHER EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, WRITTEN OR ORAL, STATUTORY OR
OTHERWISE, RELATED TO THE INFORMATION,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ITS CONDITION,
QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, MERCHANTABILITY OR
FITNESS FOR PURPOSE. Microchip disclaims all liability
arising from this information and its use. Use of Microchip
7devices in life support and/or safety applications is entirely at
the buyer’s risk, and the buyer agrees to defend, indemnify and
hold harmless Microchip from any and all damages, claims,
suits, or expenses resulting from such use. No licenses are
conveyed, implicitly or otherwise, under any Microchip
intellectual property rights unless otherwise stated.
Trademarks
The Microchip name and logo, the Microchip logo, AnyRate, AVR,
AVR logo, AVR Freaks, BitCloud, chipKIT, chipKIT logo,
CryptoMemory, CryptoRF, dsPIC, FlashFlex, flexPWR, Heldo,
JukeBlox, KeeLoq, Kleer, LANCheck, LINK MD, maXStylus,
maXTouch, MediaLB, megaAVR, MOST, MOST logo, MPLAB,
OptoLyzer, PIC, picoPower, PICSTART, PIC32 logo, Prochip
Designer, QTouch, SAM-BA, SpyNIC, SST, SST Logo,
SuperFlash, tinyAVR, UNI/O, and XMEGA are registered
trademarks of Microchip Technology Incorporated in the U.S.A.
and other countries.
ClockWorks, The Embedded Control Solutions Company,
EtherSynch, Hyper Speed Control, HyperLight Load, IntelliMOS,
mTouch, Precision Edge, and Quiet-Wire are registered
trademarks of Microchip Technology Incorporated in the U.S.A.
Adjacent Key Suppression, AKS, Analog-for-the-Digital Age, Any
Capacitor, AnyIn, AnyOut, BodyCom, CodeGuard,
CryptoAuthentication, CryptoAutomotive, CryptoCompanion,
CryptoController, dsPICDEM, dsPICDEM.net, Dynamic Average
Matching, DAM, ECAN, EtherGREEN, In-Circuit Serial
Programming, ICSP, INICnet, Inter-Chip Connectivity,
JitterBlocker, KleerNet, KleerNet logo, memBrain, Mindi, MiWi,
motorBench, MPASM, MPF, MPLAB Certified logo, MPLIB,
MPLINK, MultiTRAK, NetDetach, Omniscient Code Generation,
PICDEM, PICDEM.net, PICkit, PICtail, PowerSmart, PureSilicon,
QMatrix, REAL ICE, Ripple Blocker, SAM-ICE, Serial Quad I/O,
SMART-I.S., SQI, SuperSwitcher, SuperSwitcher II, Total
Endurance, TSHARC, USBCheck, VariSense, ViewSpan,
WiperLock, Wireless DNA, and ZENA are trademarks of
Microchip Technology Incorporated in the U.S.A. and other
countries.
SQTP is a service mark of Microchip Technology Incorporated in
the U.S.A.
Silicon Storage Technology is a registered trademark of Microchip
Technology Inc. in other countries.
GestIC is a registered trademark of Microchip Technology
Germany II GmbH & Co. KG, a subsidiary of Microchip
Technology Inc., in other countries.
All other trademarks mentioned herein are property of their
respective companies.
© 2018, Microchip Technology Incorporated, All Rights Reserved.
ISBN: 978-1-5224-3599-0
Note the following details of the code protection feature on Microchip devices:
• Microchip products meet the specification contained in their particular Microchip Data Sheet.
• Microchip believes that its family of products is one of the most secure families of its kind on the market today, when used in the
intended manner and under normal conditions.
• There are dishonest and possibly illegal methods used to breach the code protection feature. All of these methods, to our
knowledge, require using the Microchip products in a manner outside the operating specifications contained in Microchip’s Data
Sheets. Most likely, the person doing so is engaged in theft of intellectual property.
• Microchip is willing to work with the customer who is concerned about the integrity of their code.
• Neither Microchip nor any other semiconductor manufacturer can guarantee the security of their code. Code protection does not
mean that we are guaranteeing the product as “unbreakable.”
Code protection is constantly evolving. We at Microchip are committed to continuously improving the code protection features of our
products. Attempts to break Microchip’s code protection feature may be a violation of the Digital Millennium Copyright Act. If such acts
allow unauthorized access to your software or other copyrighted work, you may have a right to sue for relief under that Act.
Microchip received ISO/TS-16949:2009 certification for its worldwide
headquarters, design and wafer fabrication facilities in Chandler and
Tempe, Arizona; Gresham, Oregon and design centers in California
and India. The Company’s quality system processes and procedures
are for its PIC® MCUs and dsPIC® DSCs, KEELOQ® code hopping
devices, Serial EEPROMs, microperipherals, nonvolatile memory and
analog products. In addition, Microchip’s quality system for the design
and manufacture of development systems is ISO 9001:2000 certified.
QUALITYMANAGEMENTSYSTEM
CERTIFIEDBYDNV
== ISO/TS16949==
2018 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Sheet Complete DS40002065A-page 435
ATmega48P/V/88P/V/168P/V
The Microchip Web Site
Microchip provides online support via our web site at www.microchip.com. This web site is used as a means to make files and information
easily available to customers. Accessible by using your favorite Internet browser, the web site contains the following information:
•Product Support – Data sheets and errata, application notes and sample programs, design resources, user’s guides and hardware
support documents, latest software releases and archived software
•General Technical Support – Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ), technical support requests, online discussion groups, Microchip
consultant program member listing
•Business of Microchip – Product selector and ordering guides, latest Microchip press releases, listing of
seminars and events, listings of Microchip sales offices, distributors and factory representatives
Customer Change Notification Service
Microchip’s customer notification service helps keep customers current on Microchip products. Subscribers will receive e-mail notification
whenever there are changes, updates, revisions or errata related to a specified product family or development tool of interest.
To register, access the Microchip web site at www.microchip.com. Under “Design Support”, click on “Customer Change Notification” and
follow the registration instructions.
Customer Support
Users of Microchip products can receive assistance through several channels:
• Distributor or Representative
• Local Sales Office
• Field Application Engineer (FAE)
• Technical Support
Customers should contact their distributor, representative or Field Application Engineer (FAE) for support. Local sales offices are also
available to help customers. A listing of sales offices and locations is included in the back of this document.
Technical support is available through the web site at: http://microchip.com/support
6‘ ‘MICROCHIP AMERICAS ASIA/PACIFIC ASIA/PACIFIC EUROPE
DS4002065A-page 436 2018 Microchip Technology Inc.
AMERICAS
Corporate Office
2355 West Chandler Blvd.
Chandler, AZ 85224-6199
Tel: 480-792-7200
Fax: 480-792-7277
Technical Support:
http://www.microchip.com/
support
Web Address:
www.microchip.com
Atlanta
Duluth, GA
Tel: 678-957-9614
Fax: 678-957-1455
Austin, TX
Tel: 512-257-3370
Boston
Westborough, MA
Tel: 774-760-0087
Fax: 774-760-0088
Chicago
Itasca, IL
Tel: 630-285-0071
Fax: 630-285-0075
Dallas
Addison, TX
Tel: 972-818-7423
Fax: 972-818-2924
Detroit
Novi, MI
Tel: 248-848-4000
Houston, TX
Tel: 281-894-5983
Indianapolis
Noblesville, IN
Tel: 317-773-8323
Fax: 317-773-5453
Tel: 317-536-2380
Los Angeles
Mission Viejo, CA
Tel: 949-462-9523
Fax: 949-462-9608
Tel: 951-273-7800
Raleigh, NC
Tel: 919-844-7510
New York, NY
Tel: 631-435-6000
San Jose, CA
Tel: 408-735-9110
Tel: 408-436-4270
Canada - Toronto
Tel: 905-695-1980
Fax: 905-695-2078
ASIA/PACIFIC
Australia - Sydney
Tel: 61-2-9868-6733
China - Beijing
Tel: 86-10-8569-7000
China - Chengdu
Tel: 86-28-8665-5511
China - Chongqing
Tel: 86-23-8980-9588
China - Dongguan
Tel: 86-769-8702-9880
China - Guangzhou
Tel: 86-20-8755-8029
China - Hangzhou
Tel: 86-571-8792-8115
China - Hong Kong SAR
Tel: 852-2943-5100
China - Nanjing
Tel: 86-25-8473-2460
China - Qingdao
Tel: 86-532-8502-7355
China - Shanghai
Tel: 86-21-3326-8000
China - Shenyang
Tel: 86-24-2334-2829
China - Shenzhen
Tel: 86-755-8864-2200
China - Suzhou
Tel: 86-186-6233-1526
China - Wuhan
Tel: 86-27-5980-5300
China - Xian
Tel: 86-29-8833-7252
China - Xiamen
Tel: 86-592-2388138
China - Zhuhai
Tel: 86-756-3210040
ASIA/PACIFIC
India - Bangalore
Tel: 91-80-3090-4444
India - New Delhi
Tel: 91-11-4160-8631
India - Pune
Tel: 91-20-4121-0141
Japan - Osaka
Tel: 81-6-6152-7160
Japan - Tokyo
Tel: 81-3-6880- 3770
Korea - Daegu
Tel: 82-53-744-4301
Korea - Seoul
Tel: 82-2-554-7200
Malaysia - Kuala Lumpur
Tel: 60-3-7651-7906
Malaysia - Penang
Tel: 60-4-227-8870
Philippines - Manila
Tel: 63-2-634-9065
Singapore
Tel: 65-6334-8870
Taiwan - Hsin Chu
Tel: 886-3-577-8366
Taiwan - Kaohsiung
Tel: 886-7-213-7830
Taiwan - Taipei
Tel: 886-2-2508-8600
Thailand - Bangkok
Tel: 66-2-694-1351
Vietnam - Ho Chi Minh
Tel: 84-28-5448-2100
EUROPE
Austria - Wels
Tel: 43-7242-2244-39
Fax: 43-7242-2244-393
Denmark - Copenhagen
Tel: 45-4450-2828
Fax: 45-4485-2829
Finland - Espoo
Tel: 358-9-4520-820
France - Paris
Tel: 33-1-69-53-63-20
Fax: 33-1-69-30-90-79
Germany - Garching
Tel: 49-8931-9700
Germany - Haan
Tel: 49-2129-3766400
Germany - Heilbronn
Tel: 49-7131-67-3636
Germany - Karlsruhe
Tel: 49-721-625370
Germany - Munich
Tel: 49-89-627-144-0
Fax: 49-89-627-144-44
Germany - Rosenheim
Tel: 49-8031-354-560
Israel - Ra’anana
Tel: 972-9-744-7705
Italy - Milan
Tel: 39-0331-742611
Fax: 39-0331-466781
Italy - Padova
Tel: 39-049-7625286
Netherlands - Drunen
Tel: 31-416-690399
Fax: 31-416-690340
Norway - Trondheim
Tel: 47-7288-4388
Poland - Warsaw
Tel: 48-22-3325737
Romania - Bucharest
Tel: 40-21-407-87-50
Spain - Madrid
Tel: 34-91-708-08-90
Fax: 34-91-708-08-91
Sweden - Gothenberg
Tel: 46-31-704-60-40
Sweden - Stockholm
Tel: 46-8-5090-4654
UK - Wokingham
Tel: 44-118-921-5800
Fax: 44-118-921-5820
Worldwide Sales and Service